UC-NRLF ^B 257 im GIFT OF OASUy Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/elenientsofgermanOObacorich ELEMENTS OF GERMAN BY PAUL VALENTINE BACON cs-^ iBoEcnbcn tft nidjt bie @a(f)e beg ©c^uter^; e§ tft gcnug, bag er fid^ iibt ALLYN AND BACON COPYRIGHT, 1914, BY PAUL VALENTINE BACON. Ncrtoooti ^regg J. B. Gushing Co. — Berwick & Smith Co. Norwood, Mass., U.S.A. PREFACE. The Elements of German is like my German Grammar in its simplicity and its thoroughness ; it differs from the earlier book in that it aims especially to meet the needs of those teachers who may wish to vary their reading from year to year. The arrangement of the syntax in the two books is identical, except where improvements in gradation and in simplification of statement were possible. jSTo effort has been spared to make the Elements practical. To secure this end special attention has been paid to the exercises and to' the vocabulary. The exercises have been simplified without sacrificing thoroughness, and have been enlivened from the outset by the introduction of conversation and of letter- writing, the two most practical uses to which the average pupil will put his German. This plan has the addi- tional merit of offering from the beginning more connected sentences than are usually given. In the choice of the vocabulary the aim has been to do three things : to keep the number of words as small as is consistent with variety and life in the exercises ; to introduce as many cognates as possible ; and above all to use common, e very-day words. The new words average only seven to the lesson — a number readily mastered by any pupil — and in the first part of the book eighty per cent of these are cognates. This re- duces to a minimum the effort of vocabulary building. The practical character of the vocabularies deserves special mention. The words are taken entirely from the language bf the school and of the home, and are so arranged that by the middle of the year the pupil has a vocabulary of schoolroom 335655 > PREFACE. expressions, of household terms, of the things he eats, drinks, and wears, of the parts of the body, and of the weather, the time of day, and so on. While the practical vocabulary of the lessons is thus limited to the commonel|.t words, an unusually large number of poems, proverbs and quitations has been introduced for those teach- ers \^o wish to develop an extensive Wortscliatz. Taken in .veonnectlon with the appendices on Word Formation and on Grimm's Law, these offer an excellent opportunity for extend- ing the vocabulary. The subject of ^Pronunciation is treated not only in the usual way at the beginning of the book, but also in thQ Appendix, where specific directions and diagrams are given for those who are eager to approach more nearly to the real German of the Germans. The termiiaology of the Elements conforms to the Report of the Joint Committee on Grammatical Nomenclature. It is grati- fying to note that this report adopts many terms, such as "past" and "past perfect,'^ which have ^Iwl^ys be^n used in my German Grammar. As in Im Vaterland and in my German Composition, particu- lar care has been taken with the index and the vocabularies. To those teachers who have offered suggestions from their classroom experience, I take this opportunity of expressing a grateful acknowledgment. P. V. B. March, 1914. TABLE OF CONTENTS. The German Alphabet x Introduction xi LESSON I. Present of ^abett and fcttt 1 Gender. Questions. II. Past of ^aBctt and fctit 3 Nominative and Accusative. Terms of Address. III. Present of loBen , 6 The Definite Article. IV. Past of iohtn S The Indefinite Article. 9^i(^t. V. Review. Present of fc^Ctt 10 iBergigmeitinid^t . . galler^lebcn . . . 12 ®ute9^ad^t . . . torner . . . . 13 VI. Pastoffe^ett 14 Masculine Nouns of the First Class. VII. Present of merbctt 16 Feminines. Possessive Genitive. VIII. Past of tticrben ,18 Neuters. Indirect Object. IX. Future Tense .20 Second Class of Nouns. a^ein 55aterlanb . . @turnt . . . .22 X. Review. Use of Present for Future 23 S)a8 SBiffen . . . ?ogau . . . .24 2)ie $?orelei . . . §einc . . . .26 V VI TABLE OF CONTENTS, LESgON XI. XII. XIII. XIV. XV. XVI. XVII. XVIII. XIX. XX. XXI. XXII. XXIII. Perfect Tense with t^ahtn . . . Third Class of Nouns. Perfect Tense with fcitt . ... Fourth Class of Nouns (Weak). grul)Ung^al)nung . . Uljlanb Past Perfect Tense Fifth Class of Nouns (Mixed). @:pru(^ . . . . Sbner-(Sjd)cnbad^ Future Perfect Tense .... Rules of Gender. Siegenlieb . . . iBrentano Review, Outline of Declensions . S)eg SO^cibc^eng I'teb . @torm iBanbrer^ ^^ac^tUeb . @ o e t ^ e 2Bie i[t boci^ bie @rbe fo f(f)on ! 9leinicf Prepositions with Dative or Accusative Personal Pronouns Position of Objects. Prepositions with Dative . . . Inverted Order. Prepositions with Accusative Possessive Adjectives, ^eitt. Review. Apposition .... §erbftlieb . . . @turm 5Bor 3ena . . . S)ret)eg Strong Declension of Adjectives . Nouns of Measure. 9)iube bin id^ . . . §enfc( Weak Declension of Adjectives . Accusative of Time. Mixed Declension of Adjectives Position of tiie. TABLE OF CONTENTS. vii LES80X PAGE XXIV. Adjectives after tt)cid)f fo(rf|, etc .63 Adverbs. XXV. Review. Summary of Adjectives 65 !2'leb be6 gifd^erfnaben . ©critter. . . 67 3)er erfte 3}lai . . . §ageborn . . 68 ®u benfft an mid) jo felten ^^ I a t e n . . . 68 XXVI. Present of Modal Auxiliaries 69 @)3ritd} .... S^ucfert ... 71 XXVII. Past and Future of Modals . . ' . . . .72 Use with eg and ^u. XXVIII. Perfect Tenses of Modals 74 '*Two Infinitives." XXIX. Special Uses of Modals ....... 77 Use of laffen. XXX. Review 80 aReiit iBaterlanb . . galler^teben . 82 XXXI. Possessive Pronouns 83 Intensive Pronouns. XXXII. Interrogative Pronouns 86 Use of ha^ and bie§ with fein. XXXIII. Demonstrative Pronouns 88 Indecltnable Indefinites. XXXIV. Inflected Indefinites 92 XXXV. Review -. .95 @g wax, aU lydtV ber §immel: @tcf).enborff . . 96 5rnben3Jionb . . . (gn^Uti ... 97 XXXVI. Relative Pronouns 98 Dependent Order. XXXVII. Review. Lessons I-XV . . . . . . .101 Indirect Questions. XXXVIII. Review. Lessons XVI-XXV .,,,,, 103 Conjunctions. Vlll TABLE OF CONTENTS, LESSON XJtXIX. Review. Lessons XXVI-XXX . Modals in Dependent Sentences. XL. Review. Lessons XXXI-XXXVI The Modified Demonstrative. 2)ag ®d)Io8 am 9«eer . U^tattb XLI. Separable and Inseparable Verbs Complementary Infinitive. XLII. Separable and Inseparable Verbs Meaning of Prefixes. Common Prefixes. XLIII. Imperative XLIV. Infinitives and Participles XLV. Review 3m^oIfgtoti . . @tortn XL VI. Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs Particles of Comparison.. XLVII. Numerals Cardinals. Ordinals. Fractions. XLVIII. Days, Months, Dates Telling Time of Day. XLIX. Proper Nouns Use of Article with Names. L. Review Der gute ^'amerab . U^tanb 2)ie arme flelne 3bee . ©ommergtorff LI. Passive Voice Dative of Agent. LII. Passive Voice .... Substitutes for the Passive. LIII. Reflexive Verbs . Use of Reflexives. LIV. Impersonal Verbs Use of e^ gibt and c§ ift. TABLE OF CONTENTS. IX LESSON PAGE LV. Review 161 §eibenrbg(ein . . . ©oet^c . . . .163 LVI. Subjunctive of Auxiliaries .164 Dependent Subjunctive. LVII. Subjunctive of Weak and Strong Verbs .... 168 Conditional. Potential. Optative. LVIII. Conditions of Fact . .172 Subjunctive of Modals. x iiber ben Bergen . . iBuffe 175 LIX. Conditions Contrary to Fact 176 Special Use of Modals. LX. Review 180 Senn .... gulba .... 182 LXI. Genitive and Dative Cases . 183 Uses with Adjectives and Verbs. LXII. Verbals. . . . * . . . . . . .186 Modified Verbals. LXm. Word Order 188 S)ag@mcf . . . 3)a^n 191 LXIV. Idiomatic Particles . . 192 LXV. Review 196 List of Strong and Irregular Verbs ..... 199 Summary of Inflections ........ 206 Pronunciation 237 Word Formation . . . . . . . . . . 251 Grimm's Law ........... 260 German-English Vocabulary 1 English-German Vocabulary . 33 Jndex .,,,,,,..... 49 German type. 21 a « b S c © b .@ e ?? f ® 9 § ^ 3 i i ^ f 8 t aw m 3le a t Ue il U ttt THE GERMAN ALPHABET. Cerman script. Same. Germaa type, (erman script. Hame. xxy ah ^^ bay c=^ ^/^ tsay /^ ^^ day ef gay hah Oy ,^^ ee yot kah <^^^ el ^^-■0^ em 9? n O Q q 9? r @f « X t U u SB w 3 a/ .<^^ ■^ .y(r /^}(^ /It? oh pay koo air es tay (t)oo fou(l) vay ix ipsilon tset ,.^ ah-umlaut (y ^ oh-umlaut ^y/^ oo-umlaut au-umlaut ^ es-tset ^^j^ tsay-kah es-tsay-hah INTRODUCTION. The following pages give in a general way the pronuncia- tion of German letters. For a more detailed treatment, see §§ 324-342. I. VOWELS. (a) Quality and Length of Sound. — Unlike English vowels, each German vowel has only one kind of sound. This sound varies in length. The five German vowels may be long or short. (1) They are usually sliort when followed by two or more consonants or a double consonant : ba^ SBaffer, ba^ ^tii, ber gifd^, bie Sotte, ber C^utib, (2) Otherwise they are long, especially when doubled or followed by 1^ : ber SSater, ba^ Seet, t^nen, tDo()I, txm. (3) Some monosyllables, mostly indeclinable, have a short vowel before a single consonant : an, cA^ matt, itt, e^, ob. The chief difference between the pronunciation of long and short vowels in German is that long ones are pronounced less vigorously than the short. The short vowels are uttered with a tenseness — they are almost coughed — which clips them short and carries the sound immediately to the following consonant. (6) Pronunciation of Vowels. (1) Long. Long a as in father, never as \x\ fate; SSater, aber. " e " " they, " " " he; ge^tt, SBeg, " t " " machine, " " " fine; il^ttett, btr. <^ " " 7iote; ®o()tt, lobett^ " U " " rude, " " " mule; Sul), gut. XU INTRODUCTION. (2) Short. Short a as in aQia), never as in fat; SBaffer, SKatiTt, " c " " net; tDetttt, gettfter. " i " " pin; Si[(^, tcf) bin. " " " o6e2/; (Sonne, t)oIL " u ^/ " put, '^ " " >n; gln^, aJiutter. German final unaccented e is like English final unaccented a. Pronounce @(Je to rhyme with Mecca, t^re like era. g) is found only in foreign words ; it is pronounced like i. (c) Umlaut. — When in Old and Middle High German a stem whose Yowel was a, P, U, or au was followed by a suffix con- taining the vowel t (later e) the sound of the stem vowel ^ was modified, becoming more like the vowel in the ending. Thus df 0^ Mf or avi came to be spoken ft, 5, ii, or ftu (Old High German, fallu, fellis, fellit; Middle High German, valle, vellest, vellet ; New High German, fatte, fiilleft, fctCt). This change of sound is called Umlaut. ((f) Pronunciation of Umlaut Vowels. — (1) Short ft is like e in met; long ft is properly the same' quality of sound, only longer. It is a pure sound, not like a in late, but more like the first e in the^^e, or ai in faith when spoken with Irish brogue. In North Germany, however, it is coming to be spoken more and more like long c except to distinguish similar forms. Pro- nounce : bie Wdnnev, bte SBdIber ; ga^nen, tt)a^{en. Distinguish carefully : Sl^re, ©f)re ; fci^e, fe^e. (2) Short B has the lips rounded as in short o and the tongue in the position for short c (e in met) ; long 9 has the 1 The best English illustration of Umlaut is the difference we make in pronouncing the o in woman, when we speak the plural form, women. The change in the last vowel affects the sound of the first. INTRODUCTION, XIU lips rounded in the position for long d (whistling position) and the tongue in the position for long c (3Jie^I). Pronounce: bte §oHe, offnen, bte §b^(e, bie Ofen* Distinguish carefully: §dtte, ^elle ;• fonnen, fennen ; §o^Ien, ^e^Ien. (3) Short u has the lips rounded as in short u and the tongue in the position for short i (i in pin); long it has the lips rounded as in long u (whistling position) and the tongue in the position for long i {i in machine). Pronounce : bie §iitte, fUHen, bte §Ute, fiil)len. Distinguish carefully : Sitffett, Stffeti ; ^iifte, Sifte ; tnitffett, tntffen, (4) The diphthong Su is pronounced just like eu* (5) Notice that in every case an Umlaut-vowel has the same lip position as the corresponding non-umlauted vowel, but the tongue is raised nearer the position for t (see Fig. 1, p. 238). As this t was origineiJly the sound of the following syllable, we may say that the tongue began to prepare for the ending while pronouncing the vowel of the stem. Thus Um- laut may be called an assimilation of the stem vowel to the vowel of the ending. w (e) Diphthongs are pronounced about as shown below. Por more specific directions see §§ 329-330. r Satfer.'' -. 1 ©tner, etn. au like ou in house; §au^, taut.-^ cu ct J like ai in aisle; ftu like oi in toil; ' treu, geute.' ^ §ciufer, Iciutett.^ (J) Digraphs. — In English we have many double vowels for single sounds, as in the words each, heart, heard, believe, receive, and so on. German has but few of these digraphs. They are ie, pronounced like long i; dd, pronounced like xiv INTRODUCTION, long a; CC, pronounced like long e ; DO, pronounced like long o* All these digraphs are used merely to show by the spelling that a sound is long. They are employed usually where a simple vowel would naturally be short. ®te, t)tel^ bte ®aat, ber ©aal, ba^ S3eet, ba^ Wlttx, ba^ i8oot» II. CONSONANTS. ' (o) Classification of Consonants. — German consonants are classified in three different ways : (1) according to the kind of sound they make; (2) according to the vibration of the vocal cords during the sound; and (3) according to the place of the sound in the mouth. (1) According to the first classification I and r are called liquids; m, n, and ng, nasals. The remaining consonants are either stops or spirants. A stop is produced by a short puff following a complete closure of the oral passage ; as 6, b, I, tf p^ In pronouncing a spirant^ the breath passes through a narrow openin* producing a hissing or buzzing sound; as f, \, », f<^. (2) A consonant is voiced if the vocal cords vibrate in producing it, as m, 6, b ; otherwise it is voiceless, as ^, f, p, U This vibration can best be felt by putting the fingers on the throat. Compare zeal, {z voiced), seal (s voiceless) ; vara (y voiced), /an (/voiceless) ; bat (b voiced), pat (p voiceless). (3) A consonant is guttural if it is produced between the back part of the tongue and the soft palate ; as ^ in good, ck in lucJc. If produced in a similar way, but farther forward, it is palatal; as y in year. It is dental if produced between the fore part of the tongue and the upper teeth ; as d, t. It is labial if produced between the lips ; as b, p. INTRODUCTION. XV (6) Pronunciation of Consonants. — (1) Of the consonants, f, {|, tf if m, n, )J, (\f i, and i^ and generally b and b, are pro- nounced as in English : babeu, 'Dtebe, ^olett, beten, !ranf, 9}?ann, ^aar/quer, §eye, fitlben. But at the end of a word or part of a compound word, and before voiceless consonants, 6 is pro- nounced like p, and b like t. Thus, ab, 3^ob, Slbfii^t, 3J?ab(^en, er liebt, bu Icibft, O^^^f^f^r Ii^6, are pronounced as if written ap, Jot, 2l^3[id)t, aKat(^en, er ae|3t, etc. (a) bt like t: (gtabt, gefattbt, (&) t| after an accented vowel is silent: ^u^, fa^, fii^Ien. (c) cf like/c; ©tod, 9?Men, (2) Simple c is found only in foreign words. (a) c before a, D, U, or a consonant, like k: Safe, SaltJin, Sanal, gontre, greme. In the latest offi- cial spelling it is largely supplanted by f^ ih) c before c, t, S, or B, like ts: (^ebet% gtcero, Safar, In the latest official spelling it is largely sup- planted by 5* (3) d^ is a voiceless spirant. It has two different sounds not found in English. (a) After a, D, U, aUf it is guttural, as in Scotch loch : ^Vi6), ®a(^, bod), au(^. (6) After other vowels and after consonants it is palatal : 8t(^t, red^t, id), tDeld), Note. To pronounce the guttural rf), raise the back of the tongue till it almost touches the soft palate and expel the breath forcibly. To pro- nounce the palatal d), raise the tongue to the position for ee in feet and breathe out. Do not pronounce t^ like English k or sh. xvi INTRODUCTION. (4) rf|^ at the end of a root-syllable is pronounced like ks: T)Cii)^f }^ud)^. But where the ^ is added as an ending, as in ba^ ditid)^ be^ 3Jetcf)^, the d^ retains its proper sound. (5) d) in foreign words is like Jc or sh : Jc in Greek words, as g^or, Shrift, g^arafter; sh in French words, as g^rabe, Sniffer, ©f)0C0labe. In the latest official spelling French ^ is largely supplanted by Bdj : @(^arabe, ©c^ofolabe, (6) g has three different* sounds. ^ (a) When doubled, or at the beginning of a word or syllable, it is pronounced like the English g in go: gebett, griin, S^Iagge, Jage, ^uge, (b) When final, after a, 0, U, or au, it is a voiceless guttural spirant, like ^ in ad^ (II., (6), 3, a): Jag, (c) When final, after e, i, et, (i, 8, or a consonant, it is a voiceless palatal spirant, like d) in i(f| (II., (6), 3, b) : ®omg, Seg, STetg, Serg, Note 1. Officially final g is like f in (5) and (c), but few Germans pronounce it that way. Note 2. In gb, gt, and gft, g has the same sound as above in (2) and (3) : 9Jlagb, cr fagte, fUegt, bu btegft. (7) ng is always pronounced like ng in singer, never like ng ill hunger: ginger, fingen, [ang, brtngen. (8) i like y in yes: -3af)r, ja. (9) pi} is pronounced like f, by which it is being gradu- ally supplanted : ^^iIofo)3^, (Slefant, gfeu. (10) r is always pronounced sharply and distinctly. It is either guttural or trilled with the tip of the tongue. It must never be slwrred, as in English, /2^Mia/i for further. (11) German f, § has three pronunciations just like the three of English s. INTRODUCTION. XVil (a) When at the end or next to the end of a sylla- ble, or when doubled, it is like s in see: e^, ma^, bift, I}aft, laffen, (&) When at the beginning of a syllable it is like s in rose : fe^ett, ber @aaf , bte SRofe, ber Unftnn, (c) AVhen f begins an accented syllable whose second letter is t or ^j, it is like s in sugar : fte'^ett, f]Dre* (^en are pronounced as if spelled [(^te^ett, fi^|)re=* iVb^e. For those not using German script, the distinction between \ and § is immaterial. Those who write German script should remember to use ^ at the end of a word or of a stem syllable, f in all other cases. (12) fc^ like sli in ship: ®(f)t[f, tDafdjen, (13) ^ is like ss : ©d^Io^, (a) After a short vowel, |^ is changed to ff when an ending beginning with a vowel is added : (Sd)Io^, (Sc^Ioffer, (h) After a long vowel or a diphthong or before a consonant, it remains unchanged ; ^U^, S^^^^r i^ tDei^, t(^ mu^te. (14) ix before another vowel in foreign words is like tsee: 92atton, 'patient* (15) t{| is like t: Jf)eater, ©oet^e. Note. In all but foreign words and proper names the silent )i) after t has recently been dropped. But pupils should be prepared to meet it in newspapers and letters and in all but the most recent books. (16) ^ is like ts: fi^en, bitten, fa^e. (17) tJ is like /.* SSater, SSogeL But in foreign words it is pronounced like English v : SSenu^, SSerattba, SSerbutu, (18) UJ is like English v in vice: XOXX^ SBotf, XVUl INTRODUCTION. (19) 5 is like ts in hats: ju, ^dt, §erg, For ^ and ^, see (13) and (16). (20) In Jjf, gtt, and fn, both letters must be distinctly enunciated, as in English, hopfarm, ignoble, banknote: ^ferb, ©nabe, Snabe. ni. SYLLABICATION. Cn general, words are divided into syllables as they are spoken when articulated slowly : ©e-fd^Ied^^ter, ^reutt^be^-treue. (a) Compound words are divided according to their compo- nent parts : l^in-au^, S)ten^^tag. (6) Otherwise a single simple sound (including j and 5) goes with the following vowel : ^U-c^er, SBci^fd^e, ei^tien, rei^jen. ((?) Of several consonants the last one goes with the follow- ing vowel, except that the combination ft is not divided : gin* get, aSaH^r, fiHen, Snof^pe, ©tiib^te, be-fte, mei^fte, gen^ter. IV. PUNCTUATION AND CAPITALIZATION. German rules for punctuation and capitalization are much like English, especially in regard to the beginning of a sen- tence, the use of the period, colon, quotation marks, interroga- tion point, and so on. (a) Tlie comma is used more frequently in German. (1) Relative clauses are always set off by commas (§ 169, c). (2) In many compound sentences where English omits the comma, German uses it to separate the two parts of the sentence. INTRODUCTION. xix (6) The exclamation point is also commoner in German than in English. (1) A command is always followed in German by an exclamation point (§ 69). (2) The address inside a letter, as Dear Carl, is often followed by an exclamation point: 8teber ^arl! (c) German begins all nouns with a capital. (1) When an adjective, verb, or other part of speech is used as a noun, it is always written with a capital. (2) On the other hand, when nouns have lost their noun force they are written small (§ 138, a). ((/) The formal pronoun ©te and its possessive QijX always begin with a capital, though its reflexive fid^ is small. (1) The pronoun bit and its plural tl^r, with the posses- sives and reflexives, beitter, euer, bid^, and euc^, are written small except in letters, where they are capitalized. (e) Adjectives are capitalized after ettt)a^ and nic^t^ (§ 159, a and e). V. GERMAN EQUIVALENTS FOR GRAMMATICAL TERMS. The letter (of the alphabet), ber ^nd)'^tait* The vowel, ber SSofal', or ber ©elbftlaut. The consonant, ber ^onfonant', or ber TlWlant The sentence, ber @a^. The subject, ba^ ©ubjeft'; the predicate, ba^ ^rdbifaf* The main clause, ber §au|3t'fa|. The subordinate clause, ber S^e'benfa^. XX INTRODUCTION. The parts of speech, bte 9te'betetle» The article, ber Slrtt'tet, or ba^ ©efc^ted^t^'lDort. Definite, beftimtuf ; indefinite, un'beftimmt. The noun, ba^ (Sub'ftatttit), or ba^ ^aupt'woxt. First, second, third class, er'fte, ^tDci'te, brtf te Staffe. The pronoun, ba^ 'iproTto'meti, or ba^ gitr'iDort. The adjective, ba^ 2Ib'ie!ttt), or ba^ @i'9en[c^aft^tt)ort» The numeral, ba^ 9^umerale, or ba§ 3^^^'^^^^^- The adverb, ba^ SlbDerb', or ba^ Um'ftanb^tport. The verb, ba^ 33er'b(um), or ba^ 3^^^'^^^^** Strong, ftar! ; weak, f(f)lDacf) ; separable, tretltt'bar ; in- separable, un'trennbar ; transitive, tranfittt)' ; intransi- tive, intranfitiD^ The preposition, bte ^rdpofitiott', or ha^ SSer^cilt'nl^tDort. The conjunction, bie Sottiunftioti', or ba§ ^©in'betDort* The interjection, bie ^^nterieftioTt', or ba^ Slu^'rufung^mort. The gender, ba^ ®efd}Ie($f: masculine, mcinnli^ ; feminine, tDeibltrf) ; neuter, fcic^lii^. The number, bie ^a^I'f^^^* Singular, ber Singular', or bie gin'ja^L Plural, ber *ip(u'rat, or bte 9J?e^r'3aI)L The case, ber gad (pi. bte galle). The nominative, ber 9^o'mtttatiti ; genitive, ber ©e'ttttit) ; da- tive, ber ©a'ttt) ; accusative, ber 2lf fufattt). The inflection, bte ©te'guttg ; to decline, beflinie'rett. The declension, bte !De!(ittatiott' ; strong, ftarf ; weak, f(J)tt)a(i); mixed, gemt[(f)t» To conjugate, fottjugie'rett ; conjugation, bte ^ottjugation'. The comparison, bte ^oittparatioti', or bte ©tet'geruttg ; to com- pare, ftei'gern ; positive, ber ^o'fttiti ; comparative, ber ^otn'Mratit) ; superlative, ber @u'per(atiD, INTRODUCTION, XXI The tense, ba^ Xem'|)U^, bie 3^it'f orm ; present, ba^ ^rci'fen^ ; past, ba^ 3^m'^3erf eft ; future, ba^ gutur' (ba^ er'fte guturO; perfect, ba§ ^erfeff ; past perfect, ba^ ^Iu^':= quamperfeft ; future perfect, ba^ jtnef te gutur' ; simple, compound, em'fai^, pfam'mengefe^t. The mode, ber 3Jfo'bu^ ; indicative, ber ^^n'bifatit) ; subjunc- tive, ber Son'iunctit) ; imperative, ber 3^m'|3*eratit) ; infini- tive, ber ^n'finitit) ; participle, ba^ ^artijip'. The accent, ber 2^on ; raising and lowering of the voice, bie §ebung unb @en!ung ber ©ttmme. Position, order, bie (SteHung, bie Drbtiuttg. Word order, bie SBorf folge ; inverted order, bie ^^ntierfiott'^ Page, bie @eite ; line, bie ^dit, bie 9tei^e (row). Note. Properly the foreign terms should have the accent on the last syllable ; but in the language of the schoolroom the accent has been shifted from the meaningless ending to the distinctive part of the word. IPcIdpe Spxad^e barf fid? mtt ber beutfd?en mcffen, meld^e anberc tft fo retd? unb mddptig, fo muttg unb anmuttg, fo fdport unb fo mtib als unfere ? Borne, LESSON I. Present of f^ahcn and feim Gender. ^Jrifd? begonnen, t^alb geiponnen. — 2)eutfci^c^ <2^rtci^tDort Well begun is half done . — German Proverb. 1. Present Tense of !^aben, to have, and [etn, to he, \^ ^afte, / have. \^ Bin, / am. tsxx i)tL% thou hast. btt Bift, thou art. tXf ftc, c^ ^at, he, she, it has. cr, fie, t^ ift, Ae, s/^e, it is. toix f^ahtrtf we have. ttitr finb, we are. t^t ^abt, 2/oi^ /lave. i^r feib, 2/om «re. fie l^abett, they have. fie fittb, ^/le?/ are. 2. Gender. — Like English, German has three genders : masculine, feminine, and neuter. But in German the gender of a noun does not necessarily depend upon sex, as in Eng- lish ; instead it utterly disregards meaning. Thus the German word for knife is neuter ; for fork, feminine ; and for spoon, masculine. (a) To indicate gender the definite article (masc. ber, fem. bie, neut. ba^, the) should be learned with every noun. It should be considered a part of the noun and learned as a first syllable: not @cf)itler, but t)tv ®(^u(er; not ©d^ute, but bie @^ute; not ^ui), but ba^ «urf|. 1 2' ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 3. German Questions. — In German, as in English, a question is asked by inverting subject and predicate, or by using an interrogative adverb or pronoun. mnxd)?Aml? SBo bift btt ? Where art thou f SBa^^at cr? What has he? (a) The English repetition of the auxiliary in a question, as isnH he ? don't you ^ iDonH they f canH I f etc., is given in Ger- man by nid^t or ni(^t tDaijV^ isn't it true f We are the pupils, arenH toe 9 SSir ftnb bic a^ ^M^f nit^t (ttial^r)? 4. Vocabulary. bcr Sci^it'lcr, pupil (compare ni^if not. scholar). Xoa^Xf true. bic 'B^M'Uf school ; in ber S^ulc, mo? where? in or at school. \)mf here. U^ ^xx6), hook. i^f I; btt, thou; tx, he; :^a'0Ctt, to have. fie, she; e§, it; ttiir, we; fcin, to he. x^Xf you; fie, they. (a) Note that the same word, fie, means she or they. 5. Exercise. (a) 1. §at ber ©(filler ba^ Su(^? 2. 2Btr ^abett ba^ mi), ntd)t iDa^r? 3. 2Bo finb fie? 4. ©ie ftnb ^ter, fie ftnb in ber (2d)ule. 5. (Sie ^aben ba^ ^n(^ l^ier, nii^t tDal^r? (h) „gBo bift bn?'' „3^(f) bin in ber (Sd)ule/' ,,§aftbuba^»uc^?" „3(^ f)abe ba^ ^ud), nic^t n)a^r?'' ;;3:)er ©(^uler ^at ba^ «ucf)." PAST OF HABEN AND SEIJST. 3 i (c) 1. Have you the book ? 2. The pupil has the book. 3. Is he at school ? 4. I am the pupil, am I not ? 5. They are here at school ; they have the book. (d) ^' Where are we ? '^ " You are here at school." " We have the book, haven't we ? '^ " You have it. It is here." " I have the book here at school." LESSON II. Past of i^ahtn and feim filler 2lnfang t[t fd?it)er. — 2)eutfc^e3 (S^rtd^tDort Every beginning is hard. — German Proverb. 6. Past Tense of ^aben and fetn. tr^ ^aiitf I had. \^ toaXf I was. btt f^atit^if thou hadst. bu ttJarft, thou wast. tVf fie, t§ f\aitCf he, she, it had. cr, ftc, t§ tt)av, he, she, it was. ttiir i^atUUf we had. ttitr mar en, we were. i^r ^atittf you had. if)v toaxtf you were. fie f^atttUf they had. fie ItJarett, they were, 7. Nominative and Accusative Cases. — The nominative and accusative are always alike except in the masculine singular. (a) The Nominative, as in English, is the case (1) of the subject, and (2) of the predicate after intransitive verbs like fein and tuerben, to become. ©r ift ber Secret* He is the teacher. ^er 3^ater tout ^mU The father was good. 4 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (b) The Acmsative, like the English objective, is the case of the direct object. Sic ^ai cittCtt Skater* She has a father. SBir fatten cinctt Scorer* We had a teacher. 8.. Table of Forms. Nom. Ace. Definite Article, the. Singular, Plural. M. F. N. bcr hit H^ bie bctt bic H§ btc Indefinite Article, a. Singular. Plural. M. F. N. Nom. citt cine citt Want- Acc. cittCtt eittc citt ing. (a) Note that tie is the form for nominative and accusative of the definite article for all genders in the plural and for the feminine singular. Observe especially the masculine singular, contrasting the nominative and accusative forms. 9. A Predicate Adjective is not declined. ^cr fic^rcr ift gttt* The teacher is good. ^a§ S3tt(i^ ttttb bic fRofc fittb VOt The book and the rose are red. 10. Terms of Address. — In formal or polite address, German uses @ie, a form like the third person plural. The pronoun is always written with a capital. ©U (plural tl^r) is used with intimates, relatives, young children, and animals. Have you the book 9 (To the teacher) ^abctt @ic ha§ S3tt(J^ ? (To a fellow pupil) ^a)i btt \>a§ Sttd) ? (To several pupils) ^aht i\}V ha§ ^nHj ? (a) @lc is the common form of address to-day in Germany for both singular and plural, except when bu (i^r) is required. In translating you, think carefully whether you are addressing intimate friends or not. When in doubt, use @ic. PAST OF HABEN AND SEIN. 6 11. Vocabulary. bcr ^a'tcr, father. t>a^ '^J^apicx', paper. ber Se^'rer, teacher. ttiai^ ? what 9 bie Tlnt'ttVf mother. ja, yes. btc ^e'ber, i)ew (compare feather). ^ntf good. t>a§ ^tttb, child. ttttb, «wd 12. Exercise. (a) 1. SBa^ ^atte ba^ tinb? 2. ©a^ Mnb ^atte eitten SSater unb eine 9)Zuttei\ 3. !®er SSater unb bte 3)?utter iDaren gut* 4. 9Bo tt)ar tc^; tDar t(f) in ber @(^ule? 5. ^^a, n)ir tDaren ^ter in ber @c^ule; iDir fatten ba^ ^a|)ier unb ein Suc^. (&) ,,aBa^ fatten @ie?'' „3(^ ^atte ba^ "ipapier unb eine geben" „2Baren @ie ber 8el)rer?'' „3^a, id) n)ar ber ge^rer." „Unb @ie fatten ba^ Sud) unb bie geber." (c) 1. Was the child the pupil ? 2. Yes, the child was the pupil, and the father was the teacher. 3. Where were they, and what had they ? 4. They were here at school, and they had the paper. 5. You had a book and a pen, didn't you ? (d) " What were you at school ? " "I was the teacher." "What had you?" " I had a book and a pen." " Yes, we had a pen and the paper." ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON III. Present of loben. Definite Article. Das IDerf lobt bzn ITTeifter. — 2)cutfc^e« (S^rtd^ttjort The work praises the master, — German Proverb. 13. Classification of Verbs. — Verbs are generally called strong, when the stem vowel changes in the past ; weak, when it remains the same : (weak, lobett, loBte ; strong, fel)en, faf)). Compare English j9raise,j9rafed; see, saw. Note, These terms were i^ivented by the German 'Scholar, Jacob Grimm. A strong verb has strength enough to form its past by changing its vowel ; a loeak one requires the help of an ending. 14. The Weak Verb has the following personal endings in the present tense. These are added to the verb stem. Singular. Plural. 1st c eit 2d (e)ft (c)t 3d (c)t ctt (a) Euphony requires that certain verbs have -e- before the ending in the second person singular and plural and in the third singular: bu grlt^eft, thou greetest; er tnartet, he waits, bit retjeft, thou provokest; er babet, he bathes. Naturally it is awkward to write bu grii^ft, er n^artt, bu retjft, er babt, 15. Present Tense of loben, to praise. Stem, Iob» id) iohtf I praise. tuir lohtttf we praise. ^n inh^tf thou praisest. tl^r (oBt, you praise. tVf fie, t^ lohtf he, she, it praises. fie (oBeit, they praise. (a) Conjugate the present tense of fagen and (erncn like lobcn. PRESENT OF LOBEN. 7 16. English Progressive and Emphatic Forms are given in German by the simple verb. I am learning^ I do learn. ^^ (cmc* He was praising, he did praise. @r lobtc* * Were you saying? Did you say? ^agtCtt a§f the. bic, the. (a) Note the similarity of endings for the definite article and the personal pronoun : ber — cr, bic — fie, ba^ — eg, bie — fte. 18. Vocabulary. htv ^ni'htVf brother. ha^^nit,desk. bcr (BtU^I, chair. (o'Bctt, to praise. bic ^itt'tc, ink. fa'gcit, to say, tell. ^xt ^tci'be, chalk. Icr'nctt, to learn, study. 'b^^ Qb\a^, glass. ttiantm'? why f 19. Exercise. (a) 1. ®er 8et)rer lobt ben ® ruber; er lernt ba« 53uc^. 2. SBarum^at ber 53ruber emen@tuf)Iunbem^u(t? 3, Sa^ lernen ®te ^ier in ber ®(^ule ? 4. ^^ ^abe ba^ ®{a^ unb bte ^retbe. 5. ©ie abutter lobt ba^ ^inb; ba^ Stnb lernt. {b) „9Barum loben ®te ben ©ruber?'' M lernt ba^ Surf).'' „aBo tt)aren bie Slinte unb bte Sreibe?" 8 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. „Qij [age, fie iDarett ^ter in ber ®(f)ule." „3Bir loben ben @(J)U{er; er ift gut; er lernt/' (c) 1. What have I here? 2. You have the chalk and a glass. 3. The desk and the chair are here in the school. 4. What do you say ? Why do you praise the ink ? It (fie) is not good. 5. The teacher praises, and we learn. (d) " What are you saying ? " " I am studying the book." " Why are you studying ? '' " I have a chair and a desk and a pen and the ink." " The brother studies, and the teacher praises the pupil." LESSON IV. Past of iohcn* Indefinite Article. IDte gel^t es ? <5an^ gut, id? banU, How goes it? Quite well, I thank {you). 20. The Past Tense of Weak Verbs is formed by adding r^te to the present stem. The personal endings are the same as in the present tense, except that the third person singular is like the first. 21. Past Tense of loben. ici^ U^itfl praised. ttiir lobtcn, we praised. btt lofiteft, thou didst praise. i^r Mittf you praised. tXf fie, t^ loiite, he, she, it praised. fie lobten, they praised. (a) Conjugate the past tense of fud)cn and mact)en like loben. PAST OF LOB EN. 22. The Indefinite Article. Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut. Nom. cilt, a. cittc, a. citt, a. Gen. cittCi^, of a. tintVf of a. cinc^, of a. Dat. einem, to a. cttter, to a. cittcm, to a. Ace. cittCtt, a. cine, a. citt, a. (a) The plural of course is wanting. Compare the 'endings of ber and eitt, 23. Position of ntd^t, — When nid^t modifies the whole sen- tence it stands at or near the end; otherwise it conies just before the word or phrase it negatives. SBir iohtn ben 8rf|ii(er nit^t* We are not praising the pupil, ^tv S3rnber, niti^t ber Battv, lohi ben 8cf|nler« The brother^ not the father, praises the pupil. 24. Vocabulary. ber @ar'ten, garden; in ^tm @ar= bai^ ^Ui'i>f dress. ten, in the garden. fn't^en, (past) fnri^te, to seek, look ber X^d)f table. for. hk Dflo'fe, rose. ma'c^en, (past) mad}ttf to make. hit SBIn'me, floioer. rot, red. 'tsa^ ^aw^f house, Xoit"^ how? 25. Exercise. (a) 1. 2Bie ma^te bie abutter ba^ Sletb? 2. @te ma^te ba^ tietb auf (on) etttem %\\6), 3. SBie luar ba^ ^leib; \mx e^ ntc^t rot? 4. ©a^ §au^ n)ar nic^t in bem ®arten. 5. ^6) fu(i)te ben Setter in bem ®arten- {h) ,,$Ba^ [uc^ten ®ie, eine ^Inme?'' „3^a, \6) \Vi6)it tint $Rofe in bem ©arten," „3Bie mar bie 9to[e? Sar fie {it) rot?'' 10 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. „Qa, id) fud^te eitte $Ro[e, unb fie n^ar rot/' ,,'^it 9iofe, ba^ §au^ unb ba^ Stetb finb rot,'' (c) 1. Did you make the chair and the table ? 2. Why was the teacher praising the pupil ? 3. The house in the garden was not red. 4. The pupil was not studying the book. 5. How did she make the dress ? (d) " Were- you looking for a flower in the garden ? " " Yes, I was looking for a rose ; it (fie) was red." " What did you say ? The rose is not red.'' "The teacher praised the flower." " How and why were you looking for it (fie) in the garden ? " LESSON V. Present of fej^eit* Review. (Er ftebt ben VOalb vov Bdumen nid?t. — :iDeutfc^eg (S^ric^ttjort. He does not see the wood for the trees. — German Proverb. 26. Certain Strong Verbs change the stem vowel of the sec- ond and third persons singular in the present indicative, as in fe^en (bu fie^ft, er fte^t) ; f|3red)en (bu fpric^ft, er fprid^t). (A list of strong verbs and these stem changes will be found on pages 199 to 205.) 27. Present Tense of fe^en, to see. \6) f c^c, I see. ttiir fc^cn, we see. bu fie^ft, thou seest. t^r fe^t, you see. tVf fie, t§ fic^t, he, she, it sees. fie fe^eit, they see. (a) Conjugate the present tense of fprcd^en (t)U fpridjft) and finbcn (bu ftnbcft) Uke fe^cn. PRESENT OF SEHEN. 11 28. Vocabulary. bcr Manrtf man. fprc'c^cn, to speak. bic 5tuf gabe, exercise. fitt'bcn, to find. tsa^ (^xa^f grass. Ontit, green. ^a^ ^tVii\^f German^ the German (i'\>tXf hut. language. ttcitt, no. fe'^Ctt, to see. fc^ttJer, hard, difficult. 29. Exercise. (a) 1. @ief)[t bu ba^ ®ra^ ? 2. ^a, t(^ fef)e ba^ ®ra^ ; e^ ift griln. 3. ^^d^ fu(^e eine geber, aber t(J) [tube fie (it) nidji. 4. (S^jrtc^t ber Tlam ©eutfc^ ? 5. ^a, er f^3ri(^t S)eut[^ ; er fitibet e^ nicf)t fc^mer. (b) „ov Corner. 14 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON VI. Past of fc^ett* Masculine Nouns of the First Class. Was tft bas ? 3d? cerftet^e es nid^i What is thatF I don^t understand it. 31. The Past Tense of Strong Verbs has the same personal endings as the present, except that the first and third persons singular have no personal ending. 32. Past Tense of [e^en. x6) ^a% I saw. mir f a^eit, we saw. bit fa^ft, thou sawest. xljv fa^t, you saw. tx, fie, C^ fa^, he, she, it saw. fie fa^en, they saw. (a) Conjugate, the past of j^rerfjen (f)3rad^) and finben (fattb). 33. Classes of Nouns. — Nouns are divided into five classes according to the way they are declined. The first class con- tains those which do not change in the plural, except some- times to take umlaut. (a) Umlaut meaiis changed sound and is indicated by two dots over the vowel. 31, 0, and u are the only vowels that can take umlaut. Compare the English: man, men; foot, feet. See also J, c of the. Introduction. 34. The First Class of Nouns contains only words of more than one syllable. It includes : (1) All masculine and neuter nouns ending in ?el, -er, KU* (2) All diminutives ending in ^djtU or ^lein. (3) Neuter nouns with prefix ®e* and suffix ?e, (4) The two feminines 2)?utter and S^od^ter. PAST OF 8EHEN, ' 15 35. Declension of a Masculine Noun of the First Class. Singular. Plural. Nom. ber S3rnlicr, the brother. bic S3rubcr, the brothers. Gen. bc^ S3 rubers, the brother's. ber S3rubct, the brothers\ Dat. bcm S3rubcr, (to) the brother. bctt S3rubcrtt, {to) the brothers. Ace. bctt S3rubcr, the brother. bte SBriibcr, the brothers. (a) Like ber i8ruber decline ber @(^uler, ber !i?el^rer, ber Skater (\ixt SSater), ber @arten (bie ©cirten). Decline each of these nouns also in the singular with ein. See § 22. 36. Vocabulary. ber Som'mcr, bic 8ommcr, sum- na% wet. mer. \>a§f that. ber SBin'ter, bte SBiitter, winter. (e'fen, er Hep, (past) Ja§, to read. tttavntf warm. uerfte'^eit, (past) tierftanb, to un- lalif cold. der stand. 37. Exercise. (a) 1. ®te ©ommer finb inarm, unb bie SBittter finb na^, 2. aSa^ tt)ar ba^? ^c^ t)erftanb e^ m6)i, 3. gafen bte Sritber bie 3lufgabe? 4. !Die ©djiiler t^erftanben nid^t, tna^ fie lafen, 5. SBarum ift e^ fait in ber ©c^ule? ^(^ tierfte^e e^ ni^t • (h) „3Serftanb ber (Sinter T)eutfd)?'' „^a, er Derftanb T)eutf(^, utib er la^ e^, aber er [prat^ e^ tti(^t»" „gattb er bie 3lufgabe \6)\otx?" „yitm, er tierftattb bie 3lufgabe; fie (it) tnar ni^t firmer." „!Da^ ift gut. !l)ie (Skitter finben ba^ ©ud) ni(^t fdiiner*" (c) 1. Are the summers here warm? 2. Yes, and the winters are cold and wet. 3. The teacher spoke German, and the pupils understood. 4. Did they see the rose in the garden ? 5. The teachers were speaking (f|)rad^en) German, and the pupils were reading, but they did not understand. 16 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (d) " Did you understand the exercise ? '^ " Yes, but we found it (fie) hard." " Didn't you read the book ? '' "No, we didn't understand it (e^)." " But you spoke Grerman and you read it. Why didn't you understand ? " LESSON VII. Present of ttierben* Feminine Nouns of the First Class. VOas fd?retben Ste ba? Das gel|t ntd?t. What are you writing there ? That won't do. 38. Present Tense of tDcrben, to become, get. x^ ttierbc, I become, get. ttJtr tticrbcn, we become, btt ttiitft, thou becomest. i^r ttictbet, you become. tVf fie, e^ toit\>f he, she, it becomes. fie tticrbctt, they become. 39. Declension of a Feminine Noun of the First Class. Singular. Plural. Nom. bic %ts6)itXf the daughter. "bit %'66)itVf the daughters. Gen. ber Xoti^ter, the daughter's. ber ^iic^ter, i^e daughters'. Dat. ber ^oti^ter, (io) ^/le daughter, bctt Xiid^tertt, (io) ^Ae daughters. Ace. bie Xoci^tet, «/ie daughter. 'bit %o6)itXf the daughters. (a) Note that feminine nouns keep the same form throughout the sin- gular. 2)te Xo^ter forms the plural merely by taking umlaut, hence it is of the first class. Like bie ^od^ter decline bie Wnttex, the only other feminine of the first class. 40. The Possessive Genitive. — The German genitive, like the English possessive, is used to denote possession. As in English, it may precede or follow its noun. FBESENT OF WERDEN. 17 ^t^ (B6)Xi\tx^ ^W^. The pupiV shook. ^ic 0*{ofc t>cr Xt>^itv. The rose of the daughter. (a) The genitive singular masculine and neuter of all nouns except Class V ends in (e)^. 41. Vocabulary. bic Xo^'ter, btc Zd^itXf daughter. ft^rei'ictt, (past) \^x\t% to write. baig SBct'tcr, weather. ttJCtbett, to become, get. im Som'mcr, /?i (?^e) summer. p, ^oo. im SSitt'ter, m (^/le) winter. , \)t\% hot. fo, so. tuann ? i(?/ien ? fc^r, very. a\if old. 42. Exercise. (a) 1. !j)te 5ti5(^ter be^ ge^rer^ Derfte^ett ben (S(^u(er ntd^t ; fie tDerben fe^r rot. 2. @^ totrb ju ^et^ l)ter in ber ©d^ule. 3. X)er SSater be^ @(^iiler6 mirb fe^r alt. 4. ©(^reiben ©ie bie Slufgabe ^ier in ber ©c^ule? 5. ®ie SJJutter be^ 8e^rer^ fi^rieb ein ®ud^ ; \o\x tafen e^, aber iDir t)erftanben e^ nid^t. (&) „9IBann n)irb ba^ SBetter irarm, unb tDann n)irb e^ fait?'' „ J)a^ ^Better tDirb iDarm im @ommer unb !att im SBinter.'' „3Iber e^ trirb m^i fo fel^r fait im 3[Binter.'' „9lein, e^ ift tt)arm ^ier in ber ®cf)ule im Sinter." „3^a, aber e^ ift ju f)ei^ in ber ®(^ule im ©ommer.'' (c) 1. The weather gets very warm in summer. 2. The weather gets too cold in winter. 3. The exercise of the pupil is getting too hard. 4. The daughter of the teacher is getting very red. 5. The pupiPs book was not green ; it was old and red. (d) " When did you write the exercise ? " "I did not write it (fie).'' 18 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. " Why didn't you write it? Is it getting too hard? " "No, but it (e^) is getting too hot here at school." " Yes, it is very hot in summer at school.'' LESSON VIII. Past of metbett. Neuter Nouns of the First Class. Was tun Sie ba? §eigen Ste mir bas 3ud?l What are you doing there F Show me the book. 43. Past Tense of iDcrben. x6) ttiurbe, / became. ttJtr ttiurben, we became. btt ttiurbcft, thou becamest. i^r ttiurbct, you became. tXf ftc, e§ ttiurbc, he^ she, it became. fte ttJurbcn, they became. 44. Declension of a Neuter Noun of the First Class. Singular. Plural. Norn. ba§ SJlabti^en, the girl. bte SJlabd^cn, the girls. Gen. bei3 9JJabd^Ctt!^, ^/le ^^VZ's. bcr SWabti^cn, ^/le ^Ms\ Dat. bcm SJlabrJ^cn, («o) ^Tie gr^w. ben 9)labti^ctt, (^o) ^/le ^iVZs. Ace. 'bti^ SJlabt^ctt, «/ie ^iW. bic 9}labc^ett, ^/le ^iWs. (a) Like bag 9Jidb(i)'en decline ba« Setter, U^ 2Jleffer, bag 3Baffer, 45. The Indirect Object. — The dative is used to denote the indirect object. If both objects are nouns, the dative generally precedes as in English. 8tc ^a\> bcm Scorer cm S3u^, She gave the teacher a book. ^6) scigtc bcr Xoc^tcr cine OlDfc. / showed the daughter a rose, or / showed a rose to the daughter. (a) The dative plural for all genders always ends in (e)n. PAST OF WERDEN. 19 46. Vocabulary. t>a§ aWef fer, btc SJieffcr, knife. tm, (past) tat, to do. ba^ SBaf'fcr, bte 233affcr, tmter. ober, or. gc'ben, er ^xht, (past) gab, io ^ive. mtt, prep, with dative, loiY^. SCi'gcit, (past) jctgtc, ^o s/io?/j. ha, there. 47. Exercise. (a) 1. ©er ©i^uler gab bem 3Kab(f)en ba^ aJJeffer be^ 8e^rer«» 2. SBurbe ba^ 9Ba[fer tt)arm ober ijti^? 3. (5^ tt)ar njarm, aber e^ iDurbe fait, 4. ®a^ ^Better murbe ^etg, unb ba^ SKdb^en tt)urbe rot, 5. ©a ift etn ®Ia^; it)a^ taten ©te mit bem Saffer? (6) „SBa^ taten ©te tntt bem ajjeffer ba?" n^t^ X^^a^^ ^^^ Secret ba^ 9}?e[fer.'' „®aben @te bem ge^rer ba^ ^nd)?" „^txn, id) gab bem 2Kab(f)en ba6 Suc^/' „Unb ba^ 3)Mb{^en tnurbe rot, nic^t ma^r?" (c) 1. What did you do with the water? 2. Did the pupiPs father have the* water or the glass ? 3. We gave the pupils the pen with the ink. 4. Was the man there with the teacher, or was he in the garden ? 5. The teacher gave the pupil a knife and a book. (d) " What did you do there ? Did you show the teacher the pupil's exercise ? '' " No, the exercise was getting very hard.'' " What did you say ? Was the exercise getting too hard ? " " Yes, and I gave the pupiPs book to the teacher." " And the teacher saw the book, and he showed the exercise to the pupil's father." 20 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON IX. The Future Tense. Semen Ste bas (5ebtd?tl Die Sd^e finb ntd?t lang. Learn the poem. The sentences are not long. 48. Formation of the Future Tense. — Used independently, iperben means to become. Used as an auxiliary (that is, with a present infinitive), it forms the future tense. All verbs form the future in the same way, simply by prefixing the present indicative of tt)erben to the present infinitive. 3^ ttierbe alt / become old. ^ti^ ttJerbe Mem I shall praise. 49. Future Tense of loben. Future Tense of [e'^en. x6) ttJerbe Uhtxx, I shall praise. x^ ttierbe fe^en, I shall see. btt ttitrft U^txXf thou wilt praise. btt ttJirft fe^en, thou wilt see. tx, fie, e^ ttiirb U^trx, he, she, it er, fie, ei^ mirb fe^en, he, she, it will praise. * wilVsee.^ toxx merbett (oben, we shall praise. mtr merben fe^eit, we shall see. x\)x t&tx\^ti loben, you will praise. x^x tuerbet fe^en, you will see. fie ttierben (oben, they will praise. fie luerben fe^en, they will see. (a) Conjugate in full the future of !^aben, feiti, and ttierben. 50. Position of the Infinitive. — The infinitive stands after all its modifiers, usually at the end of the sentence. ^^ tuerbe t>tn IBe^rer nidjt fe^ett* I shall not see the teacher. Sie ttiirb bem ©chiller ein ^ut^ geben. She will give the pupil a book. 51. The Second Class of Nouns contains a large number of masculine, feminine, and neuter monosyllables, and words of THE FUTURE TENSE. 21 more than one syllable ending in =tg^ =tng^ =faf, -nt^ and These nouns add ^e to form the plural. The masculines take umlaut usually, the feminines always, the neuters very seldom. Plurals that take umlaut must be learned from the vocabularies. 52. Declension of the Second Class of Nouns. Masculine. Singular. Plural. N. bcr ^ttttb, the dog. Mc ^ttttbc, the dogs. G. be^ §UttbC)§, the dog's. bet ^ttttbc, the dogs'. D. bent §uttb(c), (to) the dog. htrt ^nn'i>tnf (to) the dogs, A. ben ^nn'tf the dog. hh ^nnbe, the dogs. Feminine. N. bte fSanff the bench. bte S3attfe, the benches. G. ber 23anf, of the bench. ber S3dn!e, of the benches. D. ber 23an!, (to) the bench. "btw S3an!en, (to) the benches. A. bte S3anf, the bench. bte battle, the benches. Neuter. !N". "^a^ ^ferb, the horse. bte ^ferbe, the horses. G. ht§ ^ferbe^, the horse's. ber ^ferbe, the horses'. D. bent ^ferb(e)^ (to) the horse. ben ^ferben, (to) the horses, A. t>a^ ^ferb, the horse. bte ^fevbe, the horses. (a) In like manner decline ber @tu^( (bte ©tii^Ie), bte §anb (bte §attbe), ba^ ^ult (bie ^ulte), ber Sifd) (bie Xtjdie), bag papier (bie fa-- ^iere), ber @a^ (bie @d^e), ein $unb, eitte iBan!, etn ^ferb, 53. Vocabulary. ber ^nt, bte ^ii'te^ hat. t>a§ (BM^^t', bte ©ebiri^'te, poem, ber iSa^, bie Sat'^e, sentence. piece of poetry. bte ^ari^t, t>it Wdd)'tt, night. (ang, Zo/i^. bie 'Btaht, t>it (Btdt^'U, city. ^vo% large, big, great. bai^ ®^ie(, bie (B^h'Uf play, game. f^ie'len, (past) f^ielte, to play. 22 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 54. Exercise. (a) 1. SBerben ®te etnen §ut madden? 2. @te merben in bem ©arten mit ben ©c^iilern f|)te(en» 3. ®e^en ®ie bie ®tabt? (Sie (t'O ift fe^r gro^. 4. ©te ^ix6)it iDcrben fe^r lang. 5. S)te ©(filler fptelten etn (S<)iel mit einent §ut* (&) „2Berben @ie bie ®a^e ber 9lnfgabe f^reiben?'' „3^a, tDir merben bie ©ci^e fc^reiben nnb bent Secret jeigen-'' „SBarmn lernen ©ie bie ®ebi(^te nit^t?" „S)ie ©ebic^te finb ju fang, aber \oxx ttjerben fie {them) lernen." „@nt! 2Sir n)erben ein ©piel fpielen.'' (c) 1. Will he learn the sentences or the poems ? 2. Shall you make the hats ; will they be very large ? 3. They were not playing; the teacher was reading a book, and the pupil was learning a poem. 4. Will the game be very long ? 5. The nights will get long and cold in winter. (d) "Will the pupils learn the sentences of the poem ?'' " Yes, they will learn the poem ; it is not very long." " And will they write the exercise with a pen and ink ? " "No, they will play with the girls in the garden." " The sentences of the exercise are getting too long." ©em 8anb, n)o nteine 9Biege ftanb, 5ft boc^ !ein anbre^ gteii^ ; g^ ift ntein liebe^ 3SaterIanb Unb ^eigt: ba^ ©entfc^e $Rei(^. — 3uHu«@tumt. REVIEW, 23 LESSON X. Review. libung mad?t t>en ITtetfter. — 2)eutfc^e^ a§ ^xid}f the book. btc S3it^er, the books. (a) In like manner decline ba^ ^inb (bie f Inber), ha^ §au^ (bie §du* fer), bass ma^ (bie @(dfer). 28 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 64. Votabulary. ba§ Sanb, hit Satt'bcr, land, coun- ba§ fiieb, bic Sie'bcr, song. try ; auf bcm Satt'be, 2>i ^/le ba^ JJclb, bic gcl'bcr^ jieZc?. country. fitt'gett, fang, gcfun'gctt (^aBcit), bai^ SSort, i^jord; bic 293i)r'tcr, sep- to sing. arate words; bic SSor'tc, co?i- Brautt, brown. nected words in a sentence. f^^tt, beautiful. 65. Exercise. (a) 1. S)te gelber auf bem ?anbe fitib nid^t fi^on im ©ommer ; fie finb braun, 2. §aben @te bie §dufer auf bem 8anbe gefe- i)tn? 3. ©te Siuber ^aben ben 9Kanneru bie 8ieber gefungen, 4. T)er (Siguier ^at bie 9Sorte be^ 8iebe^ nii^t gelernt, 5. ®ie gelber auf bem 8anbe tDaren braun ; U)ir f)aben fie (tJiem) gefel)en. (b) '.^^aben ®ie bie gieber gefungeu?'' „Qa, aber irir ^aben bie SBorte nid)t tierftanben*'' „§aben @ie bie gieber \d)Wtx gefunben?" „9?eiu, bie !iBorte tnaren niif)t frf}it)er ju lernen, aber t^ir l^aben fie (them) nic^t t)erftanben,'' „Q6) ^be bie gieber nid)t gelernt, aber ic^ U)erbe fie fingen/' (c) 1. Did you find the children in the country ? 2. The fields in the country get green in summer and brown in winter. 3. The sentences were too long, and the men did not understand the words. 4. They have been looking for the men, but will they find them (fie) ? 5. What has he done with the books ? Where are they ? (d) " Didn't you understand the words of the song ? " "No, I haven't learned the song; I didn't understand it." " But you have sung the song, .haven't you ? " " Yes, I have sung it, but I didn't learn it." " The song is very beautiful, and it is not hard to learn." PERFECT WITH SEIN. 29 LESSON XII. Perfect with fcin* Weak Nouns. Ste finb 3U fpdt gefommen; cr ift fd?on ^e^an^zn. You have come too late ; he has already gone. 66. Use of fein as Auxiliary. — Some verbs take feitt as the auxiliary for the perfect. They are (1) intransitives that indi- cate motion (like ge'^en, fommen, etc.) or change of condition (like fterben, to die, iDcrben, etc.), (2) feitt and bleibett, to re- main, and (3) some impersonals (§ 251). Perfect Tense of ge^ett. \^ ]6itt gegangctt, / have gone, I mir finb gcgaitgeit^ we have gone^ went. we went. im bift gcgattgctt, thou hast gone. i^v fcib gcgangcn, you have gone. tXf fie, c§ ift gcgattgctt, he, she, it fie finb gegangen, they have gone. has gone. (a) In like manner conjugate id} bin nid^t gcfotttttten, id} bin ba gemefcn, tc^ bin getrorbcn. 67. The Fourth Class of Nouns, commonly called the Weak Declension, contains masculines and feminines. The mascu- lines form all cases, singular and plural, by adding *tt or ^tn to the nominative singular. Feminines, of course, do not change in the singular ; in the plural they add ^(e)tt. The fourth class includes : (1) Most masculines ending in ?e and about twenty masculine monosyllables which used to end in ^e (§elb, 9?arr, etc.). (2) Foreign masculines with the accent on the last syllable (©tubettf, ^f)otograpVr e^^.). 30 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (3) Most feminines of more than one syllable, and those of one syllable not in Class II. 68. Weak Declension of Nouns. Fourth Class. Masculine. Singular, N. • htv ^nabCf the boy. G. t>t§ ^nahtttf the boy's. D. htm ^nahtrtf {to or for) the boy. A. bctt ^nahtrtf the boy. Plural. bte ^naBctt, the boys. betr ^nabctt, the boys'. ben ^nahtxXf {to or for) the hit ^xtahtn, the boys. Feminine. N. btc ^vaxXf the woman. G. bet i^vaxXf the woman's. D. bcr ^xaxt, (to or for) the woman. A. bie ^xaxXf the woman. btc '^xaMtn, the women. ber %xa\XtXif the women's. ben ^rauen, {to or for) the women. btc ^xaxitttf the women. 69. The Imperative in formal address, is like the indicative inverted. (For a full treatment, see §§ 200 and 201.) An ex- clamation mark usually follows a German command. Bead the sentence. Scf Ctt 8tc bctt Sa^ ! Write the exercise. (Bd^xtihtxx . bcm 5(ugC, (to or for) the eye. A. ba^ 5(tt9C, the eye. Plural. hit ^iaattttf the states. bet (Biaattrtf of the states. bctt ^taattrtf (to) the states. btc 'Btaaitttf the states. bic ^lugcn, the eyes. bcr 5(ttgcn, of the eyes. bCtt 5lttgctt^ (to or for) the e bte 5(ttgctt, the eyes. 76. Vocabulary. bcr ^ortt, ht§ ^ovn^f bic ^or'ntn, thorn. bcr 8cc, bC)^ Scc;^, bic Sc'cn, lake. bcr So^n, bic (Sii^'itc, son. bO)§ S3ctt, bc^ Setter, btc S3ct'tcn, bed ; ju 23ctt, «o bed. \sa^ @n'bc, bc^ @ttbC)§, btc ©nbctt^ end. (ait'tjc, adv., long^ a long time. fd^on, already^ ttiiCbicF? how much ? ttJtCbtC'tc? how many f jttict, two. 34 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 77. Exercise. (a) 1. ®er @o^n be^ §errn trar ni(^t p ©ett gegangen, 2, fatten (gte bie ©omen ber 9iofe ni(^t gefe^en? 3. SBir Ijatttn bem (So^ne be^ §errn bte jmet enben be^ @ee^ gejeigt. 4« aBtet)teIe 3Iugen ^aben tt)ir ? 5, 3=(^ (erne bie ®a^e f i^on lange ; t(^ ge{)e ju Sett, (6) ^SBte tange ternen @te ft^on 3)eut[d^?'' „-3(^ feme e^ [d^on lange, aber ii} tjerfte^e e^ nid^t." „®tnb ®te fd^on tange ^ter in ber ©c^nle ?" ,;9?ein, nid^t fef)r lange," „Qi} ^atte (Ste ntt^t gefe^en,'' (c) 1. Had you seen the thorns of the flowers in the garden? 2. The two sons of the gentleman had grown (become) very- large. 3. The ends of the lakes had been very beautiful in summer. 4. How many books and pens have we ? 5. That is not the end of the exercise, but I am going to bed. (d) " How long have you been here at school ? " "I have been here one (einen) summer and one (etnen) winter." " Have you already studied German ? " " No, I have not studied German, but I have understood it a long time." '^ That is good ! Please read the sentences." 3tret !j)inge tern' gebnibig tragen : ©ein eigen 8eib, ber anbern Slagen. FUTURE PERFECT, 36 LESSON XIV. Future Perfect. Gender. (£tn Cag ift nidqt bem anbcrcn gletd?. — @oet^e» One day is not like another. — Goethe. 78. The Future Perfect is formed by the future of the auxil- iary (idj tnerbe ^aben, etc.) and the past participle ; the infini- tive of the auxiliary (^aben or fetu) follows the past participle. ^d) njcrbe gelobt ^abciu I shall have praised. ^►(^ tticrbc gegangctt fcitt. I shall have gone, (a) As in English, the German future perfect is seldom used. 79. Rules of Gender. — There are no very helpful rules of gender. Below are given those which have fewest exceptions. These rules fall into two classes: those that determine the gender by meaning, and those that determine it by ending. (a) Nouns that determine the gender by their meaning: — 1. Names of males, days, months, and seasons are mas- culine. bcr Wlann, the man; bcr Sonu'tag, Sunday; bcr Wlai, May; ber ^OtnmtVf summer. 2. Names of females and abstract nouns are mostly feminine. hit ^vaUf the woman ; bic fjrcttbc, joy ; bic Stebe, love. 3. Names of cities or countries and words not nouns but used as such are usually neuter. ha^ fti^iine ^tviin', beautiful Berlin; ^>a§ trettC ^cutft^'Ianb, loyal Ger- many ; H^ Scbcn, life (Icben, to live). 36 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (6) Nouns that determine the gender by their ending: — 1. Kouns having the ending 4i), -tg, 'ting, or ?er express- ing agency, are masculine. Those in *er belong to Class I, those in A6)^ -tg, or 4ing to Class II. ber Xtp^pi^f the carpet; htv ^o'tttg, the king; bcr 3iiing'(tng, the young man ; tier Scl^rcr, the teacher. 2. Nouns having the ending ?et, '{)eit, -feit, 4n, 'f(^aft, or ?ung, and most names of things ending in :=e, are feminine. These are all weak (Class IV). bie ^pnigtn, the queen; btc ^off'mtng, hope; bie JJrcuttb'fri^aft, friend- ship ; btc %xt\'^txtf freedom ; tsxt S3htmc, flower. 3. Nouns ending in the diminutive suffixes, ^i^tu or 4ein, are neuter. These belong to Class I. ^a^ Wi^^tMf the girl ; \^a^ ^rautcitt, the young lady. 80. Vocabulary. ber grcttttb, btc ^rcmt'bc, friend. tsa^ ^o^r, bic ^al^'rc, year. bcr Za^f btc Xa'gc, day. tiicr, four. bcr 9Jl5'nat^ bic SHottatc, month. ftc'bcn, seven. btc SBo'^C, bic SBo^Ctt, t^eeA;. S^iitf, ^i^eZve. 81. Exercise. (a) 1. 3Btr trerben bie greutibe be^ Snaben gefel^en ^aben. 2. !j)er @o^n ber l^atne ift jtDbtf ^a^re alt, unb bie Sloc^ter be^ §errn ift fieben ^(x^xt ait 3. J)er greunb be^ 8ef)rer^ ^at bem Snaben bie 9tofen in bent ©arten ge^eigt. 4. !j)ie 3lnf' gaben be^ ©d^itler^ maren fe^r lang getDefen, abet bie @a^e [inb nid)t \i)Xotx. 5. ©ie t^ier §erren fprei^en fc^on lange J)eutf(^, aber fie fd^retben e^ nt(f)t. W ff@agen @te, bitte, tDteuiete 2Borf|en lernen @ie f^on Deutf^?'' FUTURE PERFECT. 37 „3=(i) (erne fi^on 5tt)ei SJionate ©eutfd^, ober fieben SBoc^en unb t)ter JTage," „3Btet)tete SJionate l^at etti -3=af)r?'' „@ut! 33itte, fd^reiben ©te bte (gci^e ber 3lufgabe!" (c) 1. The boy's friends will have studied German. 2. The days had been wet and cold, but the water of the lake was warm. 3. The boy had a pen and a book ; he was writing the four sentences, wasn't he ? 4. We have studied the exercise; we shall write the twelve sentences. 5. A week has seven days ; how many months has a year ? (d) ^' How many days has a week ? " " A week has seven days.'^ " And how many weeks has a month ? " " A month has four weeks, and a year has twelve months.'' "Good! You have studied German; please write the exercise." • ©tnget leife, teife, teife, ©ingt eitt pfternb SBtegentteb ! 2Son bem 3JJonbe lernt bie SBeife, ©er [o fttti am §immel jie^t. ®tngt etn 8teb fo fit^ geltnbe, 9Bie bie Quetten auf ben ^iefeln, SBte bte 53tenen um bie ginbe ©urnmen, murmein, fliiftern, rtefeln. — ©tcntcn^ 33rcntano. 38 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON XV. Review. Vftan mug etmas fein, um etmas 3U madden. — ©oeti^e. One must be something in order to do {make) something. — Goethe. 82. Outline of Declensions Class. Masc. Fem. Neut. Plural. Take Umlaut. 1st Strong tif tWf cr tif zrtf tXf (f|Ctt, (citt add nothing sometimes 2d strong mono- syllables mono- syllables mono- syllables add c usually iWVX and iMVX and 3d strong mono- syllables none mono- syllables add cr always 4th weak (e) (e) none tt, t\x, nen never 5th mixed few none few tt, Ctt never 83. « Singular. Strong Noun Endings, Plural. Class I. Class 11. Class III. Class I. Class II. Class III. N. — — — u. "C "cr . G. -g -t^ -e§ u. H HX D. — -(e) -(e) "It "Ctt "crtt A. .— — — IL "t "cr Note. The above tables are not meant to be complete, but just to give a graphic impression of the declensions. REVIEW. 39 84. Perfect Tenses. Present Perfect = present of auxiliary (^abetl or fettt) + past (also called perfect) participle. Past Perfect = past of auxiliary + past participle. Future Perfect = future of auxiliary -|- past participle. 85. Table of Cases. Nom. Gen. Dat. Ace. Masc. ^cr Srubcr bc§ Wanm^ gaB bcm Se^rcv ben Stit^t* Fern, ^ic Xoc^tcr bcr fjrau gaB ber SDIuttcr bic ^ofc* Neut. ^a^^ittb bc§ 9)lantt(cin§ gaB bcia Sl^lobti^ett ba^ t(eib. little man 86. Infinitive of Purpose. -^ The expression to, in order to, denoting purpose in English, is given in German by um . . . gU with the infinitive. A comma precedes UTU. He came to see the teacher. @r !am, ttttt bctt Sc^rcr ^n fc^Ctt* We read in order to understand. 23Bir lefctt, Utti ^u tJerftc^Ctt. 87. Review Questions. (a) 1. How is the German perfect formed? 2. What verbs take !^aben as auxiliary, and what take fettt? 3. Give the rule for the position of the past participle. (b) 1. Distinguish betyreen the use of the past and the per- fect tenses in German. 2. What are the principal parts of a German verb ? Illustrate. 3. What nouns are included in the weak declension ? (c) 1. How is the formal imperative formed? 2. When does German use the present and past for the English perfect and pluperfect? 3. Give the rules of gender according to meaning, and according to endings. 40 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 88. Review Exercise. (a) 1. J)ie i^^eunbe be^ ^naben finb gegangen, urn bie Dtofen in bem ©arten gu fe^en. 2. ^d) ^abe bie ®taaten unb Scinber gefe^en. 3. (Sudden @ie bie geber unb ba^ 'ipapier, um ju fc^reiben? 4. ©itte, geben @ie bem ^naben ba^ Su^, unb lefen @ie bie ©ci^e! 5. SBa^ fatten bie ^inber be^ ge^rer^ ntit ber Sreibe getan? 6. S5ir tDerben bem 3Kanne bie SKeffer jeigen. 7. 9Biet)ieIe SBod^en ^at ein 9Jfonat? 8. SBann ^at ba^ 3)Mb(^en ba^ ^(eib gemai^t? 9. SBerben bie 2:age im (Sommer fd^dn unb tt)arm njerben? 10. !Da^ SBetter ift !alt unb na^ gemorben; bie tinmen in bem ©arten finb geftorben. (b) 1. The boys came to look for the pens and the paper. 2. I am studying German, in order to read and write it. 3. When did you show the dress to the girl ? 4. The weather got (use perf. tense) very warm in summer, and the grass died. 5. The garden has been very green, but it (er) is getting brown. 6. I went home to show the exercise to my (meiner) mother. 7. Please read the sentences and write the exercise. 8. It has become very warm; the children have gone home. 9. Please learn the words, in order to write the sentences of the exercise. 10. The days had become very hot, but the nights had been cold. §eute, nur ^eute bin id) fo f(^5n, SO^orgen, ai} morgen mu^ alle^ t)erge^n ; 9tur biefe ©tunbe bift bu noi} mein, ©terben, ad) [terben foil id) allein. REVIEW. ' 41 liber attett ®i|)feln Qn attett 9BipfeItt (S^Jitreft bu ^auttt eittett ^ani) ; !Die SSoglem |(^tt)etgett tttt SBatbe. SBarte ttur, balbe 9?u^eft bu au^. aBic ift bor^ bie (gtbc fo Wonl SOBte ift bo^ bie (Srbe [o fd^ott, fo fc^btt! !Da^ n)tffett bie 3SogeIeitt ; @ie ^ebett il)r leii^t ©efieber Uttb ftttgett fo fro^Iid^e Sieber ^'tt bett blauett §ittttttel fjitteitt, SBie ift bod^ bie grbe fo f(^ott, fo f(^i3tt!' ©a^ iDiffett bie glitff uttb @eeu ; ©ie tttaleu iu ftarettt ©piegel !Die ©cirten unb ©tcibt^ unb §ugel, Unb bie SBoIfen, bie britber ge^n. Unb ©anger unb 3KaIer n)iffen e^ Unb Sinber unb anbere 8eut'; Unb totf^ nid)t malt, ber fingt e^, Unb tDer^^ nic^t fingt, bent ftingt e^ Qn bent §erjen Dor (auter greub\ 42 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, LESSON XVI. Prepositions with the Dative or Accusative. 2ln bcr Kontge ^ofcn, an ben Ctfd^en Der Hetd^cn unb cor ben Ciiren ber Perltebten l^ord^te man auf bie Did?ter» — ©oet^c. >!/ kings' courts, by the tables of the rich, and in front of the doors of lovers they harkened to the poets. — Goethe. 89. Prepositions with Dative or Accusative. — The preposi- tions used with either dative or accusative are : an, auf , ^tnter, in, neben, U6er, nnter, t)or, 5n)i[(^en. They take the dative in answer to the question where 9 in ivhat place ? (lt)o)» They take the accusative in answer to the question whither 9 to or into what place f (tDO'^iu)* @r fag itt bem ^aufe* Re sat in the house, (SSo fag cr?) ©r lam in ba§ ^an§. He came into the house. (So^in tarn er?) ®r ftanb in bcr §iittc» He stood in the hut. (2Bo ftanb er?) @r gittg in \^it ^iittc. He went into the hut. (So^in ging er?) ®r ging in t>cr ^iittc auf nnh ab. He went back and forth in the hut, (SBo ging er auf unb ah?) (a) Many prepositions may unite with the definite article : am for an bem; im for in bem; tn§ for In \)a^; auf^ for auf ha^, etc. 90. Vocabulary. bcr 5lrm, \>it %x'mt, arm. in, in, into. ha§ ^nit'f bic ^nt'c, knee. nc'Ben, beside. fit'jcn, fa|, gcfcffcn (f^abcn), to Whtx, over, above, across; fig., sit. about. an, at, near, by (rarely on). tttt'ter, binder; among. auf, on, upon, onto. t)OVf before, in front of. ^ill'tcr, behind. ^tt>i'\^cn, between. PREPOSITIONS IVITH TWO CASES. 43 91. Exercise. (a) 1. @r fa^ an bem ^ufte auf etnem ©tu^Ie. 2. SBtr finb itber bie gelber in bie ©tabt gegangen, 3. gr ^atte ba^ 9J?ab(^en tm 3lrme nnb ben Snaben auf bem Snie* 4. Sitte, fommen ®te in ba^ §au^ unb f^reiben @ie bie ®a^e in ba^ SSVii)l 5. SBo fifeen ®ie? (Answer 07i, at, beside, between, behind, and in front o/what or whom.) (b) ,,®ing ber ^nabe jmifi^en bie Slumen in bem Oarten?'' „9^ein, er tDar nid^t in bem ®arten; er ift in bie Stabt gegangen-" „2Birb er in bie ®(^ule !ommen?'' „Qa, er fommt in bie ©(^ute. 3Bo fi^t er ^ier?'' „gr fi^t Winter einem ^naben unb t)or einem ^naben, aber jnjifc^en itvd Wdhdjtn." (c) 1. He sat beside the boy, in order to see the sentences in the book. 2. Did you go into the city to look for a pen ? 3. The ink was among the books on a chair beside the table. 4. The man w^as sitting beside the desk with two books in his (ben) arms and a paper on his (bem) knee. 5. "We went across the garden in front of the house to go into the city. (d) "You were sitting in the garden; why did you go into the house ? " " I went into the house to look for a paper among the books." " Did you find the paper in the house ? " " Yes, it was on a chair by the desk." *^ And you found it on the chair and came here to (in bie) school, didn't you ? " 44 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON XVII. Personal Pronouns. Position of Objects. XPer tft ba? 3d? bin es. Sinb Sie es ? (£r ift es. Who is there F 92. /f is I. /5 /? I'OM ? It is he. Personal Pronouns. First Person. Second Person. N. id), 7. ttiir, we. btt, iJ/iO?f. xfjx, Sie, you. G. mcittcr, of me. ttttfcr, o/ws. bcittCt, of thee. euer, 3^rcr, o/?/om. D. ttttr, to me. Utti§, ^0 us. bit, ^0 ^/lee. euc^, S^tteu, to you. A. mi^, me. mi^f us. bi(^, «/iee. tnd^f @ie, you. Third Person. N. tVf he. fir, she. C^, if. fie, ^ey. G. feittcr, of him. \%XtXf of her. fcitter, of it. i^rer, of them. D. t^m, to him. i^Xf to her. x^vXf to it. xf^ntrtf to them. A. t^n, him. fic, her. t^, it. fie, f/iem. 93. Agreement of Pronouns. — In German, a personal pronoun of the third person must agree with its antecedent in gender as well as in person and number. ^^ f^abt bie ^inmt nidft gefe^ett; fie ttiar ^u flein. / did not see the flower ; it was too small. (Sffeit Sie ben ^ifd^ nid^t; er ift nxd^t ^nt Do not eat the fish ; it isn't good. Se^en Sic \>a^ ^av^ ? (§:§ ge^iJrt mir* Do you see the house f It he- longs to me. 94. The Position of Objects in German is just like English, (a) A personal pronoun, whether the direct or the indirect object, stands right after the simple verb or auxiliary. ®r gab e§ bent fie^rer* He gave it to the teacher. @r ^ai mix txxxtxx SBrief gefri^rieben. He has written me a letter. PERSONAL PRONOUNS, 45 (b) If both direct and indirect objects are personal pronouns, the accusative comes first. ^d) ^aht t§ i^m ge^cigt I have shown it to him. (c) If both objects are nouns, the indirect object (dative) usually comes before the direct (accusative) (see § 45). @r gab bcm Scorer tin ^nti}. He gave the teacher a hook. 95. Vocabulary. bcr Soil, bie SBal^lc, ball. Ic'gen, (cgtc, gctcrjt' (^aBctt), to bcr @c^tt^, bic 8ti^tt'^c, s^oe. lay, laid, laid. hit 23attf, bic S3att'!c, &e?ic/i. lic'gcn, lag, gcle'gctt (^aben), to lie, bic ^laf^fe, bic ^laffcit, class, lay, lain. H§ S3oot, tilt ^oo'ttf boat. fet'scn, fc^te, gcfc^f (^aben), «o t>a^ St^iff, btc Sr^if'fc, s/iip. set. 96. Exercise. (a) 1. ©er (S(^u^ ift Wer; i^ ^be x\}n unter bem ®ette gefunben* 2. ©te ^t ben ©all auf ben 2^ifd) gelegt; er tag auf einem ®tn^Ie. 3. ©ie 3Kdnner ^ben bte S3anfe in ba^ @(^iff gefe^t nnb bie ©tix^Ie in ein ^oot gelegt. 4. ®te ©chiller ber Staffe fni^en ben 53aII; er Itegt nnter etner S3anf, ober neben bem "^nttt. 5. SBtr ftnb in ein Soot gegangen, urn in ba^ @(^tff jn fontmen. (6) „§at ba^ tinb ^f^nen einen 53att gegeben? Qd) fe^e i^n ntd^t.'' „3fa, er ift ^ier; ic^ ^be i^n anf bie SSant gelegt." „Qd} finbe i^n mi)t; er liegt ni(^t anf ber -93ant'' „@r tiegt nnter bent "^Japier; fe^en ®te?" „Qa, er ift ^ier. 35anfe fe^r." (c) 1. The man showed (use perf. tense) the ball to the class, but he gave it (§ 93) to me. 2. The boy found a shoe 46 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. in the garden and laid it on a bench. 3. We went into two boats in order to be beside the ship. 4. The father laid the child on the bench, but the child did not lie on the bench. 5. Where is the ball ? I do not see it. It is lying on the table. (d) " I do not find the shoe. Did you set it under the bed ? " " No, I laid it on the bench. It is lying beside the ball." " Why didn't you show it to me ? '' " It was not hard to see it. I did not come into the house to give it to you." LESSON XVIII. Prepositions with the Dative. Inverted Order. €tle mit IDctle. — 2)eutfrf;e^ @^nc^h)ort The more haste the less speed (lit. haste with delay). 97. Prepositions with Dative. — The commonest prepositions with the dative are au^, bet, mit, narf), feit, t»on, ju* 5ttt!^ bcm ^aufe, out of the house. SBci xxn^f vnth us, at our house, ^a^ bcr 6tat»t, to the city. 98. When referring to inanimate objects ba(r)* is generally used with prepositions instead of a personal pronoun. Com- pare the English thereupon^ therewith. On it, out of it, in it. "^arattf, baraxt-g, bariit* With it, beside it, from it. ^dVXXi, battcBctt, baHOtt* 99. Inverted Order. — In the inverted order the subject stands directly after the simple verb or auxiliary. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. 47 (a) This order is used, as in English (1) in direct questions whose subject is not an interrogative pronoun, and (2) in com- mands where the form with @te is used. Do you speak German 9 S^rc^Ctt 8ic ^CUtf(i^ ? When will he come 9 SBattit ttiirb cr fommen ? Give me the book. Q^chtn ®ic mix ba^ S3uc^ ! (6) The inverted order is used in declarative sentences, when they are introduced by some element other than the subject. Now I am ready, ^t^t hin tt^ fctttg. In summer it is beautiful, ^m Sommcr ift e^ fc^iitt. Fm looking for a pen, not for ink. ^ittC fjcbcr flt^C \^f m6)i %\Xitt. 100. Vocabulary. bcr Wbn'ia^, Monday. avi^f out of btc ^ViVitXf butter. \>t\f near ; at the house of (with bic Sm>'^C, btc Stt^pCtt, soup. persons). ba§ Srot, bte Sro'te, bread. mit, with. \s(i^ %\t\S6), bic ^iti'\^tf meat. na^, after; to (a place). cffctt, a^, ficgcffctt (^aBcn), cr \txif since ; for. , x^if to eat. tJOtt, from., of; by (to denote the tci'ti^ett, rcif^tc, gerciri^t (ftaBcn), «o agent). ^anc?, pass (as at table). gu, to (a person). 101. Exercise. (a) 1. Set bem getter f)aben tDtr gfetf(^, ©rot unb S3utter gegeffen. 2. @ett 3Jiontag ^aben bte ^naben :93rot unb gutter mit ber ©u|3))e gegeffen. 3. T)te ©i^itler finb mit bett 2JJdb= d^en au^ bem §aufe ju bem Setter gegangen. 4. ^(^ f)abe bat)on gefefen ; voai l^abett (Sie bamtt getan? 5. :93itte, ret^ d^en @te bem ^^naben bie Sutter ; fie ift auf bem %\\6)t. ip) „Sitte, retc^en @ie mtr ba^ gletfd^!'' „(Sffen @ie «rot unb Sutter mit bem gleif(^?" 48 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. „Qa, naii) ber ©uppe effe id) gfeifc^ mit 33rot unb ©utter/' „^tx nn^ effen wix Srot unb Sutter narf) bem gletfrf)," „3cr§ ntcincr S5anf mtxnt§ ^n^t^ D. tttcincm Snibcr ntcincr Sanf ntcincm Snti^c A. tttcittcn S3ntbcr ntctnc SBanf Plural. ntcin ^n^ N. mcittc 23ritbcr Jttcinc Sanfc ntcinc M^tx G. ntcittcr S3riibcr ntcincr Sanfc ntcincr Sitc^cr D. mcittcn Sritbcrn ntcincn ^an!cn ntcincn ^^itt^crn A. ntctnc S5rubcr ntcinc S3an!c ntcinc Siir^cr (a) In like manner decline betn §ut, fettte Xodjttx, i^r §aug, eure @tabt, unfere iBIumc, 3^r ^leib, fein ©arteiu (6) Note that the endings are the same for all genders in the plural, and that cucr usually drops its second e for euphony when it has an end- ing ; eucr, cure, eucr ; eure§, eurcr, cure«, etc. Unfer may do the same : unfer, unjrc, unfer ; unfrc^, unfrer, unfrcS, etc. 105. Agreement of Possessives. — A possessive adjective must agree in stem with its antecedent ; in ending, with its noun. I have my book. 3»t^ ^abc mcin S5n^» I have my hooks, ^d) ^aBc ntcinc SBiid^cr, We have our book. 3Sir ffahtn nnfcr ^n^. The rose has its thorns, ^ic S^Jufc \)ai i^rc "^orncn* The girl sees her mother, ^a^ WaH^^tXX fic^t fciwc 3RnttCt, 50 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 106. Use of !etn» — German uses feitt to express no, not any, not a, unless it is meant to be very emphatic. 9^td^t ein means not one, I haven't any bread. 3ri^ ^abc feitt SBrot He didn't say a word. @r fagtc fcitt 3Bort» Not one word did he speak. Wi^t tin ^oxi fjjrari^ cr» 107. Vocabulary. iJCr SJricf, hit 23rtc'fc, letter. with dative, to thank; for, fiir; bcr ^ttttb, bic ^tttt'be, dog. (t^) hanltf thank you. hit ^nf^f hit ^Wf^tf cow. ttittf no, not a, not any, none. hit XnVf hit XWttttf door. hmtt^, through. Ui'ttrtf hatf qtht'itn (t^ahtn), to ^nx, for. beg, ask; for, uttt; btttc, please; ^e'gett, against. you're welcome. U^'ttC, without. batt'fctt, hanfitf gcbattft (^abctt), nniffor; around. 108. Exercise. (a) 1. (Ste gtbt t^rem §unbe [ein i^Ietf^ ; t^ [ef)e t^n buri^ bte 2:ur. 2. Qn bem gelbe ftnbet ber 9}?ann feitt ®ra§ fitr fettte Sit^e ; o^tte ®ra^ tt)erbett bie Slt^e fterbett, 3. SBtr fittb bur^ ^'^rett Oartett uttb uttt uttfer §au^ gegattgett, uttt unfren §unb su ftnben. 4. ©a^ SJfcibd^eu fe^te fein "ipult gegen bie $Eur, utn feine 3lufgabe fitr feinen gel^rer ju fi^reiben. 5. ®er ^nabe V* f^itte SUJutter urn Sdvot unb S3utter gebeten, aber er ^at i^r nirf)t gebanft, (b) „§aben @ie feine SSriefe fitr ntid^?" „§aben ®te i^re greunbe um Sriefe gebeten?'' „3a, unb ntein 33ater ^at ntir jmei burd^ bie Jitr gereidf)t, aber fie t^aren ntdfjt fur ntid^." rfQ^ fd^reibe feine :93rtefe. Qd) bin fe^r bagegen!" w®o? 3lber e^ ift nic^t gut, ot)ne Sriefe ^u fein." BEVIEW. 51 (c) 1. I don't see any cow; where is it? 2. Without their dog the boys went around our garden and through their father's field. 3. The lady did not ask for a flower, but her mother gave her a rose ; she thanked her mother for it. 4. Through the door I saw our cow and your dog in the field. 5. Did you thank your mother for her letter? It (§ 93) was very beautiful. (d) " Did your friend thank you for his letter ? '' " No, he didn't have any letter." " Didn't he ask you for any paper or any pen ? " "Yes, and I gave them to him, but I hadn't any ink for him." " He writes no letters without ink." LESSON XX. Apposition. Review. ^unbe, bte bellen, beigcn ntd?t. — (S^rtd^njort Barking dogs never bite. 109. Apposition. — A noun in apposition with another has the same case. Nominative. SDlettt SJatCf, ber Scorer, ift gcfommeit* My father, the teacher, has come. Genitive, ^d) (efc H§ SBttrf) ttteittc^ ^atct^f H§ ^tf^uv^. lam reading the book of my father, the teacher. Dative. @r f}at t& ntcinem ^atcr, bem Scorer, gcgcBcn* He gave it to my father, the teacher. Accusative, ^aft t»n mcinen Skater, ben Setter, gefe^en? Have you seen my father, the teacher 9 62 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 110. Review Questions. (a) 1. Which prepositions take dative or accusative? 2. When, do they take the dative, and when the accusative ? 3. Which prepositions take only the accusative ? Which only the dative ? (b) 1. Give the personal pronouns in German. 2. Give all the cases where fie and t^r occur. 3. Give the rule for the order of objects when both are pronouns ; both nouns ; one a pronoun and one a noun. (c) 1. Give the rule for inverted order. 2. How are the possessive adjectives formed from the personal pronouns ? 3. Give the rule for their agreement with their antecedent and with the noun they modify. (d) Distinguish carefully between lie, lay, lain (liegen, lag, gelegen) and lay, laid, laid (legen, legte, gelegt). Also between sit, sat, sat (fi^en, fa^, gefe[fen) and set, set, set (fe^en, fe^e, gefe^t). 8tegen and ft^en are strong, never take an object, and always express rest ; legen and fe^etl are always weak, transi- tive, and express motion. 111. Review Exercise. (a) 1. She found a ball and laid it by a bench, on the bed, behind the door, in the garden, beside a desk, over the paper, under a table, in front of the man, between the houses. 2. Here is a rose ; it lay by the chalk, on the grass, behind the dress, in the glass, beside the hat, over the paper, under the water, in front of. the dog, between the flowers. 3. The girl found a rose in our garden, and she gave it to me. 4. The boy with a letter saw the girl, and he gave it to her. 5. He went out of the house^ near the garden^ with his dog. REVIEW. 53 to the city, from the field, to his father. 6. We had come through the door, without your flowers, around the field. (6) 1. The girl has her flower, and the flower has its thorn. 2. Under the table the girl found a rose ; we gave it to her. 3. Have you seen my brother, the teacher ? He is in the gar- den with his books. 4. In the school the pupils had no ink ; they asked the teacher for it. 5. The boy asked for the butter on the table and I passed it to him. 6. You asked (use perfect tense) for it ; what will you do with it ? 7. In our garden I saw my dog with your father, the teacher. 8. In (the) school we speak German and write our exercises on our desks. 9. The girl came out of the school to go home ; she had her books under her (use def. art.) arm. 10. What did you say ? You have no paper ? What did you do with it ? ©etnc -Stutnen finb tierblu^t, 8eer unb !a^( fte^t gelb unb §atn* mntttx (Srbe, bu bift mub^ Unb ber SBtnter pKt bid) etn. ^aft bu boi^ genug ge[(i)afft, 3lQen rei^ ben 3:tf(f) gebedt ; ©amntle bir nun neue Sraft, SSi^ ber Serine 8teb bt(^ totdt ! — 3uliu^ (Sturm. 64 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. ^ot ^ena. 3luf ben Sergen, bie S3urgen, Qm 3:ale, bie ©aale, 3)ie a}Jab(f)en tm ®tabtd)en — einft atte^ tute l^eut ! Q\)x inerten ©efd^rten, SBo feib t^r jur ^dt mir, 3^^r tteben, geblteben? Sli}, alk jerftreut! ©ie etnen, fie tDeinen, ©ie anbern, fie iDanbern, ®ie britten no(^ mitten Qm SBec^fel ber ^tit ; 2lu(^ t)iele ant S^tk, 3u ben 3:oten entboten, 3Serborben, geftorben Qn 8uft ober 8eib, ^'c^ aCeine, bev eine, @d^an' mieber ^ernieber 3ur @aa(e ini Zah, ©od^ tranrig unb ftumnt ; (Sine ginbe inx SBinbe, !Cie tDiegt fii^ unb biegt fit^, 9iaufc^t f^aurig unb traurig, Qd) tod^ tDO^I toaxnm ! STRONG DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 55 LESSON XXI. Strong Declension of Adjectives. Nouns of Measure. (Suten IHorgcn, ^crr £el^rcr. (Suten Xa^, meinc Ktnbcr. Good morning, {Mr.) teacher. Good day, {my) children. 112. Strong Declension of Adjectives. — When not preceded by an article, or some other word with distinctive endings (§ 116), the adjective must indicate the number, gender, and case of the noun. This is called the Strong Declension of Adjectives, The adjective takes the following endings, akin to the defi- nite article, except that with strong nouns in the genitive singu- lar masculine and neuter, euphony requires :=en instead of -e^. Here the adjective does not need to be strong, as the noun ending indicates its number and case. Singiilar. Masc. Fern. Neut. N. gutcr ajlann* gutc %xm. gutc^ '^n^. G. gutctt Sfflannt^. gutcr %xavi. gtttcn S3uc^c^, D. gutcm ^Olattttc* jjitter fjrau* gutcm ^w^t. A. gutcn Wann. gutc JJrau* %Mit^ Sud^* Flural. N. gute Whnmx. gutc fjrauctt, gutc SiitS^cr* G. gutcr aJliittttcr* gutcr grauen, gutcr ^iic^cr* D. gutett 9Jlattttcrtt» guten grauen, gutcn ^iit^ern. A. gute SOflanncr* gutc graucn. gutc SBiid^cr* (a) In like manner decline junger @d)uler, tDarmer 2^ag, treige ^u^, fc^one S^od^ter, fd^mercg ^inb, l^ctgeS Staffer. (&) At the top of the next page are given the typical strong endings. Note their resemblance to those of the definite article. 56 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. Masc. Fern. Neut. Plu. er se =e§ «e eg (en) scr -eig (Ctt) «er em =er =em =ett en *e 't2 =e 113. Omission of Preposition after Nouns of Measure. — Nouns following expressions like a glass of, a piece of, etc., are given in German without a preposition. They are put in apposition, and so are in the same case (§ 109). A glass of milk, (^xn Q^ia^ Wliid). Apiece of bread. @itt ©tilrf 23rot A cup of white wine, ©ine ^affe ttieiger SScitt. With a glass of hot water. Wit cittcitt (^ia^ ^cigem Staffer. (a) Masculine and neuter nouns of measure after a numeral usually have the same form in both singular and plural. Fem- inines have the regular plural form. ^itv ^Xl% four feet. ©ieben $fttttb, seven pounds. 3tt»ei Xaffcn, two cups. 114. Vocabulary. ber ^af'fee, ^t^ ^affee§, coffee. ha^ ^funb, $ttiei ^funb, pound. ber Xtt, bei^ Xtt^, tea. hlan, blue. bte ^af fc, btc ^affcit, cup. jung, young. btc Wild)f ber SJiilti^, mi7A;. runb, roiind. bo§ Stiirf, bte Stii'rfe, piece. ttieig, i/?;iiYe. 115. Exercise. (a) 1. 3ic Sobcit, store. ticrfau'fctt, ticrfauftc, ticrfauft (^a= t>a§ Q^tlt>f btc Q^tVhtVf money. Bctt), «o sell. fau'fctt, fauftc, gcfauft (^aficn), to btc'fcr, «/iis. 6wy. jc'bcr, every. tUiUf small, little. jc'ncr, that. 119. Exercise. (a) 1. 3=ener junge .^nabe t)atte ba^ fd^one aJJcibc^en {ebett S^ag gefe^eti* 2. ©ie alte grau ^tte !ein ®e{b, urn in bem fleinen fiabett ein *^funb Saffee 5U faufett. 3. ©te fleine Zoii)^ ter be^ alten 8e^rer§ f^3riii)t biefe a[Bod)e fe^r gute^ ®eut[(^,, 4. 5J}Jetn 33ruber ^at btefe Heinen 93(umen tier!auft unb mit feinem ©elbe in einem 8aben ein ®Ia^ falte W:ili} ge!anft> 5. 3=eben S£ag ge^t Jener alte 2)Zann o^ne ®e(b in biefen fleinen 8aben. (b) „§at jener fleine (Schiller biefen langen ®a^ gefdirieben?" „9lein, biefe fteinen @(^ii(er [(^reiben feine @d^e," „3lber Jeber gnte ^nabe fc^reibt bie fteinen ©cifee/ SBarum fc^reiben Jene ®(f|iiler nic^t?'' „!Diefe jungen Sinber ^aben feine geber nnb feine 2:inte/' „®o? Qd) n)erbe geber nnb 2:inte fUr biefe gnten Snaben fanfen." (c) I haven't any money to buy a cup of coffee in that little store. 2. The poor man sold that little house this week. 3. In this little garden I looked every day for the red roses, but I did not find any flowers. 4. My brother went into 60 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. that little store of his friend, but he hadn't any money to buy that brown hat. 5. Did the little boy sell his roses in that large store and buy these little books with the money ? (d) "Haven't you any money? Why did you come into this little store ? " " I did not come in order to buy. I came to sell these brown shoes for that old lady." " What will she buy with the money ? " " This week she has asked me every day for the money (in order) to buy bread for her children." LESSON XXIII. Mixed Declension of Adjectives. gu jebem gan3en IDerf gel^ort etn gaTt3er XTTann. — WXdtxi* Every complete work requires a complete man. 120. Mixed Declension of Adjectives. — An adjective is de- clined as shown at the top of the next page, when it follows the article etn, the negative fein, no, none, or any possessive, like metn, bein, if)r, etc. These are all declined like ein, and are called ,,ein" words. Note that unfer is an „etn" word and not a ,,bcr" word. In the nominative singular masculine, and nominative and accusative singular neuter, these words have no ending. Therefore a following adjective must be strong in order to show number and case. In all other cases the adjective is weak. Hence the term Mixed Declension, because the adjec- tive is sometimes strong, sometimes weak. MIXED DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 61 Singular. Masc. Fern. N. mcttt armcr ^mt Plural. fcittc attbcrctt Stabtc fctitcr attbcrctt 'Bt'oHsit D. mcittctt armctt ^uttbctt fcittcit attbcrctt ©tabtctt t^rctt fkittctt ^tttbcrtt A. mcittc armctt ^uttbc fcittc attbcrctt ^itit^it i^rc flcittctt ^ittbcr (a) Decline eitt alter 9Jlann, 3^r grower ^nabc, unjere alte Mwiitx, fein neuc§ aReffer, metne meige 9lofe, euer aiit^ §au«» (See § 104, h.) {h) Below are given the mixed endings for ,,eitt" words and adjectives. Note that they are like the typical weak endings (§ 116, h) with „bcr" words, except in the singular of the nominative masculine and of the nominative and accusative neuter. Masc. Fern. Neut. Plural. (-) -er (-e) -c (-) -e^ (-0 -ctt (-c§) -ctt (-cr) -ctt (-c§) -ctt (-cr) -ctt (-cm) -ctt (-cr) -ctt (-cm) -ctt (-ctt) -ctt (-ett) -ctt (-e) -c (-) -e^ (-C) -ctt 121. Position of nie. — 9^te has the same position in the sentence as ntc^t (§ 23). / never saw those roses. ^^ f^aht jcttc O^iofctt ttic gcfc^ctt. He never came into the city. @r fam ttic itt bic ^tahU 122. bcr Sof'fcl, bic Siiffcl, spoon. bcr ^ct'tcr, jiic teller, plate. bic Q^a'Mf bic ©abcitt, fork. ha§ Si, bic (Sicr, egg. ha^ ^ittg, bic ^ittgc, thing. attbcr, other, different. Vocabulary. tritt'fctt, trattf, gctruttfctt (^aBctt), to drink. ttCtt. new. arm, poor. " '^^ > . rcitt, clean. ttic, never. 62 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 123. Exercise. (a) 1. ®etn artner Sruber \)at nte au6 eittem gro^en ®Iafe getrunfen; er trinft aM etner Heinen 3:a[fe» 2. Uttfere gro^en 2:eIIer unb bte anberen Singe auf bie[em 5li[(J)e finb nte rein. 3. 9Kein neuer 8offe( ift nic^t fo rein iDie (as) 3=^re alte ®abel; i(^ ^be bamit ©er gegeffen. 4. ^ein anbere^ !j)ing liegt stDift^en meiner nenen ®abel unb biefem reinen goffeL 5. J)er Soffel, bie ®abel unb ba^ 3Jie[fer liegen auf einem reinen teller. (&) ,,©itte, geben @ie mir eine anbere ®abel ! ®iefe J)inge finb ni^t rein." „§ier ift ein neuer gdffel unb eine reine ®abel. @ie tiegen auf einen reinen Speller. " „Q(ij ^be meinen iDarmen Saffee au^ einer neuen 3:^affe getrunfen.'' „Unb id) ^abe meine fatten (Sier unb biefe anberen Singe mit meinem alten DJJeffer unb meiner alten ®abel gegeffen.'' (c) 1. His poor mother never drinks her warm tea out of a little cup ; she drinks it (§ 93) out of a big glass. 2. Your new spoon is lying between your plate and those other things. 3. Every day I go into a large store, but I never buy new things. 4. No other man has seen my poor friend's letter. 5. What is that clean, white round thing beside my plate ? (d) " Here is my new fork ; it is clean ; I have never eaten eggs with it." " Where are your new spoon and my little fork ? " " Your little fork and my new spoon are lying on the table, but our other things are not here." " I will drink out of our old cup and eat an e^g with your new spoon." ADJECTIVES AFTER WELCH, SOLCH, ETC, 63 LESSON XXIV. Adjectives after mel^, fol<^, etc. filler guten Ptnge finb brei. — <©^rid^iuort All good things come in threes. 124. 9Kan(^, many a, folrf), swc/i a, and \otl6)^ which, may be declined like ,,ber'' words. A following adjective is then weak; Many an old hook, vxaw^t^ alte S3uc^* On such a warm day, an folt^cm ttiarmctt Xagc* Which young hoy? SSeld^er jungc ^tiabc ? (a) But usually these words are indeclinable and do not affect a following construction at all. The adjective may be strong or mixed. When indeclinable, XotiH) is exclamatory and means what. Many an old hook, tttattr^ a\it^ SBttd^* ntan^ cin a\it2 ^u^. On such a warm day, an ^old} marmcm Xa^c. an fo(^ etttcm warmen Xa^t* What a young hoy ! $Be(d^ iunrjcr Una^t ! 235c(rf) citt jitttgcr ^naBc ! TTi'^/i to/ia^ a young hoy ! '^xi )^t\6) jmtgcm ^naBctt ! "MM ttjclti^ cittcm juttgett ^ttaBcit ! (6) 9lt(, all, is usually declined as a „ber" word when fol- lowed directly by an adjective. When followed by a „ber" word or an „etn'' word, it is usually indeclinable. All good tea, affcr gwtc ^cc. Of all good things, attcr cjuteit ^ittgc. All the old hooks, aU bie dtctt ^urf|cr» Of all these blue flowers, aU btcfcr btoctt S3Ittmctt» With all ny little friends, mii all metueu thincn grcuttbctt* 64 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, 125. Adverbs. — The uninflected form of most adjectives is used also as an adverb. A single adverb has the same position as md)t (§ 23). ^ttbift gut (adj.). You are good. ^tt (critft ^ni (adv. ). You learn tvell. Sr ift citt pflic^ier Wann (adj.). He is a polite man. (£r \pxadi fc^r pflid^ (adv. ). He spoke very politely. 126. Vocabulary. bet S5o'bett^ bic SSobctt, floor. ^o^kn, f^otttf ge^iolt (f^aUn), to ber Xtp'pid^f bic Xcppi^t, carpet. fetch, go and get. ^h 2am' pt, ^k Sam^cit, lamp. Iftati^gctt, ^tng, gc^angcn {^a^tn), bte SBattb, btc SBanbc, wall (of a cr ^rittgt^ to hang (intrans.). room). f^b^'lxdlf polite. H^ S3i(b, hk ^ilbcr, picture. flci'^ig, industrious; ffcigig (etttett, ha§ 3iJ«'ittcr, bic giwmcr, room. to study hard. 127. Exercise. (a) 1. ajJan^ after Je^pt^ Itegt auf bem ^oben. 2. 3=d^ l^abe all metne :93itd^er unb eine gro^e 8ampe au^ metnem 3^* mtx ge^olt; ic^ n)erbe flei^ig lernen. 3. 31H biefe iungen ©driller ^aben ffet^ig gelernt ; fie f^reibett att i^re 2lufgaben fe^r gut. 4. ajjeiu junger greuub [prat^ fe^r ^ofttt^ ; er ^tte fold) etu f^5ne6 Stib nte gefe^en. 5. Seiu STeppti^ tag auf bem :©obeu be^ 3*^^^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ 'ff^^^^ Sampe iDar auf bem SEift^, uub an ber SBanb ^ing etn fd^one^ Silb. (b) „2Bet^ fc^5ue^ Silb ^angt an ber SBanb biefe^ atten ^tmmer^ !" „^(i) l^abe man^ f^one^ J)ing gefe^en, aber fold^ etn fi^one^ Sitb l^abe id) nte gefunben.'' „§aben ®te fold) eine alte ?ampe gefe^en?'' „5Rem, i^ ^abe flei^tg gefu^t, aber foI(^ eine 8ampe ^abe i^ REVIEW. 65 nie gefunben, Unb id^ fage btefe^ nid^t, um i)'6fiii) ju fpred^en. m tft mi)x.'' (c) (Write adjective modifiers in as many ways as possible.) 1. All these young girls are studying hard ; they write these long sentences very well. 2. What large pictures on (an) the wall ! I have never seen such beautiful things. 3. Many an old woman has never seen such a carpet on the floor. 4. We have seen many a beautiful flower, but we have never seen such red roses. 5. Which lamp did you fetch out of that big room ? (d) "What big words! We have never read such hard exercises." " You will study hard in order to write many a long sentence.'^ " But I have never seen such long words." " These long sentences are not hard. Get your paper and write." " I will study hard, and we shall write the exercise well." LESSON XXV. Review. Die 2(lten 3um Hat, bte Z^n^zn 3ur ^at — ©^rid^toort The old for counsel, the young /or action. 128. Summary of Adjective Declensions. (a) A predicate adjective is not inflected. (b) An attributive adjective is inflected. It is inflected weak when preceded by a „ber" word, mixed when preceded by an „txn" word, and strong when not preceded by either. But, 66 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. while an attributive adjective has these three kinds of declen- sion, it has only two kinds of ending : (1) weak and (2) strong. (1) Its endings are wealc when preceded by a „ber" word or an inflected form of an „ein'' word. The adjective, when weak, has only two endings, ^t and '(e)n. It takes -e in the nomina- tive and accusative singular of all genders except the accusative masculine ; =(e)n in all other cases. (2) The endings of an adjective are strong when not pre- ceded by a „ber'' word or an inflected form of an „ein" word. When strong it takes endings like the definite article. Note. The endings of an adjective in the Mixed Declension are the same as those in the Weak, except in cases where the „ein" word has no ending (is not inflected). Then the strong ending (wanting in „ein" words) is substituted for the weak ending in the adjective. (c) An adjective used as a noun is written with a capital to show its noun nature, and declined like ah adjective to show its adjective nature. ©in ^IvmcVf a poor man. ^er Swwgc, the young man. ^a§ &nitf the good. (d) To translate English one following an adjective, German uses simply the inflected adjective, agreeing in gender with the noun implied in one. Give me this book and that one. (^chtn 8ie tttir bicfC)3 S3ur^ ttiib jcttC)^* ThaVs not my hat; I bought a new one. ^a^ tft mcitt ^ttt tt^t; \6) ^obc ctnen ncucn gcfauft* Here is a pen ; havenH you any {one) ? ^xtx ift cine gcbcr; l^aBen Sic f cine ? 129. Review Questions. (a) 1. What is the peculiarity of the German expressions for a glass of a piece of a cup of etc. ? 2. What is the posi- REVIEW, 67 tion of a single adverb in the sentence ? 3. When does Ger- man use fetn? 4. How is definite time expressed in German ? (b) 1. Why must the adjective be strong when no article modifies a noun ? 2. Why may the adjective be weak in the genitive singular of masculine and neuter nouns ? 3. Is there any reason why it should be weak? 4. Give and illus- trate the peculiarities of matti^, [oI(^, iDcfc^, and att* (c) 1. Name the „ber" words and the „txn" words. 2. When is the adjective following them weak, and when strong? 3. What is meant by an inflected form? 4. How do adjec- tives used as nouns differ from other inflected adjectives ? # 130. Review Exercise. 1. Good boy, a good boy, the good boy, this good boy, such a good boy, what a good boy, which good boy, your good boy, many a good boy. 2. Put each of the above expressions into the genitive and accusative singular. 3. We go every day ; we go every warm day. 4. I have a glass of water, a piece of bread, a cup of coffee, and a pound of meat. 5. She will never write well. 6. The good die young, but the poor we have always (ttutner) with (bei) us. 7. I have never seen that little school, such a little one (school), your beautiful garden, this old dress, blue roses. 8. Every day this sum- mer we have had warm weather. 9. My young friend set a cup of tea on the table and laid a piece of bread beside it. 10. We have never sold such good meat to the poor. @^ lac^elt ber See ; er labet ^um Sabe. S)er Snabe [(f)Uef etn am griinen ®eftabe ; !3)ort ^()rt er ein Mngen, tDte gldten [o fltg, SBie ©timtnen ber gngef itn ^arabte^. — ©corner. 68 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. ^et erfte WHau !Der erfte 2:ag tm aWonat SKat Q\t mtr ber gludlicfifte tion alien. ®id^ fa^ i^ unb geftanb bir fret, !j)en erften STag tm 9J?ottat 3}?at, S)a^ bir meitt ^erj ergeben fet. SBentt tnettt ©eftcinbtii^ bir gefatleti, ©0 ift ber erfte Sag ittt 3)?ai gitr mi^ ber glitcflii^fte Don aCen. ®tt bettfft an mx6) fo fcUett !j)u benfft an mid) fo felten, Qfi) benf an hid) fo t)iel ; ©etrennt n)ie beibe SBelten 3:ft unfer beiber ^ieL S)od^ nti^^f i(^ beibe SBeften ©nrc^jie^n an beiner @anb, ©alb fd^Iummern unter ^elten, 4BaIb ge{)n t)on 8anb ju 8anb. Unb m5(^teft bn Dergelten ©nrd^ Siebe bie^ ©ebic^t, @o flie^t itm beibe SBelten gin rofenfarbne^ 8i^t. ~ Sluguft, Oraf t>on platen. PBESENT OF MODAL AUXILIARIES. 69 LESSON XXVI. Present of Modal Auxiliaries. 5ed?s Woxtet ncl^men mtd? in 2(nfprud? jeben Cag : 3d:? foil, id? mug, id? fann, id? n)ill, id? barf, xdi mag. — TOcfcrt. 131. The Modal Auxiliaries are followed by the present in- finitive. They correspond to the English modals as follows : — Pre jsent Infinitive. Past. Past Participle. biirfen, may, to be permitted, must not. burfte gcburft fottttett, cauj to be able to ; may (possibly), fonnte gefuttttt mogctt, may ; to like (to). tttO^tC gemoti^t tttiiffen, must :, to be obliged to. mu^te gemugt fotteit, shall, {ought), to be to. folltc gcfoUt tt^oUtUf will, to want to ; to be about to. ttioUte Present Indicative of Modals. gettioUt id^ barf faun mag mii^ foK ttiitt bu barfft fannft magft mn^t foKft ttiiUft cr barf fautt mag mui foil iDill ttiir biirfctt fiittttCtt miigctt miiffcn foKcit mottctt iftr biirft fiittttt mogt mufet foUt mUi fie biirfctt fiittttcit miigcn miiffcn foKctt mottctt 132. Use of Auxiliaries. — (a) The English will is translated in two ways in German : to indicate simple futurity, tuerben is used ; to indicate desire, use tnolten. Eeread § 55. He will go. ($r ttJtrb gc^cn. He wants to go. @r mill gc^ett. SBcrbctt f bte 5(bcttbe, evening, l^o'rcn, pttc, gc^iirt (^abctt), «o bcr SHur'gcn, hit ^orgcit, morning, hear. bet ^ad)'mtttaqf bte ^ati^mittage, tu'fett, tief, getufett (^aben), to afternoon. call (in the sense of caZZ out, call hiti'htn, hixthf geblieben (fetn), to to, not msi« or call upon), stay, remain. je^t, now. (a) With geftcrn, l^eute, and morgen, nouns are written without a capi- tal: yesterday moriiing, geftcrn tnorgen; this afternoon, ^eutc nad^tnittag; to-morrow evening, tnorgen Oi\itn\i, Do not confuse ntorgen and ber SJiorgen, and note the use of ^ente for this when this means to-day. 139. Exercise. (a) 1. ©eftern abenb fonnten iDtr ni(f)t fomtnen, aber tnorgen tDcrben xovc ben ganjett 9lbenb bleiben bitrfen. 2. 9Korgen nai^mittag njerbe tc^ einen neuen ©alt faufen miiffen, nm fpielen ju fonnen, 3. ©te l^rfen ^ier nidfjt bleiben; \mx n^erben @ie rufen mitffen, 4. 3=(^ fonnte ba^ 8ieb ntcf)t pren; irolften ®te e^ ^dren? 5. ^^a^ id) iroHte e^, aber id) burfte nid^t, 6. ©eftern abenb iDoHten iDir fpielen; ^eute morgen mu^ten luir l^ier bleiben; aber morgen nad)mittag iDerben n)ir f))ielen biirfen- (Z>) „SBoHten (Sie geftern na(^tnittag ni^t ©all f|)ie(en?" ,,3=(^ ti^oHte f^jielen, aber ic^ fonnte ni^t" „aBa^ mnfeten @ie tun?'' „^6) burfte nid^t fpielen; id) mu^te fiir meinen SSater in bie ©tabt ge^en," „9lber je^t n)erben ®ie fpielen fonnen, ni^t itja^r?" (c) 1. Shall you want to go into the city to-morrow after- noon ? 2. No, I wanted to (e^) yesterday, but to-morrow I shall have to stay here the whole afternoon. 3. Yesterday morning we were permitted to play in the garden, but to-day 74 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, we shall have to stay in the house. 4. He was to translate the next sentence, but he couldn't. 5. Shall I give you your new book and this old one now or this afternoon ? 6. The boys were permitted to play in the house, and we did not want to call them. (d) "Shall you want to play ball to-morrow, or shall you have to stay here ? " "Yesterday afternoon I wanted to play, but I could not; to-morrow afternoon I shall be permitted to play." " Yesterday morning I wanted to go to the field, but I was not permitted." " Why ? Were the big boys playing there the whole morn- ing?" " Yes, I could hear them, but I couldn't go on the field to see." (§ 86.) " To-morrow we shall have to play we^l, in order to be able to win (geiDtnnen)/' LESSON XXVIII. Perfect Tenses of Modals. (£s l^at nid?t foUcu fctn. — ©c^effcl. 140. The Perfect Tenses of Modals are conjugated with ^aben« ' Present Perfect. i^ f^ahtf btt f^a% etc., gefomtt, gcmitgt, etc., I have been able, etc. Past Perfect. ^ f^atttf btt ^attcft, etc., gcfonnt, gcmu^t, etc., I had been able, etc. PERFECT TENSES OF MODALS. 75 Future Perfect. The Future Perfect of the modals is regular, but rarely used. (a) These regular past participles of the modal are used when there is no dependent infinitive. (§ 137, a.) I couldn't, ^d^ ^abt c§ nid^t ^donnt He didn't want to. ©r i)at C^ Xti^t gcttiottt 141. "Two Infinitives." — The modals and nine other verbs (^nl]kn, feel ; f)ti^tn,Md; ijti^cn.help; ijoxtn, hear; la\\ tu, let or have done; lefjren^ teach; (emen, learn; mac^en, make; and fallen, see) have two past participles, one of which has the same form as the infinitive. This latter form is used in compound tenses governing a dependent infinitive. The de- pendent infinitive precedes the past participle (with infinitive form) of the modal. • Present Perfect. \6) l^tlBc f^iclen bitrfcn, / have been or was permitted to play. btt ^laft ft^retl6cn fijniicit, thou hast been or wast able to write. cr f^at fdjrctBctt (crticn, he {has) learned to write. ttiir ^ahtn fommcn miiffcit, loe (have) had to come. i^r f^ahi arbcitett ^elfctt, you (have) helped work. fie ^abctt gc^Ctt tooUtrtf they (have) wanted to go. Past Perfect. ^ f^aiit f^iclcn bitrfcn, etc., I had been allowed to play, etc. (a) Conjugate each of the above combinations in full throughout the perfect and past perfect. (b) Remember that German often uses the perfect where English em- ploys the past. (See § 61.) @r \)at nici)t fpielctt ttJoUcn. He didn't want to play. ^6) i)ahe bleiben miiffen» / was obliged to (had to) stay. 76 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, 142. Vocabulary. at'htxitnf arBcitetc, gcarBettet fcr'ttg, ready; through (in the (^aficu), to icork. sense of finished). ttirtr'tctt, ttJartcte, gctuartct (^aBcit), f|jat, adv., late (used as a predicate ^0 loaiY ; /or, auf with ace. adjective only with Cj^; t^ ift batttt, ^/leTi (in the sense, of after fjjftt, e^ ttirb f^ot. But, He is that, next). late, tx fomtttt f^Jftt)* laut, Zowd ju ^aufc, a« /iome. 143. Exercise. (a) 1. ©eftern morgen )^ahtyi voxx tnarten tt)oHen, aber voxx ^aben arbelten miiffen. 2. !j)ann ^aben bie Snaben 511 §aufe fptelen biirfen, aber [ie I)aben ba ni(^t fo (aut fptelen fdnnen. 3. (gr ift fo fpcit na6) §aufe gefommen; mir iDaren fertig, mir ^aben nt(^t njarten tDoIIen. 4. S)ann \)Cii bie alte grau taut f^rei^en tt)oI(ett, aber fie ^at e^ m&ji gefonnt. 5. !j)a^ Heine 9)Jdb(^en ^atte ba fi^en unb auf ben Setter marten tDoKen. 6. 3=e^t bin id) fertig unb e^ ift nic^t ju f))dt, um Salt fpielen ju f dnnen. (6) „SBarunt ^aben ®ie geftern abenb fo f^cit arbeiten miiffen?" „^6) ^be ntit nteiner 9lufgabe nid^t fertig tDerben fi5nnen.'' „^i) ^be ju §aufe nx6)i iDarten Gotten, aber id^ ^be e^ gemu^t.'' „®o? ©ie ^ben ba ni(f)t fpielen biirfen?'' ,,9lein, id) ^abe ju §aufe bleiben miiffen, um fertig n)erben ju fdnnen.'' (c) (Use perfect tense when possible ; see § 61.) 1. Yester- day afternoon I was not able to come ; I had to work too late. 2. He did not want to wait at home, but he was not permitted to go into the city. 3. Then he waited there and worked, SPECIAL USES OF MODALS. 77 but he couldn't get ready. 4. Please do not speak so loud ; the boys in the next room have to work. 5. Why have you had to work so late ? Couldn't you wait ? 6. I didn't want •to stay there and work, but I was not permitted to go. (d) " Did you have to stay at home and work yesterday afternoon ? " " Yes, I couldn't wait ; it was getting late and I had to get ready." ^ Did you want to go to (ju) the game ? " " I wasn't permitted to go. I wanted to, but I couldn't. To-morrow I shall be able to go." " Good ! Then we'll wait till to-morrow.'^ LESSON XXIX. Special Uses of Modals. Saffett* £ag bas I 3d:? mag es ntd?i 144. Special Uses of Modals and laffett* — ©iirfett, fbntien, tDoHetl and tniiffen, are used regularly in the meanings already given ; tni^gett and f offen have also special uses. (a) SJfogen is usually translated by English like, especially when accompanied by the adverb gertt, gladly. 3*^ maj; gem ftttgcn or i^ ftngc gctn* / like to sing. SOIogCtt Sic btcfe S3(ttmett ? Do you like these flowers f (1) English may is usually rendered by bitrfetl to denote permission ; by f otlTten to denote possibility. You may speak, ^tt barf ft f^rct^en* That may he. "^a^ fautt fein* 78 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (b) ©oHetl i^ often used, especially in the present, to report hearsay. It is translated is said to. &x futt fc^r arm fcitt* He is said to be very poor. Sic foil fc^r ^nt ftngctt. She is said to sing very well. (1) An especially common German idiom is the question, SBa^ foH (bentt) ba^? What is the meaning of that ? What do you mean by that f (2) The past subjunctive of folfen (foCte) is like the past indicative. It regularly means 02ight to, ^U fottteft lernen* You ought to study. @r folltc axhtitciu He ought to work. (c) Besides its regular meaning, tDOlten is often used in the sense of to be about to or to be determined to. ®r tuoKtc ge^Ctt* He was about to go. Stf) toiU gcprt ttJCtbcn* I insist upon being heard. (d) 8af[en in its causative meaning, to have (done), to cause to (be done), is used like the modals. It always takes the active infinitive but sometimes with passive sense. @r Vd^t ciliett Mod madden. He is having a coat made. 293ir i}ahtn ncitc ^iitc f aufen (affcu* Tf e have had new hats bought. 293ittft bu mcttt ^nd^ ^otctt (affcn ? Will you have my book brought f 145. Vocabulary. baig ^JPlaf, bte SOlalc, time (a single frii^, early; moroen frii^, to-mor- point of time). roio morning (to avoid ntotgett bic ^nif bic ^txitUf time (in gen- morgctt). eral ; an extent of time). ' gcrit, adv., gladly; usually trans- bic ©httt'bc, bic ©tuttben, hour; IditQ^liketo. lesson. natiix'lid^f adv., of course. • taf'feu, lxt% gclaffctt (l^abcn)^ cr mttt, exclamation, well (rarely, Iri^t, to let; to have or cause to now). be {done). , t)it\izxd)i'f perhaps. SPECIAL USES OF MODALS, 79 146. Exercise. (a) 1. (5r foil fe^r arm fein; er foCte em anbere^ 3Kat arbei^ ten. 2. ^fatitrtirf); ba^ !ann fein; aber t)teltet(f)t mag er titcf)t arbetten. 3. 9^un, morgen frii^ tDerbe ic^ t)iellet(^t ^eit ^aben, em neue^ ^leib ma^en ju Iaffen» 4. 3^(^ mag meine beutfd^en ©tunbeti fe^r gem, aber td^ ^abe feme ^dt, all bie @a^e gu libera fe^en. 5. 3)a^ nacf)fte 9}lal fodten @te mi^ ni(f)t [o fritf) rufen; mir ^ben Dtel ^eit, eine ganje ©tunbe, 6. 9^un, H)a^ foH (benn) ba^? §aben @ie mem neue^ ^letb nic^t maiden raffen? (&) ,aBa^ [oil U^? aSarum ^aben ®ie mt^ rufen laffen?" „?Jun, t(^ ^be ein neue^ Sleib mat^en laffen tDoffen, SSiellei^t mogen ®ie e^ gem fe^en.'' „5yjaturUd^, aber ein anbere^ 3KaI; fe^t l^abe i(^ feine ^t\i. ^^ ^abe eine beut[(^e ©tunbe bei meinem Ce^rer.'' „33iettei({)t fommen @ie morgen frii^ T n^(^f gem/' (c) 1. Of course I have time to have a new dress made ; Til do it gladly. 2. Perhaps you ought not to have a new one made. 3. He is said to sing very well ; perhaps he has lessons. 4. Of course I'll be glad to call you the next time, perhaps to-morrow morning. 5. Well, it is summer now; is it too early to have a new hat made? 6. I ought to write these sentences, but I have no time. (d) "Well, the next time in the German lesson I shall have my exercise written by (t)on) my brother.'^ " Perhaps, but you ought not to do that. Don't you like to write these sentences ? " " Yes, of course. I like German, but I have no time to . study it." • 80 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. "Well, I work early and late and I like these German lessons. You ought to." " Well, perhaps I'll do it. My father is calling me ; I must go.'' LESSON XXX. Review. VO\\\\i bu tmmer metter fd?ipctfen ? S\z\i, bas (Sute Itegt fo nal|, £erne nur bas (Sliicf ergretfen, Dtnn has (Sliicf ift immer ha. — @oet^e. 147. Review Questions. (a) 1. Give the German modals. 2. What two ways may English will be translated ? 3. Give the ways of translat- ing English may. 4. What does mdgen usually mean ? (5) 1. Which modal means must (riot) in withholding per- mission ? 2. What peculiarity have the modals when gov- erning a dependent infinitive? 3. What is the difference in the use of the past participles of modals ? (c) 1. What tense does German sometimes prefer when English uses the past ? 2. Give two meanings for f oltetl ; two for laffen ; two for !5nnen. 3. Explain the use of e^ and 3U with modals. 148. Review Exercise. (a) 1. @aben ®te m^ rufen taffen? 2Ba^ folt ba«? 2. ©a^ ncid^fte yjlal follten ®te laut fpred^en, mir ijahtn @ie ni(f)t ^oren !onnen. 3. ®a^ tann fein, aber i^ mag biefc tangen Slufgaben nid^t. 4. SBarum (affen @te* fie nid^t t)on REVIEW. 81 etnem anberen @^u(er f^reiben? 5. !Diefe^ aJZat ^atte id) feitte ^tit, aber ba^ nd(i)fte 3)tol merbe id) ttielleii^t eine ganje ©tunbe ^aben* 6. 5yJaturUc^ mdgen tt)tr unfere beutfcf)en @tun^ ben ; bte Slufgaben foUen ntc^t fc^ii^er feiti. 7. ©eftern abenb fatten wiv feine ^dt ; ijtutt morgen mitffen iptr arbeiten; morgen frit^ n)erben wix fptetett biirfen, 8. ©ie Xoi)ttx be^ ge^rer^ ^at ^eute morgen ein nene^ fileib ntarf)en (a[fen iDoIIen. 9. ®er Snabe [o(t fef)r arm fein ; natiirli^ foltte er arbeiten. 10. 3)iogen @ie biefe fc^ijnen SInnten nidjt ? (b) 1. Of course I shall have to have it made. 2. Well, perhaps you ought to. 3. He had w^anted to read the whole next page, but he was not permitted to translate it. 4. -We ought to have a whole year to be able to speak German well ; shall we be able to ? 5. Yesterday afternoon I wanted to play, but I had to work the whole afternoon. 6. Yesterday evening we had to be ready, but it was too late to be able to play, and we didn't want to work. 7. What do you mean by that ? You mustn't play here in the house. 8. May we play in the garden, or must we stay at home the whole day ? 9. I like German, but I have to have my exercises written by (t)on) my brother. 10. He is said to be very poor. (c) A Story ((gine ©efc^ic^te). The children had wanted to play in the house, but they had not been permitted. But they had been able to go into the garden to play there. They had wanted to have their German sentences written by (Don) a friend, but they had had to write them themselves (felbft). The whole afternoon they had been permitted to play in the garden. Then their mother called them. (cZ) Write the above story, substituting perfect for past perfect tenses. 82 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. ^cin QJtttetlattb* 3:reue 8iebe bi^ jum ®rabe @(^tt)5r' ic^ bit mit ^erg unb §anb ; 2Ba^ ic^ bin, unb nja^ t(^ ^be, ®anf t(^ bir, metn 33aterlanb. ^xii)t in SBorten nur unb 8tebern Q\t metn §erj jum 3)an! berett : 3Ktt ber 3:at tt^ill i^'^ ertDibern ©tr in 9?ot, in Sani^Df unb (Streit. -3n ber greube iDie im 8eibe 3{uf' i(^'^ greunb unb geinben gu : gtoig finb ttereint tt)ir beibe, Unb mein Zxo% mein ©litcf bift bu- Slreue 8iebe bi^ jum ®rabe @(^tt)5r' id^ bir mit ^erj unb §anb ; 2Ba^ irf) bin, unb ira^ xi) ^abe, S)anf i(^ bir, mein 33aterlanb ! — Hoffmann t)on 5attcr«le6cn. POSSESSIVE AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS. 83 LESSON XXXI. Possessive and Intensive Pronouns. (El^ret bte ^raucn, fie fled^ten unJ) mzhen fjtmmltfd?e Hofen ins irbifd?e 'icbcn, — (St^iaer, Eeview Sections 92, 93, 94, 98, 103, 104, and 105. 149. The Possessive Pronoun stands for a noun. It is some- times called the independent possessive, because it is used inde- pendently, without its noun. Below are given the neuter forms of the possessive pronouns and the corresponding pos- sessive adjectives. See § 103. Possessive Adjectives. Possessive Pronouns. mcinc!^ ba§ mcttt(i9)c bcine)^ ha^ tiettt(ig)c fcittC)^ t>a§ fcitt(tg)c t^rc!^ H^ t5r(tg)c tmf{e)rc)3 ha^ ttttfr(t0)c a^rc)^ ba^ 3^r(t9)e curc^ ha§ cur(ig)c i^rc!^ t>a§ i^r(tg)e (a) When the German possessive pronoun is preceded by the definite article, it is declined like a weak adjective. The article agrees with the noun which the pronoun represents. SJJcitt S3uti^ ift aiif H§ betttc (bctnigc) ift ttcit* My book is old, yours is new. SJlcittC S3u(^er ftitb oR, bic bciucn (bcittigcn) flnb ncu* My books are old, yours are new. (b) If the article is not used, the possessive takes the end- ings of a strong adjective agreeing with the noun understood. The forms in ?tg cannot be used without the article. my mem mine thy beitt thine his fettt his her ilir hers our unfer ours your CttCr yours their xiix theirs 84 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. ayJeitt SBttc^ ift alt, ^^vt§ (ba§ ^^rc, ba^ S^ttgc) ift ttcu* My book is old, yours is new. ®citt SBrubcr ift ber Scorer, ntcincr (bcr ntcinc, bcr meittigc) ift ber Sti^iitet* His brother is the teacher, mine is the pupil. 3^ ^ie mcitt S3u^ ^ier, after ^o^aitn i)ai feinc^ (ba;^ feinc, ba;^ fcinigc) tiedorctt* / have my book here, but John has lost his. ^icr ift 3^t^ $wt, lifter ntcincn (bctt mcinciv ben nteittigen) l^abe iti^ nit^t gefunben* Here is your hat, but mine I have not found. Note. — The same rule applies also to ein and fein, except that they do not take the suffix =ig, and fein cannot be preceded by the article. Reiner Don i^ncn flcl^t e^. No one {none) of them sees it. 2)er cine ift nic()t ^ier. One {of them) is not here. @incr ntng l^ciratcn. One {of them) must marry. 150. The Intensive Pronoun, felbft or felber, myself, yourself y himself, herself itself ourselves, yourselves, themselves, is inde- clinable. It is used for all persons, genders, numbers, and cases. (Sie ift felBer gefommen* She came herself SBir ^aften c§ felftft gefe^en* We saw it ourselves. ^(tf ^aht t^ felfter (f elftft) getan* / did it myself. (a) When felbft precedes its noun, it means even. t, tired. love. xtidiff rich. im'mer, always. genug', enough. POSSESSIVE AND INTENSIVE PBONOUNS. 85 152. Exercise. (a) 1. Qd) liebe meinen alten SSater, aber er ift imtner tniibe ober franf, 2. §ter ift mein neuer 9?o(f ; mein -©ruber ^at ben [eintgen [elbft gemac^t. 3. ©etbft feine Zoijttv Itebt ben aften Ttann nit^t immer. 4. 2)?ein $Ro(f Itegt au[ bent SSttt ; aber meine greunbe t)aben bie i^rigen t)erIoren, o. ©er eine ^at fetnen ^ter gefud^t, ber anbere ben fetnigen ba, aber feiner Ijat bie Slnjiige gefunben. 6. 9lber fie finb reid) genng, unt neue laufen ju fonnen* (&) „§ier ift mein neuer 2lnjug ; tDO ^aben @ie ben 3^^rigen nta^en laff en ?" „Qii} f)abe meinen felbft gemai^t, aber mein ©ruber l^at ben feinen mac^en laff en.'' „§aben @ie ein 9}?effer? S^ ^abe meinen t)ertoren, unb i(^ bin niijt xdd) genug, um ein neue^ ju faufen/' „®ie bitrfen meinen l^aben ; id) I)abe jtDei." (c) 1. This is my old coat ; I am not rich enough to buy a new one. 2. Where is yours ? Have you lost it (§ 93) ? 3. Your brother is always sick or tired; mine can play the whole day. 4. My father has had a new suit made ; I had to make mine myself. 5. All the pupils lost their books and none of them has found his. 6. That boy was very tired, but he wasn't sick enough to stay at home. (d) "Is that your new suit? I like if " Yes, and I like yours. Did you buy it yourself ? '' " No, my father bought it for me. I am not rich enough to buy such a suit." "That boy has lost his coat. Won't you give him yours ? '' "No, he can look for his ; perhaps he will find it." " Yes, he is always losing everything (alle^)." 86, ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON XXXII. Interrogative Pronouns. IPentge iPtffcn, iptectel man toiffen mug, um 5U ipiffen, wk mentg man wei%. — (S^ric^hjort. 153. The Interrogative Pronouns are lt)er, wJio; iDa^, wJiat; todi)^ which, what; and Xoa^ fur (ein), what kind of (a), what. SBer and tt)a^ can never be used as adjectives. (a) Declension of 3Ber. Masc. and Fein. N. ttJcr, lo/io. G. ttieffen, whose, of whom. D, ttjcm, ^0 whom. A. tuen, whom. As in English, the plural is the same. (b) SBet^er, which? what? has the strong endings of a „ber" word : — Neut. toa^, what. tticffen, of what. t»a^, lohat. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fem. Neut. For all genders. totl^tx tii>t\6)t totX^t^ ttield^e m\^t^ m\6)tx ttjc(ei|c§ tticlr^cr ttied^em melci^er mel^em txstX^tn ttclrfiett ttielc^e ttjelc^C)^ ttielc^e (c) In n)a^ fiir etU, the ein is of course omitted in the plural. 2Ba!§ fiir cin alter ^vA ift 'tsa^ ? What kind of an old hat is that f S95a§ fiir etnen 9fJorf faufen 8tc ? What sort of a coat are you buying? 993ai^ fiir S3ii(i^cr X)ai cr ? TT^a^ sort of hooks has he? 154. Combination of Interrogative and Preposition. — When referring to an inanimate object, U)o(r)' is used with preposi- INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 81 tions, instead of iDa^: iDOtion, of what; tt)omit, with what; mxiu, in what; etc. (See § 98.) Compare whereof, loherewith, wherein, etc. 155. Use of ba§, bie^ and e^ with feitl, — In speaking of they, these or those, with to be, German generally uses the neuter singular where English has the plural. What kind of books are those ? SSa;^ fiitr Sitc^cr ftnb ba§ ? Which children are those? a93c(c^c ^ittbcr fittb "^^^ ? Those are our trees. ^a§ ftnb Uttfcrc S3aitmc, These are hard exercises. ^k§ fittb f(i^tticrc 5tttfgabCtt» What boys are those ? Are they our friends 9 S93c(ti^e ^ttaBCtt fittb ba§ ? (Sittb c^ ttttfcrc JJrcttttbc ? 156. Vocabulary. bcr Sattttt, bte ^fitttttc, tree. H^ ^ett, tsa^ ^ctt(e))g, hay. ber ^ttfr^, Vxt 23iifc^c, bush. gc^b'rctt, gc^ortc, geprt (^abett), bic gattti'Uc, bic g'atttilictt (four to belong to, with dative, syllables), /amiZy. ttiiffctt, ttitt^te, gcltttt^t (^abett), '^a^ ^aar, 'isxt ^aate, pair; tin id) meit^ btt ttici^t, cr ttici^, «o ^jaar, a few, a couple of used as know, have knowledge of ' an adjective, not affecting the fctt'ttCtt, fattttte, gcfattttt (l^obett), following case. to know, be acquainted with. 157. Exercise. (a) 1. 3Ba^ fitr etn ©aum ift ba^, unb tDcm ge^ort er? ©iff en @ie? 2. ©a^ ift fein 33aum ; ba^ ift ein «uf(f), unb er ge^ort mtr. 3. Unter bem 53aum fanben tt)ir ein paar ©amen, fie fa^en auf bem §eu. 4. 3Bot?on l^aben @ie gefpro(^en? ^i) niei^ nid^t, tt^a^ ®ie fagten. 5. 3Kit h)el(f)en greunben finb @ie gefommen? Q6) fenne fie alle nirf)t. 6. SBeld^e ©amen finb ba^, unb ma^ fUr einer gamiUe ge()b'ren fie? 88 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (b) „SBa^ fitr Su^er ftnb ba^, unb it)em ge^bren fie?" „ J)ie^ finb bie tneinigen; fie ge^oren jener ©ame nirf)t/' „^ennen ®te ben atteti §errn? 3^c^ tod^ ntd^t, trier er ift" ,,aB^f(^en §errn? 9?ein, ic^ fenne i^n nic^t.'' „3lber fie fennen bie J)amen feiner gamilie, ni(^t?'' (o) 1. What kind of trees are those, or are they (§ 155) bushes ? 2. I don't know ; I don't know them ; they be- long to our teacher. 3. Which family does that lady belong to ? 4. I don't know, but I know a couple of ladies of (t)on) another family. 5. What kind of bushes are those there beside the hay ? 6. I don't know, but they belong to that old man. You ought to ask him. (d) " What ladies are those ? Do you know ? " " Who are they ? I don't know them." " What are you talking about (§ 154) ? They belong to the family of your friend, don't they ? " " Yes, but I don't know them. They (§ 155) are a couple of beautiful women." " I know it. You ought to know them." LESSON XXXIII. Demonstrative and Indeclinable Indefinite Pronouns. 2lus ntd?ts mirb ntd^ts, bas mer!e wolil, VOenn aus btr tiwas mcrben foil. — ©laubiu^. 158. The Demonstrative Pronouns are biefer, this; {ener, that; ber^ berjentge, that, the one (who); berfelbe, the same; folc^er, such (a). (a) The demonstrative ber is declined as follows : — DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 89 Singular. Plural. Masc. Fern. Neut. For all genders. N. ber Me bai^ bie G. bcffCtt bcrctt bcffctt berer D. bcm ber bent beneit A. bCtt bte ha§ t>it Note. It is like the definite article except throughout the genitive and in the dative plural. To distinguish it from the article, it is often written with spaces between the letters : b e r, bie, ba^. This is the German way of emphasizing or italicizing. (h) For the declension of btefer and Jetter see Lesson XXII. (c) ©erjenige and berfelbe are composed of the article ber and the weak adjectives {etlige and felbe, each of which has its regular declension : berietttge, be^Jentgett, bem}enigen, etc. (d) ©erjenige may be used instead of ber when the demon- strative is modified by a phrase or clause. But in conversation bet is preferred. The one on the table, bO!§(jettige) auf bem ^if^e* Those that I saw, bie (jettigeit), t>k i^ fa^, 159. The Indefinites. — The following indefinites are inde- clinable : — (a) @ttt)a^, somethmg, somewhatj some, any. See (e) below. An adjective following is strong and, except atlber, always begins with a capital. (£tnja§ @ttte§, something good. ^itoa^ ^e(b, some {any) money. (&iti>a^ attber(e)!§, something else. (h) ^'fgenb, which is used with some other word to give it a more general meaning. Srgeitb ttma^^ anything at all. 3»^9Cttb iemanb, irgenb eiuer, some one, any one. 90 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, (c) 9Kan, one, they, people. It is used only in the nominative, and is often best rendered by the passive voice. 93'latt fagt* They or people say, it is said. 9Jlatt hxttti. It is requested. Note. (Stneg, eitient, einen are used for the geii., dat., and ace. of man; ftci) is its reflexive, and fein its possessive. (d) aWe^r, more, Wltf^V ^ttbf more money. . Wlcf)v ^nabtrtf more boys. (e) 5yfi(^t^, nothing, not anything. 9ti(^t^ is always used in- stead of a negative and ettt)a^. A following adjective is strong and, except attber, always begins with a capital. ^\6)i^ Sc^OttC)^, nothing beautiful. ^\^i§ anbcr(c)^, nothing else. ^X \(i\j m^i^. He did not see anything, (/) SBentger, less, fewer. SBemger @clb, less money. SKcmger ^inbcr, fewer children. (g) The following generally have no inflection, except an ?^ in the genitive: {ebermattn, every one, everybody; Jemattb, some one, somebody ; TtietuaTlb, no one, nobody, not anybody. After iemanb and ntetnanb adjectives are used as after ettDa^ and nid)t^. Semanb fjrcmbe^, some one strange. 9'Jicmattb attbcr(c)!g, no one else, 160. Vocabulary. glau'ben, gtaubte, gegtaubt (^a= when it is a person. (So is not Bctt), to think, to believe, with used with glaubett: / think so, the accusative when that believed ^a^ glaube idi, or simply, i^ is a thing, and with the dative glaube* DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 91 ^al^d^f false ; wrong. attber^ other^ in the sense of dif- (c^t, last. ferent : noc^ S3riJt, more bread; noc^, yet ; uor^ nid^t, ?2o« 2/e« ; with nr>^ cine Xaffc^ one more cup, nouns, more, or other in the sense another cup ; nis^ citt (Stiirf, owe of more, as distinguished from more piece, another piece. 161. Exercise. (a) 1. ©a^ ift nt(J)t btefelbe Staffe; fie ^at meniger Saffee* 2. ^a, ba^ gtaube \6) ; geben ©ie mtr nod) eine S^affe ; bie te^te lt)ar 5U !alt. 3. ^ij fe^e nti^t^ galfd)e^ in bie[er Slufgabe, aber \6) glaube bem fletnett @d^u(er ni(f)t. 4. 2)?an ^t bie blauen ^(umeu in nnferem ©arten gefunben; glauben ©ie e^ nic^t? 5. ®er le^te ®a^ ift ni(^t berfefbe; id) fe^e etlDa^ ga(fd)e^ barin. 6. ©lauben ®ie mir, mir finb mit ber le^ten ©tunbe no(^ nii^t fertig. (&) „9Biff irgenb femanb anber^ noc^ ein ©titd :93rot l^aben?" „3a, i(^ gtanbe, aber biefe^ foH mein le^te^ ©tiid fein- ^i) fann nid^t^ me^r effen/' „^6) effe no(^ ettm^ affiarme^. ©iefe^ ift ni(^t ba^fefbe." „!Da^ glaube id), aber ^^a^ auf bem 3:ifd)e mag ic^ nid)t»" „®ann follten ©ie ettt)a^ ^atte^ effen,'' (c) 1. Haven't you translated that last sentence yet? 2. Yes, but I think I translated it wrong. 3. I don't be- lieve you ; I don't find anything wrong in that sentence. 4. These sentences are not the same ; this one has fewer words ; that one has more. 5. Do you find anything wrong in this exercise ? 6. That is false ; nobody else believes it. (d) "That last sentence is not wrong. Did you write it yourself ? " " Yes, I wrote all these sentences. To-morrow I shall have to write another exercise.'' 92 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, "But you have not yet written this one. Someone else will have to write the next one." "I think so. To-morrow I shall write fewer sentences, and then I shall have more time." " Then you will not write anything wrong." LESSON XXXIV. Inflected Indefinite Pronouns. Was bu ntd?t iptllft, bag man bir tu', Das fiig' aud? fetnem anbern 3U. — 0^nc^h)ort. 162. Inflected Indefinites. — The following indefinites usually take the regular inflection of adjectives : — (a) 31II is usually uninflected before ber (demonstrative or article) or a possessive pronoun. See § 124, b. 5(11 bcr ^cc, all the tea-. 9Wtt all fcinett ^iitbcnt, with all his children. (1) 2III is never inflected weak. All that, H2 alM. (2) When all is used for whole or entire, the German uses ganj. All day, bcn gatt^en Xa^. All the year, ^a§ gansc ^a\)V. (3) The neuter afle^, used alone, means everything, all (b) 2lnber, other, different. Another (for one more) is no^ eitt- See § 160. Some other day, tin anbcrer Xag. One day more, noc^ citt Xa^* INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 93 (c) S3etbe, bothy two, is preceded by the article, which follows in English. Both the girls, btc ^etbett Wlahti^^tt. The two friends, hit Bcibcn fjreuttbe* (d) (Stnige . . . , some; me^rere . . ♦ , several Some pens, cittigc ^thtvn. Several boys, mefjrcrc ^naben* (e) 3SieI, much, many, and iDenig, /lY^^e, few, are usually un- inflected in the singular ; in the plural they are inflected like other adjectives. A following adjective without its noun is capitalized and takes strong neuter endings. See § 159, a and e, 25ic( @c(b, much money ; 35te(c S3uci^et, many books. @itt totnx^f a little ; SSScnigc Xagc^ feio days. Wxtl ^nit^ S3r0t^ much good bread. 25iel %Mit^f much good. 163. Vocabulary. bcr %t\\'izXf bic IJe^Ier, mistake. tticfcn, ^/iere is, there are, fol- btc ©rJ^tte'ftcr, bic S^weftern, lowed by the nominative and sister. used of something in a definite ^alb, half; half the sentence, bcr place. l^albe 6a^« eS gibt, t§ ^ah, t§ f^ai gegeben, alSf after a comparitive, ^/law. there is, there are, followed by tturi^, also, besides, too. the accusative and used of things x\^'ii%f correct, right. less definite. ^a^ ^\W§ ? C§ x% t§ fittb, t^ mar, C§ tft 9C= TT/^a^ is there f What's up 9 164. Exercise. (a) 1. (S^ finb tDentge ge^Ier in btefem ®a^, aber e^ finb me^r ge^Ier al^ in Jenent langen. 2. ®iefe beiben ®a^e finb aud^ ri^ttg, aber ber anbere ift falfc^. 3. @^ tt)aren feine 94 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. ge^Ier in eintgen ©ci^en, aber titete @d^e fatten mef)rere gel^Ier* 4. SBa^ gtbf^? gitiige anbere ©ci^e t)aben me^r gel)ler al^ btefe beiben* 5, 3=(^ mag t)tel dJlHi) in meinem ^affee* 6« g^ finb me^rere getter in biefem le^ten @a^, unb all bte anberen I)aben einige falfi^e SBdrter* (b) „gBa^ gibf^? ^d) t^erfte^e ba^ alte^ ni(^t.'' „S^ [inb ju t)iele ge^Ier in biefer Slnfgabe. 3HI bie @a^e finb falfd)." ^^'d^ fe^e Die! galfrfjc^, aber i(^ glanbe, bie f)albe Slufgabe ift ric^tig/' „g^ finb einige getter in biefem @afee unb jtnei ge^Ier in ben beiben le^ten*" „Qa, aber e^ finb tDenige ge^Ier in ben anberen," (c) 1. Some men have much money, but few friends ; others have more friends than money. 2. What's up ? Couldn't those two boys write all the words right? 3. There are several mistakes in the other sentence, but none in both these. 4. My little sister wrote half the exercise without any (irgenb einen) mistake. 5. There were more mistakes in that sen- tence than in this ; this one is right. 6. That one is also right, I think, but perhaps there is something wrong in it. (d) " Who has found few mistakes in his exercise ? " " Those two boys have more mistakes than I. I translated the last sentence right, I think." " No, half the sentence is wrong. Does anyone see anything wrong ? " " Yes, it has too few words. He must write another word for moreJ^ " Can anyone find anything else (nod^ tttoa^) wrong ? Good ! Eead the sentence and translate." BE VIE IV. 95 LESSON XXXV. Review of Pronouns. tPer vkhs bringt, tptrb mand^em etmas brtngen, — @oct^e. 165. Review Questions. (a) 1. Give all the German translations of mine, yours, hers, theirs. 2. How do these differ in English from my, your, her, their ^ 3. Give the rule for the independent use of ein and lein. 4. Give the two uses of [elbft. (6) 1. Explain the use of ba^, bie^^ and e^ with [etn. 2. What are the German interrogative pronouns ? 3. How do they combine with prepositions ? 4. What other combi- nation with prepositions have you learned ? (c). 1. What peculiarities has an adjective following ettDa^ or nid^t^ ? after alte^ ? after t)iel ? 2. Give two translations for the two brothers. 3. How are other and another expressed in German ? 4. How do you say in German with something good, with everything good f 166. Review Exercise. (a) 1. He has lost his new coat, but mine is here. 2. What did you do with yours ? 3. What kind of books are those ? Which one belongs to you ? 4. With whom and of what were you speaking ? 5. I know a couple of ladies, and they are both very beautiful. 6. We wanted to see something new, but there was nothing new there. 7. There are fewer mis- takes in that last sentence, I think. 8. Won't you drink another cup of tea ? Another time, thank you. 9. I can see 96 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. much good in those two girls. 10. There were several mis- takes in these last sentences. (&) A Story ((Sine ®ef(f)i^te). Half the class wanted to write their exercises in school. The others wanted to write theirs at home. Both (bte beibett) could read the sentences, but they could not translate them right. Those at school made many mistakes in their sentences. And those at home had several mistakes in theirs. There are perhaps some sen> tences without mistakes. I think so. But there are more with something wrong. Who will be able to find it ? Has any one found anything wrong in these last sentences ? g^ mar, al^ ^tV ber ^immet ©te (Srbe fttll gefit^t, ©a^ fie im ^Ilttenfc^immer 2Son il)m nun traumen mu|t\ T)k 8uft ging buri^ bte gelber^ S)te St^ren tDogten facf)t, (S^ raufc^ten letf bie 9BdIber, (go fternflar toax bie 9?a(^t^ Unb meine ®eete fpannte SBeit t^re glitget au^, glog bur^ bie ftttten 8anbe, 211^ fI5ge fie na^ ^au^. — ^c^epf), ^rci^crr t)on (Std^cnborff. BEVIEW. 97 ®uter 3Konb, bu ge^ft fo ftille ©urrf) bie atbenbinolfen ^m ; ©etne^ (Sc^o^fer^ tDeifer SBiHe §te^ auf jener 48a^n bt(^ jte^n. geu^te freunblirf) jebem 9Kubett ^n ba^ ftitte ^ammerlein ! Unb bein @(^tmmer gie^e grieben ^n^ bebrcingte §erj l^inein ! ®uter ajfonb, bu tDanbetft leife 2ln bem blauen ^tmmel^gelt, SBo bic^ @ott gu feinem ^rei[e §at ate 8eucf)te ^ingeftetft. 3311(1 e trauU(^ ju un^ nieber !Dur(^ bie ^a6)i auf^ ©rbenrunb ! 9H^ etn treuer SOZenf^ettpter Suft bu ®otte^ 8iebe !uub. ®uter a)?onb, fo fanft unb mtlbe ©lanjeft bu im ©ternenmeer, ©alteft in bem 8id)tgefi(be ^t\)x unb feierlic^ ein^er. a}Jen[(^entr5fter, ©otte^bote, ©er auf grieben^tDoIfen t^ront ; 3u bem fd^onften 3Jforgenrote P^rft bu un^, guter ajjonb ! — ^arl(gn«ltm 98 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON XXXVI. Relative Pronouns. Dependent Order. It)al^re (Srogc l^at alletn, Wcv bte (Srogc meffen fann ; Wev's rcrftel^t, etn grower ITTann Un^ etn fd^Itd^ter XTtenfd? 3U feirt. — of}ntf the man with whom I live. ^er 'ManUf ben (melc^en) t^ fenne, the man whom I know. 168. Compound Relatives. — 2Ber and n)a^ (§ 153, a) are both used as compound relatives, meaning he who, whoever, that which, whatever, what. 8©er felne ^rennbe i^at, ift arm* He who has no friends is poor. 3ri^ ^abc gctan, niai^ iti) inn f onnte. / have done what I could. RELATIVE FliONOUNS. 99 (a) SBa^ is also generally used as a relative after neuter adjectives and neuter pronouns. 3^ ^cht bit ba^ Bcftc, ttia§ id^ ^abc* / ^ive ^o ?/o?^ the best that I have @r ^attc ttiri^t^, tua^ ir^ i^abcn ttiotttc* ^e /iad nothing that I wanted. (b) When referring to an inanimate object, lt)o(r)= is gener- ally used with prepositions instead of a relative pronoun : tt)0t)0tl, of which; tDorttt, in which; iDOtttit, with which; tPOfUr, for which ; etc. Compare § 98 and § 154. 169. The Use of Relatives in German differs from the Eng- lish use. (a) The relative is never omitted in German as in English. The house Thought, \sa^ ^dw^f 'i>a^ x^ gcfaitft ^a^e* The man you saw, bcr Wlami, bctt Sic gcfc^ctt ^aBctt* (&) When the antecedent is first or second person, (1) it may be repeated directly after the relative, the verb agreeing with it. I who did this, idj, bet i^ t^it§ ^tian f^ahc. You who know that, btt, ber tsM ba§ lueilft. (2) If the antecedent is not repeated, the verb is in the third person. Sri), bcr bic^ gctan ^ai^ I who did this. ^Mf bet \s(i^ ttJci^, you who know that. (c) Commas always set off the relative clause in German. 170. Dependent Order. — In the dependent order, the per- sonal part of the verb (in compound tenses, the auxiliary) stands at the end of the clause. This order is used in all de- pendent clauses. These are introduced either by a relative pronoun, or by a subordinating conjunction (ba, tDetl, IDO, etc.). They are set off from the main clause by commas. Illustra- tions : All the preceding examples in this lesson. 100 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (a) Eemember that the main clause is inverted when the dependent clause precedes. When he saw me, he went home. 5(1^ er mid} falft, gtttg tx nad) ^aufc. As you have no book, I will give you mine, ^a te |?tfc^c, fish. \>a2 ^t% hit 9?cftcr, nest, bic SBic'ne, btc Sicncit, 6ee. f(^ttctt, /as^, quickly. bie fJUe'ge, bic JJUcgen, j^y. fan'gcn, fing^ gefangcit (^abcn), cr ha§ ^nf^n, bic ^ii^ncr, chicken. fftngt, «o ca^c/i. 172. Exercise. (a) 1. 9Kit etner gtiege ^abe id) ben gifrf) gefangen, ber tm SBaffer tear* 2. 33atb iDerben tt)ir bie aSogel fe^en, bie in bent 9?efte liegen- 3. J)er ^nabe, ber bie gifi^e gefangen ^at, ging fd^nett na(^ ganfe. 4. ^c^ ^abe .^fltten nirf)t^ gelefen, n)a^ id) felbft ni(^t itberfe^en fonnte. 5. ®ie Sinber, ntit benen ic^ in bie @^nte ge^e, ijahtn §it^ner nnb 53tenen jn §anfe. 6. ©er SJogel, beffen ®i n)ir in bem 9?efte fanben, [a§ auf bent Sannt. (b) ,,Sontnten @ie fdtinett! ^alb fijnnen iDir bie 335gel fe^en, beren Sleft in biefent 93annt ift." „(Sinb ba^ bie 93oge{, bie mir geftern nt(^t fangen fonnten?" „9lein, bie^ finb anbere 3S5geI, bie trir geftern niijt gefe^en ^aben." „®e^5ren 3^tten bie Sienen nnb bie §it^ner, bie xdj int ®arten fe^e ?'' „Qa, ba^ finb aHe bie nteinigen/' (c) (Write both ber and treld^er for all relatives.) 1. Soon we shall catch all the flies that are in this room. 2. Are INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 101 those the fishes that you caught yesterday in that little lake ? 3. You read that page too fast, that I had not yet translated. 4. There is in this sentence something hard, which I cannot translate fast. 5. There are bees and chickens in our garden, and some birds that have made their nests in a big tree. 6. My little sister quickly caught the fish that she saw in the water. (d) " Have you seen any one who caught more fish than I ? " " I don't know. How many did (§ 61) you catch ? '^ "I caught all (§ 169, a) there were in the lake, I think." " I don't believe it. It is too hard to catch all the fish one sees." " But I caught a lot (t)itlt), and I caught them very fast." LESSON XXXVII. Indirect Questions. Review of Lessons I.-XV. 3^ voex% ntd?t, was foil es hebzutzn, Pag id? fo traurtg bin. — ^etnc. 173. Indirect Questions. — When a direct question is put into a subordinate clause in German, it takes the dependent order. (Direct) Where is your hook ? 2Bo ift 3^t 25ttti^ ? (Indirect) I do not know where your book is. ^^ ttici§ nidlt, ttio ^f^x fSn^ ift. (Direct) Why did he do that ? Watnm f^at cr ba^ qttan? (Indirect) He told me why he did that, (£r f^at mix gefagt, ttiarum Ct 102 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, 174. The Article with Parts of the Body. — When words for parts of the body are used in the predicate, German generally has the definite article and the dative of a personal or reflex- ive pronoun (fi(i)) where English has the possessive. / broke my hand, ^d) f^ahc ntir btc $attb ^thvo^tn. He hurt his foot, @r ^at fic^ belt ^x\^ ticrle^t Did you have your hair cut ? ^aft btt bir H§ ^aav fd^tieibctt (affctt ? 175. Vocabulary. bcr ^ttt'gcr, btc ??itt9Ct, finger. singular and plural, and for the hex gni^, bic ^ii^tf foot. polite form ©te, himself, herself, hit S5a'rfe, bic ^adtxi, cheek. themselves, yourself, etc. bic 2xp'pc, bic Si^^ctt, Up. liitf, left. t^a§ ^aaXf bic ^aarc, hair, used in rci^t, right (as opposed to left). both singular and plural for hair. brc'ti^Ctt, brari^, gcbroti^Ctt (f^abctt), ha§ S3cin, bic S3cittc, leg. cr bric()t, to break. \xdjf reflexive pronoun for the da- bcr(ct'5Ctt, bcrlc^tc, bcrlc^t (I)a= live and accusative, third person bctt), to hurt. 176. Exercise. (a) 1. ©iff en @te, toann ber 8ef)rer fi^ ben Heinen ginger unb ba^ red)te Setn gebrodien l^at. 2. ®a^ Stnb fiel^t nid^t, \va^ er mtt einer langen geber anf ba^ "ipaijier f(f)reibt. 3. Qd) berfte^e nidjt, Wit id) mir ben linfen gu^ unb ba^ re(^te ©ein berle^t ^abe. 4. SBir mu^ten nid)t, mann bie ©ante, bie Sl^utter be^ jungen llnaben, geftorben ift 5. Qii) lerne f^on jlDci 3^al)re !5)eutf(^, urn gut lefen ju fonnen, aber id) berfte^e nid^t, tDarum ®ie e^ lernen. 6. SBiffen ®ie ni(^t, \va^ ber SSater be^ ©d^ii^ ler^ bemgerrn gegebeti ^at? (b) „^i) berftef)e ni^t, tDarunt 3'^re Heine ©(^l^efter folc^e rote 53acfen unb fold) f(^one^ §aar Ijat." „3=(f) iDei^ and) nic^t» Qijxt git^e unb 8ippen finb nidf)t f(^bn." „SBiffen ®ie, wit fie fief) bie ginger ber red^ten §anb berlefet ijaV CONJUNCTIONS. 103 „5)fetn, after id^ toiU fie fragen, wit fie fid) bie ginger gebro(^en „3d) fe^e ntdjt, *tt}arum @ie nod) nic^t gefragt ^ben/' (c) 1. I don't know how I hurt my little finger and my left foot. 2. You saw where he had broken his right leg, didn't you ? 3. That little boy doesn't understand why his sister has such red cheeks and such beautiful hair. 4. Of course her lips are red, but I don't see why she has red cheeks. 5. I have been studying German half a year; I don't know when I shall be able to speak it well. 6. I hurt my right foot, but I broke my left leg. (d) '' Well, did you break your finger ? " "No, I didn't break my finger, but I hurt my left foot." " I don't understand how you did that." " There was a knife on the floor and I didn't see it." " Then you will not be able to play to-morrow." " No, I don't know when I shall be able to play." LESSON XXXVIII. Conjunctions. Review of Lessons XVI.-XXV. VOtnn IUenfd?en ausetnanbergebn., So fagcn fie : 2luf SBiebcrfel^n. — g^euc^tcrgtebcn. 177. The Coordinating Conjunctions, unb, and; aber (fonbem), hut; benn, for; and ober, or, do not affect the order. They are used in compound sentences. ^6) !am, mx\s er gtng ttar^ ^attfc* / came, and he went home. @r nttt§ fontmcn, obcr it^ mctbc naci^ ^aufe ge^ett* He must come, or I shall go home. 104 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (a) When hut in English introduces a contrast with a pre- ceding negative, that is, when you can say " on the contrary/^ German uses fonbern instead of aber, @jr ift ni^t mcin JJrcunb, fonbern niein fjcinb* He is not my friend^ hut my enemy. 8ic ift nt^t W^f fonbern fia^Hti^, aBer fie ift reijenb. She is not heautiful, hut homely, hut she is charming. (1) fonbern is always used in the correlative, not only . . . hut also. ^ir traren nic^t nur arm, fonbern and) IranL We were not only poor, hut also sick. 178. Subordinating Conjunctions are used in complex sen- tences and are followed by the dependent order (§ 170). The commonest ones are al^, ba, ba^, e^e, tiad^bem, ob, fobatb, tna^- renb, tnetl, and ipenn* ^^ font, tf^t er nati^ ^onfe ^xn^. I came hefore he went home. @r nttt^ fommen, tneit \6) na^ ^anfe ge^e* He must come, hecause I am going home. 179. Vocabulary. al^f when, used only of past time. tnenn, when, used generally of ha, as, usually giving a reason. present time, but in the sense of c!^e, he/ore. whenever, also of the past. na^bent', after. benn, for, followed by the normal ohf whether, if. order. fobolb', as soon as. fon'bern, hut (instead), hut (on mii^'renb, while. the contrary), followed by the meil, hecause. normal order. 180. Exercise. (a) 1. @^e er fetn SSmi) auf ba^ "^vdt fegte, fe^te er feine @(^u]^e unter bte ®anf. 2. 9la^bem tdf) etn fteine^ ®oot gema(^t ^tte, ging id) bamit ndc^ bem See. 3. 211^ feine aJiutter gegangen tnar, a^ tnein ^ruber fein ©rot, toeit er e^ md)t CONJUNCTIONS. 105 moi^te, 4. SBenn n)tr gleif^ ^aben, effe ti$ e^ nic^t mtt meinem SKeffer, fonbern mtt einer ®abel, 5. SBir ^ben eiti ^funb gute^ 93rot gefauft, it)eit tt)ir nt(i)t^ ju §aufe flatten. 6. SBenn tnir bet 3^nen fittb, trttt!en tt)tr fetnen ^affee, fonbertt See. (b) „g^e @te ba^ ©titd gletfi^ effett, mitffeti (Ste un^ etti ®ra^ falte mHi) gebett,'^ „2lber i^ ^abe fetn ®Ia^ 9)Jtlc^, fonbern etne STaffe njarmen „®obaIb @te nn^ ba^ gegeben f)aben, mitffen toxv ge^en, ba e^ f|)at H)trb/' „S03d^renb tc^ fertig merbe, burfen ©te ^ter bleiben/' „5>tac^bem iDtr gegangen finb, follten @te ntc^t arbetten." (c) 1. How many legs has the bee ? 2. After the boy has eaten that piece of bread, he will come with us into the next room. 3. While you are reading, I will go to the city, for I must buy a pound of meat. 4. It isn't meat, but fish that you must buy when you go to the city. 5. When you are ready, we ought to write tliis exercise, because our teacher is coming. 6. When she had fetched a piece of bread, she drank her cup of hot tea. (d) " Well, when you are ready, I will read.'^ "As soon as you read, I can translate, because I know these words.'' ^ " While you are translating, the other pupils may write their exercises, for they will have plenty of [much] time.'' " After you have read the sentences and before you write them, you must translate." " Well, as I am ready, I can read now." " You mustn't read this exercise, but the next one." 106 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON XXXIX. Dependent Order for Modals. Review of Lessons XXVI.-XXX. Drum frol^lid? in ben Kampf l^inetn ! VOev fiegen tpill, mug ftcrben fonnen. 3a, foil bas £eben red?t gebetl^n XHug man bem Cobe aud? was gonnen.— ^ru^. 181. Modals in Dependent Sentences. — In the dependent order in simple tenses, the auxiliaries of mode stand at the end of the clause, just like auxiliaries of tense. In a com- pound tense of the modal, when there is a dependent infinitive, the tense auxiliary (t)aben or t^erben) stands just before the rest of the verb phrase (^•' two infinitives "). He told me why he had to go. (^v fagtc mir, ttiaruitt er gc^cn ntugtc* Here is an exercise you will have to write. §icr ift eitte ^ufgabe, hit btt mirft f d^rcibctt miiff en* # That is the man who wanted to buy my horse, ^a^ ift tstx ^atttt, ber ittcttt ^ferb \)(ii faufcn ttiottctt* (a) In translating two or more German infinitives at the end of a clause, always begin at the end, then take the one next to the end, then the third from the end. ^6) \jo}it t\x6) fpielen l^oren tonncn, I was able to hear you play. 182. The Use of ba^. — The conjunction ba^, not to be con- fused with the demonstrative or relative ba^, introduces de- pendent clauses. He knows that I shall come. ®r ttiei^, ba§ \(i) fomtucu mcrbc* / saw that you were tired, ^d) f^ahc gcfejctt, bag 8ic mitbc tuarctt* DEPENDENT ORDER FOR MODALS. 107 183. Vocabulary. bcr Sut^'ftaBc, ^c§ ^itr^ftaBctt(^), bcbcu'tctt, licbctttete, bebeutct btc S3ttr^fta!Dett, letter (of the (^abcn), «o meaw (of things), alphabet). hn^^iaUt'xtn^ btt^ftabicr'tc, Buri^- bcr ^oufonant', bc§ ^ottfottatt'tett, ftabicrt' (^aben), to spell. btc ^oiifonantcn, consonant. loi^, Zoose ; ^/ie matter. 28ai§ tft bcr 2^o!a(', bic ^ofa(c, vowel io§ ? WhaVs the hatter f hvtif three. nnVf only. 184. Exercise. (a) 1. Qdi) tDU^te, ba^ ber anbere (Siguier bte SBorter ntd^t ^at buc^ftabieren n^ollen. 2. 2Ba^ i[t (o^ ? g^ finb nur ttter SSud}-- ftabett in btefem 2Borte ; ba^ finb nid^t genug, 3. 23er[te^ft bu ni(J)t, ba^ brei ^onfonanten unb jl^ei 2So!a(e bavin ge{)oren, 4. @iet)ft bu, ba^ e^ nic^t lie, fonbern lay bebeutet? 5. dtwa^ ift lo^ ; e^ finb jiDotf gel)(er in biefer 3lufgabe. 6. ^d^ ^abe ^^nen gefagt, baj3 i(^ fie ni(^t ri(f)tig f)abe itberfe^en fonnen, (6) „3Ba^ ift lo^? @ie tDiffen, ni^t mi)x, ba^ ©ie ba^, SSort nid)t ^aben bui^ftabieren fonnen.'' ^^'a, aber id) tierfte^e, ira^ e§ bebeuten mu^.'' „@e^en ®ie, ba^ e^ nur fitnf ^uc^ftaben, jtDei SSofale unb brei Sonf onanten, l^aben barf ? " „9lber e§ finb ^ier anbere ©i^iiler, bie e^ ni(f)t ^aben bud^- ftabieren Jt)o(Ien»'' „Q^ fe^e, ba^ etma^ lo^ ift, tvtnn ©ie ni^t bui^ftabieren fonnen*" (c) 1. What's the matter ? Can't you spell that next word ? 2. There are only three letters in it, two consonants and one vowel. 3. I saw that he hadn't been able to spell it. 4. You know that that word must not have three vowels, but three consonants. 5. I hear that you will be permitted to 108 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. play only in the garden. 6. The teacher knew that the pupil had not wanted to spell all those words. (d) "What's the matter? Don't you know that that sen- tence doesn't mean anything?" " Yes, now I see that I wasn't able to translate it right." "I think that you didn't want to translate it. Can you spell all the words ? " "No, there are too many consonants and too few vowels in that last word." " Well, I see that you have been able to find your mistakes. Now we will translate." LESSON XL. Review of Lessons XXXI.-XXXVI. Die irtenfd?en, bte btc Hul^e fud?en, bte ffnbcn Hul^e ntmmermet^r, IDetl fie bie Hul^e, bie fie fud^en, in (Eile jagen t>or fid? l^er. ________ —muUtx. 185. The Modified Demonstrative. — In conversation, German generally uses ber for the demonstrative, when this is modified by a phrase or clause (§ 158, d). In more formal language berjenige may be used. Kemember that this is the regular translation for the one, the ones, and that German never omits the relative. See § 128, d. Where are those {the ones) I gave you 9 993o fittb bic, ^\t \^ 3^ttett gaB ? Is he the one (xohom) you saw ? ^ft er htx, belt (bcrjctttgc, tiie(ri^ett) (Sic fa^en? She is not the one who came. Sic ift ni^t bic, bic (bicjcttigc, tDtltift) tarn. EEVmW. 109 186. Review Questions. (a) 1. Name the relative pronouns in German. 2. How do they combine with prepositions ? 3. What is used as a relative after neuter adjectives and neuter pronouns ? 4. Name the indefinite compound relatives. (b) 1. What punctuation precedes the relative in German ? 2. May the German relative be omitted, as in English? 3. How is the relative for the first or second person used? (c) 1. What word order follows the relative? 2. What kind of conjunctions are followed by the same order as the relative? 3. How do compound tenses of the modals in dependent clauses differ from compound tenses of other verbs so used ? 187. Review Exercise. (a) 1. !j)a^ finb bte SBCrter, bie xoxx mi)i l^aben fiuc^ftabieren ttjotten. 2. ^\i btefer Heine @(f)ii(er ber, ber fit^ ba^ 33etn gebrod^en ^at? 3. %{^ ber Snabe fa^, ba^ er bie Slufgabe itber= fe^en fonnte, fa^ er ben niii^ften ®a^. 4. ^ft btefer 5Ro(J ber (berjenige), ben @te ^aben derfoufen tr>oHen? 5. 9^ein, ba^ ift ber, ben x6) geftern fiir nteinen 33ruber l^abe fanfen miiffen. 6. ®er Snabe xoM^it ntd)t, ba^ ba^ ba^ ri(f)ttge SBort lt)ar. 7. 2Btr t)erfte^en nti^t, n)a^ @te l^aben fagen trotten. 8. ©a t(^ ba§ Sort m6)i ^abe bnt^ftabieren fonnen, ^be tc^ e6 nt^t tefen tDotfen. 9, ^6) fe^e nti^t, trie iDir SBbrter of)ne 3So!aIe but^ftabteren !5nnen. 10. T)te, bte bte, bte bte gef)Ier gema(i)t ^aben, fe^en, bitrfen nac^ §aufe ge^en. (p) 1. That man isn't the one I saw, but another. 2. When we heard the boy spell, we didn't know what was the matter. 110 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 3. Are these children the ones whom we saw playing in the garden yesterday ? 4. Yes, those are the ones you saw, but I do not know where they were playing. 5. As you haven't been able to spell those words, perhaps you will be willing to read the next sentence. 6. No, that is the one that I hadn't been able to translate. (c) A Letter. — Dear (lieber) father: — I must write you (§ 10) what we did yesterday in school. We had a long exercise, and it was not the one we had studied. The teacher asked (fragen): "Who is ready?" and no one could trans- late. But when he asked me, I was able to spell all the words in the first sentence. After I had spelled the words, he asked (Mtten) me to read. And after I had read, I found that I could translate the sentence. But the other pupils could not translate. Your son, Karl. ®a^ ^^loft am aJleet* §aft bu ba^ ®d)Io^ gefel^en, ©a^ f)o^e @(^Io^ am SJ^eer? ©olben unb roftg me^en S)ie aSoIfen briiber ^er. S^ m5rf)te ftd^ niebernetgen Qn bie |)3tegelflare glut, @^ m5rf)te ftreben unb ftetgen ^n ber SlbenbtDolfen ®Iut* REVIEW. Ill 3)a§ ^o^e @i^Io^ am 9)?eer, Unb ben 3Konb bariiber fte^en Unb 9iebet mett umt)erJ' 5)er 9Bmb unb be^ SJJeere^ SBaHen, ©aben fie frifc^en Slang? SSerna^mft bu au^ ^o^en fatten (Saiten unb geftgefang? „!Dte SBinbe, bie SBogen afle 8agen in tief er 9tu^' ; ginem Slagelieb au^ ber §aHe §5rf ii) mit 3^ranen iu/' ©a^eft bu oben gef)en ©en Sonig unb fetn ©entail? S)er roten 9JidnteI SSe^en, !Der golbnen kronen @tral^I? git^rten fie nii^t mit SBonne ©ne f^ijne .^ungfrau bar, §errlid) mie eine Sonne, ©tra^Ienb im golbnen §aar? „9Bo^I fa^ id) bie ©Item hdht, D^ne ber kronen 8i(^t, ^m fd^mar^en J^rauerffeibe ; ©ie ^ungfrau fa^ id) nid^t" 112 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON XLI. Separable and Inseparable Verbs. Das fommt barauf an. That depends. 188. Inseparable Verbs differ from simple verbs in only one way — they never take the prefix ge- for the past participle. The inseparable prefix is always directly before the verb, attached to it, and (except mi^-) is never accented. The insep- arable prefixes are be^, emp^, ent-, er-, ge-, mi^^, t)er*, jer^* Synopsis of Inseparable Verbs. Weak. Strong. Pres. xd^ tx^a^Uf I telL id^ tttv^icf^tf I understand. Past. x^ tv^mttf I told. x^ Ucrftanb, / understood. Put. . x^ nicrbc cr^a^lctt, / id^ ttjcrbe tierftc^en, I shall under- shall tell. stand. Perf. iri^ ^aht cr^a^lt, I have i^ fjaht Uctftanbctt, I have under^ told. stood. Past Perf. i(^ i)aiit crjri^lt, / had x^ ^attc Ucrftanbctt, / had under- told, stood. Put. Perf. t^ttierbc tx^^li l^aBett, i^ tticrbc ijcrftanbcn ^abett, I shall I shall have told. have understood. (a) Conjugate each tense in full. 189. Separable Verbs. — All other prefixes are separable. Separable verbs have the following peculiarities : — (a) The prefix always takes the accent, as in English : pick up\ take down'. att'fattfictt, ftng an', atx'^t^an^tn, to begin. SEPABABLE AND INSEPARABLE VEBBS. 113 (b) With simple tenses in independent clauses the prefix is put at the end of the clause. ^dif fattgc ^Ctttc biefc %vhdi an. I begin this work to-day. ^tt fingft gcftcrn bcine 5(ufgabc an. You began your exercise yesterday. (c) In compound tenses and in dependent clauses the prefix is attached to the verb. ^Mov^tn ttiirb cr att'fangen* To-morrow he will begin. ®a^ft hUf too ttiir an'ftngcn ? Did you see where we began f (d) The signs ju of the infinitive and ge- of the past par- ticiple are put between prefix and verb. @ie ^aBcn fcfjr ^nt an'^cfan^cn. They have begun very well. SSarum tuiittfti^t if^v nxd)t an^sufangcn ? Why don't you want to begin? 190. Conjugation of Separable Verbs. anfangctt, to begin. * Present Tense. Synopsis. x^ faitge an Pres. i^ fattgc att bu fattgft att Past. \^ ftttg att cr fattgt att Put. \^ ujcrbc atifattgctt ttitr fangctt att Perf. x^ ^abc attgcfattgctt i^r fattgt att Past Perf. x^ ^aiit attgcfattgctt fie fattgctt att Put. Perf. \6) ttjcrbc attgcfattgctt l^aBctt Formal Imperative, fattgctt Sic att (a) Conjugate each tense throughout m full. In like manner conju- gate auf^oren, auffte^ctt, and fortfa^ren (§ 193). 191. Use of Separable Verbs. — In translating a printed or written sentence it is always well to look toward the end for a separable prefix, as separable verbs are very common in German. When two verbs mean the same in German and one is sepa- rable, Germans usually prefer to use this. Thus, while ^^c^ ^abe bie 3lufgabe begonnen, and ©ttte, tDoHen @te ba^ genfter 114 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. ijfftten? are perfectly correct, a German is more likely to say, ^i) ^abe bie 2lufgabe angefangen, and Sitte, tDoMen @te ba^ genfter auftnai^ett? 192. The Complementary Infinitive usually follows the sepa- rable prefix. A modified infinitive phrase is generally pre- ceded by a comma. Please begin to translate, ^tttc, fattgett Sic an p iiberfc^ett* He began to read the sentence. Sr \)(xi angcfattgcn, tictt 8a^ jtt (cfen* 193. Vocabulary. crfta'rctt, crllattc, erf (art (KjaBctt), (^aBcn), to stop, with a comple- to explain. mentary infinitive and ju where tntf^aVitrtf cnt^ielt, tni^aittn English has a verbal in -ing. (^afictt), t§ tnt1;)iiUf to contain. auf'ftc^ctt, ftanb an^'f aufgcftanbcn an'fattgctt, ftng an', nu'gcfangett (fcitt), to stand up, get up, rise. (^a^cit), cr fdngt an', to begin, forf fa^rctt, fit^r furt'^ fort'gcfo^rwt with accusative or a complemen- (fjahtxt), cr fo^rt fort', to con- tary infinitive and ^u* tinue, go on, with a complemen- attf'prcit, prte aw^'f auf gcprt tary infinitive and p, 194. Exercise. . (a) 1. 9Benn ®te anfangen ju iiberfefeen, [te^eti ®ie auf unb lefen ®ie bie SBorte ! 2. %U \mx auf ge^ort fatten ^u f c^retben, ^at ber na(i)fte @(^UIer fortgefa^ren. 3. ©er ndcf)fte ©coaler fix^rt fort, tpenn biefer aufge^ort t)at. 4. ®ttte, erHdren @ie un^, tDtediete getter btefe 3lufgabe entl)dlt ! 5. gr ftanb auf unb fuf)r fort ju iiberfe^eu, naii)bem n^ir alle aufge^ijrt fatten. 6. !Dte 3lufgabe t)ort nii^t ^ter auf; bitte, \cAjXtn @ie fort gu Uberfe^en! (ft) „33ttte, fte^en @ic auf uub erfliireu @ie un^, ma^ ber le^te @a^ bebeutet!'' SEPARABLE AND INSEPARABLE VERBS. 115 „3df) ^abe aufgefiort 5U lefen, el}e iDtr ben te^ten @a^ itberfe^t fatten." „@o? !©ann fa()ren @ie fort, tDo @te aufge^drt ^aben!" „2lber @ie mitffen mtr ben ®a^ erftciren, e^e ti^ anfange/' „5Rein, fangen ®te an, ober lt)tr wolkn trgenb jemanb anber^ fortfa^ren Ia[fen,'' (c) Did you explain to that pupil that his exercise contained too many mistakes ? 2. Please stand up and begin to trans- late where that other boy stopped reading. 3. He continues to explain the mistakes to the children, after they have stopped studying and have begun to play. 4. Did she stand up and begin to read, or did the other girl continue reading ? 5. We stopped explaining the sentences as soon as the teacher came into the room. 6. This last exercise is not the one I had begun to translate. (d) " Please stand up and read the exercise on this page.'' " Where shall I begin to translate, and when shall I stop ? '' " Begin with this line and read two sentences. I will explain to the class what you read." " Shall I continue to read when I have translated two sen- tences ? I know what the next line means." " ]S"o, you must stop reading, and we will let some one else (§ 159, g) translate." " I like to go on translating when I have begun." " Yes, I know that, but now you must stop." ' 116 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON XLII. Separable and Inseparable Verbs. 3e^t get^t es los. Now it is going to begin (familiar) . Pas fdllt mir gar nid^t etn. IhavenH the least idea {of doing that). 195. Meaning of Prefixes. — The meaning of many insepa- rable prefixes is hard to define. In general mt^- equals mis- ; jer= means to pieces, and ent* denotes separation. The others vary. laufcn, to run ; eittlaufett^ to run away. tjcrftel^cn, to understand; nti^'lJcrftel^Ctt, to misunderstand. Brec^en^ to break; §et(rec^en^ to smash, to break to pieces. (a) The separable prefixes usually have their literal meaning : ftcl^Ctt, to stand ; aufftc^Ctt, to stand up, get up. Brcc^Ctt, to break ; aBBrct^ett, to break off. ian^tttf to run ; meglahf en, to run away, to escape. 196. Common Prefixes. — The four prepositions, bur^, iiber, Utn, and unter are sometimes separable, sometimes inseparable. (a) They are inseparable when used in a figurative meaning, or one not exactly literal. The verbs are usually transitive, have l^aben as auxiliary, take the accent on the root of the verb, not on the prefix, and do not take ge* in the past participle. The inseparable use is much commoner than the separable. buti^rei'fctt, burii^rci'ftc, buvd^rcift' (^oben) to travel over, to ''do.'' '^^ bttr(3Jrei'fc ^cutftifttanb jebcn Sommct* I travel all over {''do'') Germany every summer. 3^ IJaBe 2)ctttft!^(attb le^teti Sommer burr^reift'. / "did" Germany last summer. SEPARABLE AND INSEPARABLE VERBS, 117 ilBcrge'^cn, uBctgittg^ iiBergatt'gcn (^abcn), to omit, skip, SBtr ttictbctt bicfc (Seitc nhtvqc'f^txu We will skip this page, 2Bir ^abctt bicfc Settc u^ergan'gctt* We have skipped this page, umgc'^ctt, umgittg', umgan'gen (^abeti), to avoid, to evade, 'Bit umgc'^Ctt bicfei^ (SJefc^. They evade this law. Bit f^ahtn bicfc^ ^cfc^ umgan^gen* They evaded this law. tttttcr^al'tctt, ttttterl^ielt', nnitx^aVttn (^aben), to entertain. Bit nnitvf^dW ttitlt f^reiinbc* She entertains many friends. Bit f^at \)itlt ^rcttttbc nnttti^al'ttn. She entertained many friends. (b) They are separable when both prefix and verb are used in their natural meaning. The verbs are often intransitive, take the auxiliary of the simple verb, and have the accent upon the preposition, as in the case of all separable verbs. ^^ fc^c meinctt SSiUen burti^* I carry out my will. (5r ift u'bcrgefa^ren* He crossed over. 2)ic Bmnt ift mt'tcrgcgangcn. The sun has set. 9Jae^ cittCt SSctIc fc^rtctt ttiir \xm. After a while we turned round. (c) When used regularly with a simple verb, these four prepositions sometimes look like separable prefixes. Hence they are often so called, and the principal parts of the verbs are so given. But really they are simple verbs used with a preposi- tion. Compare the examples below with those under (a) above. tt'Bctge^cn, gtng ii'Bcr, ii'Bctgegattgctt (fctn), to go over, St^ gcl^c iiBer* I go across (separable). 3*^ gc^e itbcr 'tsa^ fjetb* I go across the field (simple verb). tttt'tcr^altctt, i)it\i un'tcr, utt'tergc^alten (^aben), to hold under. @r \)Ui btc ^a^e Ulttcr* He holds the cat under (separable) . ©r pit btc ^a^c uittcr bcm %i\^t. He holds the cat under the table (simple verb). 118 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, burj^i'rctfctt, rciftc t>xiv^'f burd^'gctcift (fein), to travel through, 933ir reifctt burd^» We travel through (separable). 2Bir rcifCtt hnxd) ^CUtfti^lattb* We travel through Germany (simple verb). um'gc^ett, gutg um', nm^oegangctt (fein), to go around. (Bh rje^Ctt urn* You go around (separable). ©ie ge!^en lim ben SBalb* Fow are going around the wood (simple verb). 197. §in and §ei\ — All verbs of motion are commonly compounded with !^tn or ^er to denote direction of motion. §in always means aiuay from the speaker, ijtx^ toward the speaker, ^a ge^t ct f^ht. There he goes (away from here). 293pnctt Sic ^er (or l^icr^cr) tommctt? Will you come here? ^iinttcn ©ie ^erauffommen? Can you come up (here') ? ^^ faittt ntc^t ^inaufge^ctt* I can't go up (there). (a) §in unb t)er means here and there, hither and thither. (£r lief \)\\X unb ^tx. He ran hither and thither. (h) 2Bo means where (rest) ; tropin' means where to, whither ; tDOl^er' means where from, whence. The two parts may be separated. Where are you going? 293o^tn gc^cn 8ic? or 3Bo gcl^cn 8te l^ttt? 198. Vocabulary. btc Ofic'gcl, bic ^t^thif rule. nntcr^jaCtcn, nntcrl^iclt', unter= bic 8c^tt)ie'rtg!ett, bic (5r^ttiic= \)(iVit\x (^abcn), ct? untcrplt^ to riofcttcn, difficulty. entertain. burji^b(aftctn,bnrti^blat'tcrtc,but(^= nnfcrnc^'mcn, nntcrnte^m'^ untct= Wii^itxi (l^abcn), to skim over, nom^mcn (^abcn), cr ntttcr= run through (of a book). ntntmt', to undertake. uber^cn'gcn^ubcr^cng'tc, iibcrscugt' njtcbcr^o'len, micbcrljol'tc, ttiicbcr= (f^ahtn)f to convince. f^M (^nbcn), to repeat. This is ttmgc'bcn, umoab', umgc'bcn the only inseparable compound (^abcn), cr umgibt', to surround. of micbcr* SEPARABLE AND INSEPARABLE VERBS. 119 199. Exercise. (a) 1. 2Btr ^aben xiju uberjeugt, ba^ er nt^t l^inge^en foUte. 2. @r ijat e^ unternommen, alt bie 9tegeln in btefem :93u(J)e ju tt)ieber^oIen. 3. @(f)one Saume umgaben unferen ©arten, lt)o tDir unfere greunbe unter^alten fatten. 4. ®itte, trteber^olen @te bte ®(^triertgfeiten, bie @ie fanben, a(§ (Sie ba^ SSnd) buri^blcitterten ! 5. gr ireig, tDo^er er fommt, aber er trei^ nid^t, tDo^in er ge^t. 6. SBir furf)ten f)in unb ^er, aber irir fonntett feiti SBaf[er finben. (b) „2BoIten ®ie biefe ®d^e burrf)blcittern unb nn^ bie ©c^tDierigfeiten erf(ciren?" „^ij bin iiber^eugt, ba§ ic^ e^ nici^t nnterne^nten fottte." „®ann miiffen ®ie bie 9tege(n iDieber^oIen." „Qa, ba^ tDirb bie anberen fe^r gut unter^alten." „(Sie U)erben t^enige @c^tx)ierig!eitenfinben, menu ®ie e^unter- nontmen {)aben.'' (c) 1. Did you undertake [it] to explain all these difficul- ties ? 2. I ran through his sentences and convinced him that they contained too many mistakes. 3. It does not en- tertain the pupils, when they have to repeat these rules. 4. The man was running hither and thither ; he did not know where he wanted to go. 5. Big trees surround the field where these flowers came from ({)er!amen). 6. Please repeat the last rules in this book. (d) " Now I will run through your exercises and explain the difficulties. How many have made mistakes ? '' " I didn't make any mistakes ; I will undertake [it] to re- peat all the rules.'' "I think I shall be able to convince you that you made several mistakes. Did the exercise contain difficulties ? '^ 120 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. ' " The whole class was surrounding me, while I was writing this exercise. I entertained them well.^' " Good, but you have not yet convinced me that you under- stand all the rules." " Well, I am willing to undertake [it] to repeat them." LESSON XLIII. Imperative. Set bulbfam gegen alles 2Inber5fetn, Unb lag bid? fetnen lOtberfprud:? r>erbriegen; ZTur tmmcr ftcl^' auf betnen eignen (Jii§cn, Vinb fprtd? 5ur red?ten §ctt entfd^Iognes ZTetn. — SBid^crt 200. The Imperative for formal address is like the inverted indicative (§ 69); loben @te, praise; fe^en @te, look; fangen @te an, begin; itberfe^en @te, translate. (a) The second singular imperative adds *e to the stem. This ^t maybe dropped in conversation: lobe, praise; ]^5re, listen; fatige an, begin; fte^e anf, stand up; iiberfe^e, translate. (b) When the root vowel e changes to ie or t in the second singular indicative, the same vowel change occurs in the im- perative and *e is not added. Strong verbs in a do not take umlaut, fie!^, see; gib, give; ^It, stop. (c) The second plural imperative is like the indicative with- out the pronoun. The connecting vowel ?e^ may be inserted for euphony. See § 14, a. IMPETtATIVE. 121 201. Conjugation of the Imperative. Second Singular. Second Plural. Formal. (o(e mt iohtn Ste, praise m fcl)t fc^en @te, see tomm fommt fDmmctt ®tc, come fange an fattgt an faugcn Sic an, begin iiBcrfe^c iibcrfc^t iibcrfe^cn n Qib\t, gib ; lefen, bu Uef(ef)t, lie« ; j^reci)en, bu fprid^ft, fprid^. 202. Vocabulary. gcttii'gcn, gcniig'tc, gcniigt' (I)a= Ibcn), to suffice, be enough; ha§ gcniigt, that will do, that is enough or sufficient. :^ci'ftcn, ^ic§, gc^ci^cn Ojobtn), to be called, to be named, to be (translated) ; 2Bic I)cigcn Sic ? Whafs your name f ^cr'fagcn, fagtc ^cr', l^cr'gcfagt (^aBcn), to recite. nc^'ntcn, na^m, gcnom'mcn (^a= Ben), cr nimmt, to take. ticrbcf fern, tjcrbef fcrtc, tictBcf'fcrt (^aBcn), to correct. uot'tcfcn, Xa^ t»or\ tiot'gcicfcn (^= Ben), cr Ucft tjor', to read (aloud). ttici'tcricfcn, ia§ tnci'tcr, ttJci'tcr= gefcfcn (I)aBcn), cr Ucft mci'tcr, to read on (further). bctttftift, adj., German; anf bcntfti^, in German. cng'iifii^, adj., English; anf cng= lifj^, in English. 203. Exercise. (a) 1. 8ie^ iDeiter, natfibem bte anberen ©(filler bte engltfc^en SRegeIn ^ergefagt ^aben! 2. yit^mi btefe 2lufgaben unb t)er== beffert aH bie @dfee, bte getter ent^atten ! 3. f omm ^er unb fage mir, iDte betn ©ruber ^ei^t ! 4. 9?imm eiu ®tU(f "ipapier 122 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. unb etne geber unb fi^reibe ben nci^ften engli[(^en @a^ auf beutfc^! 5. ©agt bte le^te beut[(^e ^eile auf engltfc^ ^er! 3Bie t}et^t ba^ lange SBort ? 6. e^e lt)ir bte Dtegeln f)erfagen, net)tnt gebern unb STinte unb f(^retbt auf beutf(^, n)a^ id) tud) t)orIefe! (&) ^-^Sitte, (te^ auf beutfd^ tDetter! Sie ^ei^t ba^ nd(^fte „S)a^ n)et§ idf) nid^t ; tc^ f)abe ntt^t mettergefefen/' „9^imm betn beutfdie^ ^u^ unb Ite^ htn na(f)ften @a^ t)or !'' ,,3<^ ^^^^ fe^^ ®ti^ nt(^t Ijerfagen ; fd^ wti^ n\d)t, tuie er auf beutf(^ f)ei^t," „®o ^ore auf unb t)erbeffere bte anberen ©cifee! !Da^ ge- nugt,'' (c) (Write all imperatives three ways.) 1. Take these Ger- man books and read on in English. 2. That will do. Read the next sentence aloud in German before we correct it. 3. Eecite the English rules, and then we will read the exercise aloud in German and translate it. 4. What is that last word in English ? Yes, that will do. 5. Take these papers and read aloud the German sentences which we have translated and corrected. 6. Kead on in German ; I will tell you when it's enough. (d) "Take this book and read this English exercise aloud in German." "Please explain the difficulties to us in English before we read on." " No, I will correct your mistakes after you have recited the rules." "What is the next German word in English? I do not understand how I am to translate it." INFINITIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 123 " Eecite the rules in English and you will be able to under- stand the German sentences.'' "Now I have read the sentences aloud in German and in English. Is that enough ? '' "Yes, that will do.'' LESSON XLIV. Infinitives and Participles. Selbft gcfponnen, selbft gemad^t, Hetn babei, tft "Sarnvntvad^t — ^^nd^tvort. 204. The Infinitives. — There are two infinitives in German : present, (oben, to x>raise ; ge'^ett, to go ; and perfect, gelobt jU l^aben, to have praised ; gegattgen ju feitt, to have gone. (a) The infinitive without the sign ju is used after modal auxiliaries and after finben, fit^ten, ^ei^en, ^elfen, ^oren, laffen, te^ren, (ernen, ma(f)en, fe^en, . (See § 141.) 3c^ fottttte i^n fe^cn* I could see Mm. ^ ^6) fa^ i^ju am ^cnftcr ftc^cn, / saio him stand at the window. @r Icrntc ^\xi (cfctt* He learned to read well. 3c^ ^ottc i^tt fommcn* / heard him come. (b) In most other cases ju is used when the infinitive has to in English. @r ftng an, ctnett 2?ncf ^u fc^rctbcn* He began to write a letter. ^ic ^(ttfgaBc ift ft^tticr p iificrfc^Ctt* The exercise is hard to translate. (c) The infinitive may be used as a notm. It is a neuter noun of the first class. ^a^ fiebCtt ift fc^r ft^on. iz/e (^o live) is very beautiful. 124 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, (d) Besides utn, denoting purpose (§ 86), the infinitive is also used after attftatt, instead of, and oijUt^ without, where English employs a verbal. Instead of going, he came. 5lttftatt ju gel^Ctt, ift cr gcfommcn. Without asking me, she went home. Otfttt mi^ 5U fragctt, ging fie nati) 205. Position of the Infinitive. — An infinitive with ju usually comes outside the clause. He began to lorite. ©r ftng an 5U fr^retBen* We continued to translate. SBir ful^ren fort ju uBcrfc^Ctt* (a) An infinitive is always preceded by its objects and modifiers. When so preceded it may be treated as a separate clause and set off by commas (§ 192). He began to write a long letter. (Sr ftttg an, cittCtt (attgen SBrief p fri^reiBctt. We continued to translate these sentences without a mistake. 2Bit ftt^tCtt fort, ol^ttc etncn JJc^lcr btcfc Sa^e p iiberfc^en. 206. The Participles. — There are two participles in Ger- man : present, {ohty\!i) ^ praising ; get)enb, going ; past (also called perfect), gelobt, praised ; gegangen, gone, (a) The participle may be used as an adjective or a noun, but it is always declined like an adjective. Unlike the Eng- lish, it is preceded by its modifiers, and as an adjective it stands before its noun. It is not common in conversation. (5ttt (!tcttt)cr %\\\% a little river. (Sin (bur^ bic 'Biatsi flic^cub)cr '^h\% a river flowing through the city. @ttt (nott eittcnt gclc^rtcn Scorer gcfc^ricbctt)e)^ SButi^, a book written by a learned teacher. %xt (5(n!ommcnb)Ctt, the newcomers. INFINITIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 125 207. The Use of Infinitives and Participles is not so common in German as in English. (a) German does not possess the progressive and emphatic forms of the verb (§ 16). For the three forms, he praises , he is praising J and he does praise, the German has but one form : er tobt. (6) Often where English has an infinitive or participial phrase, German uses a finite clause, commonly introduced by ba. To avoid errors, change the English phrase to an English clause with when or as, and then translate. Not finding him in the house^ Hooked for him in the garden, ^a id) i^tt ntd^t m ^aufc fanb, fud^tc t(^ if^n int Garten* Coming home, he found the letter on his table. ^i§ tt nati^ ^aufe fattt, fanb cr ben Srtef auf fciticm ^ift^c. I knew him to be my friend, ^c^ ttitt^tc, ba§ er mettt JJreuttb toav. 208. Vocabulary. bic ^n^'jpva^tf bic 5(tt)^f^ta^eit, bor'gett, Uv^ttf gcBorgt i^aUn), pronunciation, accent. to borrow. bie ^rommo'tif, bie QJramma'ttf en, lei'Ijeit, lie^, gelie^eit (^ahcn), to grammar. lend. ha§ Se'feBu^, bie Sefebiiti^er, e'bctt, just ; ja, e'^en, yes, that's reader, reading book. so. enb 'Itr^, finally, at last. iiBerall', everywhere, all over. 209. Exercise. (a) 1. ^t%i ^aben ®ie eben etnem greunbe ba^ geborgte ®elb gelie^en. 2, 9lein, anftatt e^ ^u (et^en, ^aU xi) enbltrf) nod) ettDa^ geborgt, 3, ©a^ ift ein fe^r gut ge[d)riebene^ gefebud), aber e^ ent^alt nur menig ©rammattf, 4, ®a^ 8efen, o^ne bie ®a|e ju iiberfe^en, ift mtr nt(^t firmer. 5. 9So((en tDir fort- fasten, btefe noc^ nt^t Uberfe^ten SBdrter t^orjulef en ? 6. Unfer 126 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 8ef)rer loht unfere beutf^e 9lu^f|3ra(f)e itberall in ber ®tabt, o^ne un^ in ber ®rf)ule ein Sort bat^on jn fagen, (b) „2Bie ^aben @ie fo gnt ©eutfc^ f^re(f)en lernen?" (§ 141). „2Inftatt an^ einer ©rammatif ober einem Sefebud) jn lefen, l^abe i^ meine Sln^fpra^e burc^ @pred)en gelernt*'' „Qd) ^abe no(^ nie einen |o gnt fprec^enben ©fitter gefel^en. (Sie foHten bie anberen fprecfjen le^ren,'' „Qa, eben, aber man mn^ nberall fprec^en- ©ann enblic^ ge^t e^.'^ (c) 1. Not being able to see well, we finally went home without waiting. 2. Instead of lending me her reader when I had lost mine, she made (144, d ) me look everywhere for it. 3. Not being able to learn a good pronunciation from your reader, you must borrow a grammar. 4. Do you find this a well- written grammar ? Yes, that's so. 5. Coming into the room, the teacher found the pupils playing instead of writing tTieir exercises. 6. The pupils finally began to write their sentences, after the teacher had seen them playing (§ 141). (d) "Do you know that to be the right pronunciation of that sentence ? " " No, but I heard another pupil read it so." "Borrow a grammar and learn the pronunciation of these words. Who will lend him a grammar ? " " Here is my reader, but I have looked everywhere for my grammar without finding it." " When you finally find it, let me see a well-written exercise and hear a good pronunciation. You must work hard to learn well." " Yes, that's so." REVIEW. 127 LESSON XLV. Review. 3n £^od?mut iiberl^eb' bid? nid?t, Unb lag ben XHut ntd?t fin!en, Xtttt beinem XDtpfel reid?' ins £id?t, Unb lag bie rDur3el trinfcn. — TOcfert. 210. Review Questions. (a) 1. Give the inseparable prefixes. 2. Where do the separable prefixes stand in simple tenses (a) in independent clauses ? (&) in dependent clauses ? 3. In compound tenses (a) in independent clauses ? {b) in dependent clauses ? 4. With the infinitive? 5. What prefixes are sometimes separable and sometimes inseparable? 6. Give the rule for distin- guishing these by their accent. 7. Explain the distinction in the use of !^ttt and !^er. 8. What is the position, order, and punctuation of infinitive phrases ? (&) 1. Give the rule for regular formation of the imperative second singular. 2. Give the rule for the second singular imperative of verbs whose root vowel is e, that change e to ie or t in the second singular indicative. 3. Is „bitte" an imperative ? Might it be ? . (c) 1. Give the cases where English uses to with the infini- tive, where ju is omitted in German. 2. What is the posi- tion of the infinitive with reference to its modifiers? 3. What is the force of um with the infinitive ? 4. What other prepo- sitions are regularly used with the infinitive ? (d) 1. Give the two chief uses of the participle in German. 2. What is the German equivalent for the following : He is 128 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. singing very beautifully. Not seeing anything in the garden, I went into the house. 3. What is the position of the participle with reference to its modifiers? 4. Which language uses participles more frequently, German or English ? 211. Review Exercise. (a) 1. ^i) tierfte^e ntc^t, tDa^ ba^ bebeutet. Sttte, erftare e^ mtr! 2. @r ^t angefangen, bte 9tegetn t^orjutefen. 3. S)te (Si^iiter ^aben ben Secret itbeqetigt, ba^ bie Slufgabe tiiele ©^iDterigfeiten ent^ielt. 4. ^itte, t)erbeffern @te biefe eng^ Ufd^ett (gcifee, e^e ©ie auf beutfd) iDettertef en ! 5. SBie fjet^t ba^ auf beutf(^? .^a, ba^ geniigt. 6. 9^imm bein Sefebud^ unb Ite^ auf ber nad^ften ©eite t)or, anftatt mit ber (e^ten anju- fangen! T. SBann glauben ®te, ba§ \6) enblt(^ eine gute beutfd^e 3lu^fpra(^e fjaben n)erbe? 8. 3)a ber 8ef)rer bie ©dottier arbetten fa^, lobte er fie. 9. Slnftatt nai^ §aufe gu ge^en, bin \6) in ber @cf)ule geblieben. 10. S)a^ 3JZab(^en mit ber guten Slu^fprai^e f)at bie gauge 3Iufgabe gelefen, o^ne einen ge^Ier gu nta(f)en. (h) 1. The teacher was explaining to the class what the rules meant. 2. We undertook [it] to convince him that he had not begun to translate right. 3. Else, please, and tell us where you are going (§ 197, h). 4. We went hither and thither, but everywhere the trees surrounded us. 5. Coming home without seeing anybody, I looked everywhere for my friends. 6. Take this book, stand up, and read the next sentence in German, instead of correcting the last one. 7. Please recite the last rules in this grammar in English. 8. Seeing the boys playing instead of working, the teacher stopped reading. 9. I have just borrowed the teacher's grammar, in order to learn a good pronunciation. 10. You REVIEW. 129 will never be able to do that without speaking a great deal (much). (c) A Letter. — Dear Mother : I like to study German. When I began to study it, I did not speak well. But instead of stopping, I read aloud every time that I could, and now I have a good accent. But you cannot learn to speak German with- out working. I work hard every day', instead of playing the whole time. Please write me a letter soon, and tell me what you are doing. Your [you] loving daughter. Sw ^olf^tott. (Sinen Srief foH ic^ f^retbett 9J?einem ®rf)a^ in ber gem' ; @te ^at mxi} gebeten, (Sie ^iitf ^ gar ju gem* 211^ n)ir nod^ tnttfammen Un^ lufttg gemai^t, ®a ^aben wit ntmmer 2ln^ @(f)reiben gebai^t, 3Ba^ l^tlft mir nun geber Unb Jinf unb papier? ®u tt)et^t, bie ®eban!en @inb alljeit bet bir ! — Zt)to't>ov (Storm. 130 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON XL VI. Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs. €tn cMer ^elb tft, ber fiirs Vatevlanb, ein cblerer, bcr fiir bcs £anbes XDoI^I, ber cbelfte, ber fiir bie ITTenfd?beit fdmpft. — Berber. 212. Comparison of Adjectives and Adverbs. — Adjectives and adverbs are compared by adding ^er and -(e) ft. Monosyllabic stems in a, 0, or u usually take umlaut. Euphony requires the use of the connecting vowel e before ft in the superlative, when the positive ends in a diphthong or a sound like ^ or t (^, ^, J, b, t) : freieft, alteft, fiirgeft. Some adjectives are irregularly compared. (a) The comparative and superlative are declined like other adjectives. The uninflected superlative is very rare. @itt Bcffcrc^ 23ur^, a better hook. ^cr pcffftc f&anntf the highest tree. @r!^ottcrc§ SBettcr, fti^oucrctt 233cttcr^, more beautiful loeather. (b) For the English superlative in the predicate, when not modified by a phrase or clause, the German uses ant with the superlative ending in ^tn for both numbers and all genders. liefer SBaum ift am pii^ften. This tree is the highest. liefer S3aum \\i bcr pti^ftc \m Garten* This tree is the highest in the garden. (c) For the adverbial superlative absolute, in the — est possible way, German uses the phrase auf^ — -fte. He spoke in the clearest possible way. (Sr f^ra^ nufi^ beutUt^jftc. j^he pave you the highest praise possible. Sic t^at ^i^ auf^ Ifo^ftc gctoM* COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 131 (d) Unlike English, long words are regularly compared in German, mtijX being used only when one adjective is compared with another. / know nothing more disagreeable. ^^ f cnuc ni^t§ Unattgcnc^mcrej^. He is more lazy than sick. @r ift me^r faul aW fratlf ♦ 213. Positive. Adj. and Adv. ticf, deep. a\t, old. fri^on, beautiful. Table of Comparisons. Comparative. Superlative. Begular, Adj. and Adv. Adj. Adv. and Pred. Adj. ticfcr, deeper. bcr ticfftc, am ttefften, deepest, alter, older. bcr aUcftc, am aftcftcn, oldest. fri^oncr, more bcr ft^ijnffe, am fc^iinftcn, most beautiful. beautiful. Irregular. Adj. and Adv. Adj. and Adv. ^uif good {?LdY. well). Bcffct, better. tfitif much. f^ot^f high. na^, near. QXO% great. tucttig, little. Adj. Adv. and Pred. Adj. bet befte, am Beften, best. mcfjr, more. ber meifte, am meiften/ most. pljer, higher. ber pr^fte, am prffften, highest. naljer, nearer. bet nati^fte, am nad^ften, nearest. gtijfeet, greater. bet B^^ftte, am gtogten, greatest. bet etftete, /ormer. bet etfte, suetft (adv.),^rs^. bet (e^tete, Za^^er. bet le^te, ple^t (adv.), last. ttjemget 1 am hJemgfteu 1 mittbet J am minbeftett J gettt (adv.) gladly. liebet, rather. 214. am (tebften, (to like) best. Particles of Comparison. (a) As is translated by tDte ; than usually by al^, sometimes by tDte. He is not so large as you. ^t ift ttid^t fo qto^ ttiie btt» He is larger than I, (^t ift gtii^et al2 {or ttiie) td^. 132 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (b) As ... as is translated ebenfo « , , tt)te (or al^). She is as pretty as you. (5ie ift ebctifo f(^Ott ttJic (or ai§) @ic» (c) The . . . the is translated by je , . . be [to. The longer the sentence, the harder it is to write, ^t (anger bct @6>^/i ber t?ierte, 4t^ ber taufenb a(f)tl)unbert[ed^^unb^ ber fitnfte, 5th neunjtgfte, 1896th (a) Ordinal adverbs are formed by adding ^tn^ to the ordinal stem: tx\itn^, firstly, in the first place; ^tvdttXl^, secondly, in the second place, etc. 219. Fractions (except bte §alfte, the half and eitl ©rittel, a third) are formed by adding =tel (a softening of ber 2^eil, the part) to the ordinal stem up to 20, and ==[tel from 20 on. They are all neuter nouns of the first class. ^tci ^ktitlf three fourths ; cttt B^^^WS^OP^^ « twentieth ; fieBctt ^tttt= bcrtftcl, seven hundredths. (a) To express and a half with small numbers, besides the regular expression, German may add ^(t)^alh to the ordinal stem of the number next larger than the one to be expressed. Thus britte^Ib really means tivo ivhole ones (understood) ayid half the third; atlbert^alb means one whole one (understood) and half another. They are indeclinable. One and a half, cittuubciu^lft, anbert^alli. Two and a half ^rtJctttubctn^alB, brtttc^ali* Three and a half, brciuttbein^alb, tiicrte^ali^ (h) The half (of) is bie ©alfte. Half (of) the book, bie ^alftc be§ S3ttc^e§» (c) The adjectives ijalh, half, and gatlj, all, whole, are declined regularly following the article. Half a page, einc f)atbt 6eite ; all the sentence, ben gan^en @a^» 136 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 220. Exercise. (a) 1. @ie ^at anbert^alb Jaffen Xtt getrunfen, unb i^ smet^^ unbein^alb. 2. gr ^at bie §dlfte ber britten Seite lefen tDoQen, aber er fonnte nur ^tiju ^dhn lefen. 3. grften^ f^attt fie jmijif 9?ofen, tt)ot)on fie mir nur ein aSiertel geben mottte. 4. 3^^iten^ wax e^ ba^ erfte 3Jfa(, unb britten^ tt)oHte fie felbft brei SSiertel ^aben. 5. SBieDiel ift fiebenmat a^t? 6. m finb fec^^ Sucf)ftaben in bem britten SBort auf ber fiebenunbfiinfjigften ©eite. (b) „3Jiac^en ®ie bie :93iic]^er auf, unb fangen @ie mit ber neun^ ten 3^if^ ^^f ®^i^^ breiunbt^ier^ig an!" „@oH id) mit berfelben ^dk auf ber t^ierjigften @eite auf^ ^oren?" „@ie ^ben nur anbert^alb ^tikn gelefen unb ^aben fiinf ge^Ier gentaii)t. 3)ie §alfte be^ ©a^e^ mar falfd^.'' „3=(^ ^abe' e^ siDeimal gelefen ; ba^ britte Wat merbe id) nur brei 3SierteI fo tiiele getter madden.'' (c) 1. How much is seven times twelve? 2. We read one and a half lines on the twenty-third page and three quar- ters of page twenty-four. 3. In the first place I can't read three and a half pages in an hour and a half ; and in the second place I don't want to. 4. She translated half the exercise in three quarters of the time, but I did it in half an hour. 5. You are half as old as I, and I am seventeen and a half years old. 6. In the year a thousand nine hundred and thirteen we read a hundred and thirty-three pages in our reader. (d) " Please begin with the third line on the forty-seventh page and read five and a half lines." " I cannot translate the first half of that second exercise.'' TIME, DATS, MONTHS, DATES. 137 "Read half the sentence and try to translate a line and a half." " I know only a third of the words ; you will have to trans- late three fourths of the sentence for me." " That will do. We will try some one else." LESSON XL VIII. Time, Days, Months, Dates. 3m u)unberfd?onen UTonat Iltat, als alle Knofpcn fprangen, Pa ift in mcinem fjer3en bte £iebe aufgegangcn. — ^cine. 221. Telling Time of Day. — German uses U^r for English o^clock. As in English, it is expressed usually only on the complete hours. What time is it f SBietifcl U^jt ift t§? It is ten o'clock. (^§ ift jc^tt UffV* It is half past eight. Q:^ ift f^aih ttCtttt* (a) German usually reckons ahead to the following hour, and instead of saying quarter past any hour, it says one quarter towards the succeeding hour. It is quarter past Jive. (^§ ift Cttt S^icrtcl (auf) ^t6)§* It is half past Jive. ©^ ift i^aih fcr^§- It is quarter of six. ©^ ift brci ^itvtd (auf) fcd^i^* At quarter to eight. Uttt brci S^icrtel a6)t (b) Minutes are reckoned as in English, before (t)or) and after (na6)) the hour. It is ten minutes to nine. ®^ ift 5cl)tt SJlittutCtt tJOr ttCUtt* It is twenty-three minutes past seven. Q:§ ift breiuttbsttiattjig SKittUtetl nad^ fieBen* 138 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, 222. Other Time. — Days of the week are put in the accusa- tive of time (§ 117) or in the dative with atn* What day (of the week) is to-day f SBcIc^cu Xag JjaBctt ttiir ^cute ? To-day is Monday. ^Cttte ift Wmiaq. Monday we went home. 9Jlotttag (am SJlutttag) fitngctt toix nacft ^aitfe* (a) Days of the month are put in the accusative of time (§ 117) or in the dative with am. In dating a letter use ben, Notice the idiomatic expression by which German asks, What day of the month is to-day 9 What day of the month is to-day? ^Ctt ttJieUicltCtt f^ahtn toiv ^Ctttc ? To-day is the thirteenth. $cutc ift bcr btci^C^tttc, We arrive (on) the eighth, ^it fOtttlttCtt bctt at^tCtt (or am a^ittt) an. Chicago, June 7, S^icago, ben 7tctt (b, 7,) 3utti, (b) The name of the month foHows the date without article or preposition. Qm QaijVt usually precedes the year date. Fourth of July, ben 4tCtt 3iUU. (On) the first of January, bclt (am) crftCtt SattUar, In 1492, im 3a^re tanfenb tjict^ttttbcrtsttJciuttbttcunsig, or simply 1492^ bicrac^tt^uttbcrt^tticiuttbttcttitaig. 223. Names of Days and Months. (a) The days of the week are: — bcr Sotttt'tag, bet ^mx^'ia^f bcr ^on'itcr^tag, bcr Wm'ia^f bcr SJlitt'ttJot^, bcr fjrci'tag, bcr Sott'nabcttb, bcr Sam^'tag (South Germany). (p) The names of the months are : — bcr Sati'uar, bcr max, bcr (Sc^tcm^bcr, bcr ??g'brttar, bcr 3tt'tti, bcr Ofto'bcr, bcr 9Kar^, bcr ^vi% bcr ^obcm'bcr, bcr %px\V, bcr 5(ttgttft', bcr ^cjcm'bcr. TIME, DAYS, MONTHS, DATES. 139 224. Exercise. (a) 1. a^ fing um stDanjig 3}?tnuten t)or adjt am ©onner^tag bem fiebten Wdx^ im ^a^re neunse^n^unbertbreije^n an. 2. 3=m (Sotnmer, in -3^^^^ -3^tt nnb 3lngnft ge{)e id) nm ^alb elf jn Sett. 3. ge^ten SBinter in ©ejember unb .^annar famii^ ieben STag nm l^alb nenn in bie (Si^nle. 4. ^ebe SBoi^e fdngt bie ©c^nle am 3Kontag nm brei asiertet nenn an, nnb fie ^brt am greitag nm ^alb jtDei anf. 5. aBeId}en Slag ^aben n)ir ^ente? 6. §ente ift ©onnabenb, geftern wax greitag, nnb morgen n)irb @onntag fein* (p) „3Biet»ieI U^r ift e^, nnb ben U)iet)ietten ^aben iDir ^ente?'' „^tutt ift ber erfte nnh e^ ift ein SSiertel ^e^n." „®eftern morgen bin xii) nm brei a5iertel fieben anfgeftanben, aber am tiierten -3^Ii ftanben tDir alle nm ^alb t)ier anf." „®a^ ift jn frit^ fiir micf|. Qd) fte^e nie t)or je^n 3Jiinnten nad) fieben anf/' „®ann fommen ®ie fpdt in bie ©c^nle. SBir fangen nm brei aSiertel nenn an.'' (c) 1. What day of the week and of the month is to-day? 2. To-day is Wednesday, the twelfth of February. 3. What time was it when you went to bed last Sunday evening? 4. It was half past ten, or perhaps it was quarter to eleven, but on Monday I went to bed at twenty-five minutes past nine. 5. I saw him here in the city at quarter past eleven on Thurs- day, the seventh of October, 1913. 6. Where were you at two o'clock and at half past two on Saturday the eighth of May, 1897? Tuesday, March 18, 1915. (d) A Letter. — Dear Sister : Last Friday, the fourteenth of March, we got up at quarter past six. After we had eaten 140 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. at seven o'clock, we went into the city at quarter to eight. Before eleven o'clock I had bought a new dress. Then we waited till quarter to twelve before we came home. We were both very tired before half past twelve, but I bought a beauti- ful dress. Your [you] loving sister. LESSON XLIX. Proper Nouns. 2IIt f^eibelberg, bu fetne, Du Stat>i an (El^rcn retd?; 2lm Hecfar unb am Ht|etne Ketn' anbre fommt bir gletd?. — ©c^cffel. 225. Proper Names. — Names of persons or places usually have no inflection except an ^^ in the genitive singular. 29St(^c(m^ ^hdilcVf William's books. ^crttt 'MMcv§ ^an^f Mr. Miller's house. ^ic ©tra^Ctt ScrUn^, the streets of Berlin. ^tc ^liiffc fRn^ianHf the rivers of Bussia. (a) Names of persons ending in an s sound take an apostrophe in the genitive ; names of places ending in an s sound substi- tute the dative with t)Ott. ^xW SKcffcr, Fritz's knife, ^ic ©ttagctt tlOtt ^axx^f the streets of Paris. (b) When modified by the definite article, proper nouns are uninflected. When they are modified by an adjective, this must be preceded by the definite article. PROPER NOUNS. 141 ^a§ ^a\X§ ht§ ^tvvn WlMtv, the house of Mr. Miller, ^ic SKuttcr bcr gutcn 5ttttta, good Anna's mother. @r gai ci^ bem ncittett 2Bi(^c(tn. He gave it to little William. ^ic 233a(t»er bc^ fcrnett JRuPanb, the forests of distant Russia. (c) German often uses the article with a proper noun where English does not. Thafs Charles. ^'a§ tft (bet) ^axL Give it to Mary, (^ih t§ bcr 9Jlaric» 226. Vocabulary. bcr fit% Fred. bag 2)Ctttfti^'Iattb, Germany. bet ^o'^attit, Jb/iw. httom'mttif htfam', Bcfom'ntcit ber ^arl, Charles. (!^abctt), to get, secure. bic ^n'na, Anna, Ann. t^aVitUf f^itU, gc^dtctt Oiabtn), bte Syjattc', Mary, Marie. Ct p(t, ^o hold. ha^ ^mt'vxla, America, fttts, short, 227. Exercise. (a) 1. ©er Heine ^o^ann ^t gri^' ©itd^er genommen utib ber guten 3)iarte gegeben. 2. ®a^ finb ^o^nn^ gebern, bte aJiarie ^citt; fie l^at fie t)on ^arl befomtnen. 3. 2lnna ift brei- unbein^alb 3^a^re alter al^ ^avl, aber grife' ©ruber ^'o^ann ift anbertfjafb Qaijxt alter ate 5lnna. 4. T)ie ©aume be^ alten S)eutf^Ianb finb ni^t fo gro^ tt)ie bie be^ f(^ijnen 2lmerifa. 5. ^art, IDO ^aben @ie ben furjen SRod befomnten? 6. T)a^ ift !ein Stod; e^ ift ein ^leib, ba^ ber Meinen 2Inna ge^tirt. W rf-3o%tin, ma^ fatten ®ie ba in ber §anb?" ,,'Da^ ift gri^' Su(^ iiber ba§ f(i)5ne ©eutfiiiranb.'' „Unb ^aben @ie e^ Don gri^ befontmen?" „9Jein, grife l^at e^ (bem) ^arl gegeben unb ^arl gab e^ ber fteinen 2Karie.'' 142 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. „Unb bte fletne Ttaxk ijat e^ 3'^nen gegeben?" , „S^, unb id) tuerbe e^ (ber) 3tnna geben," (c) 1. John and Charles are Fred's brothers. 2. Anna and Marie are sisters. 3. Fred's brother John knows Marie's sister Anna. 4. All the children went from America to Germany, where they stayed a short time. 5. There little Fred's brother Charles got more things than he could hold in both hands. 6. When they came home to America in March, Anna's dresses were shorter than in January. (d) " John, where did you get that reader ? " " This isn't a reader ; this is Fred's grammar. I got it from Fred." " Well, hold it in your (ber) left hand and read a line and a half in the third exercise on page seventy-three." " I can read two and a half lines, but I cannot translate." " Well, perhaps John or Charles will translate for you." LESSON L. Review. Das fletne rDortd?en ^IlTug" 3ft bod? von alien Hiiffen, Die Xrtenfdpen inaden miiffen, Die allerl^drtfte Hug. — S3ed^ftetn. 228. Review Questions. (a) 1. How are adjectives and adverbs compared ? 2. Do adverbs or adjectives have two forms in the superlative ? 3. Explain the uses of these two forms. 4. Give eight REVIEW. 143 irregular comparisons. 5. How is than following a com- parative expressed in German ? 6. Give the German for as . , . as and tJie . . . the. (b) 1. Count from one to one hundred in German. 2. How does German distinguish a hundred and one hundred f 3. Give the rule for forming ordinals. 4. What are the various Ger- man equivalents for half? (c) 1. Name the months and the days of the week. 2. Give all the rules for telling the time of day. 3. Illustrate each. 4. How does German ask the day of the week ? 5. Of the month ? 6. Give the rule for dating a letter. 7. What expression usually precedes the year date ? (d) 1. What is the only difference between German and English use of proper nouns ? 2. What is the distinction in use between names of persons ending in an s sound and names of places ending in an s sound ? 3. Comment on the use of the article with German proper names. 229. Review Exercise. (a) 1. Sart ift tttd^t fo gro^ tDte 3^o^ann, a6er er tft gr5^er at^ 3lnna, unb grtfe ift am gro^ten. 2. ^e Iclnger mtr lernen, befto me^r tt)if[en tt)ir* ♦ 3. aic^tmal neun ift stDeiunbfiebstg, uttb bie §alfte t3on jlt)eiunbfieb5tg ift fe^^unbbrei^ig. 4. Qn ber brttten 2lufgabe auf ber neununbai^tsigften @eite ijaUn mtr nur anbertf)alb ^tiltn iiberfe^en fcinnen. 5. 9Biet)tet U^r ift e^ ? ©en tt)iet)telten ^aben tt)ir f)eute ? SBe((^en 2^ag f)aben tt)tr ^eute ? 6. 2lm T)onner^tag bem t)ierten 3^uU, tm ^a^re a^tje^n^unbert^^ fiebenunbtteunjig ^aben metne betben ^©ritber jn^eiunbein^Ib ©tunben ti:)artett mitffen. 7. gr tft am britten gebruar urn bret SSiertel neuti gefommen, unb nm ijalb je^n tft er gegangen* 8. ©onntag ben erften Wdx^ finb tt)ir urn etn aSiertet fteben auf^ 144 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. geftattbeti, 9. 35te 5Kutter ber fletnen 3lnna ^t gri^' aJZeffer in ©eutfi^Ianb ge!auft, 10. ©ann ijat fie e^ (bem) ^arl gelie^en* (b) 1. Her oldest daughter has the most beautiful clothes. 2. This tree is higher than that ; it is the highest in the gar- den. 3. Anna is as old as Fred's sister, but not so old as Marie. 4. John is bigger than his brother, but Charles is the biggest. 5. The faster we try to translate, the more mistakes we make. 6. Six times eight is twice as much as twelve times two. 7. 629,354 and 756,871 is 1,386,225. 8. Please read a line and a half in the third exercise on the seventy-fourth page. 9. What day of the week and of the month is it, and what time is it ? 10. It was quarter to ten when you came ; now it is quarter past ten. Boston, August 18, 1916. (c) A Letter, — My dear friend: You asked me about my brothers and sisters. I have three brothers and two sisters. The brothers are named Fred, Charles, and John, and the sis- ters, Mary and Anna. Fred is older than Mary, but not so old as Charles. Anna is as old as Fred, and John is the oldest in the family. Mary can sing better than the boys ; but Anna sings most beautifully. We all go to school every morning at half past eight and come home at quarter past one. Your friend. Qd) ^atf etnen ^ameraben, (Stneti beffern finbft bu nit ; ®te 2:rommeI fd)(ug jum ©treite, @r gtng an meiner (Sette Qn glet^em ©c^ritt unb SCritt. BEVIEW, 145 ©tie ^uget !am geflogen ; ®tlf^ mir ober gilt e§ btr? ^'^ti ^t e0 lr)eggert[fen, 6r Itegt mir tior ben ^it^en, 311^ mart em (gtiid t)on tnir* 9Bttt mir bie §anb not^ reid^en, ©erlDeil ic^ eben lab' ; „^ann bir bie §anb nidjt geben ; ©teib' bu im ett)'gen geben ajiein guter Samerab !" — Subtotg Ui^lanb. a)ie axmt Ketne S^^^^* @^ h)ar einmal eine arme, Heine 3^bee, (gin arme^, f^mat^tige^ SSSefen,— !Da famen brei ©id^ter be^ S93eg^, o tDe^ ! Unb ^aben fie anfgelefen. S)er eine matfjt einen @^3rn(f) baran^ — S)a^ ^ielt bie fleine ^'bee nod^ au^ ; ®er jlDeite, eine :33a((abe — ®a iDurbe fie [^n)ac^ nnb malabe ; ®er britte iDoItf fie Dernjenben ^u einem 9ioman in jmei Sanben, !Dem ftarb fie unter ben §anben. — otto ©ommcr^torff. 146 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON LI. The Passive Voice. (Sliicf Idgt fid? ntd^t r»on (Sott erbttten Unb ntd?t t)om ^tmmel fid? erflel^n, €s tDtrb erMmpft ntd?t, ntd?t erftritten, Unb nte errungen fann man's fel^n. — SSei^I. 230. The Passive Voice of transitive verbs is formed by conjugating tperbetl with the past participle (the third one of the principal parts). In the perfect tenses the form tDOrbett is used for getDorben. (a) SBerben thus has* two meanings in English besides its regular meaning, to become. In the future it means shall or will; in the passive, am, is, or are. Distinguish carefully; id) tDerbe, / become; t(^ tDcrbe (oben, / shall praise; t(^ iDcrbe getobt, I am praised. When you see a form of tDerbetl, look carefully to see whether it is used independently, or is fol- lowed by a simple infinitive, or by a past participle, and then , translate accordingly. Except in the future it may often be translated by get. Qd) inurbe !ran!, / got sick. Qd) tt)urbe gef(f)Iagen, I got hit. 231. Conjugation of the Passive. Present Indicative. td^ wctbe gcIoBt, gcfc^ctt ttitr tticrbcn gcIoBt, gefcl^en / am praised^ seen. we are praised, seen. btt wirft ^tU% ocfe^en x^x ttJcrbet gclofit, gcfc^ctt thou art praised, seen. you are praised^ seen. tx ttitrb gclobt, gcfc^ctt fie mcrbcn gcloBt, gefc^cn he is praised, seen. they are praised, seen. THE PASSIVE VOICE. 147 Synopsis. Pres. i^ tticrbc gctoBt, / am Perf. id^ hin qtloU irborbcn, / praised. have been praised. Past. i(^ ttjurbc gcluBt, / was P. Perf. tci^ mar gdoBt ttJOtbcn, praised. I had been praised. Fut. irJ^ iticrbc geloBt tuerbcn^ F. Perf. x^ tucrbc gcIoBt njorbcn / shall be praised. feiu, / shall have been praised. Imperative. — ttlcrbc gctobt (rare), luetbet gctobt (rare)^ &6 praised. Note. — The passive imperative is usually formed with felit : — fci ^tloUf fcib gcloBt, fcictt Sic gcIoBt, 6e praised. Infinitive. — Pres. gcluBt (gu) tticrben, ^o 5e praised. Perf. geloBt ttiotbctt (gu) fcttt, ^0 have been praised. Participle. — Pres. 5U lobettb, ^0 5e praised (used only as a declinable adjective preceding its noun) : cttt ^tt (uBcjtbcr ^atttt^ a man to be praised. Past, qtlofft, praised. (a) Conjugate each tense of the indicative in full, and give complete synopses in the second and third singular, and first, second, and third persons plural. 232. Dative of Agent. — The agent is put in the dative after t)on. The English by with the agent is never German itu 3c§ tijerbc tiutt bcm Secret gclobt I am praised by the teacher. ^tt bift tJUtt bciner 9Jliittcr gclobt tnorbcn* You have been praised by your mother. 233. Vocabulary. bcr ^efn^', bie S3efu^(S^c, visit. ct^aCtcn, cr^tclt^ cr^jarteit (^a= bic ^tt'tc, middle^ center. bctt), er etJ|a(t', ^0 receive. ^a^ gen'ftcr, bie fjcnftct, window. fa('(cn, ftel, gefattcn (fcin), cf beftt'^en, befuti^'tc, bcfurfft' (^a= fallt, ^o fall. bctt), ^0 v/si^; (in speaking of ^zx\^xt'6)tn, 5crbvat^', ^crbto'd^ett school) to attend (as a pupil, not (^abctt), cr ^txWx^i', to smash, as a visitor). break to pieces. 148 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 234. Exercise. (a) 1. @r tft au^ bem genfter in bie 3JJttte be^ ©attend gefallen, aber er murbe nt(f)t Derle^t. 2. ©te gter, bte lt)tr tjott -^o^atiti er^alten ^aben, finb atle t)on bem 2!JJdbcf)en jer* broc^en iDorben. 3. §eute morgen tDerben ©ie gelobt tDerben, benn bte Slufgabe ift t)on -3^nen rit^tig uberfe^t tDorben. 4. !Sie ^Taffe unb ber ^tetter finb t)om %x\ijt gefallen unb finb beibe jerbro(^en iDorben. 5. Dlai^bent bie ©d^e itberfe|t iperben, iDirb bie Hnfgabe anf bentf(^ gef(f)rieben n)erben. 6. SBenn id^ meinen grennb befnd^e, n^erbe i^ Don feinen lleinen Sriibern nnter^alten. {h) „33on irem ift ba^ genfter jerbrod^en morben ?" „S)a^ genfter mnrbe t)on feinem ber @^iiler jerbrod^en, bie nnfere @d^n(e befnd^en." „2lber e^ ift gerbrod^en n^orben, af^ x6) einen ^efnd^ t)on einem grennbe er^ielt." ,,3^^ ^t^be ettDa^ an^ bem i^enfter fatten fe^en, aber e« n)ar fc^on jerbrod^en toorben, e^e id^ ba^ fal^." (c) 1. When I fell out of the window, I was not hurt. 2. What school do you attend, and from whom did you re- ceive those books ? 3. In the middle of the lesson the win- dow was smashed by a ball. 4. Your visit is too short ; you must stay longer when you visit us. 5. It is fine (fd^on) to be called out of the class to be praised by the teacher. 6. When these words have been written, the whole exercise will have to be translated. {d) " What school does your brother Charles attend ? Where is he ? '' " To-day he isn't attending any school. He fell out of the window yesterday and was hurt.'' THE PASSIVE VOICE. 149 " Did he receive his books at home, or weren't these exer- cises written by him ? " " Yes, his books were brought (^oletl) by a friend, and all these sentences were translated by Charles." " Good. He will be praised by his teacher, because these sentences were all written correctly." LESSON LII. The Passive Voice. (Es tft bcfttmmt in (Sottes Hat, Dag man com £tebftcn, was man I^at, ITTug fd?etben. — i^eud^ter^Ietcn. 235. Uses of the Past Participle. — When the Past Par- ticiple is used as an adjective in English, German uses feitt as copula. The door is shut, ^ie ^^iir ift gcfe^toffett. The cloth is torn. l)a^ Xnd^ ift jcmffctt, (a) This must not be confused with the passive construction, often expressed the same way in English (because in English to be is both the copula and the sign of the passive).^ The door is (being) shut. 'J)tC ^iir toxvh gefti^Iuffcit* The cloth is (being) torn, ^a^ %x\ti^ toM SCtriffCtt. (b) The auxiliary depends upon whether a condition is asserted or an action. A simple way to distinguish is to make the verb active. If the tense stays the same without changing the meaning of the original sentence, use tperbett. But if, in 150 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, order to keep the original meaning, you have to change the tense, use [eitl* Passive. Active. Rule. Example. The door is being Some one is shut- Use WtX^tn. ^ic %nv tt)trb gc= shut. ting the door. fl^luffctt* The door is shut. Some one has shut Use fettt* ^tc Xnv ift ge= the door. fc^Iojfett* The cloth is being Some one is tear- Use ttietbeu. ^a§ Xn6} ttiirb 5Cr:= torn, ing the cloth. riffciu The cloth is torn. Some one has torn Use fcttt* ^a§ Xuri^l'tft jcrnf* the cloth. fen* (c) Always use tt)erben when the agent is expressed. TJie cloth was torn may be translated correctly, ®a^ Xu6) Wax jerrif-^ fen or ©a^ Xui) tnurbe jerriffen, depending on the meaning, but The cloth was torn by the man can be translated correctly only by ©a^ %Vi6) murbe t)on bem 3)?anne gerrtffen. 236. Passive of Verbs governing the Dative. — Verbs followed by the dative are used only impersonally (that is, with e^ as subject) in the passive, the subject being put in the dative of indirect object. In dependent or inverted clauses e^ is omitted. I am thanked. @i§ luirb vxxx gebanft (lit. it is thanked to me). You were helped by a man. ^\x {tXX^f S^ltClt) ttltttbe tiOtt eittCItt 9JlattttC ge^olfctt* 237. Substitutes for the Passive. — German uses the passive less than English. (a) When the agent is not expressed, matt with the active may be used. / am thanked. 9)latt banft mtr* You were asked. '^axK fragtc btti^ (tw^, Stc)» We shall be convinced. WldM tuirb \xn^ ttber^eugctt^ It is said. SSlaw fagt. THE PASSIVE VOICE. 151 (b) When the agent is expressed, we may invert, making the agent the subject, and the subject, the object. You were helped by a man. @itt SSHann \\(ii bir ge^olfctt* Tlie cloth was torn by the man. ^er 'Mann 5em§ t>a§ Xn^* 238. Vocabulary. ber ^Ip'^cif hit ^^fcl, apple. cr gcfiiUt', to please, followed by bet 293eg, bic S95egc, way, road. the dative. bic Ui^Vf bic U^ren, c?ocA:, i^^^c/i. ft^rrfcn, fc^ttfte, gcfi^irft (f^ahtn), ha^ Xnd^, hit Xiid)tVf cloth. to send. ^eFfctt, l^alf, ge^olfctt (^abcn), er aerret'gcn, $cm^^ gcrrtf fctt (:^a= !^Uft, ^0 help, followed by the htn), to tear (to pieces). dative. brcit, imde, broad. gcfaFIctt, gcflct', gefaCten (^abeit), ttiett, /ar (not wide). 239. Exercise. (a) 1. 2Son h)em tDurben -3t)nen btefe Stpfel gegeben? 2. ©er ^naht tDurbe in bie Stabt gef(f)i(ft, urn etne U^r ju faufen; e^ irurbe tf)m auf bem 3Bege tion einem greutibe ge- ^olfen. 3. ©efallen ^^nett Jene breiten 3Iit(^er, bie fiir unfere Steiber gemadjt tDurben? 4. (5^ tDurbe bem ©(^itler bott ben anberen gebanft, al^ man i^m bie fc^onen St^fel ft^idte, bie er ben anberen @(^ulern gab. 5. Ttan ^pitlt nnb fingt auf bem SBege nad) ©aufe, nad)bem bie Slufgaben gefc^rieben finb. 6. !T)er flei^igfte Snabe ift nad) §aufe gefd^idt tDorben, treit bie @a^e bon i^m fo [d)ne{( iiberfe^t njurben. (6) „g^ gefallt mir nt^t, biefe^ jerriffene Xud) ^ier ju fet)en/' „©o? 3ft ba^ 5ru(^ serriffen?'' „Qa. @^ ift bon jenem ^naben jerriffen iDorben. ® tDurbe i^m bon feinem Sruber ge^offen.'' „9Jfan foHte i^n na^ §aufe fd)iden.'' „?Jein, e^ ift ju tueit ; ber Seg ift ju lang/' 152 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (c) 1. John was sent the long way to the city to fetch a clock and some apples. 2. That broad piece of cloth that has been torn doesn't please me. 3. The pupil was helped by the teacher, and the teacher was thanked by the pupil. 4. The cloth is torn, they say, but by whom was it totn ? 5. How far is it home, and is the way beautiful ? 6. The girl became red when she was praised by her mother. (d) " Did it please your mother when you were sent home with a torn coat ? '' " She did not know that my coat was torn ; I did not show it to her." " Is it far to your house ? Is the way long ? " " Yes, but I was helped on the way by an old man." " Did you thank him ? Old men must always be thanked by boys, when the boys are helped by them." " Yes, he gave me an apple and I thanked him, and I showed him where the cloth was torn." LESSON LIII. Reflexive Verbs. <£s btlbet tin Calent fid? in ber Stille, Std? ctn Cl^arafter in bem Strom ber IPelt. — @oct^c. 240. Reflexive Verbs. — A reflexive verb is one whose object is a pronoun referring to the subject. (a) The reflexive pronoun for the first and second persons is the same as the personal, except for ©te (formal address). For the third person, including man and (Sie, it is fi(^ in both numbers and cases (dat. and ace). REFLEXIVE VERBS. 153 (b) As the reflexive verb always has an object (the pronoun), the auxiliary is always ^aben, 241. Conjugation of a Reflexive. Indicative. Present. Past, id) frcuc mid}, I rejoice. id) frcutc mxd)f I rejoiced. btt frcuft t>xd}f thou rejoicest. btt freuteft hidj, thou rejoicedst. tv frcut ftti^, he rejoices. tv freutc \idj, he rejoiced. toiv frcttCtt tttt^, we rejoice. toix frcutcn un^, we rejoiced. xf^t frcut mdjf you rejoice. xf^x frcutct cud^, you rejoiced. ftc freuctt ftti^, they rejoice. ftc frctttett fic^, they rejoiced. Future. id} mcrbe midj frcucn, / shall rejoice. btt ttiirft bt(i^ frcttCtt, ^/low wilt rejoice, etc. iri^ ^afic mtti^ gcfrcttt, / /iaue rejoiced. btt ^aft bid^ gcfrcttt, thou hast rejoiced, etc. Pas« Perfect. id} f^aiit mid} Qcfrcttt, / had rejoiced. btt ^attcft biti^ gcfrcttt, thou hadst rejoiced, etc. Future Perfect. id} tucrbc mid} gcfrettt l^abew, /sTiaZZ 7i(z?;e rejoiced. btt ttiirft bid^ gefrcttt l^aBen, «/iow i(Ji7« /la^e rejoiced, etc. Imperative. ftctte btii^, frcttt tnd}, frcttCtt @ic ftr^, re/oice. Infinitives. Pres. m (mii^, btt^, etc.) (ju) frcttCtt, ^o rejoice. Perf. ft(^ (n«(^, bi(i^, etc.) gcfrcttt (311) l^aiett, ^0 /tave rejoiced. 154 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. Participles. Pres. ft(ij ftCttCttb, rejoicing (rare). Past, fi^ gefreut, rejoiced (used only in compound tenses, never as adjective). (a) Give complete synopses of all persons and both numbers, including the formal address. Conjugate each tense in full, remembering to change the reflexive pronoun in each form to agree with the personal one (subject) . 242. Use of Reflexives. — Reflexives are commoner in Ger- man than in English. (a) Any transitive verb may be used refiexively. '^6) fti^ttcibc ba^ %\t\\^. I cut the meat. '^^ fti^ttcibc m\6). I cut myself. (b) Intransitives may also be used refiexively. This is an impersonal idiom, used only vs^ith e^» §icr tait^t c§ ftrfi fc^r fr^iin. The dancing here is very fine. Q:§ gel^t fid) nic^t fe^r gut im SBalbc* The walking is not good in the wood. @^ fti^ttitmmt fit^ ttti^t (cic^t in btcfem falteu Staffer, Swimming isn't easy in this cold water. (c) Reflexives are often used as substitutes for the passive. The door is opened (opens), ^ic Xnv iiffnct fid^* The book has been lost. ^a§ ^x\d) i}at ftc^ ijcttorcti* This paper is easily torn, ^ief C)§ *^5aergeffen, ber t)on jtuei ^ferben gejogen tDurbe. 3. Qd) ermnere mid^ ^tl^e^ SSater^ fe^r gut; befinbet er ft(^ gut? 4. ©ie tDtrb fid) freueu, treun fie bie gro^eu ^ferbe uub ben f^onen SBagen fie^t. 5. Qi) 1:)attt t)ergeffen, ba^ ba^ "ipferb ben SBagen in bie ©d^eune gegogen ^atte. 6. Qd) freue mid), ba^ @ie fid) fo gut befinben. (b) „'&k befinben @ie fic^ ^eute morgen?'' „Qi) freue mic^, ba^ id) mic^ fe^r gut befinbe.'' „§aben ©ie- ben gifd^er gefef)en, beffen ^ferbe ben breiten SBagen in bie ®d)eune gegogen ^ben?'' „9^ein, id) erinnere mii^ feiner nxiijt" „SBie I)aben @ie i^n t)ergeffen fdnnen? (Sr tnar eben l^ier." (c) 1. How do you do to-day, and how is your father? 2. I am glad that you have not forgotten me. I remember you very well. 3. Are those the fisherman's horses, that are pulling that big wagon into the barn ? 4. Were you glad that you had remembered all the words in the sentence ? 5. I had forgotten that you had been sick, but I am glad that you are well now. 6. I do not remember your horse, but I for- get very easily. (d) " Good morning ! How do you do this morning ? " " Very well, thank you. I cannot remember when I have been so well." 156 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. " I am glad to hear it. Won't you come and make me a visit ? I will show you my new horses." " I had forgotten that you had a barn. I am glad that you have one.'' " Yes, I have two carriages and two beautiful horses." " Oh, yes, now I remember the barn. Thank you, I shall be glad to see all that." LESSON LIV. Impersonal Verbs. 5d?on fSngt es an 5U bdmmern. Per ITTonb als ^trt crmad^t Unb ftngt ben IPoIfenldmmern (Etn £teb 3ur guten TXad^t — ©etbeU 245. Impersonal Verbs. — Impersonal verbs are of four kinds or classes : pure impersonals, reflexive impersonals, imper- sonals with the accusative, and impersonals with the dative. (a) Impersonals are found only in the third person singular, and are conjugated only with the pronoun e^* They are usu- ally weak and take ^aben as auxiliary, except gef (^e^en, gelingen, and einfatlen. 246. Pure Impersonals usually denote states of the weather : e^ regnet, it rains; e^ fd^neit, it snows. Conjugation of e^ regnet^ it rains. Pres. c§ rcgttCt, it rains. Past. t^ rcgnete, it rained. Fut. c§ ttiirb rcgnen, it will rain. IMPERSONAL VERBS, 157 Perf . t§ f^at gcrcgnct, it has rained. P. Perf. c^ f^atU gcrcgnct, it had rained. F. Perf. c§ ttitrtJ gcrcgnct f^abtUf it will have rained. Infinitive. — Pres. (ju) tcgttCtt, to rain. Perf. gcregttct (gu) ^abctt, «o Aave rained. 247. Reflexive Impersonals include such as e^ ftagt ft(^, t^ is a question; eg fcflidt [id), i^ ^s proper; eg t)erfte^t firf|, i^ *s a matter of course. Conjugation of eg [(^idt fi(^, ^^ is proper, Pres. c^ fri^ttft fir^, i^ IS j9roi9er. Past. 0)3 f c^irftc fid^, i^ teas proper. Fut. ci§ tuitb fi(!^ fd^irfcn, i^ will beproper. Perf. C!^ ^at fil^ gcfti^icft, i^ Aas been proper. P. Perf. c§ ^attC fir^ gcfti^irft, it had been proper. F. Perf. t§ Uiirb fit^ gcfrfftrft ^aBctt, i^ w?i7Z /lave been proper. Infinitive.— Pres. m (ju) fci^itfcn, ^o beproper. Perf. m gcfd^irft (gu) l^a^en^ ^o /iat;e been proper. 248. Impersonals with the Accusative include such as eg freut mic^, lam glad; eg tDUnbert mtc^, I wonder. Conjugation of eg freut tnic^, / am glad. Present. C^ freut mx^f I am glad. t§ freut nn^f we are glad. t§ freut hid}f thou art glad. e^ freut eur^l, you are glad. t§ freut i^tt (fie, eg), he (she, it) is glad. c§ freut fie, they are glad. Synopsis. Pres. c§ freut mi(^, / am < Past. e§ freute btti^, ^/lo?^ wast glad. Fut. e!^ luirb U}n freueu, he will be glad. Perf. e§ Ijat uu^ gefreut, we have been (were) glad. 158 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, P. Perf. t§ ^atte CU(^ gefrcut, you-had been glad. F. Perf. t^ ttJitb fie gcfrcut ^laben, they will have been glad. Infinitive. — Pres. nti^, 'tsx^f etc., (311) freucit* Perf. mx^t b^, etc., gcfrcttt (^u) \)a^tn, 249. Impersonals with the Dative include such as e^ tUt tntr fetb, / am sorry; e^ fallt mir ein, it occurs to me; e^ gelingt mir, I succeed; e^ gefi^te^t mir, it happens to me. Conjugation of e^ tut tnir leib, / am sorry. Present. e§ iVii mix (eib, / am sorry. t^ tnt nn^ (cib, we are sorry, t§ int bit Icib, thou art sorry. t§ int txtd} (eib, you are sorry. t^ tnt xf}m (il)r, i^nt) (eib, he {she^ t§ txxt i^ncn Ux^, they are sorry, it) is sorry. Synopsis. Pres. t§ tnt mix ttxhf I am sorry. Past. c^ tat bir tcib, thou wast sorry. Put. t§ ttiirb x\}m Icib tun, he will be sorry. Perf. t^ i\at nn^ (cib ^ttmf we have been sorry, P. Perf. e§ ^attc cur^ (eib gctatt, you had been sorry. F. Perf. t^ ttiirb i^nctt (eib getan ^a^tn^ they will have been sorry. Infinitive. — Pres. mir, bir, etc., ttxh (311) ttttt. Perf. mir, bir, etc., leib qttan (ju) \)a^tn, 250. @^ gibt; e^ ift, — There is (there are) is expressed in two ways in German ; e^ gibt and e^ ift. (a) To express general existence without naming a limited, definite place, use e^ gibt. It is always impersonal, singular, takes the accusative, and e^ is never omitted. (S§ gibt t)ie(e ftol^e 2tntt, There are many proud people. SBttig gibt t§ S'Jette^ ? What is there new? ( What's the news?) IMPEBSONAL VERBS. 159 (6) To express particular existence in a limited, definite place use e^ ift or e^ finb (§ 163). It is personal, the verb agreeing in person and number with the real subject (not e^), which is always in the nominative case. @^ is omitted in an inverted or subordinate clause. ^§ ift fein ^la^ me^r tm Xf^taitv. There is no more room in the theatre. ^§ finb 5ttiei (SJlafcr auf bcm Xifc^c. There are two glasses on the table. GJcftcrn ttiar fcitt ^(a^ im Xf^tatcv. Yesterday there was no room in the theatre. ^^ fel^c, baft stuei (^(afcr auf bcm Xi^d^t finb* / see that there are two glasses on the table. 251. Vocabulary. c^ tcg'ttet, e§ rcgnete, ci^ i^at e§ tut mir Uxh^ c§ iat mh Uxh, c§ gcrcgnet, it^s raining. f^at mir (eib gctau, / am sorry. t§ f^ttcit^ c^ ft^jttcite, t§ ^at ge= t§ ^tlin^t' mir, t^ gckng' miVf c^ fd^ttcit, ifs snowing. ift mir gelutt'gctt, / succeed, in, c^ Sic^t, c§ 5og, Ci^ ^at gc^ogcn, with the infinitive. there's a draft. C§ gcfd^ic^t', c§ gefti^a^f e§ ift c§ fragt firi^, c§ fragtc fiti^, e^ f)at gcfri^c'^cn, to happen, to, with fid^ gcfragt, it is a question, dative. about, um with accusative. t^ faltt mir tin', c§ fte( mir citt', t^ t§ t)erfte!)t' fi^, t§ ijcrftattb' fir^i, c^ ift mir cingefaUctt, it occurs to f^ai fi^ tJerftan'ben, it is a matter me ; t§ fntlt mir itidftt eiit, / of course. ' shouldnH think of {such a thing) . t^ f rcut miti^, t§ frcute mi^, c§ ^ai 295a^ f aUt ^^ntn cin? What are mx(il gcfreut, / am glad. you thinking of f 252. Exercise. (a) 1. g^ tut mir feib, ba^ e^ un^ nt(^t gelungen ift, ben fiirsef ten SBeg ju finben, 2. ©a^ gibt'^ 5«eue^? ©^ freut mt(^, ba^ e^ fo gefi^e^en ift. 3. g^ nerfte^t fit^, ba^ e^ un^ freut, l^ier ju fifeen, menu e^ regnet unb fc^neit. 4. g^ gi6t 160 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. fettten beffereti greutib al^ ^ol^antt, 5. g^ tut mtr tetb, ba^ e^ ^ier jie^t, aber e^ fdllt mir nt(f)t etn, tti^ anbere ^i^^^^ 3^ ge^en* 6. (g^ fragt fi^, toann e^ nn^ gelingen n)irb, biefe (Sd^e rid^ttg ju uberfe^en, (&) „9Ba^ fallt ^'^tien eiti? SBtr fbnnen nt(f)t ^tnge^en, tDenn e^ regnet unb [c^neit." „©a^ t^erfte^t fi(^, aber e^ fragt fii^, ob tvix l^ier bleiben tDoIIen, n)o e^ ste^t*'' ud^ tut mtr letb, ba^ e^ un^ ntd^t gelungen tft, fritter ju ge^en/' „Qa, aber e^ freut mtc^, ba§ e^ balb auf^oren tcirb ju regnen-'' ,,3Bentt ba^ gefd)ie^t, [o fdnnen tt)ir ^tuge^eu-" (c) 1. What are you thinking of ? There's a draft here. 2. Is it raining or snowing ? 3. I am sorry that you didn't succeed in translating these long sentences. 4. I was glad that it occurred to me to look the words up in the dictionary. 5. It happened yesterday that there was a draft in school. 6. Are you sorry or glad that it is snowing and raining ? (d) " What were you thinking of ? It is a matter of course that you will translate this exercise." " There's a draft here and I feel (§ 243) sick. Mayn't I go home ? " " No, it is snowing and raining. I am sorry that it happens so, but you will have to stay here." " It occurs to me now that I have something to eat in my coat. Perhaps I shall succeed in finding it." " I am glad that you have something, for there is nothing warm here." REVIEW. 161 LESSON LV. Review. ^veu^voU nnb letbcoK, geban!ent?oII fein; ^an^zn unb bangen in fd^tpebenber petit ; ^immcll^od? jaud73enb, 3um Cobe bctriibt, (Sliicflid? allcin tft bie Seele, bie Itebt. — ®otti}c. 253. Review Questions. (a) 1. Give the rule for forming the passive in German. 2. How many meanings may lt)erben have in English? 3. Il- lustrate each. 4. How is the agent expressed in German? 5. What is the best way to tell when to use iDerben and when fetn, with the past participle ? 6. How do you express the passive of German verbs that take the dative? 7. Give two examples. 8. Which language uses the passive more frequently? 9. Give the common German substitutes for the passive. * 10. When may they be used ? (b) 1. Give the reflexive pronouns for each person. 2. Which language uses the reflexive more often ? 3. Give a reflexive that takes the genitive. 4. May intransitives be used reflexively in German ? 5. If so, what is their English equivalent? 6. Give an illustration of the German reflex- ive used for the English passive. (c) 1. Name the four kinds of impersonal verbs. 2. State two peculiarities of impersonals. 3. Which impersonals correspond exactly to the English usage ? 4. Give and illustrate the distinction between the use of e^ gibt and that of ee ift. 162 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 254. Review Exercise. (a) 1. SSon iDcrn tDurbe ba^ genfter jerbroi^en? 2. 911^ e^ iDarm im ^tmmer tnurbe, mac^tett tDir ba^ genfter auf ; banti jog e§. 3. !T)a^ 2;u(^ ift jerriffen ; e^ tft t)on bem Snaben get* rtffen tDorben, 4. (g^ it)urbe mtr t)on etnem SJfanne ge^olfen, bem t)on meinem 3Sater gebanft iDurbe, 5. 2Bir freuen un^, bag e^ fidf) auf biefem SBege [o gut ge^t, 6. (g^ freut un^, bag tntr un§ be^ alten Tlanm^ erinnert ^aben, 7. (g^ gibt ©c^uler, beueu e^ letb tut, tvtnn e^ fctinett, fo bag fie bie ®df)ule ntd^t be[u(^en founen, 8. 2lber ba^ gefi^te^t nic^t iu unferer ©c^ule, mo e^ \\ii) utd^t um ba^ SBetter fragt. 9. ?fa(f)bem e^ aufge^ort ^t ju regnen, U)irb e^ dtedetc^t f^neieu* 10. (g^ tut mir leib, bag e^ mtr ntc^t gelungeu tft, ^'^rem 3Sater ju gefalleu. (b) 1. It became cold and there was a draft, when the win- dow was broken. 2. I see that the cloth is torn, but by whom was it torn ? 3. I, was thanked by an old man, who had been helped by my friend. (Write two ways.) 4. He was glad that it wasn't raining. 5. The little girl did not remember that her mother was well. 6. I am sorry, but I can't remember the next word. 7. There are pupils in this city who like to study. 8. I am sorry, but there are too many mistakes in that last sentence. 9. It is a matter of course that he will not succeed. 10. I am sorry that there is a draft ; I had forgotten that it was snowing. (c) A Story. — YesteTdsiy we went into the wood (beH 2BaIb). It got cold and began to rain, but we succeeded in finding a little house in which we played. The windows had been smashed by someone, and there was a draft, but we succeeded in getting warm. We played games and sang songs and were sorry when we had to go home. BEVIEW. 163 ®a^ ein ^naV ein dlMtin fte^n, 9?5^Iein auf ber §etben, ' SBar fo iung unb tnorgenfrfion, 8tef er fc^nett, e^ nal) ju fe{)n, @a^^^ tntt Dtelett greuben* dtMtin, $Rd^iein, 9to^Iein rot, / SR5^Iem auf ber ^eibett* ^nabe \pva(i) : ,,3^^) bterfie btc^, dtUkxn auf ber §eibeu!" 9?5^rem fpra^ : „Q^ fte^e bt(^, !Da^ bu eU)tg beu!ft an mti^, Unb ii) U)tir^ ni(^t leibeh/' 9?5^tetn, 5Ro^(etn, 9tb^(etn rot, 9ft5^Iein auf ber §eiben- Unb ber toilbe ^nabe brad^ '^ SRd^Ietn auf ber ^etben ; JRo^Iein me^rte fid^ unb ftad), §alf t^m bod) !etn 2Bel) unb ^d), Ttu'^V e^ eben (etben, dtUkin, 9?o^tetn, dtMidn rot, 9ftij^(etn auf ber §eiben» 164 ELEMENTS OF GEBMAN. LESSON LVI. The Subjunctive. The Auxiliaries. (Eincs fd?t(f t fid? ntd?t fiir alle, Sel^e jeber, wk er's tretbe, Scl^c jeber, ipo cr bleibc, Unb wet ftet^t, bag er ntd?t falle. - 255. The Subjunctive Mode is formed regularly from the cor- responding tense of the indicative. The subjunctive endings are : — Singular. Plural. 1st person =c -Ctt 2d person =eft -ti 3d person =c *ett (a) The present subjunctive is formed by adding these end- ings to the present stem, except in the case of fetn, which does not add ^e in the first and third persons singular, (h) The past subjunctive of weak verbs is the same as the indicative ; strong verbs add the regular endings above, and the root vowel takes umlaut when possible. (c) The future, perfect, past perfect, and future perfect sub- junctive are formed regularly from the corresponding tenses of the indicative. Instead of the indicative, the subjunctive of the auxiliaries '^aben (fettl) and tDcrben is used. {d) In German, as in English, there is a tendency to use the iAdicative, especially in conversation, even when the rule calls for the subjunctive. In learning the language, however, it is best to adhere to the usage which is generally accepted as correct. THE SUBJUNCTIVE, 166 256. Subjunctive of the Auxiliaries. No translation is given, as the meaning varies with the use. As the subjunctive is most used in dependent sentences, it is best learned in the dependent order. Present. Past. (baf3) if)r f^abtt 0)a^) fie f\ahcn fci fcieft fet fcten feict fcictt ttierbc merbcft ttiertie ttjerbett tticrbcn (bag) bu ptteft (bag) cr pttc (bag) ttJtr gotten (bag) i^r pttet (bag) fie pttett ttiare ttirireft ttJiire njiirett motet todttn mitrbe tuitrbeft ttiurbe ttJittbett ttitttbet ttitttbett (bag) ic^ f^ahtn ttJerbe (bag) bu l^aBen itierbeft (bag) er ^aben ttierbe, etc. (bag) x^ Qtf^aU ^abe (bag) t>n ^ti^aU ^abeft (bag) er ^tf^aU ^ahc, etc. (bag) iti^ Qtf^aU ^iitte (bag) btt ^tt^aitt f}aitc\i (bag) er ge^abt f)ixtttf etc. Future. feitt ttierbe feitt ttJerbeft fein ttierbe, etc. Perfect. gettiefpn fet getticf en feteft gettiefen fei, etc. Past Perfect. gettJefen ttJdre gettjefett ttiareft gettjefett ttidre, etc. Future Perfect. ttierben ttierbe ttierbeii ttierbeft ttierben ttierbe, etc. gettiorben fet gettforbeu feteft gettiorbett fet, etc. gettiurbett ttirire gettiorbett ttiareft gettiorbett ttiare, etc. (bag) id) gc^abt ^abett ttierbe gettiefen fein ttierbe gettiorbett feitt ttierbe (bag) bu ge^abt ^abett ttierbeft gettiefett feitt ttierbeft gettiorbett feitt ttierbeft (bag) er geljabt ^abett ttierbe, gettiefeit feitt ttierbe, gettiorbett feitt ttierbe, etc. etc. etc. (a) Conjugate all the tenses in full, and give complete synopses in each person. 166 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 257. Uses of the Subjunctive Mode. — The German subjunc- tive is used : (1) in indirect discourse {dependent subjunctive) ; (2) to express possibility {potential subjunctive) ; (3) to express a wish or command {optative or hortatory subjunctive) ; and (4) in some conditional sentences {conditional subjunctive). The de- pendent subjunctive will be treated in this lesson; (2) and (3) in Lesson LVII ; and (4) in Lesson LIX. Except in indirect discourse, the German subjunctive corresponds very closely to the English. 258. The Dependent Subjunctive is used in indirect discourse and indirect questions after verbs of saying, thinking, feeling, asking, etc. (Sr ^\aM\>it, ba^ x^ fratt! f ci. He thought that I ims sick. @r fdgtc, ber ^nahc fci im ^aufc. He said the hoy was in the house. (a) In indirect discourse English changes the present tense Ibo past, if the verb of the main clause is past. German may make this change, but usually it keeps the tense of direct discourse- He said, ''lam ilV @r fagte: ,,3*^ Bin franf/' He said that he was ill. ^v fagte, ba§ er frrmf fci* He said, ''I have a book.'' ^r fagte: ,,3<^ f)aht tin ^nd^*" He said that he had a book. @r fagtc/ bag cr cttt ^n6) ^aht. {b) When the form of the present subjunctive is the same as the indicative, German often changes the tense of the indi- rect discourse, in order to use a form distinctively subjunctive. He says that I have money. ($r fagt, t^a^^ x(^ ^clb i^diit. They say they 'have no time. Sic fagcit, fie i^aiitn hint 3cit (c) The indicative should be used if the speaker wisTies to emphasize his belief in the truth of what he reports @r fagtc, bag cr t§ nid^i gctan i}at He said that he didn't do it. ^^ qlanhtf t>a^ \>n tt^i ^aft* / think {am sure) that you are right. THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 167' 259. Vocabulary. bcr '^aVtSf bte 3Ba(bet^ wood. W\^^f ^^ff' tc, gc^offt' (^aBcti), bic Q^t\^x^'itf bie (SJcfc^itifttctt, ^o hope. story. (au'fctt, lief, gctaufen (fein), to run, \^a^ %tVi'tXf btc %tVitXf fire. ttiun'fc^cit, milttfr^'te, gcttJiiitfi^t' ftc§ amiifle'ren, amiiftcr'tc ft(^, ft(^ (^aficn), ^o lois/i, with a com- antiiflert' (^aBeit), ^o have a good plementary infinitive and ^u* ^ime ; used with and without gut* brau'tett, outside^ out (of doors), tV^df^'Uttf tX^'df^VUf tv^'df^W with words denoting rest. (^abctt), to tell, relate. oft, often. 260. Exercise. (a) 1. 3Btr ^offen, ba^ e^ brau^en nid)t ju Mi fern t^erbe; tDtr tDunfd^en hnxd) ben 2BaIb ju laufeti- 2. Unfere greunbe fagen, fie fatten fic^ oft amitfiert, al^ tDtr um ba^ geuer fa^en itnb ®efif)t(^ten erjci^Iten. 3. gr fagt, er fjabe nic^t fo t)iel ®elb, tt)te er iDiinfi^t, aber er ^offt, no(^ tttoa^ gu 6e!ommen» 4. ®er ft^nabe fagte, ba^ er oft brau^en im 333albe gelDefen feu 5. (Sr ^offte, ba^ feine SDJutter nt^t !ran! getnefen tt^cire. 6. 3=^ l^atte gegtaubt, ba^ er ®elb genug ge^abt f)atte, um ba^ §au^ ju faufen. (&) „Sr amitfiert fid^ ^ier nirfjt [e^r gut- ©r fagt, ba§ ba^, geuer ju ^ei^ fei»'' „Q(i) ^offe, ba^ e^ beffer iDerben tDerbe. SJian fagt, ba^ e^ brau^en fe^r !alt fet." „Qa, unb er.l^at mtr erja^tt, ba^ er feinen trarmen diod fjaUJ' „T)a^ tut mir teib, benn er tDiinf^t, burc^ ben SBalb gu laufen.'' „Qa, er l^at felbft gefagt, e§ fei i^m brau^en ju !alt.''. (c) 1. We had a good tirae when we sat around the fire and told stories. 2. When. they were running through the wood, they said it was getting warm. 3. .The boys often wished to have a good time out in the woods. 4. He thought that he 168 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. had the right book. . 5. I hope that you had money enough, and that you were not sick. 6. The children told that they were in the woods, but that they had no fire. (d) A Story. — I wish to tell you a little story. It hap- pened out in the wood. Two boys went into the wood to have a good time. But the little one said that he was too tired. Then the other said that the little one was not tired, but that he was not warm enough. He said it was getting cold,^and he made a fire in the wood. When the little one said that it was warm, the two boys ran home. But they had not had a good time. LESSON LVII. The Subjunctive. Weak and Strong Verbs. Unfer Pater in bem fjtmmcl. Dctn Hame merbe gebetltget. Detn Hetd? fomme. Detn W'lUe gefd^el^e auf (£rben, u)te tm ^tmmel. Unfer tcigltd? Brot gib uns I]eute. Unb cergib uns unfere Sd?ulben, tpie w'xv unfern Sdpulbigern r»ergeben. Unb fiil^re uns nid?t in Perfud?ung, fonbern erlofe uns von bem Ubel. Denn Dein ift bas Heid? unb bie Kraft unb bie ^errlid?!eit in (£u)igf eit. 2lmen. — (Stjangeltum @. Wlait^'di, vi. 9-13. 261. Subjunctive of loben, a Weak Verb. Present. Past. (ba^) tr^ loBc (ha^) ttitr iohtn (\)a^) i^ (oBtc (ha^) ttiir (oBtcn (ha^) U (oBeft (t)a^) i^t UUt (bog) bu (oBtcfi (ba^) i^r loBtct (bag) cr loht (ta^) fie Mtn (ba^) er MU (iba^) fie UUtn Future. Perfect. (ba^) xdf lohtn tticrbe (ba^) td^ geloBt iftaBe (ba^) bu roBen metbeft • (ba^) \>n gcIoBt ^abeft (ba^) er (obeit werbe, etc. (bag) er gelobt i^aU, etc. THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 169 Past Perfect. {\iOi^) \^ getoBt pttc (bag) btt ^zUU pttcft (bag) cr %tUU ^aiXtf etc. Future Perfect. QiOi'^) x^ gclpBt l^aictt mcrbc {ha^) bu gelobt ^afieit merbeft {\>a^) zx gctobt l^oben ttierbe, etc. 262. Subjunctive of [e^en, a Strong Verb. Present. Past. (bag) t^ fe^c {\ia^) btt fc^cft {tic^^) tx fe^c (bag) ttJtr fc^cn (bag) i^r fcliet (bag) fie fc^ctt (bag) i^ fa^c (bag) btt^a^cft (bag) cr fa^c (bag) ttJtrfa^ctt (bag) tf)r fa^ct (bag) fie fa^en Future. (bag) tr^ fc^ctt ttierbc (bag) bu fe^ctt mctbeft (bag) cr fe^en ttJcrbc, etc. Past Perfect. (bag) x^ gcfel^ctt ftottc (bag) bu gefc^en ^attcft (bag) cr gcfc^ctt ^attc, etc. Perfect. (bag) ic^ gefe^ctt ^abc (bag) btt gcfelien ^abcft (bag) er gcfe^eit ^abe, etc. Future Perfect. (bag) x6) gcfc^ctt ^abctt ttJcrbc (bag) '^M gefc^cit ^abcit mcrbeft (bag) er gefe^en ^aben ttierbc, etc. 263. Subjunctive of ge^etl, a Strong Intransitive Verb. Present. Past. (bag) x^ ge^c (bag) \svi ge^eft (bag) er gel^c, etc. Future. (bag) \6) ge^en luerbe (bag) bu ge^en hjerbeft (bag) er ge^^en itierbe, etc. Past Perfect. (bag) x^ gegangett ttiare (bag) btt gegangett ttiareft (bag) cr gcgattgctt ttiarc, etc. (bag) tr^ gittgc (bag) btt ghtgeft (bag) cr gittgc, etc. Perfect. (bag) x^ gcgattgctt fet (bag) btt gcgattgctt feteft (bag) cr gcgattgctt fet, etc. Future Perfect. (bag) x^ gcgattgctt fcttt tticrbc (bag) btt gcgattgctt feitt ttjcrbcft (bag) er gcgattgctt feitt ttJcrbc, etc. 170 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 264. The Conditional is formed by prefixing the forms of ipiirbe to the present and perfect infinitives. Its use is exactly like that of the English with should and would. Present. Perfect. I should praise. I should have praised, id) tonvht Uhtn tr^ ttiurbe geloBt f^ahtn ' bu ttJiirbcft Men bu wilrbcft gcluBt ^abcn cr ttiiirbc (oben, etc. er ttiiirbc gclobt ^abcn, etc. « 265. The Potential Subjunctive, as in English, expresses a possibility or a contingency. It is like the conclusion of a condition, and is usually translated by should or tvould. The use of tenses is like the English. ©r f^dtiz aubcr^ getan^ He would have done othericise. Q:§ ttitirc faum miigltti^. It would scarcely be possible. ^a§ ^in^t ttt^t fo gut That would not go so well. (a) The conditional and the potential subjunctive are interchangeable. The conditional might be used in all the above cases. (Sr tt)iirbe anbcrS getan l)aben. S^ triirbe faum tnoglic^ feln. S)a^ tDiirbe nt(f)t fo gut ge^eu. 266. The Optative Subjunctive is used to denote a wish. As in English, the verb precedes the subject, unless the wish is introduced by ba^* The use of tenses is also like the English. yim or boif) is often used to strengthen the wish. 293arc \^ nur p ^auf e ! Were I only at home ! 5trf), bo§ i^ boc^ ntc^r (^tVts ^attc ! Oh, that I had more money ! GJingctt mir nur jcben Xag ini^ X^catcr ! Would that we went to the theatre every day ! (a) The Hortative Subjunctive is the present tense of the sub- junctive used in the first and third persons for the imperative. Soben ttitr. Let us praise. ^cin 3SiUe gcfe^ie^c. Thy will be done. @eictt fie fleiftig* Let them be industrious. THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 171 267. Vocabulary. ber ^fcf'fcr, pepper, tion) ; btc Xxt'i^pt I)tnab or ^itt= \stx ^n'dtXf sugar. unitx f downstairs {moWorL). bic portion', bic ^ortiottett (t ?iA;e ba§ ci^) ic^ gemot^t ^abc {ha^) it^ gcmu^t !)abc (bag) tc^ gcfoUt ^aH (bag) ic^ gettiottt l|abc Perfect. o (bag) \^ ^a^e ge^cit bitrfcn (bag) bu ^al^cft ge^en fonncn (bag) er I)aBc gc^cn mogcn (bag) nitr \)ahtn ge^cn milffen (bag) i^r \)(ihti gc^cn foUeu (bag) fie ^Bctt ge^cn ttioUen Past Perfect. (bag) tt^ ^fittc gc!)Ctt bitrfett (bag) btt ^dttcft gc^eit fiiitnctt (bag) er pttc ge^ctt mogcn (bag) ttJtr pttcn gc^cn tttiiffctt (bag) \^x pttct gc^ctt foUcn (bag) fie pttcn gc!)Ctt ttiottctt 270. Conditions of Fact. — German conditions correspond very closely to English. As in English, if the premise of a conditional sentence assumes something as an actual fact, both clauses are in the indicative. 2Benn ct f omntt, tuirft bu bi^ freuen* If he comes, you will he glad. SScnn C!§ regnet, mcrbcn ttiir 511 ^aitfc bkibctt* i/'z^ miws, toe shall stay at home. 271. Use and Omission of 3Benn. — The condition is usually introduced by tt)enTl, if As in English either clause may pre- cede. Also, as in English, the verb stands first when tpetlU is omitted. @o (compare English then) often sums up the condition and introduces the conclusion. 174 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, $Bctttt @ic titcttt ^reunb finb, (fo) ttJcrbcn Sic ba;^ i\m. If you are my friend^ (then) you will do that. ®te itjcrbctt ba^ tmt, mcim Sic mcitt grcunb ftnb* row iui7Z do that, if you are my friend. (a) Contrary to English usage, German may omit tt)enn in a condition of fact. Stub Sic mcitt fjrcttttb, fo tticrbcn Sic 'ta^ inn. If you are my friend, (then) you will do that. 272. Vocabulary. bcr Sarf, bic Sarfc, sack, bag. instead of a possessive adjective. bcr 3«9r bic SH^f train. t>a§ ^olb, gold. bic ^il'fc, help. ha§ SiCbcr, silver. bic Xa'^^tf bic ^afr^ctt, pocket, ftc'rfcw, ftcrftc, gcftcrft (^abctt), to used generally with the article stick, put. 273. Exercise. (a) 1. 9Benn @te ba^ ®otb unb ba^ @tI6er in bie Jafd^e fteden, fo braudie id) 3^f)nen nti^t gu ^elfeti. 2. Q]t ber ©ad ju gro^ gu flatten, fo mu^ t(^ urn §tlfe bitten. 3. ^tnn @ie mir ni(f)t ^elfen, ben ©ad nttt bem ®oIb in bent ^UQt jn fn(i)en, fo ftede id) ba^ ©ttber in bie Jafd^e. 4. §aben ®ie ntein ®oIb in ben ©ad geftedt, fo fann id) nic^t^ tun. 5. 2Benn mir l^ier bleiben, fo merben toxx ben 3^9 f^^^^ mitffen. 6. SBenn n)ir ba^ ©ilber fnd)en, fo n)erben n)ir e^ finben !onnen, tt)enn nie^ manb e^ in bie 2:afc^e geftedt ^t. (b) „SBenn @ie mir nid)t l^etfen, fo fann i(^ btefe langen ©d^e nid)t f(^reiben." „355enn ©ie bie ©cifee o^ne §ilfe fd)retben, fo bitrfen ©ie nad^ §aufe ge^en.'' „9lber toenn id^ bie 2B5rter nid^t t)erfte^e, mn^ id) bie ganje 9lnfgabe itberfe^jen?'' SUBJUNCTIVE OF MODALS. 175 „9?etn, fie bitrfen §t(fe ^aben, menu ®te nt^t uerfte^en.'' „§eute nacf)mittag ftecEe icf) mein 33u(^ in bie 5J:a[d)e, urn ju §aufe ju lernen." (c) (When the condition precedes, write it with and without tDenn, and use fo in the conclusion.) 1. If you help me, I shall be able to put all this gold and silver in that bag. 2. If he asks for help, my, brother will help him. 3. If you get up early, you will hear the trains. 4. I will not help him, if he wants to put that gold in his pocket and that silver in a sack. 5. If you want to translate that long story, perhaps the teacher will help you. 6. If you put that silver in your (bie) pocket, it won't contain anything else. (d) " If you give us such a long exercise, we shall not be able to write it." ^* If you do not write all the sentences, you will have to stay in school the whole afternoon.'' " But if we do not know the words, must we write all the sentences ? " "If you do not know the words, you must look them up." "If the exercise is very hard, will you help us ? " " If you put your grammar in your pocket and take it home, you will be able to translate the sentences without help." itbet ben Bergen* '^ber 'i^tn Bergen, wtit ju tt)anbern, ®agen bie geute, it)of)nt ba^ ®IM, 9l(^, unb id) gtttg tm ®(^it)arTne ber anbern, ^am mtt beriDeinten 3Iugen prltd . ilber ben Bergen, meit, irett britben, @agen bie Qtntt, n)ol)nt ba^ ©titcf.— SarisBuffe. 176 ELEMENTS OF GERMAJST. LESSON LIX. Conditions Contrary to Fact. VOenn mand^er VTiann tpiigte, VOj^x mand^er XHann wdv\ Of mand?er Vflann ntandpem ITTann ITland^mal met^r (£I^r\ — ^^ric^hjort. 274. Conditions Contrary to Fact. — The subjunctive is used in the condition and conclusion of contrary-to-fact conditions. As in English, the conclusion may be in the conditional. The use of tenses corresponds to the English. ^attc i^ S^^^r o^ totnn i^ 3ctt ^iittc, tatc x^ e^ gern^ or miirbe xtf^ t§ gem ttttt* If I had time, I should gladly do it (present). ^^ fame, or t(^ milrbc fommctt, tt>cnn i^ fontttc* / should come, if I could (present). 3^ pttc eig gctan, or ttiitrbe t§ getait l^aBeit, ttJcntt ic^ Sett gc:^aBt pttc* I should have done it, if I had had time (past). @r pttc c§ gem getan, or tuitrbe e§ gem gctan ^aBeit, ttietttt cr mettt fjrcunb gcttiefeu tiodxt. He would have been glad to do it, if he had been my friend (past). (a) The contrary-to-fact subjunctive is also used after al^ (ob) and al^ (menn). When ob or n)enn is omitted, the clause is inverted and the personal part of the verb stands first. @r jptx^tf aU oB cr Ute( @e(b f^aiU, or aU i^ditt er t>id Q^d'b. He speaks as if he had much money. (£r fic^t avi^f al^ oB er frattf turire, or al§ todn er franl. He looks as if he were sick. 275. Difference between German and English Conditions. — There are two chief differences between English and German conditional sentences. CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT. 177 (a) English never omits if or though in the expressions as if, as though, while German may omit tvtUU or ob and invert. (b) English has only the form with would and should, both for the German regular subjunctive and for the conditional. That would not go so well. ^a§ gtttgc tttri^t fo gttt, or ^a^ tonxH nxttjt fo gut ge^ett* It would scarcely he possible. ^^ toixvt tanm mbgliti^, or t^ ttJitrbC faum tttogHd^ feim 276. Use of Modals. — The German modals occur frequently in conclusions contrary to fact, with or without the condition expressed. The English expressions ought to have (gone), could have (gone), and so on, are then translated in German by the past perfect subjunctive of the modals, not by the condi- tional. In the dependent order the personal auxiliary (l^dtte) precedes the two infinitives (§ 181). 3c^ ^Stte ge^Ctt bitrfcn* / should have been permitted to go. ^tt ptteft ge^Ctt Unntn. You would have been able to go. (St pttc ge^en mogctt. He icould have liked to go. 2Bir fatten gel^ctt mitffett* We should have been obliged to go. S^r pttct gc^cn foUeit. You ought to have gone. 8ie pttctt gel^en ttujKeit. They would have wanted to go. (a) The expression, He ought to have done it, or should have in the meaning of ought to have, is (gr l^citte e^ tUtl foHett, be- cause it was not done, and so is contrary to fact. On the other hand. He must have done it, is @r mu^ e§ getatl l^aben, because it was done, and so is a fact. Note. English could may be indicative or subjunctive. He could (was able to) do it yesterday^ but he canH to-day^ is a present fact, and so is indicative : (Sr fonnte eg tun. He could {would be able to) do it, if he had time, is contrary to fact in the present, and so is subjunctive : @r fonnte eg tun. 178 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, There is the same difference in referring to past time. He could {was able to) have done it^ for he had time^ is a past fact, and so is indicative: (Sr !onnte eS getan l^aben. He could (would he able to) have done it, if he had had time^ is contrary to fact in past time, and so is past perfect sub- junctive : ©r \aiit e§ tun fonnen. In the above cases the difficulty is not with the German, but with the defective English modal, which has but a single form for two meanings which in German are expressed by two different forms. Pupils should learn to analyze the exact English meaning. (h) Should like and ivould like are always forms of TUt)(i)te (past subjunctive). Would you like to go 9 Wod^ttn Sie gc^Ctt ? Yes, I should, ^a, i^ mb^U. 277. Vocabulary. bcr ^a't^trtf btc IJaben, thread, n^'^tn, ttal|te, gcita^t (f^ahtn), to string, sew. bcr ^tto^f, ^it ^no^jfc, button. tra'gctt, trug, gctragen (Ija^cn), cr hit ^ant^f btc ^anbc, hand. tragi, to carry ; to wear (in speak- bic ^a't^tif bic ^abcln, needle. ing of clothes). aitj^'fc^cn, fo^ aui3, au^^gefc^ett ftarf, adj., strong; adv., hard. (I)abctt), cr fic^t avi^f to look, gcra'be, adj., straight; adv., just, appear. exactly. 278. Exercise. (a) 1. @r fte^t au^, ate tDcire er nt(^t [tar! genug, um att biefe <93u(J)er in ber §anb ju tragen. 2. SBir I)citten gerabe gur red^ten ^di !ommen fonnen, tt)enn mir nic^t fatten niarten mitffen. 3. (gie ntu^ ben Snopf gena^t ^ben, benn \i) ^atte !einen gaben nnb feine 9^abe(. 4. ^6) ni5(^te ^eute nac^mittag in bie ©tabt ge^en, after i^ barf nid)t. 5. ©ie fa^ au^, ate tDcire fie gerabe ftar! genug, nm i^re fleine ®^n)efter nad^ CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT. 179 §aufe ju tragen* 6. jKoc^ten ®te biefen 9to(f tragen, nad^* bent bie ^nopfe mxt [tarfem gaben gend^t morben finb ? (b) „®ie f)dtten ben ^no|3f tnit ftcirferem gaben unb etner befferen Stabel nd^en folfen." „^a, ba^ t)dtte id) tun fonnen, menn tc^ ben 2ln5ug I)dtte ttagen tDoiknJ' „3lber moc^ten ©ie i^n ntc^t tragen? @ie iDiirben barin fe^r gut au^fef)en,'' „ ©te fatten nti(^ fe^en follen, al^ t(^ ba^ le^te 3Kal t^n trug* gr faf) nt^t [et)r f(^on au^,'' „@o ? SBenn er nti^t f (f)on au^fie^t, fo module id^ i^n ntd^t tragen/' (c) 1. Would you like a needle and some strong thread to sew those buttons? 2. He would have looked better, if he had worn better clothes. 3. You ought not to have carried those hot plates in your hand ; they might have hurt you. 4. The little boy must have been just strong enough to carry those bags to the train. 5. I should like to sew those buttons with your needle and [your] thread, if I hadn't hurt my hand. 6. She looked as if she couldn't carry all those things. (d) "You look as if you were tired. Would you like to stop working and play ? '' "I should like to play, but I must sew these buttons with this needle and some strong thread." " You ought to have done that this morning ; you must have had time enough." " I could have done it, if my brother had not come. I know that I ought to have done it." " I think that you could have done it if you had wanted." " Yes, that is true, but now I should like to stop." 180 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON LX. Review. £tegt btr (Seftern flat unb offen, IDtrfft bu l^eute fraftig fret, Kannft aud? auf ein ITTorgen I]offcn, Das ntdpt mtnbcr glii(f Itd^ fet. — ©octi^e. 279. Review Questions. (a) 1. Give the rules for forming the different tenses of the subjunctive. 2. Name the four chief uses of the subjunc- tive. 3. Which use differs most widely from the English ? 4. Give in detail the rules for this use, and illustrate each by two examples. 5. Name and illustrate the subjunctives whose use is just like the English. (b) 1. How is the conditional formed ? 2. Give the rules for conditions. 3. Are conditional sentences always in the subjunctive or conditional ? Illustrate. 4. How do German conditional sentences differ from English ? 5. Give the rule for the use of the past perfect subjunctive of the modstls. Illustrate fully. 280. Review Exercise. (a) 1. ®ie ©(fitter fagten, ba^ bie @efc^t({)te gu lang fei; fie f)offen, ba^ irtr eine Wrjere erja^Ien. 2. ®(auben ®te, ba§ e^ ju fait fein merbe, urn un^ brau^en im SBalbe gu amit^ fieren? 3. 31(f), baf trf) no^ eine "^Portion @up^e f)atte! J)ann tDitrbe tc{) nid}t fo Ijungrtg fetn, 4. SBdren iDtr nur ju §aufe ! 5. SBenn e^ oben ju fait ift, tDarum ge()en @te nid^t BEVIEW, 181 bte 3:re^3|3e l^tnunter unb bletben @te unten? 6. §at er ba.^ ®i(ber in bte Za\d)t geftecft, fo tDcrben tt)tr t^m ntd^t ^elfen. 7. 3Baren @te fritter gefommen, fo l^atte tc^ nid)t anbert^atb ©tuttben auf ®te marten mitffen, 8. !j)er ©dfjuler ptte feine 3lnfgabe geftern [rfiretben foden ; er ptte e^ tnn !dnnen, 9. Qd) mo^te ie^t in bie @tabt ge^en ; nto(^ten @ie nxdjt mit mir fomnten? 10. gr ntu§ e^ getan ^aben^ aber id) mbc^te iDiffen, ii3ie er e^ tat- (b) 1. Oh that there were more pepper and salt in this soup ! (§ 250, b). 2. These boys would write their sentences, if they only had time. 3. If you go downstairs, I shall remain upstairs. 4. If that girl has put all those things in her pocket, we shan't give her anything. 5. If you had wanted to do this, you ought to have told me so (e^). 6. He must have tried for an hour to spell that word, but he couldn't have spelled it right. 7. I should like to read those German stories; would you like to help me translate them? 8. We must have worked for half an hour ; we couldn't have done it in less time. 9. You ought to have come home earlier; your mother would have liked to see you. 10. If the pupils could have translated those long sentences, they wouldn't have had to stay in school the whole afternoon. (c) A Letter. — Dear Mother : You ought to have seen us yesterday. I should like to tell you what we did. We wanted to read a German story, but no one could translate it. I could have helped, if I hadn't wanted to go home. We must have worked a whole hour before we finally succeeded in reading it. Your [you] loving son, Charles. 182 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 3SSenn. ^'a, ^iitte mir t)on 3lnbegtnn @o manc^e^ nid)! gefe^It, Unb ptf ifi) nur mit anberm ©inn T)tn anbern SBeg erma^tt, Unb l^dtf t(^ auf bem rec^ten *ipfab t)te re^te §Uf empfa^n, Unb fo ftatt beffen, lua^ ti^ tat, 3)a^ Oegentetl getan, Unb fjcitt' tc^ Dieted nt(^t gentn^t 2lnf f)o^ere^ ©e^et^ Unb nur bie §alff t)or^er getDU^t 3Son bem, n)a^ ^euf 16) iDci^, Unb ^att' i(^ ernftltc^ nur getDotlt, Qa, tDoIIf \d) nur no(^ {e^t, Unb tDcire mir ba^ ®Iu(f fo ^o(b SBte mani^em, ber'^ ntt^t f^ct^t, Unb f)atf i^ je^nmat [ot)ieI ®elb, Unb fdnnt', tt)a^ id) nt(f)t fann, Unb !dm' no^ einmat auf bie SBelt — 3a, \>ann ! GENITIVE AND DATIVE CASES, 183 LESSON LXI. Genitive and Dative Cases. (Sletd? fet fetner bem an^zven, bod? gletd? fet jeber bent ^od?ften. — ©oet^e. 281. The Genitive Case. — Besides its use as possessive (Lesson VII.) and with certain reflexive verbs (§ 243), the genitive is also used (a) to denote indefinite time and (6) with certain prepositions. (a) In contrast with the accusative of definite time (Les- son XXIL), the genitive is used (1) with the indefinite article to express indefinite time ; (2) with the definite article to denote regularly recurring time. (1) ^int§ Xa^t^f one day. ^int§ 5lbenti)§, one evening. (2) ^c§ 5(5ettb)^, in the evening (regiilarly) , every evening. ^C^ Wlov^tn^f every morning^ mornings. (b) The genitive is used with iDCi^rettb, during, and many- other prepositions, most of which may be translated into Eng- lish by a phrase with of (instead of, in spite of in the midst of etc.). The most familiar are: attftatt, au^er^atb, inner^alb, bie^fett^^ {enfett^, inmttten, tro^, tnatjrenb, and tpegen, SSa^renb bc^ '^miat^, during the month. ^nmxtitn fctncr greimbc, in the midst of his friends. Xxo^ bc^ ^ttttv^f in spite of the weather. 282. The Dative Case. — Besides its use as indirect object (Lesson VIII.) and with prepositions (Lessons XVI. and XYIIL) the dative is also used (a) with a few adjectives and (b) with certain verbs. 184 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (a) The dative is used with many adjectives, most of which are followed by to in English. Unlike English usage, the dative usually precedes the adjective in German. Q^t ift mir lith. He is dear to me. ^a^ mar uit^ frcmb* That was strange to us. ^a§ ^ixt() ift bcm anbercn aljuni^. The book is like (to) the other, ^a^ 393cttcr ift ntir angene^m* The weather is agreeable to me. (b) The following verbs which take the dative have already been given: batiteti, etnfatlen, gefatten, ge^oren, gelingen, ge- fc^e^en, gtauben, ^elfen. Besides these the commonest are begegnen, btenen, broken, fofgen, ge^orc^en, ^affen, f(f)met(^eln. 233tr ftttb il|m Begcgnct* We met him. ^a§ pa^t mix ntti^t* That doesn't suit me. 283. Vocabulary. ^egeg'ttCtt, Begegncte, fiegegnet an^tait', prep, with genitive, instead (feitt), with the dative, to meet of. (by chance) . au'^crl^aK^ prep, with genitive, fuCgctt, folgtc, gefotgt (fein), with outside of. the dative, to follow. biC)3'fett§, prep, with genitive, this Jjaf'fctt, pa^iCf QCpa^t (f)ahtn)f side of. with the dative, to Jit ; to suit. tro^, prep, with genitive, in spite a^n'W^f preceded by the dative, of. similar (to), like^ resembling. ttia^'renb, prep, with genitive, an'gcnc^m, preceded by the dative, during. agreeable (to) , pleasant (to). me'gctt, prep, with genitive, some- fremb, preceded by the dative, times following its object, on strange (to), a stranger. account of because of. 284. Exercise. (a) 1. Ivol^ be^ SBetter^ waxMt er au^er^alb ber ®tabt tie^- feit^ be^ breiten gelbe^. 2. gtne^ angene^men 3lbenb^ finb - ti:)ir bem latigen SBege bte^feit^ be^ SBalbe^ gefotgt, 3. ©^ GENITIVE AND DATIVE CASES, 185 toav un^ angenel^m, un^ tDa^retib ber ©tunbe ju amufieren, aber e^ pa^tt bem getter nii^t. 4. 2Begen be^ §unbe^ pa^tt e^ bem 3}?attne, tt)a^renb be^ 9la(J)mtttag^ au^ert)alb be^ ©attend 3U bteiben- 5. Jro^ ber ©onne g^^fl^^ ^i^ ^i^^^ S^age^ narf) einem keitett gelbe au^erl}alb ber ®tabt* 6. 2lnftatt eine^ S3u(^e^, ba^ mir fremb ift, foHten @te tnir em anbere^ geben. (b) „gme^ 2:age^ bin id) einem 3Jianne begegnet, ber ^^rem S3ruber fe^r d^nlii^ au^faf)/' „§aben @ie mit i^nt gefprod^en ?" „9?ein, ^'^r ^rnber ift mir fremb, 3:ro^ feine^ 9lu^fel^en^ pa^tt e^ mir nic^t, i^m jn folgen nnb mit i^m ju fpredjen/' „& nrtire meinem :93rnber [e^r angene^m geiDefen." „3lber tviv traren an^er^alb ber ©tabt bie^feit^ be§ gro^en gelbe^, nnb ii) gtanbte, e^ !onnte jemanb anber^ fein," (c) 1. This side of the big field outside the city, we met two strange men, and we followed them during the whole afternoon. 2. It was very agreeable to the girl that the hat fitted her so well. 3. Because of my sick mother I went home early in spite of the weather. 4. She is like her father instead of her mother. 5. If her clothes fitted her better, she would look like her sister, because of her beautiful hair. 6. In spite of your work you ought to have come. (d) " Shall we follow the way this side of the wood ? '^ " That suits me ; it will be very agreeable to me." " Outside the city perhaps we shall meet some friends." " During the afternoon we must meet some friends and some who are strange (rs) to us." " In spite of all those exercises that I ought to have written yesterday, I should like to go, because of the beautiful weather." 186 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON LXII. Verbals. Da id? bte ^erbe trteb auf unfern 3ol^en Pa tpar id? gliiifltd? ipie im parabics. — ©emitter. 285. Verbals in -ing. — When an English verbal in -i7ig is in a participial phrase of time or cause, it is rendered in German, not by a participle, but by a clause. This clause is generally introduced by al^, ivhen, ba, as, ittbem, at the moment when, as, or iDcil^renb, while. Thus these participial phrases toust be mentally changed to clauses before translating. Seeing Mm, she waited, ^a fic Utt ^a% ttiartctc fie* While playing, I got tired. SSri^rcnb ir^ f^tcltc, ttitttbc id) miibe* Coming home, he found a letter. 'iJHi^ cr nad) ^aufe fattt, fattb cr cittcn S3ricf, 286. Modified Verbals. — When the English verbal is modified by a possessive, German uses a clause with ba^, instead of the infinitive with ju. Compare § 204, d. He came without seeing me. @r fam, u^ltc mid} 5tt fel^eiu He came without my seeing him. ©r !am, O^ttC ba^ id) t^U fa!^» - Instead of going, he came home. Stttftatt p ge^ieu, fam cr nad) ^attfc* Instead of my taking the book, you must, ^n^iatt ha^ id) bai^ '^^nd) nel^me^ mn^i bit t^. 287. Vocabulary. ber ^In^f bic 5?Hlffe, ntjer. ha^ U'fcr, bte Ufcr, s/iore, bank. bcr JHc'gCtt, min. ba§ X^ta'tcVf bte X^eatcr, «7iea«re ; bic ^0% t>ic ^oftcii^ postoffice, ttt^ X^catcr, ^o ^/le theatre, post; auf bic ^^5oft, «o the post- ha§ ^onscrt', bic ^ott^cttc, con- office, cert ; in^ ^Oltjcrt, to the concert VERBALS, 187 an'fommctt, tarn an, att'gcfommctt H§ ^xUttt', btc SBiKct'te (pro- (fcitt), to arrive^ usually followed nounced bilyet'), ticket. by in or an with the dative. O^Ct^^ adv., at once^ immediately. 288. Exercise. (a) 1. aSa^renb fie xm $Regen nad) §aufe Itefen, fatnen fie am Ufer be^ Stuffed an* 2. J5a er fpcit im 3:t)eater anfam, ^at er !etne Gillette befommen fcinnen* 3. 3lnftatt ba^ iii) auf bie ^oft ge^e, inerben @ie g(ei(^ ^inge^en mltffen. 4. SBa^- renb tt)ir am Ufer be^ gluffe^ fpieften, fa^en mir ben 3^g, ber citn angefommen trar, . 5. ®a fie i^r ^iltett ^atte, ging fie gtei(^ in^ ^onjert, o^ne mi^ ju fet)en» 6. !l)a er ba^ ^inb im gfuffe fa^, ging er glei^, nm §i(fe ju t)oten. (&) „0^ne ba^ icf) etma^ bat)on innate, ^at mein Sruber jiuei ©ittette jnm tonjert gefanft.^' „Unb anftatt mit 3^t)nen in^ Sonjert p ge^en, ift er oI)ne ©ie gegangen?" „?Jein, er ijat mir ein ^ittett gegeben, aber inbem irfi in^ Son^ jert an!am, erinnerte ii^ mit^, ba^ id) e^ t^ergeffen ^atte," „SBa^ ^ben @ie getan?" ,jQd) ^abe nai^ §aufe ge^en mltffen* 3Keine ®(f)rt)efter ift mit meinem -93it(ett im ^onjert angefommen, of)ne ba^ x6) fie fal^^'' (c) 1. Having bought our tickets to the theatre, we shall go at once. 2. While gomg to the postoffice, I saw many women coming from the concert. 3. Arriving at the shore of the river, he saw the boys at once, without their seeing him. 4. Instead of our going to the theatre with those tickets, you ought to go yourself. 5. While playing in the rain at the shore of the river, my little sister hurt her foot. 6. Arriving in the theatre late, we bought our tickets at once without any- body's seeing us. 188 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (d) " I am glad that you have arrived. Shall we go to the theatre at once without waiting for (auf ) the others ? " "Perhaps, instead of our waiting here, they think that we will wait outside." " I have the tickets here. They could not have arrived without our seeing them." " No. Coming through the door there they would have had to see us." " There they are. I am glad that they have finally arrived." LESSON LXIII. Wor4 Order. Review, Der fjerr tft metn i^trte; mtr mtrb ntd^ts mangeln. (Er ipctbet mid? auf etncr griinen 2lm unb fiil^ret mid? 5um frifd?en XPaffer; er erquic!et mcine Scele; cr fiil^rct mid? auf rcd?tcr Strage um feines Hamens millcn. Unb ob id? fd?on ujanberte im ftnftcrn Cal, fiird?te id? fein Ungliicf; benn Du bift bei mir; Dein Stedzn unb Stab troften mid?. Du bereiteft vox mir e'lncn Cifd? gegen mcine ^einbc. Du falbeft mcin ^aupt mit 01 unb fd?enfeft mir coil ein. (Sutcs unb Barml^er3igfeit tDcrbcn mir folgen mein £eben lang, unb id? mcrbie bleiben im £]aufe bes X7crrn immerbar. — 2)er 23. ^falm 2)ai)tb^. 289. Word Order. — (a) Eeview Inverted Order, § 99; in questions, § 3; in the formal imperative, §§69 and^200; in the main clause, § 170, a ; in conditions, § 271 ; after al^, § 274, a ; the omission of e^ in, § 250, 6. (6) Keview Dependent Order, § 170; with relatives, § 167; in indirect questions, § 173 ; with subordinating conjunctions, § 178 ; ba^, § 182 ; the modals in, §§ 181 and 276. WORD ORDER. 189 (c) Review Normal Order; position of ntd^t, § 23; of nie, § 121 ; of a single adverb, § 125 ; of objects, § 94 ; of the object of an adjective, § 282, a; of possessive genitive, § 40; of in- direct object, § 45; of past participle, § 60; of participle as adjective, §206, a; of infinitives, §§50, 192, and 205; of ju with separable prefixes, § 189, c? ; of ju with modals, § 137, b ; of " two infinitives," § 141 ; of separable prefixes, § 189 ; after coordinating conjunctions, § 177. 290. General Rule for Word Order. — In general, the more emphatic parts of a German sentence come nearest the end. Thus, if whom is emphasized when the question is asked : To whom did you give your book ? then in the answer, to the teacher is the emphatic part, and German does not follow the rule in § 94, c, but says Q(i) ^abe metn SSnd) bem Secret gegeben. (a) In independent clauses the personal part of the verb (the auxiliary in compound tenses) is the second element in the sentence, except that particles (aber, jebod), etc.) may pre- cede it. But I won't do it. ^6)^ aBcf, tttc c^ tttr^t* Still I will do it to-morrow. 9)lorgctt^ jcboti^, tttC \^ t2* (b) Adverbs and adverbial phrases stand : (1) time, (2) place, (3) manner. 2Bir f^ahtn t^n ^cutc itBcrall ftcitig gcfur^t* We have hunted for him to-day diligently everywhere. ^ic ^inbcr f^ielcn f^tntt brau^cn im ©onncnf^eitt* The children are playing to-day out of doors in the sunshine. (1) Adverbs of time usually precede objects, except pronouns. 3t^ ffaht i^m gcftcrn ctttcn ^od gefauft / bought him a coat yesterday. ©r ttJirb S^ttcn tia(b H§ SSuc^ gcBcn. He will soon give you the book. 190 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, (2) In main clauses adverbs must never be placed be- tween subject and verb. ^^ gC^C nie in bic BiaH. I never go to the city. ' (3) A phrase follows a single word. S93ir gittgctt o^Pcnt ttt bic ^icCisi* We went into the city yesterday, 291. Vocabulary. bcr 8(^ttce, snow. fiirr^^itct (^abeit), to he afraid, of, Jjic ^xx'^tf bic ^irr^ett, church, tjor with dative. ba§ ^Xaiif btc flatter, leaf su'ma^cn, ntati^te p', ^u'gema^t rerf|t f)atJCtt, l^attc, gc^abt (^aBcn), (^abcn), ^o shut, close. to be right, used of persons. Cttt'ttieber ♦ ♦ ♦ ot>tv, either . . , or. un'rcj^t f^ahtUf f^attc, ^ti^abt ttic'bet ♦ ♦ ♦ norf|, neither . . . nor. (^abctt), to be wrong, used of tinttUV , of one and the same kind ; persons. ha^ ift mix cincrlci', thaVs all \i^ fiiri^'tcn, fitr^tctc fitift, \i^ gc= one to me, I don't care. 292. Exercise. (a) 1. aSenn ®te iiberfefeen, Tniiffen ®te entmeber red^t ober unred^t ^aben. 2. 3<(i) furcate mid) iDeber t)or bem ©d^tiee nod) t)or bem 9?egen. 3. g^ ^at geftern itberatt ftarf (hard) geregnet; bie ^©latter ber ^ciutne neben ber tirc^e ftnb gang na^. 4. gr ^atte unret^t, aber e^ tDar i^m ganj einerlet; er tDoHte tDeber lefen noc^ Itberfe^en. 5. Qi) ^abe red^t nnb @ie ^aben nnred^t; mac^en @te Q^x ^n^ jn, unb fagen ®ie bie ©efdftii^te anf beutfd) ^er ! 6. g^ ift mir gang einerlei, ba§ meine ©(^u^e na^ ftnb ; ic^ fitrd^te mid^ meber t)or bem SBaffer nod^ t)or bent ®c^nee» (&) „Sttte, madden @te bie :93it(^er ju! Sir tDoffen enttDeber fefen ober itberfe^en.'' ,rJ)te ©latter meine^ -Snd^e^ finb jerriffen; i^ fann tt)ebev lefen nod^ itberfe^en*'' WORD ORDER. 191 „35a^ tft mir etnerlei. @ie ptten entlDcber bte 3Iufgabe ait^ ctner anberen ©ramtnati! lernen ober eitte neue faufen follen,'' „(Ste ijahtn vtd)t, aber ic^ fltrc^tete mtc^ Dor metnem SSater, tt)enn id) t^m [agte, ba^ mein :93uc^ jerriffett fei." „®a^ tut mir (eib, aber @te mitffen bte @a^e lernen/' (c) 1. My shoes are wet, but I don't care ; rm not afraid of the snow. 2. You will either have to write this exercise with closed books or go home. 3. That little boy goes nei- ther to (in bie) church nor to school. 4. You were right and I was wrong; these leaves are quite wet. 5. We are not afraid of them ; they are neither so big nor so strong as we. 6. Those younger pupils are wrong every time they translate, but the teacher is always right. (d) ^^ I don't like this weather. It either rains or snows the whole time.'' "No, you are wrong; yesterday it neither rained nor snowed." " I don't care ; it was very wet and we couldn't play ball." " Are you afraid of the rain ? " "No, but it is not very agreeable when either the ball or our shoes get wet." " Yes, that's true. Perhaps it will be better to-morrow." ©.a^ ®IM, ba^ imnter i)or mir f^tuanb, !j)a^ id) t)erf olgte f onber 9?u^^ — grreic^t nun \}aV xd)'^ unb erfannt : ©a^Omd — biftbu. 192 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. LESSON LXIV. Idiomatic Particles, ^entt, ^od^, ^a, '^od), <^d)on, 2BoI|L ( This Lesson may be omitted at the discretion of the teacher or post- poned till later in the course.) irttr tDtrb von alle bcm fo bumm, 2II5 gtng' mir ein UTiil^Irab tm Kopf lucrum* — ©octi^c* 293. Idiomatic Particles. — The use of the German expletives benn, bod^, ja, noc^, f(^on, and tpo^I is important. It consti- tutes one of the chief differences between idiomatic German and German that is merely grammatically correct. Of course no pupil is expected to speak idiomatic German after but one year's study, but many may wish to try. (a) The chief difficulty arises from the impossibility of translating these particles directly into English. Good illus- tration of this is found in the already and yet of Germans who have but partly mastered English. They know already and yet are English for fd^OTl and bod^, so they translate them with disastrous results. (b) The use of these expletives can be learned only by hear- ing, studying, and memorizing good, idiomatic German. As it is largely a question of feeling, no set of rules will suffice, but the following hints may help. 294. 2)cntt may be used in almost every spoken German question. It adds an almost imperceptible note of surprise or curiosity. It is not translated in English. 2Ba)g ift bcttti ba^ ? What is that 9 ^a^ ift bcnn (0^ ? Whafs the matter ? IDIOMATIC PARTICLES. 193 295. ^a* — Besides its regular meaning of yes in answering affirmative questions, }a is used to strengthen an imperative. Here it is emphasized and may be translated by all rueans. Xxt^ t§ ja* Do it by all means ! (a) It adds a tone of assurance or surprise to any sentence. Here it is not emphasized and may usually be translated by why at the beginning. ^a§ ift ja friftott. Why, that is fine. ^X fagte ja m^i^* Why, he didnH say anything. 296. Sod^ has three uses besides that of adversative conjunc- tion, yet. They are like the corresponding uses of Ja, but there is always a suggestion of but or yet about them. (a) It means yes in answering negative sentences. ^oBctt Sic fcin @clb ? Have you no money? ^t>^. Yes {but I have). ^u ttiirft ^Ctttc toof^l nx^t tommtn. You won't come to-day, will you? ^0(j^. Yes (oh, but I shall). (6) It means but in strengthening a negative and pray or do (emphatic) in strengthening an imperative. It may also be translated in the first case (with the negative) by repeating the subject and auxiliary as a question. ®r fagte ho^ tti^t^. But he didn't say anything. ^U fommft bO(^ ni^t ^CUtC ? You aren't coming to-day, are you? ^ommen (Sic boti^. Pray come, or do come. @C^C btd^ bO(^. Pray be seated, or do sit down. (c) It adds a note of surprise to an affirmative sentence. Here it is stronger than Ja, and may be translated by why or some stronger exclamation. ^a§ ift but^ fj^iitt. My, but that is fine ! ^u l^aft boc^ einctt langcn S^lorf. Why, what a long coat you have I or well, you have a long coat I 194 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 297. 9lo^ is used (besides its regular meaning of still, more, yet) whenever the idea of yet or more enters into an English sentence. It is not expressed in English. 233cr fottft nori^ ? Who else 9 ^dl^t ^(umctt 5a6c ic^ not^ uic gefc^cn* I never saw such flowers. 298. Sd^on is used whenever the idea of already or of all right enters into an English sentence. 3t^ i^xn fd^Ott ba gcttJCfctt* I've been there. ^a fommt cr fti^ott. 7% ere Tie comes (now). 3<^ Werbe c^ ft^oit tun fiJitncn* ril he able to do it, all right. 299. SBol^I is used whenever the idea of probability enters an English sentence. It may be translated perhaps^ probably, I think, or by any phrase showing lack of certainty. @r ift n)oI)( franf ♦ He is sick, I think. ^tt ttiirft ^Cttte ttio^I ntc^t fommctt* Tow (probably) won't come to-day, will you ? (a) SBol^t is generally not English well, except sometimes in speaking of health. ^a^ ^aft btt ^iit gctan. Tow did that well ^a§ ^aft i)U nJ0^( gctait* Tow did that, didn't you? You probably did that. (b) TTeZHn' English is gut for the regular abverb ; nutl for the exclamation. » Mnrtf ba§ ^aft bu ^nt gctan ! Well, you did that well ! 300. Vocabulary. bet ^o'ntg, bic ^onigc^ A:in^. bai^ ^orf, bic ^iirfer, village. ber (Solbaf, bci^ SoCba'tcn, bie crlau'bcu, crlauB'te, txXmW (^a= ©olba'tCtt, soldier. ben), «o aZZot(?, with dative. bet 5ln'genbUcf, bie 5(n/genbUtfc, ermar'ten, crttiar'tcte, crnior'tet moment. (!^aben), ^o expect, await. IDIOMATIC PARTICLES, 195 etttfc^uCbtgctt, entf^ttCbtgte, cnt= faum, hardly, scarcely. fti^uFMgt (^abctt), to excuse. ^txi'it (mor'gcn, etc.) ii'Bcr a^i f^a5tc'rcn gc^cn, ging f^ajic'tcn, Xa'^tf a week from to-day, etc. f^ja^tc'rctt gegangctt (feiit), to go tior, with dative, ago; mv sttJci walking, or /or a toaZ/c. 3<^^J^^Wf ^^^ 2/^^^^ ^S'^^* 301. Exercise. (a) 1. gntfd^ulbtgen @ie mt(^ borf) ! ^'(^ ^abe {a nxiji^ getatt* 2. T)er ®onig iDirb ben Solbaten tDol^I faum eriauben, ba^ fie ^eute itber ac^t Silage fpajieren ge^en. 3. a3or gtuet 28ocf)en tt)ar irf) f(^on in biefem Keinen ©orfe. 4. 2:un @ie e^ ja ! ©^ ift tDO^l eriaubt ; ®ie braud)en \id) boc^ nirfjt ju entfc^ulbigen* 5. 3}?orgen itber at^t STage tDerbe ic^ bie ©d^e fi^on iiberfe^en fdnnen. 6. ®ie eriauben boc^ nii^t, ba§ ber @o(bat mit .^^nen fpajieren ge^t ! ©oc^ ! (b) „gntf(^u(bigen @ie mi(^ bod^ ! Qii) ijattt faum ertDartet, ®ie ^ier ju fe^en,'' ,,3Sor jtDei ©tunben tDoHte i(^ bur^ ba^ ®orf f^^ajieren ge^en, aber tc^ fonnte nidit*'' „@rlauben ©ie bo(^, ba§ i^ ntit 3'^nen ge^e !" ,,^'ommen ©ie {a ! ©^ mirb jeben 3lugenbli(f f(^dner." „3Bir miiffen bo(^ nic^t ju itjeit gef)en." (c) (Use as many particles as you can.) 1. Do excuse me ! Why, you would [probably] hardly expect me to [that I] go walking in the village with a soldier! 2. Why, the king won't allow that, will he ? 3. He never [yet] has allowed it, but we expect [already] every moment that he will (tUt). 4. Why, that is beautiful ! You wouldn't have expected it, would you ? 5. Pray give me some more water in this cup of tea; it is [still] much too strong. 6. A week from to-day you will [probably already] have time enough to go for a walk. 196 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (d) "Why, I hadn't expected [it] to find you here! Do allow me to go walking with you." " No, I can't (md)t bO(^) ! Why, I have hardly a moment. My brother has probably arrived already." "Pray excuse me ! I did not know that you were expecting your brother." "I know [it]. Another time I shall probably have more time." " Good ! A week from to-day I shall try it again." * LESSON LXV. Review. (£nbe gut, alles gut. — 0^rtc^n)ort. 302. ' Review Questions. (a) 1. What kind of prepositions govern the genitive? 2. Name the commonest ones. 3. Give three other important uses of the genitive, and illustrate each. 4. Distinguish be- tween the German ways of telling definite, indefinite, " and recurring time. Illustrate each. (&) 1. Give the rules for the four chief uses of the dative case. 2. Name ten verbs that govern the dative. 3. What kind of adjectives take the dative in German? 4. What should be done to English verbals before they are translated into German ? 5. Distinguish between modified verbals and similar unmodified uses. 6. Illustrate both uses by original sentences. BEVIEW. 197 (c) Grive the rule for the use of dependent order. What exception occurs ? 2. Give the three main rules for inverted order. Illustrate each. 3. In what order do adverbs stand ? 4. Do adverbs sometimes come between subject and predicate, as in English ? If so, when ? (d) 1. Give the position of the separable prefix in all tenses for the normal order, and in the present and imperfect for the dependent order. 2. Where do the infinitive and participle stand ? 3. Give and illustrate all the rules for position of objects. 4. What general rule covers almost all cases of normal word order ? 5. Prove it from the illustrations you have given. 303. Review Exercise. (a) 1. Slnftatt eine^ 3Jiantie^, ber mtr fremb ift, fatten @ie mtr etnen jeigen foKen, bev tnetnem 33ruber ai^nlxi) tft. 2. sjjad^^ bem fie ben Wdnmxxi begegnet fittb, fitib bie llinber t^nen tDix^- renb be^ ganjen S^aiimittag^ gefolgt. 3. 3lte er anfam, gitig er in ba^ ^an^, o^ne ba^ jemanb etiDa^ ^orte. 4. Slnftatt ba§ fie bie Gillette ^nm 3:^eater !anft, tDtrb i^r ©rnber e^ tnn. 5. & ijat geftern UberaH ftar! geregnet, aber e^ ift ntir ganj etnerlei. 6. SBo ge^en ®ie benn I)tn? 7. ® ift boc^ noi^ nic^t 3eit, tn^ Son,^ert ^n ge^en. 8. ^c^ iDar fc^on ba. ©o t)tete ®amen ^abe id) no(^ nie gefe^en. 9. (Sntfifiutbtgen ®ie mid^ bod^! @te n)erben mtr tno^I ertauben, mit ^arf fpajteren jn ge^en* 10. Sari fonimt ft^on, aber bie anberen fommen n)o^( fpater, tDtil e^ noi^ mi)t ^tit ift. (b) 1. Because of its difficulty, that other book does not suit this class. 2. In spite of the rain we have followed those women during the last two hours. 3. Coming home late, 198 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. he tried to open a window without anybody's hearing him. 4. Seeing him arrive, we all stopped singing at once. 5. In- stead of my buying the tickets, you ought to have done it yourself. 6. She could neither write nor 'translate the sen- tences ; she was wrong every time. 7. Why, I am not afraid of long sentences ; they are all the same to me. 8. Haven't you translated [yet] ? Well, you will probably have to read later. 9. You don't want to go yet, do you ? Oh yes, I do. 10. I have never [yet] seen a king, but my brother has prob- ably [already] seen several. STEONG VERBS. 199 304. LIST or STRONG AND IRREg^ULAR VERBS. The principal parts are in full-faced type. The second and third per- sons singular of the present indicative are given when the vowel differs from that of the infinitive; also when the connecting vowel e is required in verbs whose stem ends in b, t, g, ff, f, ft. The second person singular of the imperative is given when it has the short form without e, or vowel- change i; also when the e is optional. A dash indicates regular forms. Compound verbs are given only when the simple verb has passed from use, e. g., befel)Ieu, gebciren. Cognates are in small capitals. Infinitive fdaden,^ bake JBcfc^Ien, command bacfft, bMt, befie^Ift, beMIt befte^I Past ind. subj. fdtfitxfien, apply (refl.) bcfleifeeft, befleiBt befleiB(e) ©egtnncn, begin aJet^ctt, BITE 6et§eft, bet^t bciB(e) a5cttctt,2 bark biUft, bittt hiU ©crgctt, bide, birgft, birgt Hrg ©crftcn,! BURST, birfteft, birft birft 93ctt)C0ett,^ induce — » fdiCQtn, bend JBictCtt, offer ©inbcn, BIND binbeft, binbet S3tttcn, beg bttteft, btttet f&iaicn, blow btafeft, blaft S3(cibcn, remain S3lCtt^Cn,* BLEACH Sratcn,^ roast bratft, brSt aSrcc^cn, break bric^ft, bric^t brid^ JBrcnnctt, burn JBringcn, bring Befall Bcflt^ begann m Barg barft borft bcU)00 Bog bot battb Ut bUeS blteb b(t(Q bdct brar^ branntc brac^tc bufc befal^Ie befo^Ie befliffe bcgcinne begonnc biffe bbtte barge biirge bSrftc bbrftc bett)oge boge bote banbc bate bliefe bliebe blid^e briete brad^e br^nnte brac^te Past Part. Oeba(fen befo^len Bcftiffctt begonnett OCbiffctt geboUen geborgen gcborftcn bemogen gcbogcn gcboten gcbunben gcbctcn gebtafen gebUeben gebtid^en gcbraten gcbroil^ctt gebrannt gebrat^t 1 Often weak, except in the past part. 2 Generally weak. s Weak, except in figurative sense* * Weak when transitive and sometimes when intransitive. 5 Sometimes weak, except in the past par. 200 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. Infinitive Pres. Ind. 2nd and 3d per. sing. Imperative 2ud per. sing, Past , ind. subj. Past Part 2)Cn!Ctt, THINK • bad^tc bad^tc gebad^t 2)in9Ctt,i hire, bargain (bung bang biinge) gcbungctt ^refC^Ctt, THRESH brifd^eft, brifd^t brifc^ brafiff broM braf*e brofc^c gebtofd^en 2)rtngctt, urge brang brangc gcbrungen 2)ttttfen, THINK (bauc^te baud^te gcbautftt) 2)iirfen, be allowed barf, barfft, barf, bitrfen (wanting) burftc bUrfte gcburft ©m^jfclj Jen, recommend cmpfie^lft, em* empfte^l em^fa^I ctn^fal^Ie emi)fb^U tmp^ofittn @ffCtt, EAT iffeft, m i% a§ ftBe gegcffctt ^af^tn, archaic for fangen ^af}ven, go, fare fa^rft, fal^rt fa^r(e) mv fU^re gcfa^rcn fallen, FALL faUft, foUt tier fide gcfatten ^aUtn,^ FOLD falteft, faltet gcfattctt ^angctt, catch fangft, fangt (ficttg fiengc) gcfangctt fJCr^tCtt, FIGHT fic^tcft,3 fiesta fiesta fot^t foc^te gefor^tett fjittben, find finbeft, finbet fanb fanbe gcfuttbcn ^U gefc^a^c getDcinnc gehjonne 0offe gltc^c gaffe gatte glomme griibc grtffe l^attc l^ielte l^tnge l^iebc l^o&e pbe l^alfc pife «ffe fenntc flbbc !Iommc flang fniffc fnippe fame lonnte Irifd^c Irbd^e fore liibe Past Part gcnoffctt gefd)c^cn gemonnen gcgoffctt gegltc^en gcgliffctt) gegUtten gcgtommett gegraben gcgriffeit ge^aBi gc^aitett geljangen ge^auen ge^oiben gc^cigctt gc^oifett gefiffcn gefannt geftoien geflommett geftungen gefniffctt gefni^^en) gefommen gefonnt gefrift^ctt gcfrot^en gcforcn gelaben 1 Usually weak when transitive. ^ Sometimes weak. 2 Weak forms sometimes occur. « ^jgo weak. Two verbs are confounded in •'' l^angft, l^angt also occur. Do not con- this one, viz., laben, load, once always fuse with the weak l^iingen. . strong, and laben, invite, once always * Usually weak. weak. 202 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. Infinitive 2ndand3d o^^^Z^^Z per. sing. 2ndper.sing. Past , ind. subj. Past Part gaffcn, LET laffeft, la^t, lam m lieBc rjclaffen fittttfcn, run laufft, lauft act Hcfc gclaufen 2cU>cn, suffer leibeft, leibet Ittt attc gclittctt Sci^Ctt, LEND m Ite^e geUc^eit ficfcn, read liefeft, Ueft Ite§ ta§ lafc ficCefctt Sicgctt, LIE lag lage gclcgen Soft^ctt,! go out Itfc^eft, Ufc^t m lofc^ lofc^c gcroft^cn fiugcn, tell a lie lOfl loge gcJogctt 9Waf|(ctt,2 grind gcma^len SWcibCtt, shun tneibeft, tncibet mteb miebe gcmtcbctt anc«Ctt,3 MILK mirfft, milft mtif molt molfe gcmottcn aWcffen, measure tnifjeft, nti^t mi^ mafi ma^e Ocmcffett miUmtn, fail mi^tang miBISnge miftlungen aWogCtt, MAY mag, magft, mag, mbgen (wanting) motfttc moc^te gemoi^t aWuffcn, MUST mu^, mu^t, mufi, miiffen (wanting) mu^tC mii^tc gewu^t ^cfimtn, take nimmft, ntmmt ntmm ttdljnt na^me genommen D^JCttnCtt, NAME nanntc nennte genannt ^fcifcn, whistle i^nff PPffe ge^ftffctt ^flcgen,* cherish ^flog ^Pge gc^ffogeti ^reifctt,'' PRAISE iDreifeft, preift ^ric§ priefe gc^riefett jQueKen,^ gush quiUft, quiEt quia quoll qubHc QtanoUtn Slacken, avenge (roc^ rbc^e) gerorftett gflatctt, advise ratft, rat rict riete gcrateit ditxhtn, rub vieh riebe gerteben aiet^Ctt, tear rci^eft, rci^t reiB(e) m riffe gcriffctt giettCtt RIDE rciteft, reitet vxtt rittc gcntten 9ietttten, run ratttttc renntc gcrattttt 9lie(^en, smell ror^ rdc^c gerad^en Siingett , wring, wrestle rang range gcrungeit Slinnen, run tann rannc rdnne gcrottttctt Kttfew, call Hef riefe gcrufctt ©aljcn,' SALT faljeft, faljt gcftttseit @aufen, drink fftufft, fftuft fauf(e) foff fiJffe gcfoffen 1 When transitive, , quench, weak. « Sometimes weak « Usually weak, ex :cept in the past part. « When transitive i, 5oaA, weak. « Usually weak. * Also entirely weak. ' Only the past part, is strong. STRONG VERBS. 203 Infinitive i?S iffX Past ind. subj. Past Part. ©augcn, suck fog fbge ficfooctt ©c^nffen,! create fiijuf fc^iife ficft^affeit @c^attctt,2 sound fi^ott fc^bUe gcfc^oactt ©tiftcibctt, part fc^eibeft, fd^cibet fdjteb fc^iebc flcft^tcbcn ©t^eincn, appear fr^ien fc^ienc gcfdjiencn ©t^CltCn, SCOLD fc^tltft, fc^ilt fc^itt naii fc&alte c^blte gcfi^ottctt @d^erctt,3 SHEAR fd^ierft, fc^iert fc^ier mv fc^dre gcfi^orcn Sd^tCBCtt, SHOVE mf> fd^obc gefr^ofiett ©r^ic^cn, shoot mfi wm gcftftoffctt ©(i^inben, flay fc^tnbeft, fc^inbet ft^unb2 fc^iinbe gcft^unbeit ©ti^Iafcn, SLEEP fc^Iafft, fc^Iaft fc^raf(c) ft^nef fc^liefe gefd^rafen ©t^tagctt, strike mm, m^Qt mm fd^mgc gcfrfjrrtgcn @(i)(ctt^en, sneak fr^n« fc^lic^c geft^lit^cjt ©t^Ictfctt,* whet ft^ntf fc^Uffc gcfi^affen ©(^ICt^Ctt, SLIT fc^lciBeft, fc^IeiBt frfia^ fc^Hffe geft^affctt ©c^Ucfett, slip fi^foff fc^loffc gcft^loffctt ©t^Kcfeett, shut ft^Ioft mm gcff^toffctt ©t^Ungcn, sling ft^Ittng Wiange QtWutiQtn ©t^met^en, smite fd^met^eft, fc^meifet fc^metB(e) ftiimtft fd&mtfle gcfr^miffcn ©ti^melscn,'' melt fc^miljeft, fc^miljt fc^milj fc^mo(5 fc^molge gcfii^moljcn ©d^nauBcn,^ snort fC^ttOft fc^nobe gefi^noben ©dinciben, cut fc^ncibeft, fc^neibet fd)nttt fc^nxtte gcfd^ttittcn ©ti^rauBcn,' screw fc^roB fc^rb&c gcft^robcn ©t^rccfcn,^ be afraid ^c^rfdft, fc^rlcft fd^rid ft^ra! fc^rafe geft^rodfctt ©t^rctfictt, write ft^rieJi fc^riebe geft^tieBen ©tftrctcn, cry fc^rei(e) ft^rtc fc^rtee gcfrfinccn ©tl^reiten, stride fc^retteft, fd^rcttet fc^ritt fc^ritte gcfdinttctt ©r^rotcn,^ rough-grind fc^roteft, fc^rotet gcfj^rotcn ©(^marcn, suppurate fc^toicrft, fc^hJtert fd^hJier ft^rtjor fd^h)brc gcfi^toorcn ©d^hJCtgctt,^ be silent fi^tftco fd^hJtcge gcft^UJtcgcn ©t^ttjettctt,^ swell fc^hJtUft; fc^njiEt fc^ttJia m^ou fc£)tt)bae gcfc^UJoKeit Bti^toimmtn, swim ■ fr^h>am» I fcbioatniTK d9rt)bmm( • gcfrf)tyommcii 1 In other senses weak. « Weak when transitive. 2 Also entirely weak. « Also weak ; f(3^nieben occurs Instead of 3 Sometimes weak. fd^naubcit. 4 Weak in other senses, rase, drag. ' Also weak. 8 Only the past part, is strong. 204 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. Infinitive Pres. Ind. 2nd and 3d per. sing. Imperative Past 2nd per. sing. ind. subj. Past Part. ©tftttitnbcn, vanish fc^toinbeftjd^toinbet frf)jj>anb cbttjcinbe c^toilnbc gcf(^ttJttttbctt ©dittJtngctt, SWING fi^ttjang <6h)ange gefti^hJUttgei ©tftwiircn, swear f(fitt)or (bhjorc 4toure gcft^ttioren @e^ett, SEE fte^ft, fic^t fteKe) m vm gefclicn ro§ fprbffc gef^roffen S^jringcn, spring f)>rang f^range gcfprungeit Stcdjctt, prick ftid^ft, ftic^t ftic^ fta* ftac^e gefto(^en ©tCrfCtt,» STICK m ftatc (geftocfcit) ©tC^Ctt, STAND fte^(e) tanb tunb ftanbe ftttnbe geftanbeti ©te^len, steal ftie^lft, ftie^rt ftlc^l iiaf)i table td^le gefto^Iett ©tcigen, ascend ftieg fttegc geftiegett ©terbctt, die ftirbft, ftirbt ftirb ftara ftarbc tUrbe geftor^ett ©tieBen, disperse ftuB ftobe gcftobett @titt!ctt, stink ftani ftanle geftunfcw ©toftcn, push mt% mt ftoB(e) fHc§ ftieftc gcftoftcn ©trett^citr stroke ftrirft ftric^c geftritl^en 1 Also weak. 2 Only the past part, is strong. « Always weak when transitive j some- times when intransitive. STRONG VERBS. 205 Infinitive 9nrr«nH?H Imperative 'ptr.%fn|.' 2dp^er.sing. Past ind. subj. Past Part. ©Ireitcn, strive ftrciteft, ftrcitct • ftrttt ftritte gcftrittcn Sragett, carry trdgj^, tragi ttUQ triige gcttugctt ^rcffcn, hit trifffl, trifft triff traf trdfc gctroffcn '^teiben, drive ttiah triebc gctricbctt ^Vetm, TREAD trittjl, tritt tritt ttat tratc gctrctcit ^ricfctt/ DRIP ttoff troffe gctroffeit Xtinttn, DRINK traitf tranfe trunfc getruulen 2;riigcn, deceive trog troge getrugctt '^vm, DO tu(e) tat tdtc gctott JBerbcr6en,2 spoil Uerbirbft, berbirbt Dcrbirb bevbatb ijerbarbc berbiirbe berburbctt IBcrbrieftctt, vex berbro^ ijerbroffe berbroffctt aScrgeffen, forget bergiffeft, bergtBt ijergiB bcrgaft i)crgaffe bergeffett JBcraeren, lose bertor berlijre bcrtoren SBat^fcn, grow toac^feft, todc^ft tout^S toUc^fe gentat^fen SBagcn,^ vs^eigh toog tooge gchiogen aSafr^en, wash toafc^eft, toafc^t ttlUf(^ toufc^c gctuaft^ctt !D3caen,3 weave mob hjobe gemoben gBctt^cn,* yield toiiii hJtc^e getoic^ett aScifctt, show toeifeft, toeift mteS h)iefe gcttiicfctt aBcttbCtt, turn tocnbeft, toenbct mattbte tticnbete toenbete gcttjanbt gctticnbct aSBcrficn, sue toirbft, toirbt toirb toarb tuarbe hjiirbe gettiorben SBerbcn, become hJirft, toirb toerbe toarb ujurbe toilrbc getQorbett aScrfcttr throw toirfft, toirft toirf toarf todrfe toilrfc gcttJorfctt SBtcgett,'' weigh too0 toogc gctoogen SBtttbcn, WIND toinbeft, toinbct ttiattb ttjanbc getounben aSiffctt, know h)ei|, njiffen toiffe ttjuftte toii^te getoufet aSBottCtt, WILL hjitt, toiaft toitt, tooUen tooQe tDoate tooUtc gcttJottt Sci^cn, accuse 8ie^ Sie^e gesic^ctt Bie^en, draw 800 joge gesogcn Smingcn, force swang jtocinge gcsttJungctt 1 Sometimes weak. 4 Weak in the sense of soften. 2 Weak when transitive. » 2Bagen and miegen are really identical 8 Also weak, especially in the sense of « SESiegen, rocA;, is always weak. move, hover. 206 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS 305. TheDef Lnite Article and " bcr " Words. Typical Endings. (a) ®er, the: Definite Article. Singular. Plural. Masc. Nom. b cr Gen. b t§ Dat. b cm Ace. b Ctt Fbm. bte bcr bcr bic Neut. bc§ bcm M. F. N. bic bcr bctt bic (b) ®iefer, ^/^is ; Demonstrative Adjective or Pronoun. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fem. Neut. M. F. N. Nom. bicf cr Gen. bicfeig Dat. bicf cm Ace. bicf Ctt bicfc bicf cr bicfcr bicfc bicfcr (bieg) bicf t§ bicf cm bicf c^ (bieg) bicfc bicf cr bicf Ctt bicfc (c) Like btefer are declined Jeber, every, jener, that, manijtr, many (a), folc^er, such (a), and tlie interrogative tDcIi^er, which. These are called "ber" words, as they have endings similar to ' ber. These are the typical strong endings as distinguished from the typical weak endings. (d) Typical Strong Endings : (e) Typical Weak Endings : Singular. Plural. Masc. Fem. Neut. M. F. N. Nom. cr c C)^ c Gen. c§ cr c§ cr Dat. cm cr cm ctt Ace. Ctt C C^ C ^ Ungul ar. Plural. Masc. Fem, , Neut. M. F. N. C C C Ctt Ctt Ctt Ctt Ctt Ctt Ctt Ctt Ctt Ctt c c Ctt SUMMABY OF INFLECTIONS. 306. The Indefinite Article and ** citt" words. (a) Sin, a: Indefinite Article. 207 Singular. Plural wanting. Masc. Eem. Neut. Nom. citt cine citt Gen. eittc^ ciuer txut§ Dat. etttcm eincr eittettt Ace. cittett tint tin (b) 3)?etn, my : Possessive . Singular, Adjective. Plural Masc. Eem. Neut. M. E. N. Nom. ttteitt ttteinc ttieitt ttteitte Gen. metueig mctner ntcittC)^ tttcittcr Dat. meinem metttcr tttcincm mcittCtt Ace. meinett meine tttcin meittc (c) Like tneitl are declined the possessives beitt, your, f etn, his, its, il)r, her, their, Utlfer, our, Qi)V, your, euer, your, and the negative lettt, no, not a. {d) @uer and unfer may contract by dropping the e either of the stem or of the ending. Singular. Plural. Masc. Eem. Neut. M. E. N. Nom. euctr cure cttcr cure Gen. tnvt§ or tntv^ eitrcr Ctttcg or CttCri^ curcr Dat. cttrcm or cttcrnt cuter curcttt or cucrnt eurctt or cttcrtt Ace. curctt or cttcrtt cure cttcr cure J^ote that: 1. The nominative and accusative forms are always alike, except in the masculine singular.- 2. The genitive singular masculine and neuter are alike, as are also the dative singular masculine and neuter. 3. The dative plural always ends in n. 208 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 4. There are only two typical weak endings^ e and en* The e is found throughout the nominative singular and in the accusative singular feminine and neuter ; the en is found in all other cases. 5. The endings for the indefinite article and "ein" words closely resemble those for the "ber" words, except in the nominative singular masculine and neuter and the accusative singular neuter. 307. Adjective Declension. (a) Adjectives have three declensions : strong, weak and mixed, (b) In the strong declension an adjective has the typical strong endings, except that in the genitive singular masculine and neuter, the weak ending is preferred. The strong de- clension occurs when the adjective is not preceded by an arti- cle or a "ber" or an " ein " word. (c) Strong Declension of Adjectives. Singular. Fem. gutcr fitttetr gttte (c?) In the weak declension an adjective has the typical weak endings. The weak declension occurs when the adjective is preceded by the definite article or a "ber" word. (e) Weak Declension of Adjectives. Masc. Nom. (jttter Gen. ^nt tn(t§) Dat. out em Ace. gut en Plural Neut. M. F. N. 9UtC)g gute gut tn{t^) gutcr gut em guteu ^ntt§ gute Singular. Plural Masc. Fem. Neut. M. F. N. Nom. ber gut e bie gut e H^ gut e hit guteu Gen. hz§ gut en ber gut en be^g gut en ber gut en Dat. bemguten ber gut en bem gut en htn gut en Ace. ben gut en bie gute bn^gute bie gut en SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 209 (/) In the mixed declension the adjective takes the typical weak endings in all cases except the nominative singular mas- culine and the nominative and accusative singular neuter, which are strong. The mixed declension occurs when the adjective is preceded by the indefinite article or an "ein" word. (.9) Mixed Declension of Adjectives. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fem. Neut. M. E. N. Nom. mcin gut cr meiuc gutc mciuguto^ Uteiue gut eu Gen. mcittcg gut eit uteiuer gut eu mmtt§ gut eu uteiuer gut eu Dat. ntctnem gutctt mctuer gut eu meiuem gut eu uteiueu gut eu Ace. meinen gut eu uteiue gut e meiu gut e^^ uteiue gut eu Note. — While these are the three adjective declensions, the endings of an adjective can be only strong or weak. They are weak when pre- ceded by the definite article or a "ber " word (but see § 309, 5), or by an inflected form of the indefinite article or an "etn" word (that is, a form having a case-ending). They are strong when not so preceded. Hote that: 1. In the genitive singular masculine and neuter, the ending e§ of the noun sufficiently indicates the case, and, in order to avoid too many e^ sounds, the adjective takes the weak ending en. 2. When the " ein " word has no ending, the adjective must have one in order to show the case. If the " ein " word is inflected (has an ending) the adjective does not need to show the case, and so is weak. 3. Though there are three adjective declensions, there are only two kinds of endings for adjectives. 308. Noun Declension. There are five classes of nouns, declined as follows: 210 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (a) Masculine Nouns. Singular. let class. N. bcr ^vttbcr G. t>c§ S3rut>cr)§ D. bcm SBrubcr A. t>tn ^ntbcr N. bic SBriibet G. bcr Sriibct D. ben S3rtttJertt A. bic S5ruber is^ class. N. bic Xoc^tcr G. bcr Xor^tcr D. ber Xor^tcr A. bic Xod^itv N. bic Xiic^tcr G. bcr Xii(i^tcr A. bic XiJti^tcr Isi class. N. ba§931abd)Ctt G. bc§ 9Kab(i)Ctt§ D. bcm Wat>ii)tn A. ba§ SJlabt^ctt N. bic SJlcibr^ctt G. bcr SJlabrfjCtt D. bctt SJlcibdjcn A. bic Wla'bditn 2d class. bcr ^uttb bc^ ^unbc!^ bcm ^ttttbc bctt ^lutb bic $unbc bcr ^ttitbc bcii ^uttbcu bic ^iinbc 3d class. bcr Wamx bc^ aJlattttc^ bcm SJlannc bctt aJlautt Plural. bic ^aitttcr bcr Wmntx ben ^anncrn bic SUlrinncr Uth class. 5th class. bcr ^nabc bcr ^imi bc§ ^nabcn bca etaate^ bcm ^nabcn bcm ^iaait ben ^nabcn ben ^i^ai (6) Feminine Nouns. Singular. 2d class. bic S3anf bcr S3an! bcr ^an! bic ^anf Plural. bic Scinfc bcr ^an!c bic "^mit 2d class. bag ^ferb be§ ^ferbeg bcm ^ferb U^ ^fcrb bic ^ferbc bcr ^fcrbc 'istw ^ferben bic ^ferbc bic ^naben bcr ^naben tstn ^xxahtM bic ^nabcn uth class. bic %xaM bcr fjran bcr ^ran bic gran bic fjranctt bcr ?5^anen ^tn grancn bic grancn Neuter Nouns. Singular. 3d class. beg S5tt(^cg bcm S3n^c t^a^ ^nd) Plural. bic SBiir^cr bcr S3it(^cr \st\x Sitti^ern bic ^Vi^tx bic ^iaaitn bcr 8taaten \>t\x ^iaaitxx bic 8taatcn 5th class. tsa^ 5lngc beg 5Inge§ bcm 5(ngc bai^ 5lngc bic 5(n0cn bcr 5(n(jcn tstn 5(ngcn bic 5(ngcn SUMMABY OF INFLECTIONS. 211 Note. — The first three classes are called the Strong Declension of Nouns; the fourth, Weak; the fifth, Mixed. But feminines like bic graii are sometimes grouped with the fifth class because they seem to resemble it more closely, in that they form the. plural the same way, while they are declined in the singular like other feminines, just as fifth class neuters are declined in the singular like other neuters, and fifth class masculines are declined in the singular like other masculines (except the weak ones). (c?) A few nouns differ slightly from Class 1, seeming to drop the last letter in the nominative. J)er 9^ame(n), name. J)a^ gerj, heart, « Sing. Plu. Sing. Plu. Nom. bcr 9^amc(tt) bic ^amcn \>a^ ^erj bic ^cr^cn Gen. be^ $^amctt)3 bcr ^^amctt bc§ ^cr^cn^ bcr ^crjctt Dat. bcm 9Jamctt bctt ^amcit bcm ^cr^cn ben ^cr^cn Ace. bctt ytavxtn bic 9Jamctt ^a^ ^cr^ bic ^cr^cn {e) Other nouns declined like ber SSl(XVXt are : bcr JJricbc(tt), peace bcr $attfc(tt), heap bcr fjttttfc(tt)^ spark bcr Same (it), seed bcr (55cbattfc(n), thought bcr St3^abc(n), injury bcr ^lauBc(tt), faith , bcr 933itte(n), will Note that : 1. Nomis of the first and third classes and feminines of the second class usually add umlaut in the plural when possible. 2. l^ouns of the fourth and fifth classes add (e)n to form the plural and never add umlaut. 3. Except bie SJJutter and bte S^O(i)ter all feminines form the plural (1) by adding (e)n, or (2) by adding e and taking umlaut. 4. Only monosyllabic feminines belong to the second class. So all feminines of more than one syllable, except bie 3J?utter and bie 2;0{f)ter, are of the fourth class and form the plural without umlaut by adding (e)n. 5. The dative plural always ends in n* 212 ' ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. 309. Declension of nouns with adjectives and "ber" and "ettt" words. (a) Strong adjective — without article; declined with typical strong endings, (See § 307, h.) Singular. Norn. gutcr Wann gutc ^xan gitte^ ^inb Gen. gutctt Mannt^ gutet f^rau gutcn ^iiibc^ Dat. gutem SStamxt guter fjrau gutcm ^inbc Ace. guten ajfJann gutc %xaxi gutC)^ ^inb Plural. Norn. gutc WhxntXf l^raueit, ^inbcr Gen. guter 9Jlauuer, fjrnucu, ^iubcr Dat. guteu Wmntxn, fjraucu, ^iubern Ace. gutc aWauncr, fjraucu, ^iubcr (6) When mattd^er, iDcIc^er, foI(J)er are used without the end- ing (mant^, tt)e(c^, fo(cf)), the adjective following has the strong ending. (See § 307, g, Note.) Singular. Nom. ntauri^ gutcr ^tinn Gen. tttaur^ gutcu(cig) SKauttCi^ Dat. maud^ gutcm ^Jlauuc Ace. mauc^ gutcu Wann (c) Weak adjective — after definite article or " ber " word ; declined with typical weak endings. Singular. Nom. bcr gutc "^anxt bic gutc JJrau \sa^ gutc ^m\s Gen. bci§ guten Wannt^ bcr gutcu fjrau be^ gutcu ^iubC)^ Dat. bcm gutcu SD^lauuc bcr gutcu JJrau bcm guteu ^tubc Ace. bcu gutcu "^ann bic gutc g^ou \>a^ gutc ^tub Plural. Nom. bic gutcu 9)'lauucr, fjroueu, ^iuber Gen. bcr gutcu 9Jiauuer, groucu, ^iubcr Dat. bcu gutcu 93'iouuertt, g'^oucu, ^iubern Ace. bic guteu WmntXf fjraucu, ^iuber SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS, 213 (d) Mixed adjective — after indefinite article or " ettt" word; weak when the article is inflected, strong when the article is not inflected. Singular. Norn, citt 0Utctr SWatttt etnc gute ^Jrau etn gutejg ^inb Gen. txnt^ gutcn SJlanttci^ citter gutcn %x(va eitie§ gutcn ^inbeig Dat. cincm gutcn aWanne ciuer gutcn %xa\i cincm gutcn ^inbe Ace. cinen gutcn SSlmn cine gutc fjrau ein gntc^^ ^inb Plural. Nom. fcine gutcn SD'lanner, granen, ^tnbcr Gen. fcincr gutcn Scanner, fjrancn, ^tubcr Dat. fcincu gutcn SWonncrn, S^^aucn, ^inbern Ace. fcine gutcn 9Hanner, ^raucn, ^inbcr Note that: If the article or "ber" word or "ein" word is omitted, or does not show the case {i.e, is not inflected), the case must be shown by the adjective, except in the genitive singular mas- culine and neuter, where the noun -ending shows the case and the adjective may be weak. 310. Personal Pronouns. ic^, J; bu, thou ; @ie, you ; er, he ; fie, she; e6, it, (a) First Person: Sing. Second Person: Sing. Nom. x^, I '^Uf thou^ you (Bit, you Gen. mcittcr (mcin), of me bctncr (bein), of thee ^I^rcr, of you Dat. ntir, to or for me bir, to or for thee ^i^ntttf to or for you Ace. mi^f me bici^, thee, you @ic, you (6) First Person: Plur. Second Person: Plur. Nom. mir, we xf)Xf you @ic, you Gen. unfcr, of us eucr, of you Sftrer, of you Dat. nn^f to or for us euri^, to or for you 3^ttcn, to or for you Ace. nn^, us cur3ft, you (Bit, you 214 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (o) Third Person Singular. Masc. Fern. Neut, Nom. cr, he, it fic, she, it t§, it Gen. f einetr (feirt), of him, of it i^ter, of her, of it f cincr (fein), of it Dat. t^m, to ov for him or it t^r^ to or for her or it ii)m, to or for it Ace. i^tt, him, it fic, her, it c^, it Third Person Plural: M. F. N. Nom." fie, they Gen. t^rcr, of them Dat. i^nen, to or for them Ace. fic, them Note that: 1. The possessive pronoun is formed from the genitive case of the personal pronoun. 2. The polite form, ©te, is the third person plural written with a capital, and is the same for both singular and plural. 3. The forms fettter, tf)r, i^rer, tt)m, un^, tvai) and fie have more than one meaning. Give all the English equivalents of each. 311. Relative and Interrogative Pronouns. (a) The relative bcr, who^ which, that. Singular. Plural. Masc. Fem. Neut. M. F. N. Nom. bcr bic baS hh Gen. bcffett . berctt beffctt bcren Dat. bcm bcr htm beitett Ace. belt bic has hit (p) The relative totld}tx^ who, which, that Singular. Plural. Masc. Fem. Neut. M. F. N. Nom. ttJclrffcr mi6)t mid)t2 totl^t Gen. bcffeit berctt beffcn bcrctt Dat. totid^tm tt)eld)er tticld^em tiotld^tn Ace. tticl^Ctt mld)t melc^eS ttlC(rf|C SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS, 215 (c) The interrogative and relative interrogative Uicr, who, toa^f what. Singular {plural wanting). Masc. and Eem. Neut. Norn. toer ttia§ Gen. ttjcffeu tticffctt Dat. ttjcm Ace. tticn tva§ (d) The interrogative lnel(l)er is declined like "ber" words. J^ote that: 1. The only differences between the forms of the relative, ber, and the article, ber, are in the genitive throughout and the dative plural. 2. The relative iDeI(f)er is wanting in the genitive and uses the genitive of the relative, ber. 3. The dative of the neuter interrogative, lt)a^, is wanting. It is usually expressed by It)o(r) and a preposition: iDOjU, IDO- nad), tDorauf, etc. 4. The only differences in form between the relative, rt)elc^er, and the interrogative lr)el(f|er, are in the genitive. 312. Demonstrative Pronouns. (a) The demonstratives are ber, that; biefer, this; {etter, that; foI(f)er, such (a); \^tx\tx(x(^t, that, the one ; berfelbe, the same. (h) The demonstrative ber, that^ is declined like the relative ber; biefer, {ener, and folc^er are "ber" words (§ 305, c). In berjentge and berfelbe, the first part is declined like the definite article, the last part, weak. Singular. Plural, Masc. Fem. Neut. M. F. N. Nom. bcrjetttge btcjctttgc baj^jenigc bie jenig en Gen. be^icutcjctt bcrjcnigett be^jcttigen berjentgeit Dat. bcmicnigcu berjcnigctt bcmicmgen bettjctttgcn Ace. bcttjciiicjett biejenige baj^jeitigc biejcttigcn 216 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. Note that : 1. The demonstrative, ber^ differs in form from the article, bet, only in the genitive throughout and in the dative plural. It is declined just like the relative ber, from which it can be distinguished by the position of the verb following. The de- monstrative does not change the order of the sentence ; after the relative the verb is put at the end. 2. In the declension of berjentge and berfelbe, the second part is inflected just as if it were a separate weak adjective following the article, ber. 313. Indefinites and Reflexives. (a) Most indefinites and the reflexive fid) for the third per- son (er, fie, e^ ; fie) are indeclinable. The declinable ones are inflected thus: (b) The indefinites {etnanb, some one ; niemanb, no one ; \t^ bermann, every one ; matt, one, they. Singular (plural wanting). Norn. jcmanb ntemaub jeberntann man Gen. \cmant>{t)§ tttl^tttlTttS^I^^^ tl^h(^1*tttlY1ttt^ niKiiiuiw\}^j9 jtucvmiiiiuj? Dat. jcmanb(cm or ctt) nicmattb(em or eit) jcbcrmantt etncm Ace. ictttattb(cn) tticmattb(cn) jebctmatttt cincji The reflexives : Subject R^exive. NOM. DAT. ACC. m mir mx^ bn bit bi(i^ wit nn§ m» iljr tn^ euiit (e) The indefinite mand)er, many (a), is a "ber" word (§305, c). Note that: 1. The reflexive pronouns (a) for the first and second per- sons singular have different forms for the dative and accusa- SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 217 tive ; (b) for the first and second persons plural they have one form for both dative and accusative ; (c) for the third person both singular and plural of all genders, there is only the one form, fid^, for the dative and accusative. 2. 3^^^^*^ ^^^ ntemanb are just alike in form and ending ; iebermann has two n's and man only one. 314. (a) Pres. Indie. I have, etc. id) 4aBe t>n ^aft tx fiat tait ^aB en iljr \)abt 8te f^ahtn fie f^abtn (6) Past Indie. I had, etc. id) f)aitt t>\t iaitt^t cr \)atit tt)ir flatten i^r f)aiitt (Sic fatten ftc flatten (c) Future Indicative. I shall have, etc. id) ttierbe f)af>tn btt mirft ^aben er ttiitb ^abcn Conjugation Pres. /Su6;. I have, etc. id) l^abe bu l^abeft er l^abe tntr l^aben i^r f)af) et tn tl^r iDcrb et ^abctt Sic ttJcrb en ^ahtn fie merb en iftoben (d) Fut Per/. Indie. I shall have had, etc. i^ merb e nel^abt ^aben bn mir ft — — et: mirb — — ttjir metb en — — il)r merb et — — ©ie merb en — — fie merb en — — mir nierb en ^ahcn t^v njerb et ^aben @ie merb en l^aben fie tuerb en ^aben Fw«. Per/. Subj, I should have had, etc. xdii merb e cje^abt ^abcn ^n ttJcrb eft — - — er njerb e — — mir ttjerb en — — i^r merb ct — — ©ie mcrb en — — fie merb en — — mir njilrb en i^aBen il)r milrb et ^aben ©ie miirb en i^ahtn fie miirb en l^ahtn Per/. Conditional. I should have had, etc. i^ mitrb e ge^abt Ijaben bnimtrbeft — — er iniirb e — — toxv witrb en — — i()r miivb et — — ©ie milrb en — — fie milrb en — — (e) Imperative. Sing. ||ab e (bn), have ! i ]^ab en ©te, have ! Partieiples. Present : l)ab enb, having Perfect : ge^abt, had Infinitives, (jn) i^ahtn, to have ge^abt (sn) !ftaben, to have had Note that : 1. The plural of the present subjunctive is just like the in- dicative, except that in the form i^r Ijahtt^ the t of the ending is preceded by e. This is true for all verbs except feitt and tun* 2. The past subjunctive always differs from the past indic- ative only in taking umlaut when possible. 3. All subjunctives are regular (except two forms in the present of feitt). So when you have learned the subjunctive of l)abett, you have learned them all. 4. The present subjunctive is formed by dropping the tt of the infinitive ; the past by adding umlaut to the indicative; SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 219 the other tenses by using the subjunctive of the auxiliaries of tense. 5. The past and pluperfect subjunctive are often used for the present and perfect conditional respectively. 315. Conjugation of the verb fcttt, to be, and (as tense auxiliary for intransitives), to have, (See Footnote, p. 217.) (a) Pres, Indie. Pres. Subj. Per/. Ind. Perf. Subj. I am, etc. I am, etc. I have been, etc. I have been, etc. id) Un i^fei id) hin gettjefett id) fei gettiefett \>n Bift btt fei eft btt bift (jemefett btt fei eft gettiefett erift erfei er ift gewefett er fei gettiefett toiv ftttb ttiirfeiett ttiir ftttb gemefett ttiirfeiett gettiefett i^r fctb i^r fei et i^r feib gettiefett i^r fei et gettiefett ©tc ftttb ©ie fei ett ©ie fittb getuefett ©ie fei ett gettiefett fie fittb fie fei ett fie fittb gettiefett fie fei ett gettiefett (b) Past Indie. Past Subj. Plup. Ind. Plup. Subj. I was, etc. I were, etc !. I had been, etc. I had been, etc. id} tt>av id) wax e id) wax gewefett iff) ttiar e gettiefett bu wax ft btt ttiar eft btt ttJar ft gettJefett btt ttiar eft gettiefett er toax er wax e er war gewefett er ttiar e gettiefett tt)tr wax ett ttjir wax ett ttiir wax ett gettiefett ttiirttitirett gettiefett i^r wax et i^r ttJcir et i^rwaret gettiefett i^r ttiar et gettiefett 8ic toax ctt 8ie ttJrir ett ©ie war ett gewefett ©ie ttiar ett gettiefen fie war en fie ttjiir ett fie ttiar ett gettiefett fie ttitir ett gettiefett (c) Future Indieative. Future Subjunctive. Present Conditional. I shall be, etc. I should be, etc. I should be, etc. itf| ttierb e feitt i^ ttierb e feitt id) ttiiirb e feitt \>n wix ft feitt btt ttierb eft feitt btt ttiiirb eft feitt er luirb feitt er ttierb e feitt er ttiiirb e feitt wix wtxh Ctt feitt ttiir ttierb ett feitt ttiir ttiiirb ett feitt i^r merb et feitt i\)x ttierb et feitt i^r ttiiirb et feitt ©ie ttJerb ett feitt ©ie ttierb ett feitt ©ie ttiiirb ett f ein fie ttierb ett feitt fie ttierb ett feitt fie ttiiirb ett feitt 220 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (d) Fut Per/. Indie, I shall have been, etc. idi tticrb c gettiefcn feln btttuirft — — er tDxv\> — -— toiv tticrb ctt — — tl)r mcrb ct — — - (Sic werb en — — fie tuerb en — — (e) Imperative. Sing, fei (btt), be I Fut. Perf. Subj. Perf. Conditional. I should have been, etc. I should have been, etc. x^ werb e getuefeu feiit i^ ^tiitrb e gehJefen fcitt hn ttierb eft — er taerb e — toxv merb ett — ifir merb et — 8ie merbeit — fie ttierb ett — Plur. ( fcib (i^r) be I ' 1 fei ett ®ic, be ! (jtt) feitt, to be — bit itJitrb eft — — er ttJitrb e — — tt)ir njiirb ett — - — i^r ttittrb et — — 8ie ttiiirb ett — — fie ttiiirb ett — Participles. Present : fei ettb, being Perfect: gettiefett, been Infinitives. gettiefett (p) feitt, to have been 316. Conjugation of the verb tticrbeit, to become (in the sense of come to be), and as auxiliary for the future tenses shall and will; also sign of the passive when used with the perfect participle. See § 318. (See Footnote, p. 217.) (a) Pres. Indie. Pres. Subj. Perf. Indie. I become, etc. or I become, etc. or I have become, I shall, etc. I shall (will) etc. etc. xiS) uierb e i(t| merb e x^ Bttt gettiorbett bu mir ft bu werb eft 't^M bift gettiorbett et tuirb er werb e er ift gettJorbett ttitr toerb ett i^r tuerb et @ie werb ett fie toerb ett (6) Past Indie. Perf. Subj. I have become, etc. xdi fei gertjorbett t>n fei eft gettJorbett erfei gettiorbett mir fittb geitiorbcit ttiir fei ett gcttJorbeit i^r feib gemorbeit iJ|r fei et gettiorbett ®ic fittb gettiorbett Sie fei ett gettiorbett fie fittb gettiorbett fie fei ett gettiorbett Plup. Indie. Plup. Subj. I became, etc. I became, etc.* I had become, etc. I had become, etc. id) ttiurb t, tuarb xti^ ttitlrbe t^ ttiar gemorbett i(i| nidr e gettiorbett hn ttiurb eft, ttiar ft t^n ttiilrb eft hn tuar ft gettiorbett btt ititir eft gettiorbett er ttiurb t, ttiarb er toitrb e er ttiar gettiorbeu er toar e gettiorbeu 1 This form, tcttrbc, is used regularly for the auxiliary of the conditional mode, should t would. See any complete verb conjugation. bu toerb eft er ttierb e ttiir ttierb eu il|r ttierb et (5ie ttierb eu fie ttierbcu Past Subj. SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 221 ttitt lutttb ctt ttjitttiurbctt »mr tnar en gcttjorbcn tnir marcit gettiorbeti t^r njurb ct il^r miirb et i^r tuar t gcttjorben i^r ttidt ct gcworbctt (Sic ttmrbcn @ie tuitrbcn @ic tuar en gcttiorbcn @tc mar en octtiorbctt fie ttiurbctt fie njiirb en fie tuar en (jenjorben fte Mx en getnorben (c) Future Indicative, I shall become, etc. ir^ merb e luetben on mv ft ttJerben ernjitb merbett ttiir merb eu ttjcrbett il)r ttierb et merben (Bit ttJerb en merbcn fie nierb eit ttjerbcn (d) Fut. Perf. Indie. I shall have become, etc. t(i^ merb e gettjorben fein t>vi njirft gcttjorben fein zx tuirb gettiorben fein ttiir ttierb eit getnorbett fein i^r tt»crbct gemorben fein Sie wtxh en getuorben fein fie ttierb en gertjorben feiit Future Subjunctive. I shall become, etc. id} tperb e ttjerbett btt merb eft njerben er ttjerb e ttjerben mir merb eit merbett if^x itierb et itjerben n lobteft cr lobte er lobte ttiir lobteit mir lobten i^r Uhitt i^r lobtct (5ie lobten Sic lohttn fie lobten fie lobten Perf. Ind.^ I have praised, etc. x6) ^aht oelobt \svi ^aft gelobt er ^ai gelobt ttiir l^abcn gelobt i^r ^a\si gelobt 8ie l^abcn gelobt fie l^abcn gelobt Plup. Indie. I had praised, etc. idj Iiattc gelobt bu ^attt^t gelobt er f^aitt gelobt toir l^atten gelobt i^r Ijattct gelobt 8ie \jatttn gelobt fie fatten gelobt Perf. Subj. I have praised, etc. i^ f^abt gelobt hn l^abeft gelobt er liabe gelobt loir fiaUn gelobt xi)v f^abtt gelobt @ie l^aben gelobt fte fjobttx gelobt Plup. Subj. I had praised, etc. id) ^dttc gelobt t>n ptteft gelobt er I)attc gelobt mir fatten gelobt i^r i^dittt gelobt ®ie f^mtttx gelobt fie flatten gelobt iFor the conjugation of an intransitive verb with fein as auxiliary, see hjcrbcn, §316. SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 223 (c) Future Indicative. I shall praise, etc. i^ ttjcrbc lofien btt ttJtrft iohtn tx toxth ioi)tn ttiir tuerbctt lobctt i^r tuerbct lohtn 8ie tticrbcn (obcn ftc tticrbctt lobctt (d) JPu^. Per/. Indie. I shall have praised, etc. iti) ttJcrbc gclobt l^abcn bu tiitrft — — er mirb — ^ — tuir ttJcrben — — i^r merbct — — Sic ttJcrbctt — — ftc ttJcrbcn — — Future Subjunctive. I should praise, etc. id) iDerbe lohtn t^n ttierbcft Uhtn cr mcrbe lobctt ttiir tnctbctt Uffcn i^r teicrbet lobctt (Bit mcrbctt lohcn fie tticrbcit Uhcn Fut Per/. Suhj, I should have praised, etc. i6) ttJcrbc gelobt !)a6ctt bu tucrbcft — — cr tticrbc — — ttjir tticrbctt — i^r tticrbct — 8ic ttjcrbctt — ftc mcrbctt — Present Conditional. I should praise, etc. ir^ ttJiirbe lubcn ^n ttiurbcft (uben er ttiurbc lobctt ttiir tDiivbett (oben i^x njilrbet lobctt @ic ttJiirbcn (obett ftc ttittrbctt lobeit Perf. Conditional. I should have praised, etc. tr^ hJiirbc gcbbt l^abcn 'tsM tuiirbcft — — cr ttiiirbc — — ttJtr milrbcn — — i^r miirbct — — 8tc hiurbcit— — ftc ttiurbctt — — (e) Imperative. Participles. Infinitives. Sing, lobe (bu), praise ! Pres. lobcub, praising (p) lobctt, to praise Plu. UU (i^r), praise ! Perf. gclobt, praised gctubt (^u) I)abCtt, to have praised lobcu @tc, praise ! 318. (a) Pres. Indie. I am praised, etc. id\ mcrbc gctobt t>\t ttJirft fjclobt cr tuirb gclubt ttiir uicrbctt gclobt if)x tticrbet gctobt Sic tticrbcu gclobt fie ttJcrbctt gclobt Passive Voice. (See Footnote, p. 217.) • Pres. Subj. I am praised, etc. x(i) tticrbc gclobt bu ttjcrbeft gclobt er tticrbc gclobt ttiir tticrbcu gcbbt i^r tticrbct gctobt @ic mcrbctt gclobt fie ttJcrbeu gclubt 224 ELEMENTS OF GEBMAN. Per/. Indie. I have been praised, etc. id) bin qcloht morben btt bift qtioht morben cr ift qtiohi itiorbctt toiv finb qtioht iDorbcn iljr fcib gelobt ttiorbctt @te finb gclubt itiorbcn fie finb gelobt morben (&) Past Indie. I was praised, etc. idf mnrbe gelDbt bn mntbeft gclobt ct tt»nrbc geluBt toiv ttinrbcn gclobt t!ftr mnrbct getobt @ic nmrbcn ocIoW fie mnrben gclobt PZwp. Indie. I had been praised, etc. t(i^ mar ^tUU morben hn ttJarft geloBt morben er war gelobt morbcn mir maren geloBt njotben i^r maret gelobt murben 8ie ttJaren gclobt morben fie maren gcIoBt morben (c) Future Indie. I shall be praised, etc. idj merbc gctobt merben btt mirft gelobt ttjerbcn er mirb getobt itjcrbcn mir merben gelobt mcrben t^r tuerbct gelobt merben (Bit merben getoBt mcrben fie n^erben gelobt merben Perf. Suhj. I have been praised, etc. id) fei gelobt murben hn feteft gelobt morben er fei gelobt morben tuir feien gelobt morben i^r fciet gelobt luorben @ic feien gelobt morben fie feien gelobt wurben Past Suhj. I vras praised, etc. id) miirbe gelobt t^n iuiirbeft gelobt er miivbe gelobt tuir wiirben gelobt i!jr mitrbet gelobt 8ie ttjiirben gelobt fie miirben gelobt Plup. Suhj. I had been praised, etc. id) mare gebbt morben ^M ttJareft getobt morben er mare gelobt morben mir maren getobt morben iftr maret gelobt morben Sie maren gelobt morben fie maren gelobt morben Future Suhj. I should be praised, etc. i^ merbe getobt merben bn merbeft gelobt merben er merbe gelobt merben mir merben gelobt merben iftr merbet gelobt merben Sie mcrben gelobt merben fie merben gelobt merben SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 226 (d) Future Perf. Indie. I shall have been praised, etc. i(f| ttjerbc gclobt ttiprbcn fetn bu ttiirft qtloht !mox\>cn fein cr mirb gclobt ttiorben fciit ttJtr tticrbctt qtloU morben fein i^r ttierbct gclobt tuorbcn fein @ic mctbctt gelobt morbcn fctit fie ttierben gclobt ttjorbcn fein (e) Present Conditional. I should be praised, etc. id^ ttiiirbe gclobt ttjerbcn hn niitrbeft ge(obt merben cr ttjitrbe gelobt werbeit tx>ix ttiiirbett gelobt merben i^r ttiiirbet gelobt tperbett @ie tuiirben gelobt toerben fie loiirben gelobt toerben Future Perf. Subj. I should have been praised, etc. i^ toerbe gelobt toorbeu fein hn toerbcft gelobt toorben fein er toerbe gelobt toorben fein ttiir toerben gelobt morben fein i^r toerbet gelobt morben fein 8ie merben gelobt ttjotrben fein fie merben gelobt morben fein Perfect Conditional. I should have been praised, etc. t(^ mitrbe gelobt toorben fein t^n mitrbeft gelobt morben fein er toiirbe gelobt toorben fein toir miirben gelobt niorben fein i^v miirbet gelobt morben fein 8ie toiirben gelobt morben fein fie ttJiirben gelobt morben fein 2d Sing. 2d Plur. Imperative. toerbe {t>n) gelobt or fci (Ux) gelobt, be praised ! ( toerbet (il|r) gelobt or fcib (i^r) gelobt, be praised ! ( tt»erben 3ie gelobt or feien @ie gelobt, be praised ! Participles. Present: (jn lobenb, used only as adj.) Perfect: gelobt toorben Infinitives. gelobt (ju) njerben gelobt morben (^n) fein 319. Conjugation of fel^en, to see, a strong verb. Active Voice. (See Footnote, p. 217.) (a) Pres. Indie. Pres. Subj. I see, etc. I See, etc. itift fe^e ir^ fe^e hn fielrft btt fei^eft er fie^t er fe^e Perf. Indie. I have seen, etc. id) ^aht gefe^en hn l^aft gefe^en er f)at gefeljen Perf. Subj. , I have seen, etc. id) ffaU gcfc^cn t>n ^abeft gefel^en er l^abe gefe^cn 226 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. mir fc^en mit fei^ctt ttitr iftaben gcfel^ctt ttiir (abctt gefc^cn i^r fc!)t i^r fefiet i^r \)a\>t gefe^cu i^r f)ahti gefc^ctt @tc fcl)Ctt Sic fefjctt 8ie i)a\)t\i gefeftcn @ie ^abctt gcfe^icu ftc fc^ctt fie fe^ieit fie ^abctt gefe^en fie ^abctt gcfctjctt (6) Pasi. Ind. Pas^. ;Sw?>;. Plup. Indie. Plup. Subj. I saw, etc. I saw, etc I had seen, etc. I had seen, etc. id) \a\) id) fd^e id) \)aiit gefcl^cn id) f)ixitt gefc^ctt U fal)ft bu fa^eft btt \)aiit\i gefe^ctt btt Iidttcft gefe^ctt cr fa^ er fa^e cr l^atte gefc^ctt er l^dttc gefc^ctt njir fa^en ttiir fd^eu wir fiattctt gefc^ctt ttiir pttctt gcfclftctt i^r fa^t i^r fd^jet il^r ^(kiiti gefe^en i^r f)'dittt gcfcfjctt 8ie fnfiett @ie fd^en (5ie ftatteit gcfe^eu 8ie ^dttctt gefc^ctt fie fa^ctt fie fd^en fie ^attctt gefe^ctt ftc pttctt gefc^ctt (c) Future Indie. Future Subj. Present Conditional. I shall see, etc. I shall see, etc. I should see, etc. id) merbe feften id) tticrbe fc^cn id) ttiilrbe fc^ctt bu mirft fewest btt ttierbefi fe^ctt btt ttiiirbeft fc^cn cr ttJirb fe^en cr tticrbe fc^ctt cr mitrbe fc^cn mir ttierbctt fc^cn ttiir ttierben fc^ctt ttiir ttiiirbctt fc^ctt if)r tacrbct fcljcn i^r tticrbet felften ii)x ttiiirbet fc^ictt @ie ttjcrbctt fc^ctt (Sic merbcn fc^en @ic ttiitrbctt fc^ctt fie tticrbctt fe^cu ftc ttierben fcften fie ttiitrbctt fc^ctt {d) Future Perf. Indie. Fat. Perf. Suhj. Perfeet Conditional. I shall have seen, etc. I should have seen, etc. I should have seen, etc. id) mcrbc gefe^eit ^abett id) tuerbe oefcl)en(|abcit id) ttiilrbe gefc^ctt I|al»ctt btt ttiirft — — btt ttierbeft — — btt ttiiirbeft — — cr njirb — — cr tticrbe — — cr ttiilrbe — — wsix mcrbctt — — ttiir ttierbctt — — ttiir ttiitrbctt — — t^r ttJcrbet — — i^r tticrbet — — i^r ttiiirbet — — ®ic ttierben — — ®ic ttierbctt — — (Sic ttiilrbctt — — fie ttierben — — fie ttierben — — fie ttiilrbctt — — (e) Imperatives. Participles. Jnflnitives. Sing, fte^(c) btt, see ! Pres. fc^Cttb, seeing (5tt) fc^Ctt, to see fc!)et(il)r), see! ^^^' fcdeneie, see! Perf. gcfd^Ctt, seen gefeftctt (p) ^abew, to have seen SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 227 (/) The Passive Voice of fe^ett is formed exactly like that of (oben, by substituting^ the form gefe^eu for the form gelobt in the paradigms in § 318. Note that: 1. The personal endings throughout the weak verb cor- respond very closely to those of the auxiliaries. 2. Many strong verbs change the root-vowel in the present indicative, second and third persons singular, and in the im- perative singular. 3. Weak verbs have the past participle in t. Strong verbs in en; otherwise they are conjugated just like weak verbs, except in the present and past indicative and in the imperative. 320. Conjugation of attfatigcn, to begin, a separable strong verb. (See Footnote, p. 217.) (a) Pres. Ind. Pres. Suhj. I begin, etc. I begin, etc. i(^ fange an xdf fange an bu fanoft an bu fangcft an tx fdngt an tx faitgct an toix fangeit an n)ix fangctt an toix i^ahtn i^x fangt an iijx fannct an i^r f^aht (Bit fangctt an Sic faitgett an @ic f^ahtn fie fanoen an fie fangen an fie f^ahtn Per/. Indie. I have begun, etc. ic^ I)aBe angefangen hn ^aft — er i^at — (b) Past Ind. I began, etc. id) fing an hn fingft an tx ftngt an mir fingen an i^r finget an (Bit fingen an fie fingen an Past Subj. I began, etc. iti) finge an bn fingeft an et finget an mir fingen an iffr finget an Bit fingen an fie fingen an Plup. Indie. I had begun, etc. x6) f^aitt angefangen hn ^attt^t — tx f^attt — mir fatten — iftr f^atttt — ®ie f^atitn — fie fatten *— Perf. Subj. I have begun, etc. id) f)aht angefangen t>n ^abeft — er f)aht — tvix i)ahtn — i^r \)ahtt — Bit f)ahtn — fie ^aben — Plup. Subj. I had begun, etc. id) f)aUt angefangen btt Iiattcft — tx f)Clttt — toix fatten ■— il)r %aiiti — Bit ^aiitn — fie ^aiitn — 228 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (c) Future Indie. I shall begin, etc. x^ merbe anfattgen btt toitft anfangeu cr ttiirb anfangen toxx tuerbcn anfattgcn i^r tticrbet anfattgcn Sic merben anfangeu fie toerben anfangen Future Subj. I should begin, etc. id) merbe anfangen t^n tnerbeft anfangen tv merbe anfangen njir merben anfangen i^r merbet anfangen Bit ti^txhtrx anfangen fie tuerben anfangen Pres. Conditional. I should begin, etc. idj miirbe anfangen hn miirbeft anfangen er milrbe anfangen tx)iv mitrben anfangen i^r milrbet anfangen tn er miirbe angefangen l)aben ttiir mitrben angefangen f)ahtn if)x miirbet angefangen l^aben (Bit milrben angefangen ^ahtn fie niitrben angefangen ^aben (e) Imperative. Sing, fange (bn) an, begin ! • (fanget(i^r) an, begin i ^^' ( f angen Bit an, begin ! Participles. Pres. anfangenb, beginning Perf. angefangen, begun an^ttfangen, to begin Infinitives. angefangen su l^aben, to have begun SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 229 (/) The Passive Voice of separable verbs is perfectly regu- lar. See § 318. 321. Conjugation of JcrBred^Clt, to break (to pieces)^ an insepar- able strong verb. (See Footnote, p. 217.) Pres. Subj. Per/. Indie. (a) Pres. Ind. I break, etc. idft ScrBrcdjc btt jcrBnriftft I break, etc. t^ $crBrcrftc bu ^crBrc(f|cft toix serBrer^ctt ton ^crbrcrficu i^r 5crBrc(^t i^r jcrbrer^ct (Bit jcrBrc^ctt @tc jcrBrc^ctt {ic aer^rcti^ctt fie ^txhttd^tn (6) Pasi. Inci. I broke, etc. l^ ^tvhxad) bn aerbrati^ft cr ^txhxa^ .ttiir serbrati^ctt ^r aerBradftt @tc serBradftcn fie scrbrar^ctt Past Subj. I broke, etc. t(^ jctBrddje bu jerbrdriftft cr ^txWdtijt totr jcrbrad^cit tl|r ^erbror^iet (Sie jcrbrat^cn fie scrbrd^en I have broken, etc. id\ i^ahc 5crbrod)ett hn ia^i — cr f^at — ttiir ^abctt — i^r fiaU — @ic ^abcn — fie ^abeit — Plup. Indie. I had broken, etc. xdi f^aiit 5erbro(i^en btt iiattt^t — cr f^aitt — ttiir f^atitn — i^r ^attct — Sie fatten — fie flatten — Per/. 5u6;. I have broken, etc. id) fjaht scrbrot^cn btt ^abeft — cr l^aht — ttJir ^abctt — i^r f^attt — ®ie f^ahtn — fie l^abctt — Plup. Subj, I h?.d broken, etc. id) f)aitt serbrod^ctt hn ftdttcft — cr ^dtte —- Itiirpttctt — t^r f)ixtttt — @ie \)Uitn — fie ^dttctt — (c) Future Indie, I shall break, etc. id) tnerbe jerbrcti^ett btt tuirft serbrctiftctt cr ttjirb jerbrcd^ett ttiir ttjerbctt gerbre^en ifjr tticrbet gerbrec^ctt Sie werbctt gerbreciftctt fie ttierbctt scrbrcd^ctt Future Subj, I should break, etc. id) merbe gerbreti^ett btt ttjcrbeft jerbred^ett cr tticrbe jerbre^ett ttiir merbctt ^erbrcrfictt i^r ttierbet jerbrerfiett 8ie ttierbett ^erbrcd^ctt fte tttcrbctt ^erbreti^en Pres. Conditional, I should break, etc. id) ttJiirbe serbredjcn btt ttiitrbcft jerbrcd^ctt cr toiirbe ^txUtd)tn toix ttJiirbctt ^erbreti^ctt i^r ttJitrbet ^erbrct^iett 8te tuitrbctt scrbreri^ett fie ttiilrbcn aerbrcii^ctt 230 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, (d) Fut. Perf. Indie. Fut Perf. Suhj, I shall have broken, etc. I should have broken, etc. i^ ttierbe ^txhxo^tn f^abtn id) luerbe ^cvhvod)cn i^ahtn btt ttJirft ^tvhvoti)tn f)aUn t^n merbeft ^tvhxo^tn ^abcit er ttiirb scrbrudjeit ^abcn cr hierbc ^txhvo^tn IftaBeit ttiir tticrbctt jcrBro^cn ^aben tuir merben serbroti^ctt ^abett i^r hierbct ^erbrorJicn ^abcn il)r tticrbet ^crbroriicn ffahtn (Bit tticrbcu gerbrotfjcn Ijaben (Bit njctben scrbroc^en ftabctt fie mxhtn ^tvhvo^tn f^ahtn fie ttierben ^txhtoti^tn iiahtn Perfect Conditional. I should have broken, etc. id^ njiirbe ^crbro^en ftaben btt ttiiirbcft ^txhxod^tn f^ahtn er ttiitrbe ^erbroti^en l)abctt ttiir ttiitrbett jcrbror^ctt f^ahtn xf)x miirbet jerbrocfiett f^ahtn Bit ttJitrbett ^txhxod^tn f^ahtn fie ttiiirbctt ^crbroc^en ^aben (e) Imperative. Participles. Sing, jerbrirf) (btt), break ! Pres. ^erbretiftenb, breaking Plu ( S^^^'^^^^ti^Ct (iWf l^^eak ! Perf. jerbrodftCtt, broken ( jcrbreri^ett Bitf break ! Infinitives. (jtt) jerbreriictt, to break ^erbroti^ctt (jtt) ^jabett, to have broken (/) The Passive Voice of inseparable verbs is perfectly reg- ular : i(J) it)erbe gerbrodEien, etc See § 318. Note that : 1. The separable prefix follows and is separated from the root-verb in the present and past indicative and subjunctive and in the imperative. 2. In all other cases it precedes and is attached to the root- verb. This includes the past participle with prefix ge^ and the SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 231 infinitive with sign gu. So we write aufgeftattben, aufjuftctjen, etc. 3o Inseparable verbs are just like simple verbs, except that the past participle does not have the prefix ge-. It is easy to see that this would sound awkward. 322. Conjugation of fid^ frcueit, to be glad, to rejoice, a reflexive verb. (See Footnote, p. 217.) (a) Pres. Ind. Pres. Subj, Perf. Indie. Per/. Subj. I am glad, etc. I am glad, etc. I have been glad, etc. I have been glad, etc. i(ift frcttc mid) ifft frcue mir^ id) t)aU mid) gefrcut ir^ ffaBe mirf| gcfreut btt frcuft \>id) hn freucft hid) bu f)a^i hid) — bu ^abcft hid) — cr freut ^id) cr freuc \id) tv f)at ^id) — er ^abc \id) — ttJirfrcttcituni^ ttJirfrcttCttUtt^ ttJtr ^abetttttt^ — ttiir ^aficu utt^ — Hr frcttt tnd) i\)v frcuct tnd) ii)v f)aU cud) — ii)v f)ahtt end) — (Sic frcuctt ^id) @tc freuen ftr^ @ie ^aBcit ^id) — @ic i)ahcn ^id) — fie frcucn fid) fie freuen ft(^ fie f)ahtn \id) — fie f)aUn ^id) — (6) Past Indie. Past Subj. Plup. Indie. Plup. Subj. I was glad, etc. I was glad, etc. .1 had been glad, etc. I had been glad, etc. idi freute mid) id) freute mid) id) fjaitc mid) gefreut id) f)'attt mid) gefreut btt freuteft bidi hn freuteft hid) hu t)attt^i hid) — hn Jtitteft hid) — er freute ^id) er freute ftrff er ^attc fitfi — er fiiitte fic^ — UJtr freuteu nn^ UJir freuteu \m§ tuir f)aiitn un§ — mtr \)dittn nn^ — if)v freutet euc^ i\)v freutet eudj tfir f)atttt cud) — if)v f)dtHt end) — (Bit freuteu ftdji @te freuteu fid) ®te i)atitn \id) — 8te i)ixittn [xd) — fie freuteu \id) lie freuteu fid) fie f)aittn \id) — fie f)dittn fid) — (c) Future Indieative. Future Subjunctive. I shall be glad, etc. I should be glad, etc. id) merbe mid) freuen id) werbe mid) freuen hn ttJirft bitift freuen bu merbeft hid) freuen er tuirb fid) freuen er UJerbe ftt^ freuen mtr ttjerbeu un§ freuen mir werbeu uu^ freuen tl)r luerbet euti^ freuen t^r mcrbet end) freuen 8ie ttjerben ^id) freuen ©te merben fid) freuen fie merbeu fid) freuen fie merben \id) freuen 232 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN, (d) Future Per/. Indie, I shall have been glad, etc. id) merbe mieift gcfrcut f^ahtn btt ttiirft hiti) gcfrcut f)ahcn cr ttiirb fief) gcfrcut ^ti^cn mir ttjerbctt nn§ gefreut l^abctt i^r tuerbct curi^ gcfreut ^abeit Sic tt)tvhtn fl(^ gcfreut liaBcit ftc wcrbcit fitift gefrcut ^abcit (e) Present Conditional. I should be glad, etc. ii^ mitrbe mt(!^ freuen bu tDiirbeft bit^ freuen er tuilrbc fiti^ freuen ttiir miirben nn$ freuen i^r ttJitrbet cu^ freuen @ie mitrben fic^ freuen fie miirben fir^ freuen Future Perf. Subj. I should have been glad^ etc. i6:i merbe mii^ gefreut :^aBen \>n merbeft biri^ gefreut ^oben er merbe fid^ gefreut I)aben mir merben nn§ gefreut l^aUn xf)v tuerbet eur^i gefreut l)aben 6ie tuerben fid) gefreut ^ahzn fie merben firi^ gefreut l)oben Perfect Conditional. I should have been glad, etc. id) miirbe mitift gefreut Iftaben ^n tuiirbeft hid) gefreut l^oben er ttiiirbe fid) gefreut ^aben toir mitrben un§ gefreut f)(ibcn i^ir milrbet tnd) gefreut I)abeu 8ie ttJitrbeu fid^ gefreut f)ahtn fie milrben fiti^ gefreut ^oben Participles. Pres. fid^ freueub, rejoicing Perf. fiti^ gefreut, rejoiced (/) Imperative. Sing, f reue \>id), rejoice ! ( freut tnd)f rejoice ! ^^* ( freuen 8ie fiti^, rejoice ! Infinitives. [id) 5tt freuen, to be glad [td) gefreut ju ^oben, to have been glad Note that : v 1. The reflexive pronoun in the conjugation of the reflexive verb must change to agree with the subject, just as we say in English, / hurt myself, you hurt yourself, he hurt himself. 2. The reflexive pronoun always follows directly after the verb in the simple tenses and directly after the auxiliary in the compound tenses. 3. All reflexive verbs are conjugated with the auxiliary fjaben. SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS, 233 323. The Modal Auxiliaries correspond to the English modals as follows: — (a) Present. Past. Past Participle. bitrfctt, , may, to he permitted bttrftc gcbttrft < ov biirfctt fottiiett ;, can, to be able to fottttte gefottttt or fiittttCtt Jitiigctt, , may, to care or like to tttOC^tC gentot^t or tttiigctt miigcii , must, to be compelled to » tttttgtC gctttttjit - or tttiiffctt follcu, shall, ought, to be to folltc gcfoUt or fottctt ttioKen, f will, to want to tooUtc gcttioUt ( or ttfoUtn W Present Indicative of Modals. I may, I can, I like. I must. I am to. I want to, etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. i^ barf x^ fatttt id) tttag id) tttttg id)^oU id) toiU bn barfft bn faititft btt tttagft btt ttttt^t btt folift btt ttJittft ct barf er fatttt cr tttag cr nttt^ erfua crttJia mtr bitrfctt ttiir fottttCtt mir tttijgctt ttiir tttiiffctt ttJir fottctt ttiir mottctt i^r biirft il)r fiitttttc iljr tttijgt i^r tttii^t i^r fottt ii)v ttJottt oUt ttiir bitrfctt ttiir fiittttCtt ttJir tttiigctt ttiir tttiiffctt ttJir foffctt tt)ir ttioKctt il|r biirfct il)r fiittttct i^r tttijgct i^r ittitffct iffr follet i!)r tooUtt Sic bitrfctt Sic fbnttctt Sic tttijgctt Sic tttiiffctt Sic foUctt Sic ttioKctt ftc bitrfctt fie fiittttCtt fie tttiigctt fie tttiiffctt fie fottctt fie ttfoUtn (d) Past Indicative. I was per- I was able, I liked to. I had to, I ought to. I wanted to, mitted, etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. etc. id) bttrftc id) fottttte id| tttod)te tt^ nttttte tr^ fottte id) ttiottte bttbitrftcft bttfmttttcft btttttod^teft btt tttit^tcft bttfollteft bttttioWtcft er bttrftc er fottttte cr tttod^tc er tttttgtc er fottte er woHtc 234 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. ttiir burftctt ttJit fotttitcn toix mori)tctt toit mugtcn ttih fotttett ttitr ttjotttcn il|r burftet i^r foiintct i^r mod)tct i^r mu^tet if)r foKtct i^r wotttct ©ic burftctt @ic fonntcn @tc modfitctt (Sic mu^ten Sic folltcn Sic tuotttcu fte burftctt fie fotttttctt fie mod)ttn fie tttugtctt fie fotttctt fie moUttn (e) Past Subjunctive. I might, I could, I should I sh'd have I ought to, I should etc. etc. like, etc. to, etc. etc. want to, etc. irift biirfte id) fiittttte ir^ mod^tc i^ ntiigtc irf| fottte id^ tnoKtc bttbiirfteft bu fmmtcft bu ntiJri^tcft bu ntiigtcft bu fottteft bu inoHtcft er biirfte cr Wttttte er ntiitJite cr miifttc cr foKtc cr ttiotttc ttjir biirftctt ttiir fowtttctt ttiir ntiid^tctt ttiir ntii^tctt luir foKtctt toir motttctt iftr bilrftct i^r fiitttttet i^r ntotfttct ifir tttii^tct i^r fotttct i^r tuotttct Sic bilrftCtt Sic fijuutcn Sic miidjitctt Sic ntit^tctt Sic foCten Sie moUtctt fie biirftctt fie fiitttttew fie tttijrf)tctt fie ntilgtctt fie foKtctt fie luoKtctt (/) Future Indicative of all modals is regular: iij tDcrbe burfen, I shall be permitted; bu IDirft biirfen, etc. Future Subjunctive of all modals is regular: id) lt)erbe bitrfen, I shall be permitted; bit tDcrbeft biirfen, etc. (g) Perfect Indicative without a dependent infinitive is regu- lar: idE) f^abt geburft, I was (have been) permitted: iii) ijabt ge^ fount, I was (have been) able, etc. (h) Perfect Indicative with a dependent infinitive has the past participle with infinitive form ("two infinitives"): I was permitted to go, etc. i^ l^abc gc^ctt biirfctt btt ^laft gclftctt biirfen er f^at gc^eu biirfen tuir i)ahzn qtf^tn biirfen xf^v i}aht ncf)cn biirfen (Sic f^ahtn gc^cn biirfen fie ftabcn gel)en biirfen SUMMARY OF INFLECTIONS. 235 (i) Perfect Subjunctive, Without Dependent Infinitive. I have been permitted, etc. id) f^ahc geburft bu ^abcft ficbutft cr ^abc gebutft ttjir f^abtn gcburft U)v ^nBct gcburft (Bit f)ahtn gcburft fie ^aBcu gcburft (y) Pluperfect Indicative, Without Dependent Infinitive. I had been permitted, etc. tr^l ^attc gcburft ^n ^attcft gcburft er iftattc gcburft ttJir f^atitn gcburft ii^v fiatttt gcburft @ic fatten gcburft ftc flatten gcburft (Jc) Pluperfect Subjunctive, Without Dependent Infinitive. I might have been permitted, etc. tri^ f^'diic gcburft hu pttcft gcburft cr pttc gcburft UJtr l^cittcu gcburft iftr Ijcittct gcburft Sic Ijiittcu gcburft fie i^dtttn gcburft With Dependent Infinitive. I have been permitted to go, etc. idi ^abc gel^cu bitrfcn bu l^abcft gcl^cu btirfcn cr ^abc gcl^cu biirfcu ttiir i^ahtn gc^cu biirfcu i^r ftabct gcl)cu biirfcu 8ic ^abcu gcl)cu biirfcu fie ^abcu ge^en biirfcu With Dependent Infinitive. I had been permitted to go, etc. idi I)ottc gc^cu biirfcu hn ftattcft gc^eu biirfcu cr f^attc gc^cu biirfcu ttiir f^atttn gc^cu biirfcu i^ir \)atUt gc^cu biirfcu @ie fiaittn gcl^cu biirfcu fie fiaittn gc^cu biirfcu With Dependent Infinitive. I might have been permitted to go. id) fidttc gc^cu biirfcu '^M I)dttcft gc^cu biirfcu er 1;)Uit gcl)cu biirfcu ttiir pttcu gc^cu biirfcu i^r i)tiiiti gcl)eu biirfcu Sic pttcu gc^cu biirfcu fie in'aiitn gc^cu biirfcu (I) Future Perfect Indicative and Subjunctive of modals is regular but seldom used. 236 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (m) Imperative. Participles. Wanting, except Pres. bitrfcub, fottttCttb, etc. mottCtt, which is rare. Perf. geburft or biirfctt, etc. Infinitives. bilrfctt, !ottnen, etc. geburft ju ^abcit, gefottitt 311 l^abctt, etc. 2^ote that: 1. In their principal parts all modals are irregular and re- semble weak verbs. 2. The forms are regularly made from the principal parts except in the present, and in the past subjunctive of folletl (follte) and iDoIfen (iDoltte), which do not take umlaut. 3. The past indicative and subjunctive of [oKen and of iDoCen have the same form. 4. The English should like or would like is usually German Tnorf)te (gem). 5. English expressions, could have gone, might have heen, must have seen, ought to have done, etc., are almost always German, I)atte ge^eti fotinen, t)dttc fein f onnen, l^dtte [e^en tnitffen, ^dtte tun mii[fen, etc. Always begin such a phrase with a form of Icjaiit. 6. Because of the future idea in m5gen , follen and iDoHeti, they are not commonly used in the future tense. 7. All modals are conjugated with !^aben as auxiliary. PRONUNCIATION. 237 PRONUNCIATION. Introduction. • 324. A German Accent. — Most of us can imitate German brogue in telling a dialect story. We say : " Veil, vot iss it ? " and so on. To speak in this way we throw our organs of speech by force into the positions which those of a German occupy naturally. This is the basis of what we call a German accent. The easiest way to approach a good German accent is to make believe we are telling a German dialect story, and to do this when we read or speak German. We must also get rid of all false modesty, for trying to mimic German sounds is not half so ridiculous as giving German letters their American sounds. 325. The Main Difficulties. — In general, those German sounds for which English has nothing to correspond — like ci^, 8, and u — are well mastered by American pupils. The chief difficulties are with sounds like I, r, and long c, because we wrongly assume that these letters represent English sounds. Pupils prepare themselves for the difficulties offered by such words as ba6 33U(f), bie SKit^e, or fc^5n, and take pains in pro- nouncing them. The result is that they are pronounced much nearer the true German way than words which are thought to offer no difficulty, like al(e, le^^ren, or bte @eele. The things that are most distinctively German — neglect of which marks an American most clearly when he speaks with a German — are: (1) pure voivel sounds, especially and e, §§ 326 ff.; (2) the diphthongs, §§ 329-330; (3) the glottal catch, §§ 331 ff.; (4) the consonants \ and r, §§ 338-339; (5) length 238 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. Fig. 1. — The Tongue-position for t» Fig. 2. — The Tongue-position for a» of consonants, § 340 ; and (6) the ending en in certain special cases, §342. Vowels. 326. Quality of Sound. — American vowels are usually slurred, but Ger- man vowels are simple, pure. There is almost always an tt/i-sound after an American vowel. This is caused by the moving of the tongue or the lower jaw. We pro- nounce o as 0-00, while a German keeps tongue, lips, and lower jaw in exactly the same position throughout the entire sound. We pronounce art, school, rose, Orert, schoo-ul, ro-ooze, where a German makes pure, sim- ple sounds of bie 2lrt, bte ©c^ule, bte 9iofe. The English sounds are of course exaggerated here, the better to illustrate the tendency. But the PBONUNCIA TION. 239 Germans keep the organs of speech in the same position throughout each sound. 327. Tongue and Lip Position. — In order not to move tongue, lips, and lower jaw dur- ing the sound of German vowels, it is important to know the exact posi- tion of these parts for the making of the vari- ous vowel sounds. Articulate carefully the vowels in feed, far, food. For the vowel sound in . feed the lips are drawn back as in a smile ; in far they are in t*heir normal position of rest ; in food they are (or should be) thrust for- ward as in a pout. And the tongue is raised and thrown forward in feed, is normal in far, and is drawn back in food. These positions are illustrated in Figures 1, 2, and 3. The German vowel sounds form a sequence t, e, a, 0, U, beginning with a sound in the front of the mouth and running to the back. Notice the position of the tongue for the series as graphically shown in Figure 4. It must not change position during each sound. Fig. 3. — The Tongue-position for U» Fig. 4. — Diagram of the Tongue-position for Gernnan vowels. 240 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. A good way to keep the tongue steady is to rest its tip con- sciously against the base of the lower teeth. A good way to keep the lower jaw steady is to hold a lead pencil between the teeth. 328. Pronunciation. — Except in the case of long e, German vowels offer little difficulty if we remember not to move tongue or lower jaw during vowel sounds. German e has three sounds : short, obscure, and long. When short it is like e in metf when obscure like e in golden. But long c makes trouble, as it has no English equivalent. It is between a in mate and ee in meet. It is made with the teeth almost together, the lips drawn back as in a smile, and the tongue almost as high as in the i-position (Fig. 1). It is a pure sound and has not the slur usually following English long a, as when we pronounce name, na-im. Pronounce Sl^re (not t^rc), @eete (not ©ate), tne^ren (not aJiiil^ren), fe^e (not fa^e). Note. For the sound of c in the unaccented syllable tx, see r, § 339, Note. Diphthongs. 329. Pronunciation. — Properly speaking, a diphthong is a double sound. But we often speak of two vowels when written together, as a diphthong, even when they are spoken as a single sound : eaich, heart, heard. Below are treated the three genuine diphthong sounds : at (ci), au, and cu (Su). They differ from the English chiefly in having the main emphasis on the second sound where English has it on the first. But there are also differences in the quality of the sounds. (1) The diphthongs ct and at are pronounced exactly alike in German. Their sound is nearly like that of English i in mine. PRONUNCIATION. 241 but English long i is a long a^--sound followed by a short ee sound {W-ee)y while German at (ci) is a^ short a-sound followed by a longer c-sound (a=CC')- In German, after the short a-sound, the tongue does not bother to climb clear to the {-position (Fig. 1), but stays for the longer part of the diphthong in the c-position (Fig. 4): ®a^ (5t, metti, ber §ain, bie @atte, (2) The diphthong au is nearly like English ow in how, but English ow is a long a^-sound followed by a short i^sound (d'ob), while German au is a short a-sound followed by a longer o-sound (a-oo'). In German, after the short a-sound, the tongue does not bother to go way back into the u-position (Fig. 3), but stays for the longer part of the diphthong in the o-position (Fig. 4) : ^a^ §au^, ber 9?aub, ba^ aJiaut, an^. (3) The diphthongs cu and au are historically the same sound and are pronounced exactly alike in German. Their sound is nearly like that of English oy in boy, but English oy is a short at(;-sound followed by a shorter i-sound (aw-i) German cu (Su) is a short o-sound followed by a longer 8-sound (o-W). In German, after the short o-sound the lips keep the same rounded position and the tongue does not bother to climb clear to the t-position (Fig. 1), but stays for the longer part of the diph- thong in the c-position (Fig. 4) : J)te geute, ^eute, bie gciute, bie ®dule. 330. Summary of the Differences. — German diphthong-sounds have the emphasis on the second part, where English empha- sizes the first element. The second (longer) element of the German diphthong is not so different from the first (short) element as in English. In other words, both the lip- and the tongue-positions for the second element of the German diph- thong are nearer those of the first element, than in English. 242 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. German diphthongs are also of shorter duration than English. They are not so long as a long vowel. If we want to emphasize a claim to something we say: " That's mine " (mdadd'een), where a German says : „T)a^ t[t tnein'' (maeen')- When we are hurt, we say: " Ow" {dddd'do)^ but a German says : „%n" (aoo')» We also call : " Ship ahoy " (aw'i), but a German in calling out the word for hay, says : „ba^ §eu" (odo'). The best way to say this right is to think mainly of the second sound ; the first will take care of itself. The Glottal Catch, y^ 331. The ^* Catch" Proper. — Germans usually speak with the muscles of the chest and diaphragm tense. They seem to be holding their breath, as it were; there is always pressure upon the bellows which furnishes the motive -power for speech. This tenseness or pressure accounts not only for the staccato effect and the impression of vigor and speed given by most spoken German, but also for the greater explosiveness of many German sounds. It is also the foundation of what is called the glottal catch. When we say, " pooh ! " the breath bursts through our lips in a little explosion. If we close our vocal cords, as we do our lips in " pooh," and then let the breath pop through them, we have what is known as a " glottal catch." There is noth- ing like it in English ; the nearest approach is when we whis- per " uh-uh " for " no." It is a little, jerky cough. 332. Use of the Catch. — In English conversation we carry- over a consonant to a following vowel, even when they are in separate words : not at all, odd or even. But a German comes to a full stop — closing his vocal cords — before words or syl- PRONUNCIATION. 243 lables beginning with a vowel. The sound of the vowel is then preceded by the little, jerky cough — the " glottal catch " — caused by the sudden bursting open of the vocal cords: odd I or I everiy not \ at \ all. Pronounce the following words, making a complete closure of the vocal cords after the prefix, and beginning the basic word with a glottal catch: ent|e^ren, er|tnnern, mig|ad^ten, t)er|einen, ur|a(t* Also: g^ | tft | ein | au^er|orbentU(f) | unlar- tige^ Sitib, When in English a vowel sound precedes an initial vowel — whether this begins a word or a syllable — we join the two by the sound of to (after o or u) or of y (after e or ^). In rapid speech, throughout, see it, I am are pronounced through-wout, see yit, I yam. But a German comes to a full stop before the initial vowel sound, which he pronounces with a glottal catch : through \ out, see \ it, I \ am. Pronounce the following words, making a complete closure of the vocal cords after the prefix, and beginning the basic word with a glottal catch: be|ob|ac^ten, be|a{^ten, ge|enbet, ge|arbettet» Also: ^^c^ I)abe | etne | un|angene^me | 2lnttDort I er^alten, 333. Rule for the Glottal Catch. — In very rapid speech, especially in unaccented words and syllables, the glottal catch is sometimes omitted. But as such fluency is not acquired till after years of practice, it is best to follow the rule. Except after the participles mentioned below, a glottal catch should pre- cede every word or root syllable beginning ivith a vowel. It sounds queer to us when a German speaks English with a glottal catch, but no queerer than it sounds to a German when we say : be-yo-bachten, be-yachten, ge-yeyidet, and ge-yarbeitet instead of be|ob|a(^ten, be|a(^ten, gelenbet, and ge|arbeitet» 244 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. Much of the difficulty Germans have in understanding our pronunciation of their language is due to our omission of the glottal catch. An illustration of this is the fact that an Amer- ican was once obliged to pronounce the word „ertnnern" five times before her German teacher could tell what word she was trying to say. The difficulty lay partly in the drawling of the American r, partly in the omission of the glottal catch after the first er* The American said e-rinnurn instead of er|innern« 334. Omission of the Glottal Catch. — In words compounded with the particles ^ter, ^tn, ^er, bar, tnar, tt)or, t)or, tPteber, and after K, there is no glottal catch. Thus l^inau^, herein, barUTt' ter, tDarum, i^oran, t)oriiber, iDteberum, tiollenben, are easy for Americans, as they are pronounced without the glottal catch. Consonants. 335. Dissimilar Consonants. — The consonants which have sounds not found in English are d^, g, I, and r* Naturally they make the most trouble for Americans. 336. The Sound of rff. — (1) When we pronounce ^ after a, U, U, or au, the back of the tongue is raised and drawn back toward the soft palate so that a scraping sound is made as the breath is forced through. It is like the Scotch ch in loch. The nearest equivalent English sound is the rasping we sometimes make at the end of a long yawn, or the sound some people utter when breathing on their eye-glasses before cleaning them. Pronounce : a6), ba^ 53uc^, ba^ 8od^, avi6). (2) After all other sounds — that is, after consonants or e, t, CU, or the umlauted vowels — ^ has a sound resembling the noise made by a spitting cat. Eaise the tongue to the position for long i (Fig. 1) and holding it there, stop the vowel sound PRONUNCIATION. 245 and breathe out. Pronounce: ba§ ^ed), ba^ 8i(I}t, eU(^, bie %'6&jitx, bie ©cither, bie Zviijtx, bie ®d)(au(^e, ix)el(^, tnanc^* The guttural rf)-sound, made in the back of the mouth, goes naturally with the vowels a, 0, and u, which are formed in the middle or back of the mouth (see Fig. 4). The palatal (j^-sound, made against the front part of the palate, goes natu- rally with the vowels formed in the front of the mouth (Fig. 4) or with I or n, both of which are articulated with the tongue against the front of the palate (Fig. 5). (3) At the beginning of a syllable, (i| is pronounced as in (2) before c and i: S^emie, E'^itta* Before other vowels or con- sonants it is pronounced like l : g^or, Shrift, g^arafter, S^^^^, iDad^fett- 337. The Sounds of g. — (1) German g at the beginning of a word or syllable is like English g in go. (2) At the end of a syllable it is like k except (3) in the ending ig, when it is like rff in td^. Thus ^ and g in ri^tig are pronounced alike. But as soon as inflectional endings are added to final g, so that g becomes the first letter in the following syllable, g is pronounced like g in go. Pronounce : (1) gut, gritti ; (2) ber Zd^, ber @ieg ; (3) ru^ig, rii^tig ; but (1) bie SEage, bie Siege, ru^iger, rid^tiger. Note. There is less uniformity in Germany for the pronunciation of g than for any other letter. Probably half the people in Germany pro- nounce final g like final 6), as in § 336, 1 or 2. But the best authorities are now agreed upon the pronunciation as given above. 338. The Sound of L — German I is pronounced with the tohgue pressed against the front of the palate, like Hi in million (Fig. 5). The sound of y in year seems interwoven with the i, which is made in the very front of the mouth, not at the 246 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. back as English I One might say that German I has an ee-shade (Fig. 1), while English I has an oo-shade (Fig. 3). Pronounce : 8tHt Se^matttt, alle§, IW!- 339. The German r* — There are two distinct German t's ; the tongue-tip (trilled) r, and the uvula (rolled) r* Both differ from the American slurred r of the East and South, and from the drawled r of the West. (1) In the trilled r (Fig. 6), the tongua-tip is vibrated against the palate just behind the front teeth. This is not only the easier of the two, but it is the one approved on the stage. (2) The uvula or throat t (Fig. 7) is made by the vibrations of the uvula upon the back of the tongue. It is more dis- tinctively German, but it is usually difficult for Americans to acquire. In a way it resembles a gargle, and it may best be developed from the guttural d^, § 336, 1. In fact, many Germans pronounce r as d^ when speaking rapidly ; they give 9)?art^a and 9J?agba almost the same sound. The physio- logical explanation of this is that in very rapid speech the uvula fails to vibrate when the breath is forced out, thus making only the scraping sound of d), § 336, 1. For this Fig. 5. — The Tongue-position for I. PRON UNCI A TlOJSr. 247 uvula r the front of the tongue must never be raised as in the drawled r of the West. The back of the tongue is raised so that the uvula is forced to vibrate when we breathe out (see Fig. 7). Note, In conversation the r in the unaccented syl- lable er is not rolled. The uvula touches the tongue just once, but does not vibrate. This makes a very short aw- sound, akin to o in short. Thus S)er ^atev l)at e§ t)er= geffen is spoken almost like Daw fahtaw hat es fawges- sen. The sound here repre- sented by aw is as short as it can possibly be. It is not at all like the avj in ' ' See, saw, Marjorie Daw,^"* but on the contrary so brief as to be practically only a grace note. 340. Length of Conso- nants. — German has long and short conso- nants as well as long and short vowels A long vowel followed by Fig. 6. — The Tongue-position for trilled r» The Tongue-position for uvula tt 248 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. a short consonant offers no difficulty, as that is a frequent combination in English. But care must be taken to prolong a consonant following a short vowel. Remember to hold tongue and jaw still during a German vowel-sound and to jump without any slur from a vowel to the following conso- nant, especially when the vowel is short. Compare ber ^onig and fdttnen* Pronounce S5 5 d ij nig and Ion Tin n nen* In the same way pronounce bte @(^ule and bie ®(J)Ulb (@d)U U U n le and ©c^uinib). Also ber Of en and off en (D o o o fen and offfffen)* Be careful always to jump without any slur from the vowel to the consonant. Do not say Sol^^/ilnig, fo|i^^|nnen, ^6:)Vi\uh\lt, (Sd)n\uh\lh, D|w^|fen, o|w/i|ffen. This is one of the most characteristic features of German and one of the easiest to learn. Just reraeniber to put on extra lung-pressure for short vowels and then to hold the following consonant. If we admire something very much, we say it is " wo nderful^^ ; a German says „tt)nnnnbert)oIt.'' The best English illustration of this is the way ng is prolonged in the American slang expression : " Stung ! " This length of conso- nants is especially easy to get with I, m, and n* Try these first. A few good pairs with which to practice these short vowels followed by long consonants and to compare them with similar long vowels followed by short consonants are : bent (So^ne, bie (Sonne; fit^Ien, fiillen; !omif(^, fomnten; ber ©ta^I, ber ©tall; mo^toollen; ber 33aIIfaaI; §alle an ber (Saate; ben @^afen, fc^affen; lam, ber ^amm; la^m, ba^ Samm. Pitch. 341. Change of Pitch. — In English words the vowel carries the changes in pitch. When we say " Oh, come on " in a plead- ing tone, the o in on slides several notes down the scale. If PBONITNCIATION. . 249 a German were to use the same expression „Somm an" in the same tone, the n in atl would carry this change in pitch. Graphically this may be represented by English ^^Come 0"^^ " ; German „®omm Cltt?^♦'' In German any change in pitch is car- ried by the long element in the syllable, whether vowel or con- sonant. Of course, to carry change in pitch a consonant must be voiced, that is, the vocal cords must vibrate when it is pro- nounced. Thus change of pitch cannot be carried by mutes like p, h, t Assimilation. 342. The Ending ctt. — Much of the speed with which Ger- mans speak is due to their clipping of the ending ctt* An enor- mous number of German words end in eu, the sound of which is shortened in various ways. In conversation the c in etl is always silent. The n then undergoes various changes, called assimilation J depending upon the preceding or following conso- nant. Chief of these are : (1) next to 16 or )j ; (2) after g ; and (3) after n or ng* (1) When the ending en comes just after or just before a i or a ^j sound, it is pronounced like m. The sentence 2Bir ^ben eben fiebett ^naben gefe^en is pronounced, SBir ^abm ebm fiebm .^nabm gefe^ti, gfd^enb^it^ and aBoIfenbiittel are pronounced gf^mbarf) and aBoIfmbutteL^ iThis statement is at variance with German pronunciation as formally taught, but it is consistent with the practice, even of teachers. The author once heard a professor in the University of Berlin — a man well known in America — say in a lecture : 2)te ©nbung ,en' mu§ tmmer tjolln Zon ^abml Advocates of stage German insist that en should have its regular sound, but even on the stage h and p usually attract n to m. For instance, ^upmhtint (in Frey tag's "3"^urnaltften") is never pronounced according to the stage rules. 250 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. If we notice carefully how 6 and p come to attract n to ttl, we shall see that it is all done by the soft palate. For the sounds h and p the lips are closed and the soft palate cuts off the nasal passage. For the following n-sound it is much easier to keep the lips closed and simply to let the soft palate down, thus opening the nasal passage, than it is to open the lips and raise the tongue to the n-position. This opening of the nasal passage gives a nasal sound, and the only nasal sound possible with the lips closed is m. (2) A similar process to that just described takes place when en follows g. In the sound of g in ge'^ett (§ 337, 1) the nasal passage is closed by the soft palate, and it is easier to lower the soft palate than to raise the tongue to the n-position. The result is that the following n-sound becomes nasal (like ng in sing). SBir tragen f)of)e ^ragen is pronounced SBir tragng l^o^e Sragng. (3) When the ending en follows n or ng it is indicated simply by a cliange of pitch. The change may be up or down. In other words the tongue remains in the n= position while the vocal cords alter the pitch. This may be graphically indi- cated thus : 2Btr f 5nnen einen f d^onen ©^^ajtergang maiden — tt)tr fontt^ etn"^ fcf)o^ ©pajtergang ma&n — or tpir Ii3nn3 etn3 fc^on3®pa5tergang ma(f)n. @ie ftngen an, gu fingen — fie fing^ an, ju fing^ o^ fie fing^ an, ju fing"^* Actors always say ^ie^mbrinf. This is a practically universal law, which the Greeks and Romans embodied in their written language: €P-{-^dWuj—4fji^dX\uj (en + ballo — emballo) ; con + preheudo — comprehendo. In speaking hur- riedly we say " 0pm the door," for " Open the door." WORD FORMATION. 251 "WORD FORMATION. 343. Introduction. — German is very rich in compound words. Not only does it compound many words which in English are written separate, as bte §au:pt[a(l)e, the main thing^ bte 8uftfrf)tfffa^rt^afttengefel(fd)aft, the airship passage stock company, and so on, but it is particularly varied in its roots, prefixes, and suffixes. 344. Roots. — German roots often vary their vowel sounds so that it is hard to identify the original root : [(^liej^en, ba^ (Sdjfo^, ber ®d)(u§ ; ber Sunb, bte Sinbe, ba^ 53anb» English also has this same kind of change: sing, sang, sung, song; swim, swam, swum. Nouns derived from verb roots are usually of one of three kinds : (a) an active object, performing the action of the verb ; (&) a passive object, on which the action of the verb is per- formed; or (c) an abstract noun, denoting the condition or action of the verb. (a) J)a^ Sanb (binben), something that binds. ®er Sogen (btegen), something that bends. !j)er glu^ (Pie^en), something that flows. (6) !j)er Srud^ (brecfien), something that is broken. !Der Sunb (binben), something that is bound. ©er Sranf (trinfen), something that is drunk. (c) !j)er Slug (fltegen), action or condition of flying. S)er ®ang (ge^en), action or condition of going. ©er 2^run! (trinfen), action or condition of drinking. 345. On the next page are given some common verbal roots from which nouns are derived in the way just shown. 252 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. ^inben, to hind; ber Sanb, hound vohime; ba^ 53anb, rihhon; bie 33inbe, handage; ber 33unb, 2>ond, union. gitegen, ^o /ow;; ber glu^, nVer; ba^ glo^, rq/)^. ®raben, to dig; ha^ ®rab, grave; bie ®rube, grotto; bie ®ruft, vault; ber ®raben, d^Yc/i. ^lingen, ^o sound; ber Slang, sound; bie S(inge(, &eZ?. ©c^ie^en, ^o s/ioo^; ber ®d)U^, s/io^; ber (Sd^o^, s/zoo^, ^w;/^. ©c^Iagen, to strike; ber @(J)(ag, stroke; bie @(i)Ia(^t, 6a#Ze. ©d^Ue^en, (o shut; ba^ ©C^to^, ^oc/c; cas^Ze; ber @(^Iu^, end; ber ©c^liiffel, key. ®ingen, to sing; ber @ang, ber ®efang, song. ©pred^en, to speak; bie ©praise, language; ber ©prud^, saying; ba^ ®e[pradf), conversation. Strinfen, ^o drm/^;; ber Jran! and ber S^rutif, c?nnA:. SBiegen, (1) to weigh ^ (2) to rock; (1) bie SBage, scale; ba^ ®ett)i(^t, weight; (2) bie SBiege, cradle; bie SBoge, ?/.'a'ye. ^icl^en, ^o dmw ; ber ^Vi^, train ; feature ; bie 3^^^^ hreed(ing), 346. German Prefixes may be divided into two classes, verhal and general. The verbal prefixes have been treated under in- separable and separable verbs. Of the general prefixes the most important are : erj^, ge-, Utl', ur=. They are used chiefly with nouns. (a) Srj' (English arch-) means leader, chief; ber Srjbifd^of, archhishop; ber (Srj^erjog, archduke; ber ©rjIUgtier, arch-liar, (h) ®t- (no English equivalent) forms (1) collectives out of noun stems, or (2) verhal nouns from verb stems. (1) S)a^ ®ebirge, mountain chain (ber Serg) ; bie ®e' briiber, hrothers (ber ©ruber); ba^ ®efieber, pZwma^e (S^eber). (2) ber ®eban!e, thought (ben!en) ; ba^ ®ebi^t, poem (bic!^ten) ; ba^ ®t\i^tVii, present (f^en!en). WOBD FOBMATION. 253 (c) Utl= (English im- or in-, sometimes mis-) usually reverses the meaning of a word : uttarttg, naughty (arttg) ; uttbeftimmt, indefinite (befttmtnt) ; bte Uugebulb, impatience (bie ®ebulb), (d) Ur== (no English equivalent) denotes origin or source. It may also intensify the meaning of a word ; uralt, very old (att) ; ur!omt[(^, very funny (fottiifd^) ; ber Urfl^rung, source (ber (Sprung) ; ba^ \Xx\Qaih, primeval forest (ber SBalb), 347. Suffixes. — Many German words are formed by adding suffixes to roots. The most important groups of words formed in this way are : (1) nouns, (2) adjectives, and (3) verbs Nouns formed by suffix may be divided into two classes : con- crete and abstract. 348. Concrete Nouns are formed by the following suffixes : c^en, letn, er, in, and ling- (a) Sf)en and lein form neuter diminutives out of other nouns, the root vowel taking Umlaut when possible: ba^ 9Kdbc[)en, little girl (bte SJiagb); ba^ ^Six^Iein, brooklet (ber ^a(^) ; ba^ grauletn, Miss, little woman (bte grau). (b) @r forms masculine agents, usually with Umlaut, from — (1) Nouns : ber glei[(^er, butcher (ba^ Sf^t[d^) ; ber ©artner, gardener (ber ®arten) ; ber stopfer, potter (ber 2:opf)« (2) Verbs : ber git{)rer, guide (fU^ren) ; ber 8efer, reader (lefen) ; ber ®(^retber, clerk (ft^reiben). (c) Qn forms feminines from masculines ; bie ^ontgtn, queen (ber ^tintg) ; bie Sel^rertn, lady teacher (ber gefjrer). (d) 8ing forms masculines of varying meaning, having Um- laut when possible. (1) Nouns : ber ©iinftttng, favorite (bte ®unft) ; ber ©|3ro^Ung, scion (ber ®^3ro^, sprout). 254 ELEMENTS OF GEBMAN. ■ (2) Adjectives : bet gremblittg, stranger (fremb) ; ber grueling, spring (frii^) ; ber -Sitngltng, youth (jung). (3) Verbs : ber gmbltng, foundling (fittben) ; ber ge^rling, apprentice (lefjren) ; ber ©ciugUng, suckling (faugen). (4) Numerals : ber dx^tlin^, first fruits (erft) ; ber 3tt)i(ttng, twin (5tx)et) ; ber ©rifling, triplet (brei), 349. Abstract Nouns are formed by the following suffixes : e, ei, l^eit, !eit, [rf)aft, andung* (a) (5 forms abstract feminines with Umlaut from — (1) Adjectives : bte §drte, hardness, cruelty (^art) ; bte @ro^e, size (gro^) ; bte gcinge, length (lang). (2) Verb Eoots : bie :93ttte, request (bitten); bie Siebe, love (tieben) ; bie giige, lie (litgen), (h) @i forms feminines of various meanings (many have become concrete) from — (1) IS'ouns: bie ^Mtxtx, bakery (ber Sdder); bie gift^erei, fishery (ber i^tfrfier) ; bie @!Iat)erei, slavery (ber ©ftatje)* (2) Verbs : bie 5Re(ferei, chaffing (neden, to tease) ; bie ^lauberei, chattering (planbern) ; bie @(^meicf)elei, flattery (f(^mei(^eln), (c) §eit forms abstract feminines from — (1) Nouns : bie Sinb^eit, childhood (ba^ Mnb) ; bte 9Kenfcf)^eit, humanity (ber 9)fenf(^). (2) Adjectives : bte ©nmm^eit, stupidity (bumm) ; bie (5inf)eit, unity (ein) ; bie Sei^^eit, wisdom (tt)etfe)* {d) ^eit forms abstract feminines from adjectives which have endings like ig, 1x6), fatn, bar, etc. : bte !l)anfbarfett, grati- tude (banlbar) ; bie grennblic^feit, Idndness (freunblii^). (e) ©djaft forms abstract feminines, chiefly from nouns de- WOBD FOBMATION, 255 noting persons : bie Siirgerf c^af t, citizens (bet Sitrger) ; bie !Diener[c^aft, servants (ber ©iener). (/) Utig forms abstract feminines, chiefly from verbs : bie grjci^tung, story (erjci^ten) ; bie Sleibung, clothing (fteiben)- 350. Adjectives are formed by the following suffixes : bar^ en, ^ft, ig, \\6), lid), and fant* (a) 33ar forms adjectives from — (1) Nouns: ban!6ar, grateful (ber 3)an!) ; e^rbar, hon- orable (bie S^re) ; furc^tbar, terrible (bie gurc^t). (2) Verbs : brauc^bar, usable (.brau(^en) ; epai% eatable (effen) ; le^bar, Zegr26Ze (lefen), (6) @tl forms adjectives, usually of material, from nouns : etd^en, oaken (bie ©it^e) ; golben, golden (ba^ ®oIb)» (c) §aft forms adjectives from — (1) Nouns : efel^aft, disgusting (ber (Sfet) ; Ttieifter^aft, masterful (ber SJieifter) ; fitnb^aft, sinful (bie ©itnbe). (2) Adjectives : bo^^aft, malicious (bdfe, bad) ; !ran!^aft, s^c% (Iran!) ; tra^r^ft, real (iDa^r, true). (d) Q^ forms adjectives, chiefly from nouns : ttlUttg, cou- rageous (ber SKut) ; fonnig, sunny (bie ®oune). (e) Q^6) forms adjectives, chiefly from proper nouns : atneri- fanifc^, American (ber 2lmertfaner) ; frans^fif^, French (ber grangofe) ; ^omerifc^, Homeric (ber §omer)» (/) 8icf) forms adjectives from — (1) Nouns : gtitcMirf), happy (ba^ ®Iii(f ) ; menfc^Ii^, human (ber 5Kenf(^) ; tagU(^, c?a?72/ (ber 3:ag). (2) Adjectives : fro^U(^, joyous (frot)) ; IangU(^, lengthy (lang) ; rbtUi^, reddish (rot). 256 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (3) Verbs : begretflti^, comprehensible (begretf en) : fraglid^, questionable (fragen) ; ^a^ti^, hateful, ugly (^affen)* (g) (Satn forms adjectives from — (1) Nouns : furd^tfatti, timid (bie gurd^t) ; gelDaltfam, violent (bie ©etDalt) ; fittfatn, modest (bie (Sitte, usage). (2) Verbs :^ biegfatu, pliable (biegen) ; ge^orfam, obedient (gel^ord^en) ; ftre^fam, assiduous (ftreben, to strive), 351. Verbs are formed by the following suffixes : en, em, teren, and igen* (a) @n forms verbs from — (1) Nouns : bitrften, to brush (bie SSitrfte) ; fifteen, to fish (ber gifc^) ; !u[fen, to kiss (ber Sn^). (2) Adjectives : fatten, to harden (^art) ; flatten, to iron flat (plait ^ flat); ftdrfen, to strengthen (ftar!). (3) Eoots of other verbs: brcingen, to crowd (bringen, io force one^s way) ; (fatten), to fell (fatten). (b) dxn forms verbs, chiefly from adjectives. With com- paratives it may be considered as simply -n added to the com- parative root. A prefix — commonly t)er* — often precedes the root: t)erbeffern, to correct (beffer) ; t)erlangern, to prolong (Knger) ; Dergrb^ern, to enlarge (gro^). (c) ^eren forms verbs, chiefly from foreign words : antU=* fieren, to entertain (Ft. amuser) ; regteren, to rule (Lat. regere). (d) ^g^tt forms verbs from — (1) Nouns: l^nlbigen, to do homage (bie @utb, grace)] freujigen, to crucify (ba^ ^ren^) ; fteinigen, to stone (ber (Stein). (2) Adjectives (when an adjective has the ending ^ig, this class of verbs is not to be distinguished from that in (a)): befeftigen, to fasten (feft) ; befc^bnigen, to beautify (fi^5n). WOBD FORMATION, 257 352. German Compounds always have the basic word last : blaugrun, hluish green; griinblau^ greenish blue. They may be any part of speech (nouns take their gender from the last ele- ment) : ba^ 5rt[(f)bein (noun), table leg; ba^felbe (pronoun), the same; l^eHblaU (adjective), light blue; lt)a^rfagen (verb), to prophesy ; bergatt (adverb), up hill; attftatt (preposition), instead of; nai^bem (conjunction), after; :pofetaufenb (interjection), Great Scott! But most compounds are (1) Nouns, (2) Adjec- tives, and (3) Verbs. 353. Compound Nouns may be formed from — (a) Nouns: ba^ ^thtxhtii, feather bed; ber gittger^ut, ^^im- ble; ba^ ©olbftUd, gold piece; bie ^auptftabt, capital city. (b) Pronouns, usually felbft : ber ©elbftmorb, suicide; ber ©elbftlaut, voioel; bie ©elbftfui^t, selfishness. (c) Adjectives: ber 33Itibfinn, nonsense; ba^ ©eutfc^Iattb, Germany ; bie ©ro^TUUtter, grandmother. (d) Verbs: ba^ 3^a{)rrab, bicycle; bie j^nU^tbtX^ fou7itain pen. (e) Adverbs: bie Slu^eufeite, outside; ba^ Sbenbilb, image. (/) Prepositions: ba^ Ttittdb, pity; bie 9^a(^tt)elt, posterity. 354. Compound Adjectives may be formed from — (a) Nouns: hxl\>\d)on^ pretty as a picture; feefratt!, seasick; ftlber^ett, clear as crystal. (b) Adjectives: bitterfU^, bitter sweet; gutmilttg, good nar tured; gritnblau, greenish blue. (c) Verbs : bemerfett^itjert, worthy of note; lernbegterig, ea^er to learn; merflDilrbtg, remarkable. (d) Prepositions : aufred^t, upright; au^erorbetttttd^, ex- traordinary ; >o^x{CiVi{f foricard, pert. 258 ELEMENTS OF GEBMAN, 355. Compound Verbs may be formed from — (a) Nouns: ^au^f)a(ten, to keep house; ftattfitlbetl, to take place; tetltte^men, to take part, (&) Adjectives: gro^tUtt, to swagger; ttebclugeln, to ogle; tiottenben, to finish. (c) Adverbs : '^inge^en, to go away; tDteberfommen, to co7ne again; guriicffe'^ren, to turn back. (d) Prepositions : anjie^en, to put on; mitgel)en, to go along ivith; nad)fi^en, to stay after school. 356. Derivations through the Latin. — Latin students may like to compare certain English words, derived from Latin, with their German synonyms. German equivalents for many Eng- lish words may be found by translating the Latin word, part by part, into German. A few illustrations are given below; students should be on the watch for others. (a) Nouns: Attraction, bte 2In5te^ung (ad, an + trahere, jie^en)* Eruption, bet §lu^bru(^ (e, au^ + rumpere, bred^ett), (6) Adjectives : Retrograde, riicfgdngig (retro, rltcf 4- gradi, ge^eti)* Subsequent, nadifolgenb (sub, narf) + sequi, folgen). (c) Verbs: Expel, a}X^ixt\htn (ex, au^ 4- pellere, treiben). Prescribe, t3orf(i)rieben (prae, t)or + scribere, f(J)reiben)* Survive, iiberlebett (super, iiber + vivere, Itbtn)* GRIMM'S LATV 357. Jacob Grimm was one of the greatest scholars Germany ever produced. He is best known for the discovery or the GRIMM'S LAW. 269 working out of Grimm'' s Law. In all its details this law is too complex for any but advanced students, but many parts of it may be readily understood by beginners. In brief it is the law of cognates or of related words. 358. The German Language, as it is spoken and written to-day, is a growth or development from an older tongue, commonly called Germanic. From the Germanic language grew in suc- cession Old High German ( 1100), Middle High German ' (1100-1350), and New High German, which is usually dated from the time of Martin Luther (1483-1546). During this evolution certain changes of sounds took place, somewhat like those that have taken place in English from the old Anglo- Saxon through Chaucer and Shakspere down to the present time. 359. Cognates. — English, as well as German, comes from • the old Germanic language, so we have many words in English like corresponding German words. These similar words are called cognates, (a) Some are identical in spelling but differ- ent in sound ; (b) some are identical in sound but different in spelling ; (c) others differ in both sound and spelling and even in meaning, but their relation to each other can easily be seen. (a) Similar spellings are seen in such words as ber 3lrm, ber Salt, bte X)ame, ber ?5tttger, ha^ ®otb, bte §anb, ba^ §orn, ba^ 8anb, ber ^iame, ber 'ipian, ber ©acf, ber SBtnb. Most of these have been given in the vocabularies of this book. (&) Similar sounds, but with different spelling, are seen in such words as ber SS'dx, ba^ S3oot, ber 33uf(f), ba^ ©0, ba^ ®Ia^, ba^ §au^, ber 9JJantt, bie 3)iau^, bie Wild), ber 3}?iil(er, ber ©ommer, ber ®tuf)L 260 ELEMENTS OF GERMAN. (c) Other cognates, differing in both sound and spelling, are such words as ba^ i8rot, ber :33ruber, bte geber, ba^ }^tvitx, ber ®arten, ber §unb, ber §ut, bte a)?utter, ba^ papier, 'ba^ ©alj, bte ®(j^ule, ber ©o^n, bte Suppe, ber 2:ee, ber SSater, ber SBagen. 360. Statement of the Law. — From these examples we see that many consonants are just the same in both German and English. These are in general the liquids (I, tit, tt, r), and the letters b^ f, g, f, t|, and f, when these latter come at the begin- ning of a word. But many consonants are different in English and in German, although certain ones in English correspond regularly to the same ones in German. Jacob Grimm formulated the law ^ showing just how they correspond. In general : — (1) English d is German t: ber Jag, gut, alt, ba^ 33ett, ba^ «rot, (2) English th is German b : ba^, bte^, bret, ber T)orn, (3) English v is German 6 : ^abett, lebeu, gebett, ba^ ©ilber. (4) English k is German ^ : ba^ 93uci), ttxai^ett, bte WA6), (5) English p is German ^Jf or f : ber ^fab, bte "iPflattje, ba^ "iPfuttb, ^offen, reif. (6) English t is German f or ff : l^et^, au^, effen* 1 Footnote to teachers. The statements here given make no distinction between the first and second sound-shifts, nor between the formulations of Grimm, Verner, and other philologists. They merely attempt to give pupils an idea of the rela?tion of the two languages, making no pretence to scientific, philological completeness. GERMAN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY Whtn^f bcr, be« -§, bic -c, evening; written without a capital in ad- verbial expressions like ge'ftern a'benb, ^eu'te abenb, mor'gen abcnb. 5l'0cttbfott'ttCttfd^ctn, ber, be^ -^, evening sunshine. 3l'6cttbttHJr!c, bic, bte -tt, evening cloud. a'hcVf conjunction, followed by the normal order^ but. ati^f excL, oh, ah ; as noun, ha^ %d), alas ; SSe^ unb ^d), (the say- ing of) Alas and alack ! a^tf eight. ad^i'mai, eight times. ad^t'jc^tt^utt'bcrtfic'bettttubnctttt^ ^^ Stg, 1897. (t!^n'U(i^^ adj., like, resembling, sim- ilar, preceded by the dative. W^'vtf bie, bte -n, ear (of corn) . aUf all ; for special uses, see § 124, b ajid § 162, a. aKctn'(e), alone; 2SaI)re ®roge l)at allein, tt)er, etc., only he who. aUtviydxt^i^ hardest of all. aW^tiif always. dl^, conjunction, referring to past time, when, as ; a(§ ob, as if ; cor- relative, as ; after a comparative, than. aV^Of so, then (never also). alt, aVtttf aCteft, old; as a noun, ber 5llte, beg -n, bte -n, old per- son, old man. antf an bem ; with the superl., § 212, b. a'men', excl., amen. %ml'x\laf bag, be^ -g, America. amuftc'rcn flti^, fid^ amiifier'te, ftd^ amiifiert' (^aben), to have a good time. ait, prep, with dat. or ace, at, by, near, to ; retd) an, rich in ; benfen an, to think of; also separable prefix as in an'fangen. 5(tt'bcgttttt, ber, beg -g, beginning; t)om 5lnbegtnn, from the very first. att'bcr, other, different, as distin- guished from nod) (etn), other, in the sense o/more. ^tn'bctigfetn, "tiCi^, being different, difference, peculiarity. an^bcrt^nrB, one and a half. ^tn'fang, ber, beg-(e)g, bie tofcinge, beginning. an'fangctt, fing an^ an'gefangen (^aben), er fcingt an, to begin, commence. att'gcfattgctt, see an'fangen, an'gefommctt, see an'fommen, an'geite^m, agreeable, pleasant to, preceded by the dative. antam an^alttn an'tawtf see ait'fomnteru an'fommcn, fam an', an gefommen (fein), to arrive ; at, in or an with the dative; ba^ fommt baranf an, that depends. att'ntuttg, graceful. ^n'na, bic, proper name^ Anna. ^n'^pxu^f ber, beg -(e)g, bie 5ln= fpriic^e, claim ; in 5lnfpru(^ nef)= men, lay claim to. an^iatt'fprep. with gen., instead of ; followed by ^n with the infinitive in German^ where English has a verbal in -ing. an'pfangen, see an'fangen. 5ttt'5«9r ber, be§ -(e)^, bie ^tn'jiige, suit (of clothes). ^^'fel, ber, be^ -«, bie "■, apple. %x'ht\if bie, bic -en, work, in the sense of labor as distinguished from \ia^ 2Ber!, work, in the sense of the result or product of labor. ar'Bctten, reg. (^aben), to work. arm, adj., poor. %xm, ber, be§ -(e)g, W -e, arm. a% ate, see effen» (iVi6)f also, too. 5(tt(e), bie, bie -(e) n, meadow, pas- ture. aitf, prep, with dat. or ace, on, upon, onto; anf bentfc^, in Ger- man ; anf bie ^o\i, to the post- office; anf bent i^anbe, in the country ; marten anf, loith ace, to wait for; with the siiperl., anf« "^oc^fte, in the highest possi- ble way ; also separable prefix as in anf'^oren, auf'mac^en, anf':= fte^en, etc. 5tuf'gaBc, bie, bie -n, exercise, as- signment, task, problem. aitf'gcgattgen, see anf'gel)en. auf'gc^en, ging anf, anf'gegangen (fein), to go up, rise, arise; of love, bie ?iebe (c/. p. 137), to dawn. mifgeprt, see auf'^bren. auf'gelcfcn, see auf'Iefen, auf'geftanben, see anf'fte^en. auf'ptett, reg., sep. ({)aben), to stop, followed in German by the infinitive with ^n, where English has the verbal in -ing. aitf'Iefett, lag anf, anfgelefen (tjaben), er tieft anf, to gather up, pick up, glean. aitfmati^Ctt, reg., sep. (l^aben), to open. auf'ftel)ett, ftanb anf, anfgeftanben ((Cin), to rise, get up, stand up. aitf 5ttma(^cn, see anf mad) en, ^n'^Cf bag, beg -g, bie -n, eye. 5ttt'gCttBUrf, ber, beg -g, bie -e, mo- ment. ^ug'Ieht, bag, beg -g, bie — , little eye. ^Ittjiuft', ber, (the month) August ; ^n'gnft, ber, Augustus, August, the man''s name. an§f prep, with dat. , out of, from out, from, of; ein 9Jiarcf)en ang alien Batten, a tale of olden times ; also separable prefix as in aM'^ fatten, ang'feljen, ang'f^rerfjen, ang'fpannen, etc. an§'({C^pvo6)Ctt, see ang'fpred^en. au^'f^aittn, ^ielt ang', ang'ge^alten auSfal^ Bcrcitcn (Ijahtn), cr ^cilt au«', to bear, suf- fer, endure, "stand." an§'^a% see aii^'fe^en. auie^'fc^en, fal) au«', au§'gefe()eu (^abeu), er fie^t au^^, to look, appear ; ha^ ^2lu^fe^en, beg -6, ap- pearance, look, looks. aW^tvi)alhf prep, with gen., out- side of. aUi^^f^attttCtt, reg., sep. (^abett), to spread out. '$in^'^pva(f)t, bte, bie -n, pronuncia- tion, accent, in the sense of a good German accent. an^'^pvt^cn, jprad^ aug', aii^'ge- j^roc^en (^abett), cr fprtd^t aii§'; to pronounce. au^'^ttf^^reri^ett, see an^'\pxt6)en. ^a'dtf bte, bte -tt, cheek. Sab, ba§, be§ -«, bie "er, bath. Saljlt, bte, bie -en, way, road. Balti(c), adv., soon; batb . , ♦ balb, now . . . now ; at one time . . . then again. f8aU, ber, beg -g, bie % ball. Satta'bC, bie, bie -n, ballad. S3attb, ber, beS -§, bie ""e, volume. Batt'gCtt, regr. (tjaben), usually im- pers. with dat., eg bangt tnir, to be afraid ; lattgeti unb bangen, to be longing and fearing. ^anff bte, bte ^e, bench. S8arml)cr'5tg!ctt, bte, mercy. ^an'ttntta^tf bte, bte -en, peas- ants' costume or dress. f8anm, ber, beg -g, bte iBanme, tree. Scti^'ftcttt, $?ubtt)tg,proi)er name, a German poet. Bcbcu'teai, re^;'., msep. (l^aben), to mean (of things) as contrasted with ntetnen, to mean {of per- sons). htWdn'^tttf reg., insep. (l^aben), to oppress; bebrangt', oppressed, afflicted. Befln'bctt fid^, fic^ befanb', ftc^ befun'^ ben (f)aben), to be, to do (in health) ; Ste beftnben @te ftd^ ? How do you do ? How are you? begcg'ttCtt, reg., insep. (fetn), fol- lowed by the dative, to meet by chance, happen upon, run across. bcgitt'nen, begann', begon'nen (Ija^ ben), to begin, commence. Bcglii'cfctt, reg., insep. (^aben), to make happy ; begliicft, happy. Bcgott'nctt, see begin'nen, begdi'^cu, reg., insep. (^aben), to greet. Bci, prep, xdth dat., near, close to, by ; at the house of. I6ci'bc, both, two; used after the article or adjective that precedes it in English : both the boys, bte betben ^naben. S5ettt, bag, beg -g, bte -e, leg. Bci'fjctt, big, gebtfjen (^aben), to bite. Bcfom'men, be!am', befom'men (^a^ ben), to get, secure, procure. ^tVXtMf reg. (^abett), to bark. ^txtxi'f ready, prepared. bcrci'tcn, reg,, insep. (^aben), to prepare. SBerg 25«(^ftaBc f&tx^f hex, be^ -(e)6, bie -e, moun- tain. ht^^ti'^trtf bejd^ieb', befc^te'ben (^a^ ben), to allot, assign, apportion. Bcf fer, better, comparative of gut* beft, best, superlative of gut; am beften, best. Bcftirn'men, regr., ^^^sep. (i^ahen), to decide, decree, settle. S^cfuc^', ber, beg -(e) §, bie -e, visit; visitor. licfu'ri^Ctt, re^., insep. (I)abeu), to visit ; of school, to attend. betrii'bcn, reg., insep. ():)ahtn), to grieve, afflict, depress. fdtttf ha^, beg -(e)g, bie -eu, bed; gu iBett, to bed. l^ic^gctt \x^, reg. (l)aben), to bend (itself) ; to sv^ray, wave. SBic'ne, bie, bie -n, bee. S3i(b, hoi^, beg -(e)g, bie -er, picture. iixV^tn, reg. ({)aben), to form, fash- ion, shape ; fic^ bilben, to form itself, to develop. SJtUctf , hOi^, beg -g, bie -e {pro- nounced bilyet'), ticket. hvXf am, see fein. hi^f prep, with ace, till, until; conjunction with dependent order, till, until. Bift, art, are, see fein. Ui'Uf see bit'teu. hit'tcttf hat, gebe'ten (^aben), to beg, ask ; for, urn with the ace. ; (trf)) bitte, please; you're wel- come. Ma'fctt, blieg, gebta'fen (l^aben), er btcift, to blow ; of the watchman (SBdd^ter), to sound his horn. ^laitf bag, beg -(e)g, bie "er, leaf. Man, blue. hid'htrtf blteb, geblie'ben (fein), to stay, remain. Ui'dtttf reg. (^aben), to look, glance ; see also nieberbltd en. hlit'^tUf reg. (^aben), to flash, gleam, sparkle. ftlil'^ett, reg. (^aben), to bloom, blossom ; to flourish. S3(ttm'(i^Ctt, bag, beg -g, bie — , little flower, posy. ^Wmtf bie, bie -n, flower. SBJii'tenfri^tmmer, ber, beg -g, bie — , gleam, glitter, or splendor of blossoms. So'bcn, ber, beg -g, bie — , floor. SBout, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, boat. Bur'gen, reg. (fjaben), to borrow. fSoxxitf 2^'^oper name, a German author. hva^f see bre(i)en. Brau'd^Ctt, reg. (^aben), to need. hvaixn, brown. to'd^cn, brad^, gebro'd)en (^aben), er brtd^t, to break. hvtxtf broad, wide. f&vtxxia'nOf proper name, a German poet. SBrtef, ber, beg -(e)g, bie -e, letter, epistle. Brttt'gctt, bradi'te, gebrad^t' (f)aben), to bring. S3rot, bag, beg -(e)g, bie-e, bread. Sru'ber, ber, beg -g, bie ", brother. 23ttti^, bag, beg -(e)g, bie "er, book. Suri^'ftaic, ber, beg -ng, bie -n, let- ter {of the alphabet). hn^^iahitvtn bcrfclfic l^udiftaBtc'ren, budiftabier'te, bud)- ftabiert' (^abcn), to spell. SBurg, bie, bie -en, castle, fortress. S3ufrf|, ber, be6 -eg, bie "e, bush. S5uf'fc, proper name, a German poet. Sttt'tCt, bie, butter. ^axlf ber; proper name., Charles, Carl. IS^araf'tetr, ber, beg -g, bie (Jt)ara!= te're, character. aWmtn^, ber, proper oiame, Clem- ent. ba, a(?v., there, in that place; con- junction usually giving a reason, as. babet', at the same time, too. bagc'gen, against it ; etr\)a^ bagegen ^aben, to have any objections. balder', along. ba^itt', along, thither. ^a^lt^ proper name, a German poet. ^a'ntc, bie, bie -n, lady. bamtt^, with it. bam'mcrn, reg. (^aben), to grow dark or dusk. •-^attf, ber, beS -(e)8, thanks. bait'fctt, reg. (^aben), with dat., to thank; (id^) banfe, thank you. bann, then, next. bar, adv. and sep. prefix, usually not to he translated. It adds a suggestion of definite direction to a verb. See barfii^ren. baran^, of it. baraitf, upon it, on it ; bo8 fommt barauf an, that depends. barau!^', out of it. barf, barfft, see biirfen. bar'fii^rctt, reg., sep. (ftaben), to lead along or away. baritt', in it. barii'bcr, about it, over it. barum', then, therefore. ba^, see ber, article and demonstra- tive. baf, conjunction followed by the dependent order, that. ba^feCbe, see berfel'be. 'I)a'tiib, ber, proper name, David. batlOtt', of it, from it, from there, away. be'cfcn, reg. (^aben), to cover ; of a table, to set. bein, poss. adj., your, thy; poss, pron., yours, thine. bem, see ber, bctt, see ber. be'ttCtt, dat. plu. ofrel., ber, bctt'feu, ti^^^it, gebad^t' (^aben),to think; of, an with ace. bCtttt, interrogative particle, usu- ally omitted in translation ; con- junction folloioed by the normal order, for. ber, bie, ha^, gen., beg, ber, beg, article, the ; rel. pron. , gen., beffen, beren, beffen, who, which, that ; demonstr. pron., that, the one. bcrfcrbc, biefel^be, bagfel'be, gen., begfet'ben, berfel'ben, begfel'ben, the same. Dctwett etn htttOtxVf conjunction followed by the dependent order, while. bci3, see ber* bef fen, gen. of the relative, ber or be'fto, correlative of comparison with je: je » , . befto, the . . . the. bCtttfd^, adj., German ; auf beutfd^, in German. ^CUtj^, ba^, be^ -en, the German language; er fprid^t 2)eutfd), he speaks German. ^eutfrJ^e, ber, be^ -n, bie -n, Ger- man man; plu., the Germans. ^Ctttfti^'Iattb, ba^, beg -g, Germany. ^c^cm'Ber, ber, be§ -8, December. bid^, ace. o/biu ^i^'ttVf ber, beg -g, bie — , poet. hkf see ber, ^tCttjg'tag, ber, beg -g, Tuesday. bicfeFBc, see berfelbe. bic'fct, bie'fe, bte^feg, or bieg, this ; pliL, these. btCi^'fcit^, j9rep. -mjM gen., on this side of. ^tng, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, thing. bir, fZa^. 0/ bu. boc^, adv., after all, still, yet, but ; idiomatic particle, pray ; yes ; is it? (§296.) ^m'ntt §ta^f ber, beg -g, Thursday. ^orf, bag, beg -(e)g, bie "er, village. ^ortt, ber, beg -g, bie -en, thorn. bort, there, over there, yonder. brau'^Ctt, outside, out of doors, used with verbs of rest. btei, three. brci'ttubcttt^alb', three and a half. hxti'unWitv'^XQ, forty-three. ^Vt'tit^f proper name, a German poet. Mitf third. Wtt'ttn^f thirdly, in the third place. hvn'htVf for barii'ber, over it, about it. brum, for barnnt', then, therefore. Wf betner, btr, bid^, you, thou. bulb 'f am, patient. bumm, stupid. buu'fchl, reg. (^aben), impersonal with eg, to grow dark. burti^, prep, with ace, through. 'is\xx6)^\'ai'itx\% reg., insep. (I)abcn), to run through {of a book), bur^'5icl|cn, aog bnr(^', burd^'ge- gogen (fein), to go through. bitr'fcu, burf'te, gebnrft' or biir'fen (^aben), er barf, to be permitted, be allowed, may. burf 'ten, see biirfen. bur'ftig, thirsty. c'bcu, just ; ja, eben, yes, that's so. @b'ucr=@f(^'cuBa(^, proper name, a German poet. VbtXf declined ebler, eb(e, eb(eg ; compared ebel, ebler, ebelft, noble. t'\)tf conjunction followed by the dependent order, before. (S^'rc, bie, bie -n, honor. ell'rcu, reg. (^aben), to honor. ©i, bag, beg -(e) g, bie -er, egg. ci'geu, declined eig(e)ner, eig(e)ne, etg(e)neg, own, one's own. @i'(c, bie, haste. CtU, indef. art., a, an; numeral (cing), one ; sep. prefix as in etn* cinerlei crtttiicrrt fatten, einpEen, einfd)cn!en, ein= fc^tafen, etc. eittcrlci', of one and the same kind ; \ia^ ift mir einerlei, it's all the same to me, I don't care. cttt'fattctt, fie( t\i\' , ein'gefaEen (fein), e6 fdUt mir ein, with the dat.^ to occur to; e^ fdllt mir nid^t ein, it doesn't occur to me, I should not think of (such a thing). CtttI)Cr', sep. prefix usually imply- ing stateliness, along, forth. mt^tt'tDaUciXf reg., sep. (^aben), to float along. citt'pttctt, reg., sep. (l^aben), to wrap up, envelop. et'ittg, united; einige, plu.^ some; einige 3^it, some time. Citt'mat, once ; once upon a time. citt'fri^Cttfcn, reg., sep. (:^aben), to fill up (of a glass). citt'f^Iafcn, fd)(ief ein',et^'9^ff^icifen (fein), to go to sleep. Ctltft, once upon a time, one day. c(f, eleven. ^i'ttxttf bie (plu.), parents. cm^fa^n', poetic for em^fangen, cm^fan'gcn, empftng', em^fan'gen (^aben), er em^fcingt', to receive. @n'be, t)a^f beg -§, bie -n, end. Cttb'Uc^, finally. ©tt'gcl, ber, beg -g, bie — , angel. cng'lif^, adj., English; anf engltfcf), in English. ©ug'Uft^, bag, beg -en, the English language. Sn^'titt, proper name, a German poet. tntUc^ttttf entbot^ entbo^ten (l)a- ben), to summon avi^ay. tniho'ttttf see entbie'ten. txtt^aVUttf ent\)uW, entljal'ten (f)a> ben), eg ent^dlt', to hold, contain. Cttt^tctt', see ent^al'ten, entfc^Uc'^ctt, entfc^Iog', entfc^lof'fen (l)aben), to decide. tni^d)io^'nt§f see entjd^Iie'gen, etttf(i^uFbi(|cn, entfcf)nl'bigte, ent^ fc^nl'bigt (^aben), to excuse. cutftc'^Ctt, entftanb', entftan'ben (jein), to come into being, begin, arise, break out. Cttt'lueber, either; enttt)eber . . . ober, either ... or. er, fte, eg, he, she, it. crMi'tctt, erbat', erbe'ten (fjaben), to obtain by entreaty, to get by asking. ©t'bc, bie, ber — , earth ; anf (Srben (old weak dative), on earth. ©r'bcnruttt), bag, beg -eg, bie -e, face of the earth, terrestrial globe. erffc'^cn, reg., insep. (^aben), to get by pleading. crgc'Bctt, ergab', erge'ben (^aben), er ergibt', to deliver up, yield to ; past part., ergeben, devoted, at- tached. ctgrci^fctt, ergriff', ergrif'fen, to grasp, seize ; ergreift eg mtt toxU bem 3Be^, is seized with a wild yearning (lit., woe). tvi^aVttn, er()te(t', er^at'ten (^aben), er er^dlt', to keep; to receive. cx^tWf see er^al'ten. crin'ttetn, reg., insep. (!^aben), to crfam^fen fe^lctt remind; fic^ erinnern with the genitive^ to remember. crfom^'fen, reg., insep. (^aben), to get by fighting. crfamtt^, see erfen'nen, crfen'ttCtt, erfann'te, erfannt' (l)a- ben), to recognize. crfld'rcn^ reg., insep. (^aben), to explain. txian'htnf reg.^ insep. (^aben), loith dative, to allow, permit. ttW^tUf reg., insep. (^aben), to deliver, ransom, redeem. ernft'ltc^, earnest (ly), serious(ly). crqul^rfctt, reg., insep. (l^ahen), re- fresh, restore. crrei'd^Ctt, re^., insep. (^aben), to reach. crritt'gctt, errang', errun'gen (I}a= ben) , to obtain by striving. crrutt'gcn, see errin'gen. crft, adv., for the first time, first; just, only ; not till. cr'ftcn^, adv., in the first place, firstly. ctftcr, erfte, erfte^, adj., first. crftrci'ten, erftritt', erftrit'ten (^a- ben), to get by fighting. crffrit'tctt, see erftrci'ten. tvtt>a'^ttt, reg., insep. (fein), to awaken, wake up {neuter). crtua^'fen, reg., insep. (^aben), to choose. crttior'tctt, reg., insep. (^aben), to await, expect. crttJi'bcril, reg., insep. (l)abeii), to repay, requite, render in return. crja^'lctt, reg., insep. (^aben), to relate, tell. t^f it; there (is or are) ; with fein and a plural predicate attribute, they, those. See § 155. cffen, Ci% gegef'fen (^aben), er igt, to eat. ti'toa^f something, anything; a fol- lowing adjective must he neuter and is capitalized, except anber : ettDag ©uteg, ettt)a« anbereg. • t\x6]f dat. and ace. of if)r, you. tw'tXf your. ©uangc'Iiuttt, t^a^, be^ -^, bie @t)an* ge^Iien, gospel. C'ttJtg, a(?j., eternal; adv., forever. S'ttJtgfctt, bie, eternity; in (Swtg* felt, forever and ever. 3'a^bcn, ber, beg -§, bie ^aben, thread. fa!^'rcn, fn^r, gefa^'ren (jein), er fci^rt, to drive, ride, go {by train) ; see also fort'fa^ren. fd'lctt, fiel, gefat'Ien (fein), er fallt, to fall ; see also ein'fatten* %aV\tx^\thtnf proper name, a Ger- man poet. fftUt, see fal'Ien and ein'fallen, f atft^, false ; in the class room, wrong. ^amx'Iic, bie, bie -n (four sylla- bles), family. faitb, fan'ben, see fin'ben, fan'gcn, fing, gefan'gen (^aben), er fangt, to catch, seize ; see also an fangen. fje'bruar, ber, beg -g, February. JJc'ber, bie, bie -n, pen. ^t^'Urtf reg. (^aben), to lack, with getter freubtioU the dative of the person who lacks and the subject of the thing lacked: mir fe^tt iBrot, I lack bread. %z^'\tXf beiv beg -§, hit —, mistake, error. fci'crUc^, festive ; stately, solemn. JJcinb^ ber, beg -(e)g, bie -e, enemy. JJclb, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -er, field. gc'Hj, ber, proper name, Felix, geFfcnriff, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, rocky reef. ^en'ftcr^ bag, beg -g, bie — , window. ^CV'ntf bie, distance, remoteness ; in ber gerne, far away, at a dis- tance. fer'tig, ready ; through, finished. S'Cft'gcfang, ber, beg -(e)g, bie geft= gefdnge, festal song, joyous music. ^tn^'tev^khtttf proper name^ a German poet. %tM'tx, bag, beg -g, bie — , fire. fttt'ben, fanb, gefun'ben (^aben), to find. ftttg, fin'geu, see fan'gen, JJitt'gcr, ber, beg -g, bie — , finger. fttt'fter, gloomy, dark. gifr^, ber, beg -eg, bie -e, fish. %\'\6)tXf ber, beg -g, bie — , fisher- man, fisher. fJi'f^erltiaBe, ber, beg -n, bie -n, fisher lad or boy. Pcti^'ten, fforf)t, gef(od)'ten (l^aben), er ftid)t, to weave, twine, braid. ^leifti^, bag, beg -eg, bie -e, meat. flci'^ig, superl., fleigigft, industri- ous, diligent; fleigig (ernen, to study hard. ??ne'gc, bie, bie -n, fly. fltc'gcttp flog, geflogen (fein), to fly. fltc'lctt, flog, geflof'jen (fein), to flow. ^Hf flo'ge, see flie'gen, ^Witf bie, bie -u, flute. p^tCtt, reg. (^aben), to play the flute ; bag glijteu, playing on the flute. ^in'^ti, ber, beg -g, bie — , wing. ^mg, ber, beg gluffeg, bie gliiffe, river. flii^ftcrn, reg. (^aben), to whisper. flit'ftcrnb, see fliifterr.. ^Intf bie, hie -en, flood, stream; water. fuCgctt, reg. (fein), with dat., to follow. fort'fa^ren, fu^r fort', fort'gefa^ren (^aben), er fd^rt fort', to con- tinue; followed in German by an infinitive with git, where Eng- lish has either an infinitive or a verbal in -ing. fort'gcfa^ren, see fort'fa^ren, fra'gctt, reg. (I)aben), to ask (a question), as distinguished from bitten, to ask {a favor) ; reflexive impersonal, eg fragt fi(^, it is a question. fjrau, bie, bie -en, woman; wife; Mrs. fret, free(ly). grci'tag, ber, beg -g, Friday. fremb, strange, a stranger to, pre- ceded by dat. greu'bc, bie, bie -n, joy, happiness ; t3or (anter greub', for very joy, for pure joy. ftCttb'tiofl, joyous, happy. freuctt 10 (SJcfiebcr freu'eit firi^, reg. (^ab en), to be glad ; impersonal^ t% freut mic^, I am glad. §reimb^ ber, be^ -(e) ^, bie -e, friend. freWttb'Ur^, adj., kind, friendly; adv., in a friendly way. f^rie'bc, ber, beg -n^, bie -n, peace. gric'iicn^ttjolfc, W, bie -n, cloud of peace. ^ricb^riri^, ber, proper name, Fred- erick. ftrifc^, fresh. %xx^f tin, proper name, Fred, Fritz. friJ^'Ut^, joyous, joyful, merry. frii^, compar., frii^er, early, soon; tnorgen friil^, to-morrow morn- ing. grii^'Uttg^a^ttUttg, bie, premonition of spring, feeling that spring is in the air. gru^'lutg^Heb, \ia^, beg -(c)g, bie -er, spring song. fii'gen, reg. (^aben), to fit together, join ; see also ^uf iigen. fu^r, fii^ren, see fa^ren and fort= fasten. fii^'rctt, reg. (^aben),tolead; take, bring. JJttl'ba, proper name, a German poet. fitttf, five. fim'feln, reg. (^aben), to sparkle, gleam. fiir, prep, with ace, for. f?urrf|t, bie, fear, terror, dread. fiirti^'tcn, reg. (^aben), to fear; \id} fiird^ten t)or with dat., to be afraid of. ^M^f ber, beg -eg, bie giige, foot. ^ahf ga ben, see geben. i^a'hci, bie, bie -n, fork. gaU5, whole, entire, all ; gu jebem ganjen SBerf, for every complete work; ein ©angeg, a whole. gat, in fact, really ; at all. (SJar'tctt, ber, beg -g, bie ©cirten, garden. ge'^ctt, gab, gege'ben (^aben), er gibt, to give; eg gibt, there is; 2Bag gibt'g? What's up ? gcBc'tcn, asked ; see bitten. gcBHc'ften, stayed; see blei'ben. geBorgt', borrowed ; see bor'gen. ^thta^i'f brought; given, see brin'gen. ®cbaat'!c, ber, beg -ng, bie -n, thought. gcban'fcittJoH, pensive. gebauff, thanked; see ban' fen. geberft', covered; of tables, set; see be'den. gcbci'^(c)tt, gebie^, gebie'f)en (fein), to increase, grow, develop, thrive, flourish. (^t^id^t'f bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, poem. gcbttC'btg, patient (ly). gcfal'Ictt, fallen ; see fallen. gefal'lctt, gefteC, gefal'Ien (baben), er gefcittt', vnth dat., to please. (SJefa^r'te, ber, beg -n, bie -n, com- panion, comrade. gefatt'gett, caught; see fan'gen. gefcl)(t', lacked ; see feb'fen. ^cflc'bcr, bag, beg -g, feathers, plumage. gcpogett 11 fief(^ric6ctt gcflo'gctv flown ; !am geflo'gen, came flying ; see flie'gen. gcftttt'tJeu, found ; see fin'ben. gcgctt'gen, gone; see ge'l)en, gcgc'ben, given; see ge'ben, gc'gctt, j)rej9. tozY/i ace, against, toward, to. Q^t^^tnttiif ba^, be§ -g^ contrary. gegcf 'fctt, eaten ; see effen. geglauBt', believed, thought; see „ gtau'bem gcl^aBt', had ; see l^a'ben, ge^ci'Hget, hallowed; see l)ei/Ugeti. ^e^ci^', ba^, beg -eg, command, order. gc'^cit, gtttg, gegan'gen (fetn) , to go ; 2Bie ge^t eg 3^nen? How goes it ? How are you ? See also l^erum'ge^en, l^tn'ge^en, Iog'gel)en, \paik'xm ge{)en. gc^oCf en, helped ; see ^effen, gcprt', heard ; see ^o'reti. gcl)o'rctt, re^., ^?^sep. (\^ahen), with dat.^ to belong to; ge^ort eiti ganger 5D^antt, requires or is re- quired by. ^t\jitf 3d sing, indie, or M plu. im- perative; see ge^^en. gefauft', bought ; see fau^fen. gcfom'mett, come ; see fom'men* gclii^t', kissed ; see fiif'fen. &tihf ba^, beg -(e)g, bte -er, money. gclcgf , laid ; see le'gen. getc'fctt, read ; see (e^fen, gcHe'^Ctt, lent ; see Iei'()en. gelhtb'Cc), soft(ly), mild(ly), gently, gentle. gelttt'gctt, gelang^ gelun'gen (jein), eg gelingt mir, impers. with dat., to succeed. gelobt', praised ; see lo'bett. get'tctt^ gait, gegol'ten (^aben), eg gilt, loith dat., to be for, be in- tended for; with ace, to be worth. gehtn'gett, succeeded ; see getin^gen, gcmat^t', made ; see tna'd^ett. (3tmai)Vf ber, beg -g, bte -e, hus- band. ^cmaf^Vf bag, beg -g, obsolete and poetic, consort, spouse. gcmtt|t', been obliged to ; see miif * fen» ^tmi}t'f sewed ; see nci'^ett. gcnom'tttett, taken ; see ne^'men* gettug,', enough. gcttil'gctt, reg., insep. (^aben), to sufiice, be enough; bag geniigt, that is sufficient, that will do. gcra'be, adj., straight; adv., just, exactly. gent, compar., Iteber, superl., am Itebften, gladly; usually trans- lated to like to : id) finge gent, I like to sing, gcfagt', said; see fa'gen. gefc^afft', worked; see fd^af fett. gcft^c'^Ctt, gefc^a!)^ gej(^e'l}ett (fein), eg gefc^tel)t', impers. withdat., to happen. @cfc^i(^'te, bte, bie -tt, story; his- tory. gcfri^irft', sent; clever, dexterous; see f(^i'c!en, ^cfri^mei'bc, bag, beg -g, bie — , jewelry. gefrffric'bctt, written; see fd)rei'ben. gefe^en 12 gt(tU gcfc'^eit, seen ; see fe'^en. gcfc^t', set; see fet'^en. gef^on'nctt, spun ; see fpin'nen» gcf^ro'ci^ett, spoken ; see fpre'rf)en* ^cfta'be, ba^, beS -^, bank, shore, beach. gcftanb', see gefte'l)en. (JJcftrittb'mg, ha^, beg @eftanb'uiffe«, . bie ©eftcinb'niffe, confession, avowal. gcftcrft', put, see ftc'cfen. gefte'^ctt, geftanb^ geftan'ben (^a= ben), to confess, admit. ge'ftcnt, adv. , yesterday ; a follow- ing noun is written as an adverb without a capital^ ge'ftern,mor'= gen, ge'ftern a'benb. ©c'ftern, ha^, noun^ (the) yester- day. gcftor'Bcn, died; see fter'ben. gctatt', done ; see tnn. getrcttttt', separated; see tren'nen» gettial'tig, powerful, mighty. gcttie'fcn, been ; see jein. gewitt'ttCtt, getDann', getuon'nen (^aben), to win. gemoHt^ wanted ; see n)oI'Ien, gcttJOtt'nett, won, see gelDin'nen, gettiur'bCtt, become, got; see njer'ben, gcttmjt', known ; see tDiffen. gejeigt', shown ; see ^et'gen. ge^o'gen^ with !)aben, drawn; with Snu, gone ; see ^ie'^en. gift, imperative of ge'ben, give. giftt, see gebcn ; e« gibt, there is. gic^^cn, gog, gegof'fen (^aben), to pour ; see aZso ^inein'giegen. gilt, see gel' ten. ging, see ge'^en, i^\p'\tlf ber, beg -g, bie — , top, summit. glan'^cii, re^. (^aben), to gleam, shine, sparkle. Qbia^, \>a^, beg ©lafeg, bie @Iafer, glass. gktt'Bcn, re^. (^aben), to think; to believe, with dat. of person be- lieved^ but icith ace. if the object is a thing. ^ gleid^, adj., preceded by dat., like, alike, equal, the same ; adv., at once. g(cid)'!ommctt, !am gteid)', gleld^'= getommen (fein), with dat., to equal. ^IM, ha^, beg -(e)g, happiness, fortune, luck. gliiif'lid), superl., QlM'li6)% happy, fortunate. Q^lntf bie, bie -en, heat, glow; ar- dor, passion. ^oc't^C, proper name, a German poet. ©olb, bag, beg -(e) g, gold. golbctt, goIb(e)neg, golden. giJn'ttCtt, reg. (^ahen), to grant willingly, not to begrudge. (^ottf ber, beg -(e)g, hie Hx, God; god. (^oi'U§hottf ber, beg -it, bie -n, di- vine messenger. Q^vah, bag, beg -(e)g, bie "er, grave. GJraf, ber, beg -en, bie -en, count. ®vamma'iitf bie, bie -en, grammar. (Bva^, bag, beg ©rafeg, bie ©rdfer, grass. gtau, gray. fifog 13 l^erjagett gro§, cojiipar., gro'ger, superl, grbgt, large, great, big. (^x'o^tf hie, greatness. griitt, green. QXltf adj., good; adv., well; as noun, @ute§, good ; ba^ ®ute, the good. ^aaVf ba^, bc^ -(e)«, bic -e, hair, ifsed &oi/fc iw sing, and plu. in general sense of hair. f^a'htttf i:)at'te, ge^abt' (t)aben), bit ^aft, er Ijat, to have ; o/iJeTi trans- lated by English did. ^a'gcburn, ber, be§ -«, bie -en, hawthorn ; proper name, a Ger- man poet. ^aitt, ber, beg -(e)«, bie -e, grove. fjOXiSf adj., half; following the arti- cle : half a cup, eine ^albe Xaffe ; l^alb elf, half past ten. IJalf, see ^eCfett. ^alf tc, bie, bie -n, noun, half. ^al'le, bie, bie -ti, hall. l^aCten, l)ie(t, gel)al'ten (l)aben), er ^d(t, to hold, keep; ^dlten fiir with ace, to take for; see also au8't)alten. ^ant>f bie, bie "e, hand. l^an'gcn, ^tng, ge^an'gen (Ijaben), er ^cingt, to hang. I^aft, see ^a'ben. f^atf ^at'te, Ijat'te, see l^a'ben. ^and^f ber, beg -(e)g, bie -e, breath. ^anpi, ba^, beg -(e)g, bie ^ciup'ter, head. ^an^f ba^, beg -eg, bie §du'fer. house; ju §aufe, at home; ttad^ §aufe, (to) home. ^e'ben, ^ob, ge^o'ben (l)aben), to lift, raise. ^e^r, august, majestic, sublime. ^ci'bc, bie, bie -n, heath ; old weak dative, §eiben in auf ber §eiben; compare (Srben. ^ci'Mhtv^f bag, proper name, a German city. ^ci'bcnro^'Iein, bag, beg -g. bie — , heather rose, heath rose. ^ei'ttC, proper name, a German poet. ^Cii hot. ^ci'gcn, ^ieg, ge^ei'gen (^aben), to be called, named ; in translating, to be (translated) ; to bid, com- mand : Ijit^ auf jener ^a^n bid^ ^ei'tcr, cheerful, jovial, merry. ^e(b, ber, beg -en, bie -en, hero. ^erfctt, ^alf, ge^olfen (fiaben), er '^ilft, with dat., to help. ^eit'fcl, proper name, a German poet. !)Ct, adv., along; sep. prefix, denot- ing motion toward the speaker, hut often not translated ; t)in unb l^er, to and fro, hither and thither ; see also ^erjagen, l^erjagen. ^erbftlicb, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -er, autumn song. $er't»e, bie, bie -n, flock, herd. ^Ct'bcr, proper name, a German poet. ^cr'gefagt, recited, see l)er'fagen* l^cr'jagcn, reg., sep. (^aben), to chase along, hunt. ^entiebcr 14 §unb f^tvnxt't>tVf adv. and sep. prefix, down here or hither. l^crnlc'bcrft^aucn, reg., sep.(I)aben), to look down here. ^tvXf hex, be§ -n, bie §erreii, gen- tleman; Sir; Mr.; referring to the Deity, Lord. ^tXX'\x6)f magnificent, grand, glo- rious, lordly. ^crr'Iit^fcit, bie, glory. l^er'fagctt, reg., sep. (^aben), to recite. 1)tX\iVX'f adv. and sep. prefix, around, about. f^txnm' ^tfjtUf giug ^erum', l^eritm'* gegaiigen (fein), to go around or about. $ct5, t>a^, beg -en§, bie -en, heart. |)Ctt, ha^, beg -(e}g, hay. fjtn'tit), to-day; this, ^eute ntor* gen, this morning; a following noun is written as an adverb without a capital, l^eute abenb, J)ic(t, held, see ^al'ten, ^ter, here. 1)\t% see ^ei'gen, §irfc, bie, bie -n, help. ^tm'mcl, ber, beg -g, heaven ; sky. ^im'mc(^0(^, high as the heavens. ^m'mtX^tiif bag, beg -(e)g, can- opy of heaven. l^imm'Iifri^, heavenly, divine. ]^tn, adv., along; sep. prefix, de- noting motion away from the speaker, hut often not translated ; I)in imb ^er, hither and thither. l^ittouf, adv. and sep. prefix, up, up there. l^ittCttt', adv. and sep. prefix, in. ^tncttt'gtc§ett, gog ^inein', ^ittein'* gegoffen (^aben), to pour in. l^itt'ge^cn, giug ^in', l^in'gegangen (fein), to go (away or along). ^itt'gefteUt, see ^in'ftellen, •^itt'ftctten, reg., sep. (^aben), to place, put. ^in^itXf prep, with dat. or ace, be- hind. l^ttttttt'tcr, adv. and sep. prefix, down; W %xt\^)^t ^inunter, downstairs. ^\xi'{t)f ber, beg -(e)n, bie -(e)n, shepherd. 5o(^, declined ^o^er, ^o^e, l^o^eg; compared \)q^, p^er, ^od^ft, high ; aufg ^o^fte, in the highest pos- sible way ; ber §o(^fte, beg -n, the Highest, the Deity. ^ori^mttt, ber, beg -(e) g, pride, haughtiness, arrogance. ^of'fctt, reg. (l^aben), to hope. Hoffmann uoit fjal'lcrj^lcbcn, proper name, a German poet. pf Ut^, polite(ly). !^o'()e, see })q6). ^i^'^t, 'iixt, bie -n, height. i)ts'\\tXf higher, see ^orf). !^o(b, favorable ; kind, friendly. ^o'len, reg. (^aben), to go and get, fetch. p'rctt, reg. (l)aben), to hear; see also anf'ljoren, 3n't)oren. ^ii'gcl, ber, beg -g, bie — , hill. ^tt^n, bag, beg -g, bie "er, chicken, fowl. pl'Ictt, reg. (^aben), to wrap up, cover, hide ; .see also ein'^iitten. ^nnhf ber, beg -(e)g, bie -e, dog. ^mtfjrfg 15 Tdmmtn ^ung'rig, hungry. ^i\tf ber, be^ -(e) §, hie "-t, hat. . ^Vii'itf bie, hit -n, hut. td^, ntetner, tnir, mic^, I, me. ^bce', bie, bie 3be'en, idea. i^tn, (?a^. si?i^. o/er or e^, (to) him or it. t^n, ace. sing, of tx, him . X^'ntUf dat. plu. o/fie, (to) them. ^^'neit, dat. o/@ie, (to) >ou. 3^r, i>ossf ac^j. , your. x))Xf poss. adj., her, their ; pers. pron. 2d plu.., you; dat. sing, of fie, (to) her. tm, in bent. tm'mcr, always. im'mctbar', forever (and ever). in, prep, with dat., in; with ace, into, to, in. tttbcm', conjunction followed by de- pendent order, while, at the mo- ment when (§285). in^f in ba^, ir'bifr^, earthly. ir^gcttb, any, some ; at all ; usually making ivhat it modifies more in- definite, irgenb jemanb, some one or other. \% is ; see fein, \Cif yes ; loith an imperative, by all means ; why, you know (§ 295). ja'gcn, reg. (Ijaben), to hunt, chase; see also ^er^jagen. S^a^r, h(x^, beg -(e) g, bie -e, year. ^a'nuar, ber, beg -g, January. jaudj'^Ctt^ regr. (^aben), to shout with joy, exult. jauc^^^cntJ, exulting ; see janc^^en ; ^im'me(I)od) janc^'^enb, in ecstatic exultation. \tf adv., ever; correl., with com- paratives, je ♦ , ♦ befto, the . . . the. je'ber, je'be, je'beg, every, each. ie'bermann, every one, everybodj^. \t'bt>6)\ nevertheless, yet, but. Je'manb, some one, any one. ^e'na, hOi^, proper name, a city on the Saale river near Weimar, the site of a famous German univer- sity and the scene of one of Na- poleon''s victories. \t'ntXf yt'ut, je'neg, that. je^t, now. ^o'^ann, ber, proper name, John. '^n'ix, ber, be§ -8, July. 3tt' UU)^, ber, proper name, Julius. jmtg, adj., young; as noun, ber 3nnge, beg -n, bie -n, young per- son. ^ung'fratt, bie, bie -en, maid, virgin. ^tt'ni, ber, beg -g, June. ^af'fcc, ber, beg -g, hit -g, coffee. fa^l, bare, bald, exposed. ^al)tt, ber, beg -(e)g, bie ^e, skiff, (row) boat. la% cold. fam, fa 'men, fci'me, see fom'men, ^amerab', ber, beg -en, bie -en, comrade, companion. ^amm^ ber, beg -(e)g, bie ""e, comb. larn'mtUf reg. (l^aben), to comb. ^ammcrtein 16 Sabcn ^am'mcrlein, ^a^, be§ -?, btc — , little chamber. ^am^f, ber, be8 -(e)§, bie "e, com- bat, fight. lamp'^crtf to fight, combat. fatttt, see fon'nen, ^avif ber, proper name^ Charles, Carl. fau'fett, re^. (^aben), to buy, pur- chase. faum, hardly. fcin, no, not a, not any, none. feti'ttcn, faun'te, getannt' (^aben), to be acquainted with, know; fennen lernen, to meet. ^ic'fcC, ber, be« -«, bie — , pebble. % ^ittb, \ia^, be§ -(e)«, bie -er, child. ^tt'C^C, bie, W -n, church. ^(a'ge, bie, bie -n, complaint, plaint, lament. ^(a'gcltcb, bag, be8 -(e)g, bie -er, lamentation, dirge. fla'gett, reg. (^aben), to complain, lament. ^(atig, ber, beg -(e)8, bie "e, sound, clang. liaXf clear. ^(af'fc, bie, bie -n, class; classroom. ^{tXt>f \iCi^, beg -(e)g, bie -er, dress ; plu.^ clothes. !(citt, small, little. Hin'gctt, !tang, geflun'gen (^aben), to sound, resound ; bem fUngt eg, he hears it {lit.^ it (re)sounds to him) ; as noun^ bag ^lingeti, the sound, resounding. ^na'^c, ber, beg -n, bie -n, boy. ina'dtUf reg. (^aben), to crack. ^ntc', bag, beg -g, bie ^ni'e, knee. ^no^f, ber, beg -(e)g, bie "e, button. ^itof'pc, bie, bie -n, bud. fom'men, !am, gefom'men (fein), to come ; \);iai fommen, to be {or come) late; gleic^' fommen, with dat.^ to equal ; see also an'!om= men, juriitf'fommen. ^ij^ttig, ber, beg -g, bie -e, king. fiitt'ttCtt, fonn'te, gefonnt', or !on'= nen (^aben), a iamx, to be able, can ; may (denoting possibility). fotttt'tc, fonn'te, see fon'nen. ^ottfonant', ber, beg -en, bie -en, consonant. ^o^f, ber, beg -(e)g, bie "e, head. ^on^cxt'f bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, con- cert. ^iir'ner, 2^^e'obor, proper name, a German poet. ^va^f bie, bie ""e, power, strength. frrif'tig, powerful, strong. frattf, sick, ill. ^rei'bCy bie, bie -n, chalk. ^to'ne, bie, bie -n, crown. ^tt'gcl, bie, bie -n, bullet ; ball. ^n% bie, bie "e, cow. fil^l, cool. fltnb, known. fttttb'ttttt, tat fnnb^ fnnb'getan (^a= ben), to make known. Inv^f compar., fiir^er, superl., fiirj* eft, short. fiiffctt, reg. (l^aben), to kiss. la'd^elit, reg. (baben), to smile. la'c^en, reg. (baben), to laugh. Sa'bcn, ber, beg -g, bie Sciben, store, shop. (aben 17 Kef (a'bcn, lub, gcloben (^abcn), ex Icibt (also regular), to load (0/ a gun) ; to invite (used for diu (aben)* ia^f la'gen, see lic'gen, £am>c, bie, btc -n, lamp. Sanb, bag, bc^ -(t)^, btc ^er, a;^(^ poetic, 2anbe, land ; country ; auf bem l^anbc, in the country. lan^f compar., langcr, adj., long; as adv. following an accusative of time, for, during : ntetn I^eben (ang, all the days of my life, for- ever. lan'gc, adv., for a long time, long. (att'gcn, reg. (^abeti), to long; lattgen unb bangen, longing and fearing. Xa^f (a'fen, see le'fen. (offctt, Iteg, getaffeti (^oben), er Idgt, imperative, Ia§, to let; to cause to be (done), to have (done). (au'fctt, lief, gelau'fen (fetn), er (duft, to run. XaViif adj., loud; adv., aloud, out loud. lau'tcr, indecl. adj., pure, genuine, nothing but. Sc'Bett, t>a^, beg -§, bie — , life. Ic^Bctt, reg. (Ijabett), to be alive, live. ficB'rcr^t, ber, proper name. htVf empty. (c'gcn, reg. (f)aben), to lay. Ic^'rctt, reg. (^aben), to teach. Sc^'rcr, ber, beg -g, bie — , teacher. ititi^if light ; easy. £etb, bag, beg -g, harm ; pain ; sor- row, grief, woe. (ctb, adj., painful. (ci'beti, litt, gelit'ten (^aben), to suffer, endure ; to permit, stand : unb id) tDiU'g ni6:}t leiben. Ictb'tutt, tatleib', leib'getan (l)aben), impers. with dat. of English sub- ject, to be sorry ; eg tut mtr leib, I am sorry. (ctb'UoH, sorrowful. Tci^^Ctt, lie^, gelie^^en (^aben), to lend. (ci'fc, soft(ly), gentle, gently. Scr't^jC, bie, bie -n, lark. (cr'nctt, reg. (ijahtn), to learn; to study (as a pupil) ; ftubiereu is used only of advanced study, as at a university. Sc'fcburff, bag, beg -(e)g, bie 2e'\t^ biic^er, reading book, reader. (e^fcn, lag, gete'fen (Ijahen), ex \\e\t, to read. hi^t, last. Scud^'tc, bie, bie -u, beacon; guid- ing star. Undi^UUf reg. (^ahen), to light; to shine. Seu'te, bie (plu.), people. Slt^t, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -er, light. Strf)t^9cfl(bc, bag, beg -g, bie — fields of light. • Ixtbf dear, superl. as noun, bag ?iebfte, the dearest; what one loves most. SicB'c^Ctt, bag, beg -g, hie — , little love, darling, sweetheart. (tc'6cn, reg. (Ijahen), to love. Steb'fte, bag, see Ueb. Sicb, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -er, song. Ucfy Ite'feu, see lau'feu. Uegen 18 tttCffCtt Kc'gctt, lag, gete'gen (^aben), to lie, recline. Itc^, see le'fen, Dor'Iefen, iDei'terte^ fen, lk% see laf'fen, fittt'bc, bie, bie -n, linden (tree). lilt!, left (hand). 2ip'pt, bie, bie -n, lip. io'hcUf reg. (^aben), to praise. Sof'fet, ber, beg -g, bie — , spoon. So'gau, J?riebrt(i^, proper name^ a German poet. Sp'rclci, bie, the Lorelei, a river nymph on the Bhine. to^f loose; the matter; SBa^ ift Io«? What's the matter? see also lo^'ge^en. IW^ti^txtf ging log', log'gegangen (fein), to start in, begin. Sub'ttiig, ber, proper name, Louis, Lewis. Suft, bie, bie ^e, air. Sui'fe, bie, proper name, Louise. Suft, bie, bie ^e, joy, happiness. lu'ftig, joyful, jovial, jolly. m ma^^txtf reg. (^aben), to make, do ; see also auf'mad^en, gu'mac^en. mac^'ttg, mighty. 9Jlab'd|ett, ha^, beg, -g, bie — , girl, maiden. ma^f see mogett, Wlaif ber, (the month of) May. Wlatf bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, time. ntda'be, {French), sick. ma'Icn, re^. (t)aben), to paint. ^a'ltVf ber, beg -g, bie — , painter. maUf one ; they ; you. ntani^, many (a); special declen- sion, § 124. mnitt^l'mal, many a time, often. matt'geln, reg, (i)ahen),,impers.with dat., to want, lack ; tnir tt)irb nid)tg tttattgetn, I shall not want. SOlann, ber, beg -(e)g, bie ""er, man ; husband ; Mr. 'Mm'itl, ber, beg -g, bie mmid, cloak, robe, mantle. '^^x'^tWf bag, beg -g, bie — , fairy tale, story. ^axxt' f bie, proper name, Mary, Marie. WciX^f ber, (the month of) March. aWattp'tt^, ber, beg mait^Ci'x, proper name, Matthew. ^ecr, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, sea, ocean. mc^t, more. ntctn, poss. adj., my ; poss. pron., mine. tttei'nig, ber mei'nige, beg -tx, poss. pron., mine. SSltx'\itXf ber, beg -g, bie — , master. WtUt^tx'f bie, bie -en (forWiioW)^ melody, music. SJlenf (^, ber, beg -en, bie -en, man, in the sense 0/ human being, as dis- tinguished from ber 9[Rann, male. 9)lett'ft^ett^|uter, ber, beg -g, bie — , guardian of men. 9Jlctt'f(i^Ctttroftcr, ber, beg -g, bie — , consoler of men. ^cnfd^'^ett, bie, humanity. mct'feit, reg. (l)aben), to note, take note of. mef'fctt, mag, gemef'fen (tjabenj, er ntigt, to measure. awcffct 19 ndl^en 9Wef' fcr, ba«, beg -«, tic — , knife. ntit^, me ; see idj. miii(]r bte, milk. mt(b(c), mild(ly). min'ber, less. Wnn'itf bie, bie -n, minute. mir^ (to) me ; see id). miif prep, with dat., with ; adv, and Sep. prefix, along. mitfam'mcn, adv., together. '^ii'itf bte, bie -n, middle, midst. ntit'tett, adv., in the midst or middle. m'6d)'iCf see mi3gen, mij'gen, moc^'te, gemod)t' or mogen (^aben), er mag, to like ; may ; jt)?'es. subj., moge is often used to introduce a wish. Wo'nat, ber, beg -(e)g, bte -e, month. 9)lottt), ber, beg -(e)g, bte -e, moon. Wlott'taq, ber, Monday. 9Jlor'gcn, ber, beg -g, bte — , morn- ing ; written as an adverb with- out a capital when following an adverb like gefterit, ^eute: Ijente tttorgett, this morning. tttOt'gcn, adv., to-morrow ; as noun, bag Tlovqen, (the) to-morrow. Wlox'qtnvDt, bag, beg -(e)g, dawn, morning glow. mur'genfc^Ott, fair as the morn- ing. miibe, tired, weary ; as noun, ber Tlvibe, beg -n, bte -ti, weary per- son; aEen SJliiben, to all the weary. m^Vxa'i), bag, beg -(e)g, bte aRitt)I'== rciber, millwheel. ^nVUVf ber, beg -g, bte — , miller; proper name. Miller. mnv'mtlnf reg. (^aben), to mur- mur. Wxx^f bag, the word " must." miif fen, mitgte, gemugt, or miiffen (I^abett), er mug, to have to, be obliged to, must. mu^'tc, mugte^ see miiffen* Wviif ber, beg -(e)g, courage. ttttt'ttg, bold, courageous; strong. Wwi'itXf bte, bte 'Mui'itx, mother. tta(^, prep, vnth dat., to; after; according to; nac^ §aufe, (to) home ; sep. prefix in nac^'fdjlagen. na^bcm', conjunction followed by the dependent order, after. "^a^'vxxiia^f ber, beg -(e)g, bte -e, afternoon ; written as an adverb without a capital following words like lieute, morgen, etc.: geftern na(^mtttag» na(^'f(^(agctt, fd^dtg tiac^^ na(f)'ge= f(f)(agen (^aben), er f(^Ia(|t nad:}', to look up, as of toords in a dictionary. md^% superl. o/tia^, nearest, next; ber 9^dd)fte, beg -n, the next one ; one's neighbor. 9Jac^t, bte, bte ""e, night. 9lad)i'lit'i>f bag, beg -(e)g, bte -er, evening song. nat^'pf^Iagctt, see na(^'jd)(agen, ^a^Mf bte, bte -u, needle. na% compar., nd^et, snperl.,m6^\t, near, preceded by the dative. na'^Ctt, reg. (^aben), to sew. 9^ame 20 ^arabicig ^amtf ber, beg -n^, bie -n, name. na^f wet. natiir'lir^, adj., natural; adv., of course. ^t'Mf ber, bie — , fog, mist, haze. nt'htttf prep, with dat. or ace, be- side, by, near. ^t'dtuXf htx, proper name, a German river, on which Heidelberg stands. ttc^'mcn, na^m, genom'men (^aben), er nimmt, imperative, nimtn, nel^mt, to take ; in ^n'fjjrud^ ne^= men, to lay claim to. ttei^gen, reg. (]^aben), to incline ; to decline, wane. mxrif adv., no; as noun, hoi^ ^nn, the word " no. " 9^eft, tiOi^, be8 -(e)?, bie -er, nest. tteu, adj., new: adv., anew. neutt, nine. ncUttt^ ninth. ttCUn'unbati^lt'Stgft, eighty-ninth. neutt'je^n^Utt'bertbm'se^tt, nine- teen hundred thirteen. nit^t, not. uv6]i^f nothing, not anything; a following adjective is neuter, strong and is written with a capi- tal, except anber: ntdt)t? @uteg, nidjt^ anbere?. ttic, never. tttc'bcr, adv. and sep. prefix, down. itic'bcrbKtfen, reg., sep. (()aben),to look down, glance down. ttie'betneigett, reg., sep. (l)aben), to bend down. nh'mai^f never, at no time. nic'manb, no one, nobody ; niemanb anberS, no one else. nintm, see ne^'nten, nim'mtVf never. ttimmermc^r', never, nevermore. nit, dialect for nidjt, nod^f still, yet ; noc^ nic^t, not yet ; more (§ 160) ; noc^ etrt)ag, some more ; nor : tt)eber . . . noc^, nei- ther . . . nor ; sometimes omitted, §297. ^Ot, bie, bie ""e, need, necessity. nun, excl. , well ; adv. , now. nur, only. ' 9^tt^, bie, bie 9^iiffe, nut. D 0, excl., O, oh, ah. ohf conjunction followed by the dependent order, whether, if ; ob . . . fc^on, although. o'htUf above, upstairs. o't)tVf or ; enttoeber ♦ . . ober, either ... or. pf'fcn, open. pft, often. 0^'nc, prep, with ace, without; used also with German infinitive where English has a verbal in -ing. O^r, t>a^f be? -§, bie -en, ear. D(, ha^, be? -?, bie -e, oil. Ot'iOf ber, proper name, Otto. ^aaVf ha^, be? -?, bie -e, pair ; etn paax, used as indecl. adj., a few, a couple of. ^a^teir^ \)a9, be? -?, bie -e, paper. ^arabic!^', ha^, be? ^arabie'fe?, paradise. paii\tn 21 ntttb ^laffctt, reg. (l)aben), loith dat., to fit ; to suit. $Cttt, bie, agony, torture, pain. ^fab, ber, beg -(e)«, bie -e, path. $fcf' fcr^ ber, beg -g, bie — , pepper. ^fcrb, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, horse. ^futtb, bag, beg -(e)g, jlxjei ^funb, pound. ^la'UUf ^uguft, @raf Don, proper name, a German poet. ^iai^, ber, beg -eg, bie "e, room (space) ; seat. portion', bie, bie -en (t like <^), por- tion, helping. $oft, bie, bie -en, post office. ^vci^f ber, beg ^reifeg, bie ^reife, price ; praise, glory. ^ru^, 9lobert, proper name, a Ger- man poet. ^falm, ber, beg -(e) g, bie -en, psalm. ^nltf bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, desk. £1 SlUtVUf bie, bie -n, spring (of water) . ^atf ber, beg -(e)g, bie "e, counsel, advice. tau'Bctt, reg. (^aben), to rob. tatt'fd)cn, reg. (^aben), to rustle, ripple, roar, rush. Xt6)if adj., right, morally; right, as distinguished from left ; red)t ^aben, to be right; adv., rightly, really ; well. Vt'htn, reg. (^aben), to speak, talk. OfJc'gcI, bie, bie -n,. rule. Slc'gctt, ber, beg -g, bie — , rain. rcg'ttCtt, reg. (f)aben), impers., to rain ; eg regnet, it's raining. Xtidjf rich(ly); in, an; as noun, ber 9^ei(f)e, beg -n, bie -n, the rich (man) . ^ti^f bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, king- dom, empire. rci't^ett, reg. (^aben), to hand to, pass; to hold out, of one'' s hand; to reach. rcttt, pure, clean. JWci'nitf, SfJobert, proper name, a German poet. Ol^citt, ber, beg -g, the Rhine, Germany'' s most famous river. rt^ 'tig, right, correct (ly). rie'fctn, reg. (^aben), to ripple, trickle. ^is'^txif ber, proper name, Robert. O^iorf, ber, beg -(e)g, bie H, coat. O^loman', ber, beg -g, bie -e, novel ; tale. OlJo'fc, bie, bie -n, rose. ro'fcttfatben, rofenfarbneg, rosy- hued, roseate. ro'fig, rosy. D^ij^'lcttt, bag, beg -g, bie — , little rose. tot, red. JRii'rfert, griebrid), proper name, a German poet. ni'fctt, rief, gern'fen (I)aben), to call, cry out; see also gn'rnfen, Dlu5(c), bie, ber — , rest. tu'^cn, reg. (^aben), to rest. ni'^ig, quiet, calm. tunb, round. 22 iti^ntU (B*f abbreviation for @attft, Saint, St. (Baa'ltf tit, proper name, a German river. (Ba'd^tf bte, tie ~u, affair, business ; thing. fat^t(e), soft(ly), gently. Badf ber, be^ -(e)^, bie "e, bag, sack. fa'gctt, reg. (l)aben), to say, tell; see also {jer'fagen, fa^y fa'()eft, see fe'^en; jal) au^', see (Sai'te, bte, bie -tt, string, as of a harp. ^aVhtttf reg. (^aben), to anoint. (Bai^f bag, beg -eg, bte -e, salt. farn'mcltt, re^. (^aben), to gather, collect. famm'le, see jam'melm fanft, gentle, mild(ly), peace- ful(ly). ©fttt'gcr, ber, beg -g, bte — , singer, minstrel. f«Sr jci'^ett, see \it'^tn. aVhtf bie, bie -n, swallow. fti^ttiattb, see fd^min'ben. ©c^ttJatm, ber, beg -g, bie "e, swarm ; crowd, host. ft^ttiarj, black. fc^hic'bctt, reg. (^aben), to sway, float ; soar, hover. ff^ttJC'bcttb, see f^me'ben ; in fd^tre^^ benber $ein, in the agony of sus- pense. fti^ttJci'fett, reg. (^aben), to wander, stray, roam. fd^iJiei'gen, fc^ttjieg, gefc^tDie'gen (^aben), to be silent; to keep still. ft^tticr, heavy, of weight; hard, of work. (B^m'^ittf \>ie, bie -n, sister. 'Bd}t0it'xx^Uitf bie, bie -en, difia- culty. fti^ttiitt'bcn, fc^tDanb, gefdjmnn'ben (fein), to vanish, disappear. fti^ttJo'tctt, f(f)tt)or, gefdimo'ren (^a^ ben), to swear. \td}§, six. fcr^^'ttttbbrci'^ig, thirty-six. Sec, ber, beg -g, bie @e'en, lake. 8ec'(e, bie, bie -n, soul. fc'^Ctt, fa^, gefe'^en (l)aben), er fiel)t, to see, look ; imperative, mi fc^r, very ; much. fet, feib, feien, see jein. fein, poss. adj. and pron., his, its. fcitt, tDar, geix)e'fen (fein) ; i6) bin, bn bift, er ift; mir finb, i^r feib, fie finb ; pres. suhj., ic^ fei, etc.; imper., fei, feib, feien 6)^itXf bie, bte 2^oci)'ter, daughter. ^0b, ber, be§ -(e)§, bie -e, death. tot, dead ; as no%in, ber 2^ote, be^ -n, bie -n, dead man, the dead. tra'gcn, trug, getra'gen (^aben), er trcigt, to carry, bear ; to wear, as of clothes. Xra'nc, bie, bie -n, tear. %xa\i'tx\\t\^, ba«, be§ -(e)§, bie -er/ mourning, mourning dress. txaVi'ix^f familiar ; cordial ; snug, cozy. Xrauttt, ber, beg -(e)g, bie 'Xrau'me, dream. trau'tttClt, reg. (^aben), to dream. trau'rig, sad. tm'Bctt, trieb, getrie'ben (^abett), to drive ; of flocks^ to tend ; to do, act ; to work at, study. ttcn'nett, reg. (^aben), to separate. %xt)^')^t, bie, bie -n, stairway, stairs ; bie Xrep^e I)inauf, up- stairs ; bie ^reppe t)inunter or {)inab, downstairs (§ 267). iXZMf faithful ; of love, true. trieb, see trei'ben, tritt'fctt, tranf, getrun'fen (^aben), to drink. Xxitt, ber, be8 -(e)g, bie -e, step ; in gtei'c^em @d)ritt unb Xritt, keeping step side by side. Xrom'md, bie, bie -n, drum. Xxo% ber, beg -(e) §, comfort, sol- ace, consolation. trii'ftcn, reg. (f)aben), to comfort, console. ixoi$f prep, with gen., in spite of. tntg, see tra'gen. Xnd^f ha^, beg -(e)g, bie ""er, cloth. ttttt, tat, getan' (^aben), to do ; letb' tun, with dat., to hurt, to make sorry, eg tnt ntir (eib, I am sorry ; !unb' tun, to make known, pro- claim. %ViXf bie, bie -en, door. U ii'Bet, evil; iibel <^t\)n\,with dat., to fare ill ; iibel ne^men, to take [it] U'Mf bag, beg -g, bie — , evil. ii'bcn, reg. (^aben), to practice; fic^ iiben, to practice. ii'bcr, prep, with dat. or ace., over, above; about; ^eute iiber ad)t Xage, a week from to-day ; also sep. and especially insep. prefix^ as in iiber^e'ben, iiberjet'jen, etc. uhtxaWf everywhere, all over. iibcr^e'bctt fid), fi(^ iiber^ob', fi(^ iiberi)o'beu (i)aben), to boast, be proud ; to presume, be conceited. itbcrfet'^ett, reg., insep. (^ben), to translate. ilBer^eu'gett, reg., insep. (^aben), to convince. U'bung, bie, bie -en, practice. U'fer, bag, beg -g, bie — , shore, bank. U^'fanb, li?ubn)ig, proper name, a German poet. U^t 27 tjctftc^en Ui^Vf bte, bie -en, clock, watch ; o'clock; tt)iet)iel Uf)r ift e^? what time is it? je^n U^r, ten o-clock. UXttf prep, with ace, around, about; with the infinitive and iw, in or- der to; also Sep. and insep. pre- fix, as in umge'ben, etc. umge'fictt, umgab', iimge'ben (^a= ben), er nmgibt', to surround. untf^tv'fadv. and sep. prefix, around, about, round about. itttb, and. Utt'gliirf, 'ta^, beg -(e)g, misfortune, unhappiness. tttt're^t, wrong; nnrec^t ^aben, to be wrong. ym^f us ; see tt)tr. tttt'fer, poss. adj. and pron., our, ours. tttt'tCtt, below ; downstairs. nn'ttXf prep, with dat. or ace, un- der ; among ; sep. and insep. pre- fix, as in unter^al'ten, etc. nntttfjaVitiXf unterl)iett^ nnterl)a('= ten (^aben), er unterljdit', to en- tertain. ttttternc^'mctt, nnternat)m', nnter* nom'men (^aben), er nnter* ntmmt', to undertake. f8 ^a'tttf ber, be^ -g, bie 35ater, father; the heavenly Father. S^a'terlttttb, ha^, beg ~(e)g, bie -e, fatherland, mother country. S5eU'(^Ctt, ba^, beg -g, bie — , violet. Herfieffertt, reg., insep. (^aben),to correct ; to improve. tJCrblii'^Ctt, reg., insep. (fein), to wither, decay. tjerbcr'fictt, oerbarb, t)erbor'ben (^a^ ben), er berbirbt',to spoil, injure, ruin. tierbtic'^ctt, t)erbro6', toerbrof'fen (^aben), to vex, annoy, trouble. bcrci'ttcn, reg., insep. (^aben), to unite. iJCtforgen^ re^., insep. (^aben), to follow vigorously ; to persecute. tJcrgc'bett, tjergab', tjerge'ben (l^a= ben), er tiergibt', imperative, ber* gib', to forgive. tjergc'^ert, merging', Dergan'gen (jein), to pass, of time or events. ticrgel'ten, Dergalt', tjergot'ten (!)a* ben), er t)ergt(t, to pay for. tiergcffett, t»erga6', tjergef'fen (l)a= ben), er t)ergigt', to forget. S5crgi§'tncitttttrf|t, bag, beg -g, for- get-me-not. Ucrfau'fctt; reg., insep. (l^aben), to sell. ticrtct'^cn, reg., insep. (^aben), to hurt, harm, injure. Ucrlte'ren, t)erlor', i)erIo'ren (^aben), to lose. tJcrna^mft', see t)erne{)'men. Dcrnc^'mctt, tierna^m', t>ernont'men (^aben), er tjernimmt', to hear, perceive, learn. tjcrft^lttt'gcn, t)erf(i)tang^ Derfd^Inn'* gen (^aben), to swallow. Ucrftattb', see t)erfte'l)en. tictftc'^Ctt, uerftanb', t)erftan'ben (t)a= ben), to understand; fid) t)er= [te'^en, impers., to be a matter of course. tietfttriftctt 28 Staffer ticrftt'r^cn, reg.^ insep. (^aben), to try. ^crfu'd^ttttg, bie, tie -en, tempta- tion. ticrtuei'ttett, reg., insep. (\)ahen), to pass (time) in weeping ; to weep ; DerrtJcin'te 2lugen, eyes swollen with weeping. ticrttJCtt'bett, reg., insep. (l^aben), to use, utilize. t)itlf much ; plu.^ many. t>itUd^t'f perhaps. t>icr, four. \)kxt, fourth. ^tcr'tct, ba^, beg -8, ble — , fourth. titcr'Stgft, fortieth. SJo'gct, ber, beg -8, bie ^ogel, bird. ^o'g(e)(citt, ha^, beg -g, bie — , little bird. ^otaVf ber, beg -g, bie -e (i) ZiX-e tt)), vowel. ^ ^olf, bag, beg -(e) g, bie ""er, nation, people, folk. ^oiWiortf ber, beg -g, the tone of the people ; tm iBoIfgton, after the manner of a folksong. UOU, full. tjottctt'bcn, ijoEen'bete, DoUen'bet (l^aben), to finish. tJDttt, Don bent. tfOttf prep, with dat., from, of.; with passive, by. Uor, prep, toi^/i dat. or ace, before, in front of ; t)or gtt)ei SBod^eu, two weeks ago ; tjor (auter greub', for very joy, for pure joy ; sep. pre- fix, as in t)or'(efen, etc. tior^cr', adv., before. tiur'Icfctt, lag \)ox', i^or^gelefen (^a* ben), er (left tior', to read (aloud). tjor'plefcii, see t)or'Iefen. 293. tt>a'^tn, reg. (^aben), to watch ; to wake, be awake. WttdytcVf ber, beg -g, bie — , watch- man. SBa'gett, ber, beg -g, bie — , wagon, carriage. tual^r, true ; ntcf)t tt)a^r, isn't it true ? ttia^'rcttb, prep, with gen., during ; conjunction followed by the de- pendent order, while. 2!Sa(b, ber, beg -(e)g, W "er, wood, forest. ttiaCIen, reg. (^aben), to undulate, float ; as noun, beg SJleereg SBal- len, the motion of the sea; see also ein^er'tDallen. 295attb, bie, bie ""e, wall (of a room) . ttiatt'bettt^ reg. (fetn), to go, travel. ^aw'tstxtXf ber, beg -g, bie — , wan- derer. ttiatt'bcvtt, reg, (fetn), to wander. tnann, interrog., when. war, nja'ren, tDci're, see feln. ttJarm, warm. tuar'teit, reg. (^aben), wait; for, anf with ace; also in poetry with gen., jeiner grenbe tDarten. ttJanim', why. tOti^, interrog., what; rel. after neuter adjs. and prons., which; sometimes for ettDag (Less. XXXIX), something, anything. aSaf fet, bag, beg -g, tixt — , water. ttieben 29 ttite we'Bcn, trob, getDo'ben (^abeu), aZso re^., to weave, twine. ^^Cf^'fef, ber, be^ -6, bte — , change. me'rfen, reg. (t)aben), to waken, wake up {active). ttjc'bcr, neither; tt)eber . . . noci), neither . . . nor. 39i^eg, ber, beg -(e) «, bie -e, way, road ; beg ^egg, alopg the way. t^t'^tMfPrep. with gen., on account of. ttJeg'ocriffen, see tt)eg^*eigen» m^'xti^tUf rt§ tt)eg', tDeg'geriffen (l^aben), to tear away, snatch away. ^tfjf ba^, beg -(e)g, woe, pain, misery. ttiel^(C), excL, alas ! oh ! woe ! ; as noun, feitt 2Be^ itnb ^d), no (say- ing of) woe and alas. ttJC^^ett, reg. ({)aben), to blow, flutter ; wave ; as noun, bag 2Be'= ^en, beg -g, blowing. SBe^f, 5^obor, proper name, a Ger- man poet. ttic^'rctt \id}, reg. (^aben), to defend oneself. ttiei'bcn, reg. ({)aben), to pasture, to let graze. ttDtilf conjunction followed by the dependent order, because. ^ti'kf bUf ble -n, while, time ; delay ; diU ntit ^et(e, haste with delay; the more haste, the less speed. tuci'nen, reg. (^aben), to weep, cry. SBci'fc, bte, bte -n, melody, music to a song ; way, manner. ttici'fe, adj., wise. ttJCit, treigt, see tt)if'fen. hict^, adj., white, totitf far (not wide). mei'ter, adv. and Sep. prefix, fur- ther. tDci'tergelcfctt, see njei'terlefen. ttJei'terlefen, (ag mei'ter, it)ei'terge= lejen (^aben), er tieft itjeiter, to read on, read further. tOti^f rel. pron., who, which, that; interrog., what, which. ^cVitf bit, bie -en, wave. Wdif bie, bie -en, world. ttJCm, to whom ; see tvex* ttic'ttig, little; plu., few. mc'ttiger, fewer, less. WtnUf conjunction followed by the dependent order, when; when- ever; if. tt}tVf interrog. and compound rel., who; he who. ttiet'tJCtt, tt)nr'be, getDor'ben (fetn), er tDtrb, past part, in passive of other verbs, rtJorben, to become, get ; as sign of future tense with pres. injin. , will, shall ; as sign of passive with past participle, am, is, are ; past subj. as sign of con- ditional, triirbe, would, should. SSerf, bag, beg -(e)g, bie -e, work, the result of labor, as distin- guished from hit Arbeit, labor. totxif worth; worthy. 235ct'tev, bag, beg -g, bie — , weather. 2Bi'(^ert, proper name, a German poet. SKi'bevf^nt^, ber, beg -(e) g, bie ^i'berfprii(f)e, contradiction. ttJte, how; as; like. wicber 30 setgcn ttitc'bcr, adv. and sep. prefix^ again. tt>icbcr!^o'lett., reg., insep. (^aben), to repeat. 335ie'gc, bie, bie -n, cradle. SBic'^cttHeb, ha^, be§ -(e)«, bie -er, cradle song, lullaby. ttiic'gctt \i^f reg. (^aben), to rock, wave. ttltetlicr, how much; plu.^ how many; tt)iet»iet Ut)r? what time? ben tDietttelten ^aben tt)ir Ijeiite? what day of the month is to-day ? ttiUb, wild. tt}iUf Unllft, see inol'teti. ^iVhf ber, be^ -n§, bie -tt, will. tBiVitttf urn , ♦ ♦ tDiUen, with gen., for the sake of. SBtnb, ber, be^ -(e)^, hit -e, wind. SBttt'tcr, ber, beg -§, bie — , winter. SSip'fcl, ber, be§ -g, bie —, top, sum- mit, tip. mir^ we. mhb, see tDer'ben* toiv'ttxtf reg. (^abeti), to effect; to bring about. ttJif'fen, njug'te, getrugt' (Ijaben), er ttJeif3, to know, have knowl- edge of; as noun., ha^ ^iffen, beg -g, knowledge, knowing. tOOf where. ^o'tt^tf bie, bie -n, week. SBo'gc, bie, bie -n, wave. ttio'gctt, reg. (^abeti), to surge, un- dulate. too^tv'f where (from). tt)0^n'f where (to). ttlD^l, perhaps, probably, I. think ; well; tt)o^l ^abe id) eg gefel)en, yes, I did see it. ^0% ha^, beg -g, welfare. ttJOl^'ncn, reg. (^aben), to live, re- side. SBotfgang, Ux, proper name, Wolf- gang. SBol'fe, bie, bie -n, cloud. ^oVltnlamm', bag, beg -(e)g, bie SBol'fenlam^mer, cloud lamb, fleecy cloud. tooVUttf tDott'te, gettJoEt' or tvoVUn (l)aben), er tt)iU, to want to, wish, will. tvoWitf see tt)ol'(en. SSott'ttC, bie, ber — , bliss, happi- ness, joy. tuor'bcn, sign of the passive, see it)er'ben» SSort, bag, word ; plu., bie ifiSor'te, connected words; bie SSor'ter, separate words. 293ort'r^cn, bag, beg -g, bie — , little word. W6x'ttvtn(^f bag, beg -(e)g, bie SBor'terbiic^er, dictionary, vocab- ulary. ttiOtlOtt', of which, from which. ttiun'bcrBar, strange, miraculous. ttmn'bcrfam, strange, peculiar. iDtttt'berft^iJtt, wonderfully beauti- ful. ttiiltt'fc^Ctt, reg. (^aben), to wish. iwur'bc, tDiir'be, see tt)er'ben» 2Sttr'5cI, bie, bie^-n, root. mx^'itf see xt)i]'\eu. 5e^n, ten. 5C^tt'ma(, ten times. Sci'flcn, reg. (tjaben), to show. 3c«c 31 m'ol^ 3ct'(c, bie, bic -n, line. 3ctt, bie. bie -en, time. Stltf ba6, be^ -(e)«, bie -e, tent; vault of heaven. 5cr5rc'ti^ett, gerbrad^', gerbro'djen (^aben), er gerbric^t', to break to pieces, smash. 5crBro^rf)cn, see gerbre'(i)en» Scrm'^ctt, a^rrig, ^erriHen (l)aben), to tear to pieces. 5Ctrif fctt, see jerrei'gen. jcrftrctt'en, reg., insep. C^aben), to scatter, strew. ^ic'^Ctt, mr geso'geit (^aben), to draw, pull; with feiti, to go, go along ; impers.^ eg I'^^^^t there's a draft. Sxdf ha^, be§ -(e)§, bie — , goal, aim, end. 3tm'mer, ba^, be§ -§, bie — , room. 5og, see 3ie'f)en» 5U, adv.^ too; prep, ^^l^/i da^., to; gu §aufe, (at) home ; sep. prefix, as in ;^u'fiigen, ^u'madjen, gu'rii* fen, ;;u'f(i)tiegen, etc. Sn'dttf btx, be« -g, bie — , sugar. Stt'fitgctt, reg., sep. (!)aben), to add. SMt ^^^f ^^^ -M^, ^i^ ""^f train. ^u'^'ovtMf reg., sep. (^aben), with dat., to listen to. ^yxvXf gu bent. au'mac^cu, reg., sep. (^aben), to shut ; close. 5ur, ivi ber, ^uritrf', adv. and sep. prefix, back. priirf'fommcn, !am ^uriid', ^uriicf'- gefommen (fein), to come back. 5tt'rufen, rief gu^ ^u'gerufen (^a= ben), to call to. p'fti^ac^Ctt, id)log gn', a^'gefc^toffen (l^aben), to lock, close up, shut. 5ttJan'$ig, twenty. ^Itiar, it is true ; really. jttlCt, two. 5ltiet'mal, twice. 5tDcit, second. 5ttJci^tCtt§, in the second place. jttiei'Uttbcttt^alb', two and a half. ^ttJci'untiftcB'^ig, seventy-two. ^\0\'\^t\Xf prep, with dat. or ace, between; among. 5tt)ij(f, twelve. ENGLISH-GERMAN VOCABULARY a, ein; not a, !cin. able, to be, fon'nen, fonnte, gefonnt (^aben), 16) fattn. about, adv., un'gefdl)r; prep, {fig-), iiber with ace. ; (lit.), um ivith ace. above, prep., iiber loith dat. or ace. accent {in sense 0/ pronunciation), bie 5][u^'fpraci)c, account, on account of, tt)e'gen with gen. across, ii'ber with dat. or ace. afraid, to be afraid, fid) furd)'ten, reg. (Ijaben), of, t)or with dat. after, prep., nad^ with dat. ; conj., nadjbem' with transposed order; day after to-morrow, ii'bermorg en* afternoon, ber D^ac^'mittag, bie -e; written small with adverbs : this afternoon, ^eute nac^mittag, against, ge'gen with ace. ago, t)or followed by the noun of time in the dative. agreeable, an'gene^nt preceded by the dative. all, all; {in sense 0/ whole), ganj; all right, \6)oxi, gut; all kinds of, aFIerlei, indecl. allow, eriau'ben, reg. (^aben) with dat. aloud, adv., taut; to read aloud. tjor'lefen, Ia« t)or^ tjor'gelefen (l)a= ben), er lieft t)or, already, fd^on. also, auc^ {never a(fo)» always, im'mer» am, bin; see fein and progressive form, § 16. America, bo8 3(me'rifa, among, un'ter with dat. or ace. an, ein. and, unb followed by normal order. Ann(a), (bie) 5ln'na. another {in sense of one more of the same kind), nod)' ein; {in sense of a different one), ein an'ber. any, ir'genb (ein); not any, fein. anybody, ir'genb je'manb, any one, ir^genb je'manb. anything, et'ma^ {a folloiving ad- jective ^ is capitalized, except an'ber^); not anything, nid)t§ {a following adjective is capitalized, except an'ber^). appear {in the sense o/look), au^'= fe^en, fa^ an^', aug'gefel^en (^a^ ben), er fte^t aug\ apple, ber ^pfel, bie SpfeL are, finb; see also feiu, and the pro- gressive form, § 16 ; are we to ? foUen tnir? there are, e^ gibt, e§ finb. arm, ber ^rm, bie -e. 33 around 34 break around, urn with ace. arrive, an'fommeiT, !am an', ati'ge- fommett (feiu), as, conj. of past time, al^; coiij. of reason, ha; as if, aU ob or aU with inverted order (§ 274, a) ; correL, as . . . as, e'benjo » , . Wit; as long as, folan'ge; as soon as, fobalb'* ask (in sense of beg), btt'ten, hat, gcbe'ten (^aben), for, um toi^/i ace; (in sense 0/ question), fra'* geti, reg. (^aben), at, gu with dat., an ^(?iY/i (?a?. ; {of time), nm ivith ace. ; at school, in bcr @cf)u(e; at home, ^u §anfe; at once, gleid^; at last, cnb'Udt); at the house of, bei with dat. attend {of school), befn'c^en, reg. (l)aben). August, ber 5luguft', B bag, ber <^ad, bie ^e, ball, ber ^aU, bit "e, barn, bie ®d)eu'ne, be, fein, njar, getDefen (fein), er ift; {of health) fid) befin'ben, befanb' fid^, fid^ befun'ben (^aben); to be (translated), l)et6en, l)teg, ge^ l^eigen (^aben); to be late, \pdt fommen, !am \pat, \pat gefommen (fein) ; see also progressive forms, §16. beautiful (ly), fd^bn; most beauti- ful, fc^bnft because, Wtil with transposed or- der; because of, ttjegcn with gen. become, toer'ben, U)urbc, gemorben (fein), er it)irb, bed, bag 33ett, bie -en; to bed, ^n ^ttt bee, bie iBie'ne, bie -n. before, prep. , t)or with dat. or ace. ; conj., e^e with dependent order. beg, bit'ten, hai, gebeten (i)aben), began, see begin. begin, an'fangen, fing an^ an'ge- fangen (^aben), er fangt an', . begun, see begin. behind, l^in'ter with dat. or ace. believe, glan'ben, reg. (^aben) with ace. for things, with dat. for per- sons. belong, ge^o'ren, gel)orte, gc^ort {\)aht\\) with dat. below, adv., un'ten. bench, bie 53anf, bie H.. beside, neben with dat. or ace; be- side it, bane'ben. besides, aud^. better, bej'fer; see good ; to like better, lie'ber ntb'gen. between, gtri'fc^en with dat. or ace. big, bigger, biggest, grog, grower, grogt, bird, ber ^o'gel, bie iBogeL blue, blan. boat, ha^ 53oot, bie -e» book, ba^ iBud), bie "er. borrow, bor'gen, reg, (]^aben). Boston, (bag) ^o'fton. both, beibe {see § 162, c). bought, see buy. boy, ber ^nabe, beg -n, bie -n. bread, bag iBrot, bie -e. break, bre'djen, brad^, gebrod^en broad 35 (^a6cn),erbrid^t; break to pieces, ^crbre'd^en, ^erbracf)', gerbro'd)en (f)aben), er jerbric^t'* broad, breit, broke, broken, see break, brother, ber Sruber, bie iBriiber, brown, braun, bush, ber iBufd), bie "^t. but, conj., a 'ber; as alternative after a negative^ fon'bern; adv.^ nur; nothing but, nic^t^ a(^, butter, bie iBut'ter. button, ber ^'nopf, bie ^e. buy, fau'fen, reg. (^aben). by (beside); ne'ben with dat. or ace; agent with passive^ t)on with dat. call {in se7ise of call to), ru'fen, rief, gerufen (l)aben); be called, l^ei'gen, f)ie6, ge^eigen (l^aben)» came, see come. can, fon'uen, fonnte, gefonnt (^a= ben), er !ann, cannot, see can a7id not. care, I don't care, e^ ift mir einerlei'. carpet, ber ^e^pid^, bie -e. carriage, ber SBa'gen, bie — » carry, tra'gen, tritg, getragen (^a= ben), er trdgt. catch, fan'gen, fing, gefangen (^a= ben), er fangt. caught, see catch. chair, ber (i)tu^(, bie "e. chalk, bie f rei'be, bie -n. Charles, (ber) ^arl cheek, bie ^adt, bie -n. chicken, ba^ §ul)n, bie ""er. child, children, ba§ .^inb, hie -er, church, bie ^ir'd^e, hie -n. city, hie @tabt, bie "e. class, bie Maf'fe, bie -n. clean, rein, close, gu'mac^en, mac^te ^u', gu'ge-- mad)t (Ijaben), er ma(i)t ^u', cloth, ha^ Stud), bie "er, clothes, bie ^'(ei'ber (pi.)- coffee, ber ^af'fee. coat, ber 9lo(f, bie "e, cold, colder, !alt, falter, come, fom'men, tarn, gefontmen (fein). concert, ha^ ^on^^ert', bie -e; to the concert, in^ ,tonjert', consonant, ber ^onfonant', be§ -en, bie -en* contain, ent^at'ten, entl^ielt', ent= ^aFten (^aben), e^ ent^alt continue, fort'fa^ren, fu^r fort', "- fort'gefa{)ren (^aben), er fd^rt fort', followed by the infinitive with gu, convince, iiber^eu'gen, iibergeug'te, iiberjeugt' (^aben). correct, adj., rid) 'tig; vei^b, t)crbef'* fern, t)erbef'ferte, t)erbef'fert (^a* ben), could, see can. country, ha^ ?anb, bie ""er; to the country, auf ha^ 2anh. couple, ha^ ^aar, bie -e; a couple of, ein paar {used like an adjec- tive not affecting the case of a following noun). course, of course, natiir'lid^ ; it is a matter of course, e^ t)erftel^t' cow 36 every cow, bic ttii^, bic ^u^e» cup, bic Za\'\t, bie -n. daughter, bic ^^od^'tcr, bic Xod^tcr. day, bcr XaQ, bic -c ; day after to= morrow, u'bcrmorgcii ; what day of the week ? H)c((^cn Xclq ? what day of the month? ben tt)ict)icl'ten ? deal, a great deal, DieL dear, \k)). desk, ba^ ^u(t, bic -c. dictionary, ha^ Sor'terbuc^, bic SSbrtcrbiid^cr, did, see do and progressive forms, §16. didn't, see did a?i(? not. die, ftcr'bcn, ftarb, geftorbcn (jcin), cr ftirbt different, an'bcr. difficulty, bic (gd^tt)ic'rig!cit, bie -en. do, tnn, tat, gctan (^aben) ; (of health) fid) befin'ben, befanb' ft(^, fi(^ befnn'ben (^abcn); that will do, ha^ gcniigt'; for emphasis icith the imperative, t)od} ; see also progressive forms, § 16. does, see do. dog, bcr §nnb, ^ie -c. door, hie Xiix, bie -en. down, ^inun'ter, nie'ber ; down town, in bic (or bcr) ^tabt ; down stairs, (motion) bic Xxtp'pt ()inun'ter or ^inab', (rest) unten; to sit down, fid^ fe^en (reg., liabcn). draft, there's a draft, c§ gte^t. draw, jie'^cn/gog, gcjogen (i)abcn). dress, \>a^ ^kih, bie -cr. drink, trin'fen, tranf, getrunfen (^aben). during, irfi^'rcnb with gen. E each, jc'bcr, jcbe, jebe^ ; each other, *firf), einan'bcr. early, earlier, frii^, frii^cr. easy, easily, easier, easiest, Ieid)t, Icid)ter, Ieid)teft, am leid^teftcn. eat, ej'fcn, ag, gcgeffen (^aben), er igt, egg, ha^ di, bic -cr. eight, ad)t ; eighth, (\)a^) a6:)te. eighteen, ad^t'ge^n ; eighteenth, ac^tje^nt. either, ent'Wthex; either ... or, cnttreber . . . ober, eleven, ctf. else, an'bcrc^ ; anything else, (in sense of more), nod^ ettra^; (in se?iseo/ different), etwa^ anbere^. end, \)a^ (Sn'be, bie -n. English, adj., cng'Ufc^; noun, ba^ (SngUjrf)(c); in English, anf eng= lifd^ ; to speak English, @ngti(d) jpre(f)cn. enough, genng'; to be enough, ge= nti'gen, geniig'tc, gcniigt' (^aben). entertain, nntert)al'ten, untcr^iett'. untcrl)at'ten (^aben), cr untcrl)d(t'. evening, bcr 5l'benb, bie -c ; in the evening, am 5lbenb, abcnbS ; writ- ten small when used with ad- verbs; ^en'tc abenb, mor'gen ever, jc. every, jc'bcr, jcbc, jcbeg. everybody 37 front everybody, je'bermann» everything, al'(e§. everywhere, liberaE', exactly, gera'be, genau'. excuse, entfc^ul'bigeu, entfc^ul'bigte, entfd)u('btgt (^aben), exercise, bic ^ituf'gabe, bie -xu expect, ertrar'ten, cxtvax'tete, er= tt)ar'tet (^aben), explain, erfld'ren, erflcir^te, erflart' (^aben). eye, bag 5lu'ge, be^ -g, bie -n. fall, \aVkn, fie(, gefal'Ien (jein), er fdttt. false, falfc^, family, hie gami'Ue (four syl- lables), bie -n, far, n^eit ; as far as, big* fast, faster, fd)neU, fd^netfer. father, ber 33a'ter, bie SSater. February, ber ge'bruar. feel *{of health), fic^ befiti'ben, he- fanb' fid^, fid^ befun'ben (^aben). fell, see fall. fetch, ^o'len, reg. (Ijaben), few, fewer, tve'niQe, tDeniger; a few, ein paav, used as an inde- clinable adjective without affect- ing the case of the following noun : with a few (a couple of) books, mit ein ^aar ^)x6)exn. field, hix^ gelb, hie -ex. fifteen, fiinf'ge^n. finally, enb lic^, find, fin'ben, fanb, gefuttben (^aben). fine, \6)QU, pra(^t't)ott. finger, ber gin'ger, bie — . fire, ha^ geu'er, bie — . first, adj., erft ; adv., guerft'. fish, ber gifc^, bie -e. fisher (man), ber %i'\&\ex, bie — . fit, ^af'fen, reg. (^aben), with dat. five, fiinf* floor, ber iBo'beu, bie — or iBbben. flower, bie ^(u'me, bie -n, fly, noun, bie glie'ge, bie -n ; verb, flie'gen, ftog, geflogen (fein). follow, foCgen, reg. (fein) with dat. foot, ber gu§, bie ''e, for, prep., fiir with ace, um with ace. ; conj. giving a reason, benn with normal order ; to tell extent of time, it is translated simply by the accusative ; to look for, ju'- d^en, reg. (^oben); to wait for, tDar'ten, reg, (^aben) auf with ace. forget, tjergef'jen, tjergag', tjergef'* fen (^aben), er oergigt' forgot(ten), see forget. fork, bie ©a'bel, bie -n, forty-seventh, fie'benunbDier'jigft. found, see find. four, t)ier» fourteenth, ijier'je^nt, fourth, adj., Diert; noun, ha^ ^ier'* tel, bie — , Fred, (ber) ^ri^, Friday, ber grei'tag, bie -e. friend, ber J^^iinb, hie -e, from, t)on with dat.; come from, ^er'fommen, fam l)er', f)er'gefont= men (fein); a week from to-day, ^ente iiber Ci6)i 2^age. front, in front of, Dor icith dat. or ace. game 38 hat game, ba§ @^iel, ble -c. garden, ber @ar'ten, bie ©cirten. gentleman, ber §err, be^ -n, bie -en. German, adj.^ beutfd^; noun, (the German language), t^a^ S)eut* fc^(e); (the German citizen), ber 2)eutf^e, beg -n, bie -n; in Ger- man, auf beutfc^; to speak Ger- man, 2)eutf(^ fprec^en, Germany, ba§ 2)eutfd)'Ianb. get, (obtain, secure) befom'tnen, befam', befom'men (^aben); (be- come) tt)er'ben, n)urbe, getDorben (fein), er Unrb; (go and get) ^o'len, reg. (l)aben); get up, auf'= fte^en, ftanb auf'; auf'geftanben (fein). getting, see get. girl, ha^ SJ^db'c^en, bie — ♦ give, ge'ben, gab, gegeben (l^aben), er gibt. glad, froVr to be glad, ft(f) frenen, reg. (^aben), id) freue mid), § 241, or e§ freut mid), § 248 ; be glad to do something, ettt)a§ gem tun. gladly, gern. glass, 'iid^ (§(a«, bie @ldfer. go, ge'tjen, ging, gegangen (fein); go and get, ^o'len (r^^. ^aben); go on, fort'fa^ren, fu^r fort', fort'* gefa^ren (^aben), er fd^rt fort'; go walking or for a walk, fpagie'= ren ge'^en, ging fpajieren, S'^aixu ren gegangen (fein). gold, ia^ @olb. gone, see go. good, gut; have a good time, fid) (gut) amiifie'ren, amiifter'te fid), fi(^ amiifiert' (^aben). got, see get. grammar, bie ©ramnta'ti!, bie -n. grass, 't^a^ @ra§, bie @rdfer. great, grog; a great deal, Diet. green, greenest, griin, griinft. grow, (become) trer'ben, tDurbe, genjorben (fein), er ttjirb; (in- crease in size) tt)ad^'fen, tuud^g, getDad^fen (fein), er trdd^ft. had, see have. hair, bag §aar, bie -e. half, adj., \)Ci\h, following the ar- ticle; noun, bie §dlf'te, bie. -n; half past ten, Ic^aXh elf; and a half, r^unbein^alb; one and a half, an'bertt)a(b (§219, a). hall, ber ^aoX, bie @dle; bie §at'(e, bie -n. hand, noun,, bie ©anb, bie "e; ifer&, reid}en, reg. (^aben). hang, t)an'gen, l)ing, ge!)angen (l)aben), er ^dngt. happen, gefd)e'^en, gefd)al)', gefd|e'=* ^en (fein), eg gefd)iel)t', followed by the dative. happy, g(iid'Ud). hard, adj., (difficult) fd)n)er; (to the touch) ^art; adv., (vigorously) [tar!; (industriously) flei'gig; (to ^tudy hard) fleigig lernen, reg. (^aben). hardly, fanm. has, hasn't, see have and not. hat, ber §ut, bi^e. haye king have, ^a'ben, {)at'te, ge()abt' (t)aben), cr l^at; {auxil. with neuter verbs) fein, mar, geirefen (fein), er ift; to have to, miiffen, mu^'te, ge* mu^V (^aben), er tmig; to have done or made, laf feu, Ueg, gelaf'= fen (()aben), er Idgi haven't, see have a^if? not, also nid^t (tDalir), § 3, a. hay, ba^ §eu, be^ §eu(e)g, he, er. hear, l)o'ren, re^. (l)aben); I heard them play, \6) {)abe fie jpielen ]^i3ren, § 141. • help, noun^ bie §U'fe; -yerfe, ^el'fen, \)0l\\, ge^otfen (^aben), er l)Uft, with dat. her, (5!(Zj., il)r; pronoun^ \X)x, fte. here, ^ier. herself, reflex.^ fid); intens., fetbft high, higher, highest, {)od), l)ol)er, l)0(^ft; declined in the positive^ Ijoljev, l)o^e, ^o^e§. him, pronoun^ i^m, i^n. himself, reflex., fi(^; intens. felbft. his, fein; loiY/t j^ar^s 0/ ^/le 6odi/ used in the predicate, fi(^ and the def. art, hold, ^al'ten, ^telt, ge^alten (^aben), er ^a(t. home, at home, gu §auje; (to) home, nad) §aufe. hope, l)of' fen, reg. (^aben). horse, ba§ ^^3ferb, hie -e. hot, ^eij3. hour, bie ®tnn'be, bie -n ; an hour and a half, an'bertl)a(b @tnnben. house, ba^ §ang, bie §aufer ; at the house of, bei with dat. how, tt)ie. hundred, ^un'bert, § 217, c. hungry, ^ung'rig. hurt, t)erlet'3en, ijertelj'te, terlefet' (^aben). I I, id). If, irenn ; after verbs o/askmg, ob; as if, aU ob or a(§ tyii/i inverted order, ink, bie Slinte, bie -n. in, in with dat. or ace. ; in it, barin'; in the evening, a'benb^ or om 5lbenb ; in German or English, anf bentfd) or eng'Iifc^, industrious (ly), flei'gig. instead of, anftatt' with gen. ; also followed by a phrase (§ 204, d) or a clause (§ 286). into, in with ace. is, ift, see be ; is (translated), l^ei^t; there is, c^ gibt or e§ ift. isn't, see is and not, also nid^t (tt)a^r), § 3, a. it, eg ; also er or fte (§ 93) ; with prepositions, ba(r)*. John, (ber) 3o']^ann. just, adv., gera'be, when qualifying another word; e'ben, when refers ring to time. kind, bie @or'te, bie -n ; all kinds of, al'Ierlei ; what kind of, XO(x% fiir. king, ber ^o'nig, bie -e. knee 40 matter knee, ba^ ^nie', bic MnVt. knew, see know. knife, ba^ SJief^fer, bie — . know, (have knowledge of) tt)if' fen, tDugte, gcltjugt (I^aben), cr tt)ei6 ; (be acquainted with) Un'nen, fantttc, gcfannt (^aben). lady, bie 2)a'me, bie -n» laid, see lay. lain, see lie. lake, ber @ee, be^ -g, bie -n. lamp, bie Sam'pe, bie -n. land, ba^ l^anb, bie "er or -e (poetic) . large, larger, largest, grog, groger, grogt last, lel^t ; at last, enb'Iid^ ; last summer, tjo'rigett ©om'mer, late, later, f^jcit, f|3ater ; to be late, j^cit fommen. lay, see lie. leaf, ha^ matt, bie "er, learn, ler'neit, reg. (Ijaben). left, lint leg, ba^ iBein, bie — e. lend, lei'^en, lie^, gelie^en (^a= ben)» lesson, bie ©tun'be, bie -tt, let, laf'fen, lieg, gelaffen (^ben), er letter, (epistle) b^r S3rief, bie -e; (of the alphabet) ber S3uc^'ftabe, be« -n(«), bie-n. lie, lie'geu, lag, gelegen (^aben)* like, mbgen, mo(i)te, gemod^t (Ijaben), er ntag; should or would like, ntod)te; gem in sense of gladly; adj., (resembling) di)n'Ud), preceded by dat. line {on the page), bie ^n'U, bie -n, lip, bie ^ip'pe, bie -n. little {in sense 0/ small), !(ein; {in sense o/not much), tDe'nig. long, longer, longest, lang, Idnger, Idttgj!; adv., a long time, lange; as long as, folange with dependent order. look, fe'^en, fa^, gefe^en (l^abeu), erfiel)t; (appear) au^'je^en, fa^ au^', aug'gefei^en (l)aben), er fie^t au§'; look for, fu'd)en, reg. (^a- ben); look up {as in a diction- ary), nad)'fi^(agen, fd)tng nad)', nac^'gefc^lagen (^aben), er fd^ldgt nad)^ loose, log, lose, uerlie'ren, t)erIor', t)erlo'ren (^aben). lost, see lose. lot, a lot {in sense o/many), t)iet. loud, louder, lant, (anter, love, Ue'ben, reg. (^aben); loving, liebenb* lying, see lie. M made, see make. make, ma'd)en, reg. (l)aben). man, ber 2JJann, bie "er; sometimes omitted iri the general sense of people : some men, einige. many, Die'Ie; many a, mand); how many, tt)iet)ie'fe, March, ber SJidrj. Marie, Mary, (bie) ^Oiarie'. matter, what's the matter ? njaS May 41 not ift Ids? it's a matter of course, e§ berfteljt^ fid), eg ijerftanb' fid}, eg ^at fid) i^erftan'bett/ May, ber ^at. may, {possibility) fon'ncn, fonttte^ Qefonnt (^abett), et fann; (per- mission) biirfen, burfte, geburft (^afien), et barf, me, Tiitr, tnld^, mean, {of things) bebeu'tett/ reff. (^aben); {of people) mei'uett, reg. (^aben) ; what do you mean 'by that? 3Sag joE bemt ha^ ? meat, ha^ %^^i\^f bie -e. meet, begeg'nen, begeg'itete, begeg/= net {\^in) , followed by dat. middle, bie mn'it. might, see may. milk, bie m\\6). million, etne ^illion^ mine, mein, ber meine, ber nteintge, minute, bie 9}^inu'te, bie -n. mistake, ber 5ei)'Ier, bie — . moment, ber ^u'genblicf, hit -e» Monday, ber SRon'tag, money, bag @elb, bie -er. month, ber SJlo'nat, bie -e; what day of the month, ben mieOieCten, more, ntet)r; noc^ (§ 160). morning, ber 3JJor'gen, bie — ; writ- ten small when used with ad- verbs : this morning, i)eute mor^ gen. mother, bie SO^ut'ter, bie 3Riitter. Mr., §err. Mrs., gran. much, t)ie(, usually not declined; how much, tx)iet)iet^ must, ntiif'fen, mugte, gemugt ({)aben), er tnu§; must not {in withholding permission)^ ntd)t biir'fen, burfte, gebnrft (t^aben), er barf nic^t. my, mein; with parts of the body in the predicate^ usually mir and the def art. myself, reflex*^ mir, mid); intens.^ felbft. name, ber 9^a'me, beg -ng, bte -n; to be named, l)ei'gen, ^ieg, ge* ^eigen (^aben). named, genannt'; to be named, ^eigen. near, prep., an with dat. or ace; adj., no^e, preceded by dat. need, brau'd)en, reg. (^aben). needle, \ik 9^a'bcl, bie -n. neither, tre'ber; neither . . . nor, rtjeber . . . nod^. nest, bag 9^eft, hie -er, never, nie, nie'malg. new, nen. next, ndc^ft night, bie ^a6:jt, bie "e ; lohen re- ferring to evening, as in "Did you go to the theatre last night?", ber 5l'benb, bie -e; last night, geftem abenb, nine, neun. nineteen, nenn^ge^n. ninety, nenn'gig. no, adv., nein; adj., fetn. none, fein. nor, nod^; neither . . . nor, tre'ber . . . nod). not, nid)t; not any, fein. nothing 42 plenty nothing, nt(^t8; a folloioing adjec- tive is neuter and is written with a capital (§ 159, e). now, jctjt; {less often) nun. occur, cin'fatlen, ftel ein', cln'gcfaEen (feln), eg fallt mlr cin', with dat. o^clock, U^r; omitted^ as in Eng- lish, except on the exact hour. October, ber Ofto'ber. of, t)on with dat.; often rendered by the gen.; afraid of, fic^ furd)'= ten t)or; of course, natiir'Iid^; a pound of, etc., omitted, see § 113. often, oft. oh, 0, alj, ad). old, older, oldest, aft, alter, citteft. on, auf with dat. or ace. ; to go on, fort'fal^ren, ful)r fort', fort'gefa^= ren (^aben), er fd^rt fort'; to read on, trei'terlefen, Ia8 irel'ter, iDet'tergetefen (^aben), er Iteft tt)ei'ter. once, ein'mal; at once, gleic^. one, ein; one's, feln; not one, fein; no one, nie'manb ; in general sense, one hears, etc. man; the one, ber, berje'ntge; often trans- lated by inflected adjective, § 128, d. only, nur. . onto, auf with ace. open, auf'mac^en, madite auf, auf'= gemac^t (^aben). or, ober; either ... or, ent'tDeJDer . . . ober. order, in order to, um with injin. other, (in sense o/different) an'bcr; {in sense o/more) nod). ought to, fol'Ien, foUte, gefollt (l)aben), er foU; see § 144, b, 2. our, un'jer. out, adv., ^inau§'; prep., au8 with dat.; out of it, barauS'; out of doors, brau'gen. outside, adv., brau'gen; prep., out- side of, au'ger^alb with gen. over, adv., ^inii'ber; prep., ii'ber wjith dat. or ace. page, bte @ei'te, bie -n. pair, ha^ $aar, bie -e. paper, \iCi% ^a^ier', bie -e. pass {in sense of hand to) , rei'c^cn, reg. (^aben). past, half past ten, ^atb elf. pen, bte ge'ber, bie -n. pepper, ber ^feffer. perhaps, oielleid)t'. permitted, to be permitted, biir'fen, burfte, geburft (^aben), er barf. picture, ba§ ^ilb, bie -er; (paint- ing), \i(x% @emdt'be, \i\t — . piece, ha^ @tii(f, bie -e; break to pieces, ^erbre'djen, ^erbrad^', ^er* bro'd^en (^aben), er gerbrid)t'. place, in the first, second place, etc., er'fteng, jtDei'ten^, etc. plate, ber XtVUx, bie -^. play, noun, bag @ptet, bte -e; verb, f^ie'Ien, reg. (^aben). please, gefal'Ien, gefiel', gefaCIen (^aben), e8 gefdilt' mir, followed by dat. ; if you please, btt'te. plenty (of), gcnug', Diet. pocket 43 pocket, bie Xa'\d)e, bie -n ; the definite article is used instead of a personal pronoun to translate my, your, his, etc. poem, \iOi^ ©ebic^t', bie -e, polite(ly), ^of Ud^, poor, arm. portion (to eat), bie portion', \iit -en (t like %), post-office, bie ^oft, bie -en ; to the post-office, auf bie ^oft. pound, ba§ $funb, p^tx ^^5funb» practice, bie U'bung, praise, lo'ben, re^. ({)aben). pray {used with the imperative)^ bod), bit'te» probably, tt)o!)(, n)al)r{^ein'(id^. pronounce, au^'f^re^en, fprac^ an^', au^'gefproc^en (l)aben), er (|3ri(^t pronunciation, 'bit 5lu^'f)3ra(i)e, bie -n. pull, gie't)en, gog, ge^ogen (^aben), ' pupil, ber ®d)u(er, bie — . put, fte'rfen, reg. (^aben); (lay) le'gen, reg. (^aben) ; (set) fet'jen, reg. (]^aben). quarter, bag ^ier'tet, bie — ; quar- ter to three, brei iBiertel brei. question, it is a question, eg fragt ftc^, reg. (I)aben). quickly, f(i)net[. quite, ganj. R rain, ber 9fle'gen, bie — ran, see run. read, le'fen, (a«, gelefen (l^aben), cr Ueft; read aloud, tjor'Iefen, lag t)or', Dor'gelefen {\jaUn), er Ueft Dor' ; read on, h)ei'ter(efen, lag trei'ter, rt)ei'tergelefen (^aben), er lieft tnei'ter. reader, bag ?e'febu(^, bie $!efebii^ ready, fer'tig* receive, er^al'ten, er^ielt, n^aVitn (^aben), er erpit'. recite, l)er'fagen, jdgte l^er', ^er ge= fagt (^aben). red, rot. remain, blei'ben, blieb, geblieben (feiu). remember, fid) erin'nertt, erin'nerte fic^, \\&j erin'nert (^aben), with gen. repeat, \t)ieber^o'ten, tX)ieberl)oi'te, n)ieber{)oIt' (^aben). rich, reid^. right (correct), rid)'tig; (not left) rec^t; to be right, red)t I)aben, l^atte red^t, red^t ge^abt (^aben), er \^Oii Xi6)i ; all right, fd^on, gut. rise, auf'fte^ett, ftanb auf, auf''ge=' ftanben (feitt). river, ber glug, bie gliiffe. room, bag ^intmer, bie — . rose, bie 9^o'fe, bie -n. round, adj., runb ; prep., um with ace. rule, bie 9^e'gel, bie -ti. run, tauf'en, lief, gelaufen (fein), er Jtduft ; run through, burd)bldt'tern, bur^bldt'terte, burc^bldt'tert (^a^^ ben). sack 44 soon S sack, bcr ^ad, ble H. said, see say; is said to, foil (§144,b). salt, ha^ @alj, bie -c. same, fe(b ; the same, htx\tlht ; all the same, cinerici'. Saturday, bcr (Son'nabenb, ber ©am^'tag. saw, see see. say, fa'gen, reg. (^abcn). scarcely, faum. school, bie ©c^u'te, bie -n ; to school, in bie @^ute; at school, in ber @d)nle. second, jmeit, see, fe'^en, fa^, gefe^en (^aben), er fte!^t; I have seen them play, id) i)abe fie jpieten je^en. sell, t3er!an'fen, Oerfanf'te, uer- fauft' (^aben)* send, fd)i'cfen, reg. (^aben), sentence, ber @a^, bie "e. set, fet'jen, reg. (l)aben), seven, jie'ben. seventeen, fieb'(en)3et)n. seventh, fie'bent. seventy-fourth, tjier'unbfteb'gigft, seventy-three, brei'unbfieb'gig* several, me^'rere. sew, nci'^en, reg. (!)aben). shall, (future) tt)erben ; (is to) jotten; (want to) tx)oUen» she, fie, ship, bag @(^iff, bie -c. shoe, ber 'Bd)\i^, bie -e. shore, ba^ IVfer, bie — . short, shorter, tnxi, fiirjer. should, folVte (foUen); see also sub- junctive. show, ^ei'gen, reg. (^aben), shut, jn'mad)en, madjte ^n', ^u'ge^ nta(f)t (^aben)* side, this side of, bieS'jeit^ with gen. since, prep., feit with dat.; conj., jeitbem'. sick, !ranf. silver, ba^ @ilber» sing, fin'gen, jang, gejungen {l)a- ben)» sir, mein §err^ sister, bie @(5^ti3e'fter,bie -n. sit, fit'aen, fag, gefeffen (i)aben); to sit down, fi(^ fet'gen, reg. ({)aben), sitting, see sit. six, fed)§, small, !(ein, smash, jerbre'd^en, ^erbrad^^ ger* bro'c^en (^aben), er jerbric^t'. snow, noun, ber @d)nee; verb, eg jd)neit, reg. (f)aben). so, jo ; that's so, e'ben ; with glau'= ben, bag or eg, sold, see sell. soldier, ber (BolbaV, beg -en, bie -en. some, ei^nig ; some more, noc^ et'trag ; some one, (ir'genb) jt'^ manb, something, et'tDag ; a following adjective is neuter and is written with a capital. son, ber @o^n, bie "e. song, bag ?ieb, bie -er ; ber ©e^ fang', bie ©efdnge. soon, halb; as soon as, foba(b\ sorry 45 theatre sorry, to be, leib'tun, tat UW, leib'getan (^abett) loithdat. ; I am sorry, e§ tut mir leib^ soup, bie @u^'pe, bie -n, speak, fpre'd^en, f^rad^, gefproc^en (^aben), er fpric^t ; to speak Ger- man, 2)eutfci) fpre(^en. spell, buc^ftabie'ren, buc^ftabicr'te, budiftabiert' (^aben). spite, in spite of, tro^ with gen. spoke, see speak. spoon, ber ^of'fel^ bie — . stairs, stairway, bie S^rep'^e, bie -n; upstairs, (rest) oben, {mo- ' tion) bie 2^re|)))e ^inaiif^; down- stairs, {rest) uitten, (motion) bie S^re^^e l^inab' or Ijinun'ter. stand, fte^^en, ftanb, geftanbert (^a= ben); stand up, auf'fte^en, ftanb anf, auf'geftanben (fetn)» state, ber ®taat, be6 -e§, bie -en, stay, blei'ben, blieb, geblieben (fein). stick (put), fteden, reg. (t)aben). still, {of time)^ noc^. stop, auf l^oren, ^orte auf', auf'ge* !)ort (^aben), followed by the in- finitive where English has a verbal. store, ber ^a'ben, bie ?aben, story, bie @ef(^id)'te, bie -n* straight, gera'be. strange, fremb» stranger, adj.^ fremb; noun^ ber grembe, beg -n, bie -n, strong, ftarf, study, ler'nen, reg. (baben) ; ftnbte'^ ren is used only of advanced study, as at a university. succeed, gelin'gen, getang', gelun'* gen (fein), impers. with dat. ; I succeed, t% gelingt mir. such, foI(^ (§ 124) ; such a good man may also be translated ein jo guter 9}lann. sugar, ber ^w'dtx, bie — ♦ suit, noun, ber te'^ug, bie to'jiige; verb, |)af'fen, reg. (^aben) with dat. summer, ber @om'mer, bie — . Sunday, ber @onn'tag. sung, see sing. surround, nmge'ben, untgab', urn ge'ben (^aben), et umgibt'. table, ber %\\6), bie -e. take, ne^'men, na^m, genommen (^aben), er nimmt. talk, f^re'd^en, fprad), gej^rod^cn ({)aben), er f)3ric^t. tea, ber ^ee» teacher, {man) ber i^e^^'rer, bie — ; {woman) bie i^e^'rerin, bie -nen. tear, rei'gen, rig, geriffen (^aben) ; to tear up, tear to pieces, jerrei'^ gen, ^^errig', jerriffen (baben). tell, ja'gen, reg. (^aben); ergaVten, er^a^Cte, txiix\)\V (^aben). than, a(§. thank, ban'fen, reg. (^aben) with dat. ; thank you, (id)) banfe. that, conj., 't>Oi^\ rel., ber, tDel'd)er; demon., ber, je'ner* the, ber, bie, ha^. theatre, bag Xljea'teXr tic — ; to the theatre, tug Sweater. thee 46 translate thee, bir, bid), their, t^r. them, fie, Hj'ntn, biefet'bcn; with a prep., ba(r)-, themselves, rejlex., fid); intens., felbft ^ then, (171 sense o/next), bamt; (in sense o/at that time), ba'mal^. there, adv., ta; there is, e§ gibt, e§ ift; there's a draft, e§ 3iel)t» these, bieje, they, fie; man (§ 169, c);e§ (§ 155). thing, ba^ 2)ing, bie -e. think, gtau'ben, re^. (t)abett); ein'= fallen, fiel ein^ ein'gefaEen (fein), eS fdttt ntir ein', impers. with dat. third, adj., britt; noww, ba§ 2)rittel, bie — . thirsty, bnr'ftig, thirteen, brei'ge^n, thirty, brei'gig. this, bie§; this morning or evening, l^en'te mor'gen or abenb; this side of, bie^'feitg with gen. thorn, ber 2)orn, be« 2)orn§, bie Dornen. those, bie, je'ne; those are, 'tia^ finb (§ 159). thou, bn. thousand, tau'fenb, thread, ber ga'ben, bie gciben. three, brei; three and a half, brei'^ unbein^alb', t)ier'tef)a(b; three times, brei'mal, through, prep., burd) with ace. ; adj., fer'tig; run through (a hook), burc^blcit'tern, bnrc^blat'^ terte, burc^bldt'tert (^aben). Thursday, ber 3)on'nergtag, W -t. ticket, ba§ iBittett', bie -e (pro- nounced bilyetQ. till, bi§ with ace. or dep. order. time {extent) bie ^tiif bie -en; (point) 'Ha^ 9}ZaI, bie -e; a long time, lange {adv.) ; with a nu- meral, as three times, =mal, ein-- mal, iVotx'moXf etc.; to have a good time, fid) (gut) aniiifie'ren, amiifier'te fid^, fid) amiifiert' (^aben) ; what time is it ? trici^iel UbrifteS? tired, mii'be, to, {with persons) gu with dat:; {with places) nad) with dat. ; to school, theatre, or concert, in with ace. ; to and fro, l^tn nnb l^er; in order to, um p loith infin. ; quarter to eight, brei ^ier'tet (anf) Oi&ji; also often rendered by the dative. to-day, !^en'te; a week from to-day, ^ente iiber ad}t XaQt. to-morrow, mor'gen; to-morrow morning, morgen frii^; day after to-morrow, ii'bermorgen, too, {with adjs. and advs.) ^u; {in other cases) and). torn, see tear. town, bie ©tabt, bie "e; to town, in bie @tabt; down town, in bie or ber @tabt. train, ber 3"9/ ^i^ Re- translate, iiberfet'^en, iiberfe^'te, iiberfe^t' (^aben); to be (trans- lated), ^ei'gen, ^ieg, ge^ei^en (^aben); What is that in Ger- man? 2Bic l^eigt ba8 auf beutfd)? tree 47 what tree, bcr iBaum, bic iBaume. true, \X)a\)X, try, t)erfu'd)eu, Derfud^'te, berfuc^t' (l)aben), with ace. or infin. and Tuesday, ber ^ien^'tag, bic -c. twelfth, iXoo\\t twelve, i\vU\. twenty, gman'^ig. twenty-five, funf'unb;;tt)an5tg, twenty-four, tjier'ntibi^tuanjig. twenty-third, bret'unb^tDanaigft. twice, gmei'maL tyro, gttjei; the two, bie bei'ben, U under, un'ter xoith dat. or dec. understand, t)erfte'^en, t)erftanb', tierftan'ben (()aben)» understood, see understand. undertake, unterne^'men, itnter^ tta^m', untcrnom'nten (^aben), ^ tx untcrnimmt'. up, upstairs, {rest) o'ben, {motio7i) bic Xrep'pc ^itiauf ; what's up ? lua« gibtg? look up, {of words) nad)'\djiaQtn, fc^tug nad)', nad)^gc- fd^tagcn (^abcn), cr j^Icigt nad)'; stand up or get up, auf'ft.cl)en, ftatib auf, aufgcftanbcu (fcin). upon, auf t/Ji^/i da^. or ace. us, uu§, un'jer {gen.). very, fct)r, village, bag 2)orf, bic "cr. visit, noun, ber iBcfitd)', bic -e; ver?>, bcfii'c^en, reg. (I^abcn). vowel, ber ^o!a(\ bie -c» W wagon, bcr Sa'geti, bic — . wait, raar'ten, reg. (^abcn), for, auf %cith ace. walk, go for a walk or walking, jpagic'rcn gc^en, ging j^agieren, j)3a3iercit gcgangcn (fein). wall {of a room), bie 2Banb, bie Sdnbe. want, to want to, tt)o('(en, tvoWU, QetvoUt' (^aben), cr tt)itt. • warm, tDarm. was, tuar, see fein» wasn't, see was and not. wast, tDarft, see fcin. water, ha^ SBaf'fcr, bie — . way, ber S©eg, bie -c. we, tt)ir; {in general sense), man. wear (as to wear clothes), tra'gen, trug, getragen (^aben), cr trcigt. weather, ba§ SSct^ter, bie — . Wednesday, ber 9Jlitt'tt)oc^, bie -c. week, bic SBoMjc, bic -n; a week from to-day, l)cutc iiber a6)t XciQC ; what day of the week? tDcI'c^en Sag ? welcome, you're welcome, bit'te. well, adv., gut; excl., nun; well written, gut gefd)rie'beu; to be well, fid^ gut bcfin'beu, befaub' \id) gut, fid) gutbefuu'beu (^abeu). went, see go. were, see be ; in loassive, tt)ur'ben. wet, nag. what, tuag; what time is it? tx>ie'= tjicl U()r' ift c8 ? what kind of ? tDaS fiir (ciu) ? ; what's your name ? tnie ^ci'geu 0ic? when 48 yourself when, conj. of past time, at§; of general time, toenn; interrog., trann? whenever, iDettn, where, too ; where (to), U)o{)in', whether, ob, which, reh, bev, tt)e('(^er; interrog., toeV6)ex ; with preps., tT)o(r)=, while {referring to a long time), tDci^'renb; {for a short time), inbem', white, tDcig. who, rel., ber, WeVdjtt; interrog., rt)er* whole, gatt^, whom, see who. why, interrog., ttjarum'; excl,, j.a. wide, breit {not trett, far). wife, bte grau, bie -en» will, {future, of, time) irer'ben; \^of desire) to be willing, WoVUn, XooViit, getDoIIt (^aben), er tuill, willing, see will. window, 'oa^ gen'fter, bie — . winter, ber Stn'ter, bie — . wish, tt)un'f(i)en, reg. (^aben), fol- lowed by ju and infin. with, mit with dat. ; (with persons, as at the house of), bei with dat. without, o^tte loith ace. ; followed also by phrase or clatise (§§ 204, d, and 2S6). woman, bte grau, bie -en. won't, see will and not. wood, ber ^alb, bte "er. word, ba^ S^Sort, bte -e {of con- nected discourse), bte "er {of dis- connected words). work, verb, ar'betten, re^. (^aben); noun {in sense 0/ labor), bte 2lr'* bett, bte -en ; {in sense of the result of labor) ba^ 25er!, bte -e. worn, see wear. would, tDiir'be, tooWte ; see condi- tional and subjunctive (§§ 264 and 265). write, f(^ret'ben, fd)rteb, gejd^rteben (l)aben). writing, written, see write; well written, gut gefd)rte'ben. wrong, falfd) ; to be wrong {of per- sons), utt'rec^t ()aben, ^atte, ge= 1:)dbi (^aben). wrote, see write. year, ha^ 3al)r, bte -e. yes, ja. yesterday, ge'ftern ; a following noun is written as an adverb without a capital : geftern abenb. yet, {of time) nod^, {adversative) boc?^ ; not yet, nod) ntc^t. you, (formal) @te, 3^rer ; (inti- mate) bu, betner ; t^r, ener; (in a general sense) man. young, younger, jnng, jiinger. your, (formal) 3t)t: ; (intimate) betn, ener ; (with parts of the body used in the predicate) bir, fid^ or end^ ^vith the def art. yourself, (reflexive) ^idj, hidj, end) ; (intensive) jelbft. INDEX. % sounds of, in German, Intro., I, b. aa, digraph, Intro., I,/, a in diphthongs ax, Intro., I, 6; § 329, 1; au, Intro., i;e; § 329, 2; au, Intro., I, e; § 329, 3. ahev, § 177. , contrasted with fonbern, § 177, a. abstract nouns formed by suffixes. ^c, § 349, a ; ^et, § 349, 6 ; ^eit, § 349, c; 4eit, § 349, d; ^c^aft, § 349, e ; .ung,§349,/. See also Word formation. accent in verbs, inseparable, § 188 ; sepa- rable, § 189. common verbs, used as insepara- ble, § 196, a ; separable, § 196, b. in foreign words, § 67, 2. in pronunciation of German, §§ 324- 342. accusative case, § 7; § 7, 6; § 8; § 17 ; summary of, § 82 ; § 83 ; summary of forms, §§ 305-313. of definite time, § 117 ; § 222 ; § 222, a. prepositions with accusative or da- tive, § 89. with accusative only, § 102. impersonals with, § 248. with urn after c« fragt fic^, § 251. with c§ gt6t, § 163. active voice distinguished from passive, § 235, a, b. more used in German, § 237, a, b. address, terms of formal and familiar, § lO. use of (©te, § 10, a. adjectives, review of, § 128 and §307. declension of, strong, § 112 ; § 128, 6, 2. weak, § 116; § 128, 6,1. mixed, § 120; § 128, b, 2, note, indeclinable, § 124, a. possessive, from genitive, § 103; § 149; not used so often as in English, § 174; §272. predicate, not declined, § 9 ; § 128, a. attributive, § 112; § 128, b. use as nouns, § 128, c. after "one," § 128, d. use after manc^^ jo(rf), \vc\d), § 124; § 124, a. cardinal, § 217. ordinal, § 218 ; § 219. formation of from suffixes, ^hav, § 350, a ; -en, § 350, b ; 4;aft, § 350, c ; =tg, § 350, d; 4f(^, §350, e; Aid), §350,/; .jam, § 350, g. adverbs unintiected adjectives, § 125. formed from cardinals, with =tttal, § 217, b. from ordinals, with =cn§, § 218, a. comparison of, § 212, § 213. order in sentence, § 125; § 290, b, 1, 2,3. adverbial phrases order in sentence, § 290, b, 1, 2, 3. agent, dative of with the passive and t)on, § 232. with the active, § 237, b. 49 60 Wbex, oXf pronunciation of, Intro., I, e; § 329, 1. aU declined when followed by adjec- tive, § 124, h. indeclinable, § 124, 6 ; § 162, a. never weak, § 162, a, 1. neuter, 162, a, 3. alphabet, the German, p. x of In- troduction. introducing clauses, § 178; § 179. to translate verbals, § 285. in comparisons, § 214, a, h. d^ ob, alg njenn, § 274, a. am, contraction of an bem with the superlative in the predi- cate, § 212, h. an, prep, with dative or accusative, §89. anbcr after cttt)a§, § 159, a. meaning difereiit, § 160 ; compared with noc^ etn, § 162, b. %n ben a)Zonb, by Enslin, p. 97. anbcrt^atb, § 219, a. anfangen, § 193. » angene^m, with the dative, § 2S2, a ; §283. anfommcn, followed usually by dative, § 287. another, one more, nod^ ctn; a differ- ent one, auber, § 162, b. anftatt followed by infinitive, § 204, d. preposition with genitive, § 281; §283. antecedents agreement of personal pronoun with, § 93. of relative in gender and number, § 167, b. repetition of, § 169, b. apostrophe, used in genitive of proper names in s^, § 225, a. apposition, nouns in, § 109. special use after nouns of measure, § 113; after bte portion, § 267. article definite forms of , § 8 ; § 17 and note ; sum- mary of forms, § 305. combined with prepositions, § 89, a. distinguished from demonstra- tive, § 158, note, use with betbe, § 162, c ; with i)alh, § 163; with proper names, § 225, 6, c ; instead of possessive pro- noun with parts of the body, § 174; with 3:afc^e, § 272. indefinite forms of , § 8 ; § 22 ; summary of' forms, § 306. used with genitive to express in- definite time, § 281, a. See also bcr and em. as, in comparisons, tx)ie, § 214, a. subordinating conjunction, § 178; § 179 ; see also ba. as — as, § 214, b. assimilation of spoken sounds, §342. au, pronunciation of, Intro., I, e; § 329, 2. au, Intro., I, e ; § 329, 3. auf prep, with dative or accusative, § 89. separable prefix, § 193. with adverbial superlative, § 212, c. auft)oren with the infinitive where English has verbal in -ing, § 193. au^, prep, with dative, § 97 ; § 100. au^er^tb, § 281, b; §283. auxiliaries of mode, see Modals. of tense simple present for emphatic aux- iliary do in English, § 16; § 207, a. INDEX. 51 auxiliaries of tense (continued). future tenses, § 48 ; § 49; of mod- als, § 136. rendered in German by the present, § 55. simple futurity, tt>erben, § 132, a; § 230, a. distinctions in use of shall and will, § 132, a, 6, and note. future perfect, § 78; § 84; of modals, § 140. perfect tenses with ^aben, § 58; § 84; of mod- als, § 140. in past perfect, § 72 ; § 84. with fctn, ^66; ^ 84. in past perfect, § 72 ; § 84. use of present perfect in Ger- man for English past, § 61 ; § 141, b. use of German present with fc^on for English present perfect, § 73. use of German past with f(^on for English past perfect, § 73, a. of passive voice, tt>erbcn, § 230; § 231 ; see also hjerbeu. of separable verbs, § 196, b. position in sentence in independent clauses, § 170, a. in dependent clauses, § 170. with "two infinitives," § 181. repetition of auxiliary rendered by ntd^t tt)al;r, § 3, a. B. 95, sound of, Intro., II, a, b. See also Consonants. hC'f inseparable prefix, § 188. Bechstein, Ludwig (1801-1860), quoted, p. 142. begcgncn, with the dative, § 282, b; §283. bet, preposition with the dative, § 97 ; § 100. betbc, preceded by the article, § 162, c. Bible, quoted, pp. 168, 188. hi^, prep, with the accusative, § 102. hitte, use of, p. 48 ; § 107. Utten, § 107; bitten urn, § 107. Brentano, Clemens (1778-1842) , SSiegenlieb, p. 37. Busse, Carl, liber ben 95evgen, p. 175. but, rendered by aber or fonbern, § 177, a. C. C sounds of, Intro., II, b, 2. See also Consonants. capitalization of adjectives after ettt)a^ and ntd^tS, § 159, a, e; Intro., IV, e. after met and Itjentg, § 162, e. of nouns, Intro., IV, c, 1,2. of pronouns, Intro., IV, c^; § 10. nouns, a)^orgen, S^iad^tmittag, and 5lbenb not capitalized when combined with geftern, ^eute, and tttorgcn, § 138, a. cardinal numbers, § 217. See also Numerals. case, endings, § 35; § 39; § 44; § 52; §63; §68; §75. summary of, § 82 ; § 83 ; §§ 305-314. of appositives, the same for both, §109, of relatives depending on construc- tion in clause, § 167, b. See also Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusative. catch, glottal, §§ 331-334. causative, laffen, § 144, d; § 145. ^f Intro., II, b, 3, 4, 5; discussion of different sounds of, § 336, 1, 2,3. *cl^en, diminutive, always neuter, § 34 ; § 79, 6, 3; § 348, a. Christian names, proper nouns inflections of nouns ending in s^, § 225, a. with the definite article, § 225, b, c. c^g, sound of, Intro., II, 6, 4; § 336, 3, 52 INDEX. d, sound of, Intro., II, 6, 1, c. Claudius, Matthias, quoted, p. 88. clauses use of, in German instead of phrases, § 207, 6. independent, inverted when pre- ceded by dependent clause, § 170, a. dependent, order in, § 170; §274, a. punctuation of, § 169, c. conditional, § 270; § 271; § 274; § 275 ; § 276. inverted when ttjenn or ob is omitted, 274, a. cognates, related words (as S3uc^, book), see vocabularies in each lesson. Also Grimm's Law, §§ 357-360. comma frequent use in German, Intro., IV, a. required to set off relative clauses, Intro., IV, a, 1 ; § 169, c. before modified infinitive, § 192; § 205, a. common prefixes (both separable and inseparable) use as separable, § 196, h. use as inseparable, § 196, a. comparison of adjectives and adverbs, § 212. regular, § 212, a. in the predicate, 212, 6, c. of long words, § 212, d. table of regular and irregular com- parisons, § 213. particles of, § 214. than and as, § 214, a. as — as, § 214, b. the — the, ^ 214, c. of one adjective with another, § 212, d. composition of nouns, adjec- tives, verbs, etc., §§ 343-356. See Word formation. complementary infinitive, § 192. complex sentences, §§ 167-170; § 178. See also Sentences and Word order, dependent. compound relatives, § 168. See also Pronouns, relative. compound sentences, § 177. punctuation of, Intro., IV, a, 2. compound words, § 352. nouns, § 353. adjectives, § 354. verbs, § 355. See also Word formation^ concrete nouns, § 348. See also Word formation. conditional (mode) , § 264 ; § 265, a ; § 275, h. See 3i\so Summary of Forms, §§ 314- 323. conditions of fact, §270; § 271, a. contrary to fact, §§ 274-276. modals in, § 276. See Summary of Forms, § 314-323. conjugation indicative, § 1 ; § 6 ; § 15 ; § 21 ; § 27 ; §32;§38;§43;§49;§58;§72. of modals, § 131; § 135; § 136; § 140 ; § 141. of inseparable verbs, § 188; of separable, § 190. imperative, §201; §231. subjunctive, § 256; §§ 261-263. of modals, §269; §276. infinitives, § 204. participles, § 206. passive, § 230 ; § 231. reflexive, § 241. impersonals, § 246; § 247; § 248; §249. See complete Summary of Forms^ §§ 314-323. conjunctions coordinating not affecting order, § 177, INDEX, 63 conjunctions, coordinating {con- tinued). special uses, § 177, a. list of, § 177. subordinating requiring dependent order, § 170. list of, § 178. connecting vcwel for euphony, § 14, a. consonants classification of, Intro., II, a. (1) according to sound liquids, nasals, stops, spi- rants. (2) according to vibration of vocal cords voiced or voiceless. (3) according to place in mouth guttural, palatal, dental, labial, pronunciation of, Intro., II, 6, 1-20 ; discussion of difficulties, §§ 335- 340. contrary to fact conditions use of subjunctive for, § 274; § 274, a. use of modals in, § 276 ; § 276, a and note, contrast, shown by fonbern, § 177, a. conversation, use of bcr instead of beqenige, § 185. coordinating conjunctions, § 177 ; see also Conjunctions. copula, fetn with participle, § 235. correlatives as — as, § 214, b. either — or, § 291. neither — nor, § 291. not only — but also, § 177, a, 1. the — the, § 214, c. could have, in German, § 276. 2), pronunciation of, Intro., II, b. See also Consonants. ba, subordinating conjunction, § 178; §179. use of clauses with ba instead of English phrases, § 207, b. instead of verbals in -ing, § 285. ba(v)=, combined with prepositions, §98. Dahn, Felix (1834-1912), 2)a^ @(iicf, p. 191. ban!cn use of, p. 48 ; with the dative, § 107; §282, 6. bag neuter form of definite article, see ber* as relative, § 167. as demonstrative, § 158, a. complete table of forms of, § 305, a; § 311, a. distinguished from 'oa% § 182. used with plural forms of fcin, § 155. 2)ag ®{M, by Felix Dahn, p. 191. t>a% subordinating conjunction, § 178. distinguished from bag, § 182. dative case indirect object, § 45. instead of possessive, § 174. of definite time am with days of week, § 222 ; tm ^ai)xc, § 222, b. of agent, with t)on, in passive, § 232. after passive of verbs, § 236. with certain adjectives, § 282, a. with certain verbs, list of, § 282, b. anfommen, § 287. bcgcgnen, § 282, b ; § 283. ban!cn, p. 48. eriauben, § 300. fclgeu, § 282, b ; § 283. gcfaUen, § 238 ; § 282, 6. gei)orcn, § 156; §282, b. ^elfcn, § 238 ; § 282, b. ftc^ fiirciitcn t)or, § 291. with the impersonals eg fdHt mtr ctn, eg gclincjt mtr, eg gcfci;te!^t mir, eg tut m'lr leib, § 249. 64 INDEX. dative case {continued). prepositions with dative or accusa- tive, § 89. with dative only, § 97. with Don instead of genitive, § 225, a. after i)or, § 300. David, 23d Psalm of, p. 188. days of the week, § 223, a. of the month, § 223, 6. declension See Adjectives, Articles, Nouns, Pronouns. Also Summary of Foryns, §§ 305-314. demonstrative pronouns, § 158; § 185 ; § 312. See also Pronouns. benn, use of as conjunction, § 177; § 179. as particle, §293; §294. dental consonants, see Conso- nants. dependent clauses, §§ 167-170; § 178 ; § 181 ; § 182. punctuation of, Intro., TV, a, 1 ; § 169, c. dependent order, see Word order. dependent subjunctive, § 257, § 258. See Subjunctive. ber, the definite article, § 2, a ; § 8 ; § 17; § 305. For special uses, see Article, definite. demonstrative, § 158; § 185; § 312. relative, §167; §169; §311. differing from English, § 169. ,,bcr" words, § 116. words declined like ,,ber" words, §124; §312, 6. bcren, genitive of relative bcr, § 167, a. 2)er erftc W(d, by Hagedorn, p. 68. S)er gute ^amerab, by Uhland, p. 144. derivation of words, § 343-356. See Word formation. derivatives, Latin and German syn- onyms, § 356. bcricnige, demonstrative, § 158, c, d. declension of, § 312. use of, § 158, d; when modified, § 185. in formal language, § 185. berfelbc, demonstrative, § 158, c ; § 312. 2)eg ajJcibc^cn^ Steb, by Storm, p. 40. bcffen, genitive of relative ber, used for rtjelc^cr, § 167, a. bcfto, correlative with je, § 214, c. beutfcJ), § 202. dialect, relation of, to correct accent, §324. :j)te avme !leinc ^i^ec^by Sommerstorff , p. 145. biencn, with the dative, § 282, h. bte§, used in singular with plural form of fetn, § 155. See also biefer^ bicfer, as adjective, § 116; as demon- strative pronoun, § 158 ; § 312 ; summary of declension, § 305, 6. digraphs, aar, alg l;atf ber |)tm^ mel, p. 9(5. em, indefinite article, § 8; § 22. mixed declension with, § 120. independent use of, § 149, 6, note, negative of (fcin), § 106. summary of forms, § 306 ; § 307, rj. See also Article, indefinite. ,,ettt" words, § 103, a ; § 120. ad followed by „ein" word, § 124, h. einicje, § 162, d. zin^f cardinal number, § 217. =el, masculine and neuter noun end- ing, first class, § 34. cmp=, inseparable prefix, § 188. emphasis In German, by spacing instead of by italics, § 158, note, emphatic form in conjugation, § 16 ; § 207, a. masculine and neuter noun ending, §34; §306,4. weak adjective ending, § 116. suffix to form adjectives, § 350, 6 ; to form verbs, § 352, a. assimilation of ending near h or )), § 342, 1. after g, § 342, 2. after n or itg, § 342, 3. 't\\^, in ordinal adverbs, § 218, a. engltfd> auf, § 202. Enslin, Karl, %n ben 2«onb, p. 97. ent=/ inseparable prefix, § 188. entttjeber — ober, correlative, § 291. er, personal pronoun, § 92. =er, masculine noun suffix, first class, §34; §79, 6, 1; §348, b. plural noun ending, third class, §62. adjective and adverbial suffix to show comparison, § 212. er*, inseparable prefix, § 188. ertmtern, fid^, with the genitive, § 243. erlautjen, with the dative, § 300. =ent, verb suffix, § 351, 6. er5=, noun prefix, § 346, a. cSf neuter personal pronoun, § 92 § 310, c. with impersonal verbs, § 245, a §§ 246-250. as object of modal auxiliaries, § 137, used with plural form of fein, § 155, in e^ tft, followed by the nomina- tive, § 163; § 250, b. in e^ o^ifit, followed by the accusa- tive, § 163; §250, a. ^c^f neuter ending of adjectives, § 120, b. (g^ roar, a(^ ^citt^ ber .^immct, by Joseph Eichendorff, p. 96. ettua^, indeclinable indefinite, § 159, a. eu, pronunciation of, Intro., I, e; ' 329, 3 ; § 330. 56 INDEX. exclamation point, frequent use in German, Intro., IV, 6 ; § 69. F. factitive verbs eg ift, § 250, h ; § 163. e«3iH§ 250, a; § 163. Fallersleben, Hoffmann von (1798-1874) ^ergi^meinntc^t, p. 12. mdn ^atcrlanb, p. 82. feminine nouns uninflected in singular, § 67. exceptions, auf ©rben, auf bet ^tU ben, see Vocabulary, first class (two only) , § 34, 4, ; § 39. second class, § 51; § 52. fourth class (weak), § 67; § 68. Summary of inflections, §§ 308-309. See also Gender. Feuchtersleben, Ernst, Freiherr von (1806-1849), quoted, pp. 103, 149. finben, followed by infinitive without 5U, § 204, a. folgen, with the dative, § 282, h ; § 283. foreign nouns, masculine, §67, 2. formal address use of berjemgc instead of ber, § 185. in the imperative, § 69 ; § 200 ; § 201. ®ie instead of bu, § 10. fortfat)ren, § 193. fractions, § 219. fragen, § 133 ; as impersonal reflexive, §247. fremb, with the dative, § 282, a ; § 283. frii^, special use in ntorgen fvii^, § 145. ^rii^lingga^nung, by Uhland, p. 31. fii^Ien " two infinitives," § 141. followed by the infinitive without 5U, § 204, a. Pulda, Ludwig (1862- ), 3Benn, p. 182. fiir, prep, with accusative, § 102. future tense, §48; §49; ofmodals, §136. summary of conjugations, §§ 314- 323. rendered by present, § 55. translation of will, § 132. distinctions between follen, tt)o((en, and rtjerben, § 132, note, future perfect, § 78; § 84. of modals, § 140. G. ®, pronunciation of, Intro., II, h, 6. discussion of, § 337, 1, 2, 3. See also Consonants. gang for English entire, § 219, c; § 162, a, 2. ge^, inseparable prefix, § 188. prefix, to form nouns, § 34, 3; § 346, b. in past participles, § 59; § 304. gefallen with the dative, § 238 ; § 282, 6. gegen, prep, with accusative, § 102. gepren with the dative, § 156 ; § 282, b. ge()ord;en with the dative, § 282, b. Geibel, Emanuel (1815-1884), quoted, p. 156. gender in German, § 2. importance of definite article, § 2, a. in German compounds, § 353; in foreign masculines, § 67, 2. rules of determined by meaning, § 79, a, 1, 2, 3. determined by ending, § 79, &, 1, 2, 3. See also Masculine, Feminine, Neuter, and Summary of In- flections, §§ 305-314. genitive case denoting possession, § 40. possessive adjective formed frod, § 103. of proper names, § 225. after ftd^ erinnern, § 243. INDEX. bl to denote indefinite and regularly recurring time, § 281, a. with certain prepositions, § 281, 6. substitutes for, § 174; § 225, a. For case endings, see Summary, §82; §83; §305-314. gcltngen, impersonal verb, § 249 ; § 251 ; § 282, h. German languagre sketch of, § 358. richness in compounds, § 343. grammatical terms, Intro., V. orthography, Intro., II, h, 15, note, Intro., IV, c, d, e. punctuation, Intro., IV, a, 6. gem, § 144, a ; § 145. geftcrn, words following, § 138, a. gtauben, with the dative, § 160 ; § 282, 6. with accusative, § 160. glottal catch, §§ 331-334. gu, pronunciation of, Intro., II, 6, 20. Goethe, Wolfgang" von (1749- 1832) SKanbrer^ 9fJad)tlteb, p. 41. §etbenrd^(ein, p. 163. quoted, pp. 35, 38, 42, 80, 95, 152, 161, 164, 180, 183, 192. grammatical terms in German, Intro., V. Grimm, Jacob, § 13, note; § 357. Grimm's law, § 357-§ 360. @utc "iilad^t, by Theodor Korner, p. 13. gutturial consonants, Intro., II, a, 3. H. ^aben,§l; §6; §314. use in perfect tenses, § 58; § 72; §78; §84. with modals, § 140; position with "two infinitives," § 181. with certain inseparable verbs, § 196, a. always with reflexives, § 240, h. with impersonals, except ge» fd^c^en, gclingcn, and cinfaUen, § 245, a. 4«ft, adjective suffix, § 350, c. Hagedorn, Friedrich von (1708- 1754), 2)er erfte mag, § 159, a; trgenb, § 159, 6; man (with additional forms), § 159, c, and note ; mz\)X, § 159, d; n\6)i^, § 159, e; hjcmger, § 159,/; and also (genitive ex- cepted) , jcbermann, jemanb, nk^ ntanb, § 159, g. inflected (declinable) all, § 162, a, 1, 2, 3 ; anber, § 162, h ; betbe, § 162, c; etmgc, me^rere, § 162, d ; 'ok\, h)emg, § 162, e. tnbem, introducing clauses, § 285. indicative mode conjugation of forms in, see Con- jugation. tenses of, see Tense. complete summary of, §§ 314-323. used to indicate speaker's belief, § 258, c. use for conditions of fact, § 270. indirect discourse, § 258, a, 6, c. in questions, § 258. infinitives present and perfect, § 204. without 5U, § 204, a. with 5U, § 204, h. use as noun, § 204, c. complementary, § 192. of purpose, § 86; §204, d. instead of verbal after anftatt and c\)m, § 204, d. passive, § 231. reflexive, § 241. impersonal, §§ 246-251. position of, § 50; § 192; § 205. with raodals, § 137, h. in "two infinitives," § 141. in compound tenses, § 181. in translating two or more, § 181, a. after separable verbs, § 192. INDEX. 59 infinitives {continued) rendered in German by clause, § 207, h. used instead of English verbal in 'ing, § 193. with geltnv3en, § 251 ; with tt>imfd;en, §259. inflected indefinites, § 162. See Indefinite pronouns. =tng, noun ending, § 51. tnnert)alb, §281, h. inseparable verbs list of inseparable prefixes, § 188. meaning of, § 195. conjugation of, § 321. inseparable and separable (com- mon) verbs, § J96. intensive pronoun, jelbft, felbcr, §150. interjections, § 299, 6, and vocabu- laries. interrogative pronouns, § 153; § 311, c, d. See also Pronouns. interrog-ative sentences, § 3. See also Questions. intransitive verbs indicating motion, take fetn, § 66. idiomatic use of impersonal reflex- ive, § 242, h. common verbs, when separable, § 196, h. with fcin in German, active in Eng- lish, § 283. inversion questions by, § 3 ; in clauses when tt)cmi is omitted, § 274, a. inverted order in sentences, see Word order. trgcnb, use of, § 159, 6. irregular verbs definition of strong verbs, § 13. forms of, § 26. list of principal parts of all strong verbs, § 304. conjugation of, §§ 319-323. 4)c^, adjective ending, § 350, e. italicizing", German substitute for, § 158, a, note, iteratives, cardinal adverbs, § 217, 6. 3f pronunciation of, Intro., II, h, 8. ja, as idiomatic particle, § 293; § 295. jeber, § 116. icbermann, § 159, g ; § 313, 6. icmanb, § 159,^; §313, h. |c — befto, the — the, § 214, c. jener, as adjective, § 116. as demonstrative, § 158; § 312, a, 6. K. ^, pronunciation of, Intro., II, h, 1. See also Consonants. tein, use of, § 106. without the noun, § 149, 5, note. declension, § 103, a; § 306, c. =fett, feminine suffix, § 79, 6, 2 ; § 349, d. !cnnen, § 156. !n, pronunciation of, Intro., II, 6, 20. fonnen, §131; §135; §136; §140; § 323, h. with c^ and ju, § 137. *' two infinitives," § 141. to translate may, § 144, 1. Korner, Theodor (1791-1813), @ute ^JJad)t, p. 13. 4unft,noun ending, second class, § 51. L. ^f pronunciation of, Intro., II, a, h. difficulties of, §325; §338. labials, see Consonants. laffen, " two infinitives," § 141. followed by infinitive without JU, § 204, a. as causative, § 144, d', § 145. 60 INDEX. Latin derivatives, compared with German synonyms, § 356. tcgen, not to be confused with liegcn, § 95 ; § 110, d, Xt^xtn, " two infinitives," § 141. followed by the infinitive without 5U, § 204, a. Ictb tun, impersonal with dative, §249. 4e{n, diminutive suffix, § 34; § 79, 6,3; §348, a. lernen, " two infinitives," § 141. followed by the infinitive without SU, § 204, a. 4tc^, adjective suffix, § 350,/. Itcgcn, not to be confused with (cgcn, §95; § 110, c?. 4tng, masculine ending, § 79, h, 1; § 348, d. liquids, see Consonants. Log-au, Friedrich von (1604-1655) , 2)a^ SSiffcn, p. 24. Lord's Prayer, from gospel of St. Matthew, p. 168. Sorclct, by Heine, p. 25. b^, with gc^^en, idiomatic use, p. 116. with fcin, § 183. M. W, pronunciation of, Intro., II, a, h. See also Consonants. tttac^en, " two infinitives," § 141. followed by infinitive without ju, § 204, a. m(d, bag, § 145. =mal, adverbial suffix, § 217, h. man, indefinite pronoun, § 159, c ; § 313, h. used with active as substitute for passive voice, § 237, a. mand^, declined like bcr, § 124 ; § 313, c. indeclinable, § 124, a. may, translated by burfen or fonnen, § 144, a, 1. measure, nouns of, § 113. bte portion, § 267. mt^Xf used as particle of comparison only when one adjective is com- pared with another, § 212, d. indeclinable indefinite, § 159, d. tncl^rcre, inflected indefinite, § 162, d. Wtixi ^aterlanb by Sturm, p. 22. by Fallersleben, p. 82. mx^^f inseparable prefix, § 188. mtt, prep, with the dative, § 97; §100. mixed declension, see Nouns, Ad- jectives. modal auxiliaries indicative forms of, § 131 ; § 135 ; §136; §140. subjunctive, § 269. in conditions contrary to fact, § 276 " two infinitives " with, § 141. infinitive without ^u, § 204, a, position of in normal order, § 137, b ; § 141. in dependent order, § 181. special uses to translate likey § 144, a; may, § 144, a, 1 ; is said to, § 144, b ; what is the meaning of this? § 144, b, 1 ; ought ^o, § 144, 6, 2; to be about to, § 144, c. mode, see Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive. auxiliaries of, see Modals. 3}Zdgc jcbcr ftill ^cgliicft, by Ruckert, p. 71. tnogen, conjugation of, see Modals. special use, § 144, a; for should, § 276, 6. See Modal auxiliaries. months, names of, § 223, b. 9)iorgen, peculiarities of, § 138, a. morgcn frii^, § 145. morgen iiber ac^t 2^agc, § 300. INDEX. 61 motion from the speaker, § 197; toward, § 197 ; hither and thither, § 197, a ; up and down, § 267. SD'lube hin id), by Luise Hensel, p. 57. Muller, Wilhelm (1794-1827), quoted, p. 108. multiplicatives, with *mal, § 217, h. miiffcn, see Modal auxiliaries. N. % pronunciation of, Intro., II, a, h. See also Consonants. nac^, prep, with the dative, § 97 ; § 100. nac^bem, subordinating conjunction, §178; §179. ncic^ft, superlative of na^, § 213. name, tjet^cn, § 202. nasals, see Consonants, mhtn, prep, with dative or accusative, §89. negative, use of jottbcrn after, § 177, a;fcm,§103, a; §106; §149, 6, note;§306, c; mc^t,§3, a; §23; § 137, a; nic^t^, § 159, e; nie, §121; ttjebcr — noc^, § 291. ntd^t, for repetition of questions, § 3, a. position in sentence, § 23. with modal auxiliaries, § 137, a. 9^i^t ba§ mete SStffeti, by Logau, p. 24. ntd^tg, indeclinable indefinite, § 159, e. nic^t tt)a^r, for repetition of questions, § 3, a. nie, § 121. niemanb, indecl. except in gen., § 159, g. =m§, noun ending, § 51. noc!^, idiomatic particle, § 293 ; § 297. noc^ ein, for another, § 162, h. nominative case, § 7 ; § 8. with eg \\i, § 163. normal order, see Word order. nouns classes of, § 33. first class (strong), § 33; § 34. declension of masculine, § 35; § 79, h, 1. feminine, § 39. neuter, §44; §79,6,3; §204, c; §219. second class (strong), § 51. declension of, § 52; § 79, 6, 1. third class (strong), § 62. declension, § 63. summary of strong endings, § 83. fourth class (weak) masculine and feminine, § 67. declension of, § 68; § 79, h, 2. fifth class (mixed) , § 74. declension of, § 75. in apposition, § 109; § 113; § 267. of measure, omission of preposi- tion, § 113. after a numeral, § 113, a. substitutes for adjectives used as, § 128, c. infinitive used for, § 204, c. ** one " used for noun, § 128, d. used with geftern, i^eute, and morgen, § 138, a. declension of, §§ 308-309; see Classes of nouris. gender of, § 79. proper, inflections, § 225, a. with the definite article, § 225, 6, c. number, see Singular and Plural. numerals ending of nouns after, § 113, a. cardinal, § 217. indeclinable, except etnS and tim mmm, § 217. adverbs, § 217, h. omission of ein, in a hundred^ § 217, c. ordinal, § 218. exceptions, § 218. adverbs, § 218, a. fractions with 4el {Ztii), § 219. a)eal,§145; .mat, § 217, 6. nun, in exclamations, loelU, § 299, 6. 62 INDEX, O. O, pronunciation of, Intro., I, 6, 1, 2; §§325-327. 0, Intro., I, c?, 2. ob, subordinating conjunction, § 178; § 179. contrary to fact after a(§ oh, § 274, a. object direct in the accusative, §'7, h. of reflexive verbs, § 240. indirect takes dative, § 45. order of two noun objects, § 45; §94, c. pronouns, § 94, a, b. with modals, § 137. obcr, coordinating conjunction, § 177. o^nc, prep, with accusative, § 102. followed by infinitive instead of verbal, § 204, d. **one" following an adjective, § 128, d. translated by demonstrative, § 185. CO, digraph, Intro., I, /. optative subjunctive, § 266. order of words in sentence, see Word order. orthography use of capitals, Intro., IV, c, d, e. silent -^ after t, Intro., II, 6, 15, note, ought to have, translation of, § 276. P. ^, pronunciation of, Intro., II, b. See also Consonants. ^aar, ba^; cin ^aar, § 156. palatal consonants, see Conso- nants. participle, past (or perfect) in perfect tenses, § 58; formation of, § 58; position in sentence, § 60; use as adjective or noun, § 206, a; impersonal, §§ 246- 251 ; passive, § 231 ; rendered by a clause, § 207, b ; reflexive, §241. of all strong verbs, see Sumynary, § 304. as adjective after fetn, §235; com- pared with passive, § 235, a, b, c. participial phrases, § 207. particles, of comparison, § 214. idiomatic, §§ 293-300. ^affen, followed by the dative, § 282, b ; § 283. passive voice formation of, § 230; conjugation, § 231 ; § 316 ; § 318 ; agent of, § 232 ; of verbs governing the dative, § 236; compared with perfect participle and fern, § 235, a, b, c. substitutes for man with the active, § 237, a. agent with the active, § 237, b. reflexive, § 242, c. less used in German, § 237. past tenses, see Tense. perfect tenses, see Tense. person, congruence of pronouns in, §93; § 167, b. for personal endings, see Summary of Forms of Nouns, Pronouns, Adjectives, and Verbs, §§ 304- 323. personal pronouns, see Pronouns. ^f, pronunciation of, Intro., II, b, 20. phr^,ses, in English rendered by clause in German, § 207, b. order of, § 290, b. pitch of voice in German, § 341. Platen, August, Graf von (1796- 1835), :^u benfft an mid;, p. 68. plural number of third person, used for formal use, i^econd person, § 10. form of \zi\\ used with ba§, § 155. INDEX. 63 plural number {continued). of nouns of measure, § 113, a, ending of all nouns in the dative, =n, § 45, a. For all plural forms, see Summmnf, § 305-323. poems first lines of, 2luf ben Bergen, btc ^urgcn, p. 54. 2)ag (^Ividf ba^ tmmer tJoc mtr fd)ii3aub, p. 191. 2)ctne ^lumcn ftnb t)er6(ii^t, p. 53. 2)em :^aub, too mctnc SSetge ftanb, p. 22. 2)er crftc :^ag im 2)?onat a)iat/ p. 68. 2)u bcufft an mid) fo fcltcn, p. 68. ©ineu 33rief fod id) fc^reiben, p. 129. ©g bliii^t tin fc^b'nc^ 33liiimc^en, p. 12. (5^ iuar, atg l)atf ber §immcf, p. 96. (5^ n?ar etnmat cine arme fletnc ^bee, p. 145. ©ute '^hxi^i, p. 13. @uter gDZonb, bu gc^ft |o [title, p. 97. -^aft bu bag ^djXc^ g^fef)en, p. 110. §eute, nuu Ijeute bin ic^ fo fd)on, p. 40. 3(^ ^atf einen ^ameraben, p. 144. 3ci^ h)ei^ ntd)t, n^ag fott eg bebeuien, p. 25. 3a, i)dtte ntir t)on 5lnbeginn,p. 182. 9)Joge jcber ftid bcgliicft, p. 71. WnU hxn \6), gel)' ^ur 9tuf), p. 57. 9fJid)t bag Diete Siffen tuf g, p. 24. ' O fanftcr, jii^er v^aud), p. 31: @af) eirt ^nab' ein Otb'glein ftci)n, D. 163. ®inget leife, leife, (eife, p. 37. !^reue \?iebe in^ 5um ®rabe, p. 82. iXber aden ©i^feln, p. 41. iiber ben 33etgen, tt)eit ju ttjanbern, p. 175. SBie tft boc^ bie (Jrbc fo fd^bn, p. 41. 3it>ei :2)inge tern' gebulbig tragen, p. 34. authors of Brentano, p. 37; Busse, p. 175; Dahn, p. 191; Dreves, p. 54; Ebuer-Eschenbach, p. 34; Ei- chendorff, p. 96; Enslin, p. 97; Fallersleben, pp. 12, 82; Fulda, p. 182 ; Goethe, pp. 41, 163 ; Ha- gedorn, p. 68; Heine, p. 25 Hensel, p. 57; Korner, p. 13 Logan, p. 24; Platen, p. 68 Reinick, p. 41 ; Riickert, p. 71 Sommerstorff, p. 145; Storm pp. 40,129; Sturm, pp. 22, 53 Uhland, p. 31, 110, 144. authors quoted, see Quotations. possessive pronouns, see Pro- yiouns. potential subjunctive, § 265. predicate, order in, see Word order. predicate adjective, § 9; § 128, a. prefixes, inseparable, § 188. separable, § 189. common (separable and insepara- ble), § 196. general, § 346. prepositions, with the accusative, § 102; dative or accusative, § 89 ; with the dative, § 97 ; with the genitive, § 281, 6. buret), iiber, um, unter, as verbal pre- fixes, § 196. omitted after nouns of measure, § 113. combined with ba(r)s, § 98; with the definite article, § 89)^ a; with n?o(r)=, § 154. present tense, see Tense. preterit, see Tense, past. principal parts of verbs, § 59 ; list of, for all strong verbs, § 304. prog-ressive form, rendered by . simple verb in German, § 16; § 207, a. pronouns agreement with antecedent, § 93. as objects of reflexive verbs, § 240. 64 INDEX. pronouns {continued). summary of forms of, §§ 310-313. personal, § 92 ; § 310. dative used instead of possessive, §174. possessive as adjective, § 103 ; § 310, c, 1. without a noun, § 149. weak declension of, § 149, a; strong, § 149, h. effect upon verbals, § 286. intensive, § 150. interrogative, § 153; § 311, c, d. demonstrative, § 158; § 312. when modified, § 185. indefinite, § 313. indeclinable, § 159. inflected, § 16*2. reflexives, § 174; §313. relative, § 167 ; § 311. agreement with antecedent, §167, h- § 169, 6, 1, 2. compound, he who, § 168; com- pound neuter, § 168, a. substitute for, tDO with preposi- tions, § 168, 6. uses, § 169. never omitted, § 169, a; § 185. agreement with verb, § 169, h, c. punctuation of, Intro., IV, a, 1. pronunciation. Introduction; §§ 324- 342. vowels, Intro., I; §§ 326-328. diphthongs, Intro., I, e; §§ 329- 330. digraphs, Intro., I,/, consonants, Intro., II; §§ 335-340. glottal catch, §§ 331-334. pitch, § 341. assimilation, § 342. summary of chief difficulties of German pronunciation, §§ 324- 325.' proper names, § 225 ; see No^ins. proverbs, pp. 1, 3, 6, 10, 23, 46, 51, 58, 63, 65, 72, 86, 92, 123, 176, 196. Prutz, Robert (1816-1872), quoted, p. 106. Psalm, Twenty-third, p. 188. punctuation, Intro., IV. comma in compound sentences, Intro., IV, a, 2. to set off relative clause, Intro., IV, a, 1 ; § 169, c. with infinitive, § 86 ; § 192. exclamation point, Intro., IV, 6,1,2. purpose, infinitive of, § 86 ; § 204, d. Q. O, pronunciation of, Intro., II, b. quantity, of consonants, § 340. of vowels, Intro., I, a, b. questions direct by inversion or interrogative, § 3. by ntc^t or nid)t itta^r, § 3, a. indirect, with dependent order, §173. requiring dependent subjunctive, §258. quotation marks, as in, English, Intro., IV. quotations from Bechstein, p. 142; Bibel, pp. 168; 188 ; Claudius, p. 88 ; Feuchters- leben, pp. 103, 149; Geibel, p. 156; Goethe, pp. 35, 38, 42, 80, 95, 152, 161, 164, 180, 183, 192; Heine, pp. 101, 137; Herder, p. 130; Muller, p. 108; Prutz, p. 106; Riickert, pp. 60, 69, 127, 133, 172; Scheffel, pp. 74, 140; Schiller, pp. 83, 186; Siebel, p. 98; Wehl, p. 146; Wichert, p. 120. R. % pronunciation of, Intro., II, b, 10. difficulties of, trilled v, ,§ 339, 1 ; rolled X, § 339, 2. INDEX. 65 reflexive verbs, §§ 240-242. list of, § 243. common use of, in German, § 242, a, h, c. impersonal, § 247. complete conjugation of typical one, § 322. rcgnet, e^, impersonal verb, § 246; §251. Reinick, Robert, SSie tft boc^ bte (grbe fo \d)on, p. 41. relative pronouns, see Pronouns. roots of words, §§ 344-345. See also Word formation. Ruckert, Priedrich (1788-1866) quoted, pp. 60, 69, 127, 133, 172. ex^, inseparable prefix, § 188. verbals in -ing, rendered by infini- tive after auf()oren and fort* fa^rcn, § 193; after m^tatt and o^ne, § 204, d. m.odified verbals rendered by ba§ clause, § 286. in time or causal phrase rendered by clauses, § 285. verbs as it would be impossible to index verbs without referring to most of the sections in the book, ref- erences have been made, under the proper special headings, to the forms and uses of verbs, i.e. to Voice, Mode, Tense, Conju- gation, etc. See also under Word formation. Separable, Inseparable, and Com- mon Prefixes. Transitive and Intransitive verbs. Weak and Strong verbs. Reflexive verbs. Iiyipersonal verbs. verbs with the dative, § 238 ; § 282, b ; § 283. impersonals, § 249. verbs "with the genitive, § 243. verbs, impersonal, with the accusa- tive, § 248. ^ergi^metnm(^t, by Fallersleben, p. 12. ml, § 162, e. voice, see Active and Passive. voiced consonants, see Conso- nants. voiceless consonants, see Conso- nants. i)on, prep, with the dative, § 97 ; § 100. use with the agent in the passive voice, §»232. as substitute for the genitive, § 225, a. S3or, prep, with dative or accusative, § 89; § 90; with dative, § 291; § 300. fSov 3ena, by Dreves, p. 54.^ vcwels, kinds of, Intro., I, a; pro- nunciation of, Intro., I, b; difficulties of pronunciation, §§ 325-329. vowel changes in strong verbs, §26. W. SS, pronunciation of, Intro., II, b, 18. tt)dt)renb, subordinating conjunction, § 178; § 179; use in clauses, §285. preposition with genitive, § 281, b. INDEX. 69 SanbrerS ^fjac^tltcb, by Goethe, p. 41. tt)ann, interrogative, § 41. rt>a^, interrogative, § 153, a. indefinite compound relative, § 153, a ; § 168. relative after neuter, § 168, a. nja^ fiir ein, § 153, c. nja^ gibt'^, § 163. •weak declension, of nouns, see Nou7is, fourth class. of adjectives, see Adjectives. weak verbs no vowel change, § 13 and note, personal endings, § 14; additions for euphony, § 14, a. past participles of, § 59 ; complete conjugation of, § 317. ■weather, state of, shown by imper- sonal verbs, § 246. week, days of the, § 222; § 223, a. ttjegen, prep, with the genitive, § 281, b ; § 283. , g^cobor (1821-1890), quoted, p. 146. hjeil, subordinating con j unction , § 1 70 ; §178; §179. )mci(i)f indeclinable as exclamatory, § 124, a. See also Sclc^cr. ttjtic^cr, relative, declined like ber, § 167; §311. interrogative, § 153, b. well, adv., gitt, § 299, b. of health, rtJof)t, § 299, a. ttjcnig, inflected indefinite, § 162, e. tt)cnigcr, indeclinable indefinite, § 159, /. tuenn, subordinating conjunction, §178; §179. use of, § 271 ; omission of, § 271, a. al^ ttjcnn in conditions contrary to fact, § 274, a. SBenn, by Ludwig Fulda, p. 182. it>er, § 311, c; as compound relative, §168. interrogative, § 153, a. tDcrben conjugation of, §38; § 43; sum- mary, § 316. auxiliary of the future tense, § 48; in compound tenses of modals, §181. of passive voice, § 230; § 231; §318. use of nominative after, § 7, a, 2. discussion of meanings, § 132, a, b, note; § 230, a. subjunctive of, in the conditional, § 264. Wichert, E. (1831- ), quoted, p. 120. ttJtber, prep, with accusative, § 102. h)te, in comparisons, § 214, a, b ; cor- relative with ebenfo, § 214, b ; . interrogative, § 24. SSie tft bod^ bte @rbe fo fd^on, by Rei- nick, p. 41. SStegenltcb, by Brentano, p. 37. will, showing simple futurity, hjerbcit, § 55; § 132, a; desire, tt»oUen, § 132, a, b, note. WiVf personal pronoun, § 92; § 310. tDiffen, § 156. tuo, interrogative adverb, § 4. iuo(r)=, compounded with prepositions, § 168, b. used for neuter dative, § 311, d, 3. hJof)(, as idiomatic particle, § 293; §299. word formation roots, § 344 ; verbal, § 345. prefixes, § 346. suffixes, § 347. forming concrete nouns, § 348. abstract nouns, § 349. adjectives, § 350. verbs, § 351. 70 INDEX. word formation' {continued) . compound words, § 352. German rich in, § 343. nouns, § 353; adjectives, § 354; verbs, § 355. Latin derivatives compared with German, § 356. word order, § 289. normal general rule for emphasis, § 290. coordinating conjunctions, § 177. position of nouns as objects, § 45 ; § 94, c ; pronouns as objects, § 94, a, 6; indirect object, § 45; adjective, § 282, a ; posses- sive genitive, § 40. verbs, § 78. separable prefixes, § 189, h, c; ju and ge=, § 189, d\ infinitives, § 50 ; § 205 ; modified, § 205, a ; complementary, § 192; "two infinitives," § 141. 5U with modals, § 137, h. participles, § 60; § 206, a. adverbs, § 125; § 290; nid^t, §23; me, § 121. phrases, adverbial, § 290, h. inverted general rule for, § 99. in questions, § 3. in formal imperative, § 69; §200. of main clause, § 170, a. of the condition, § 271. after d^ (lt»cnn omitted), § 274, a. omission of e^, § 250, h. dependent general rule, § 170. with relatives, § 167 ; in indirect questions, § 173 ; with subor- dinating conj., § 178; after ba^, § 182; the modals in, § 181; §276. Sort, plurals of, § 64. tt)iinfrf)cn, with infinitive and ju, § 259. X, pronunciation of, Intro., II, 6, 1. Y. ^, pronunciation of, Intro., I, 6. Z. 3, pronunciation of, Intro., II, 6, 19. jer*, inseparable prefix, § 188. 5U, prep, with dative, § 97; § 100. position of, § 205. with modals, § 137, h. use of, § 204, h ; § 259. omission of, § 204, a. 3ti?ct, § 217. 3h)ei 2)ingc lenf gcbulbig tragen, by Ebner-Eschenbach, p. 34. §tt)tfc^en, prep, with dative or accusa- tive, § 89. UNI THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL PINE OP 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. jUN 15 1938 OCT 1C?1939 **oy 7 m. oct ^ ^^ S I T? t^ mm Oct s- ■" ■ ■ ^ / i w^ «)^^' iA^ JUN 12 195SM •Y^rr^^ff*^ l^^- 6 19^ LD 21-95m-7,'37 Tb UIAID (^ % .'h Ql A /■■■ r 03.5655 . ^ '— ' ■■"e UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY ^5?f f ^' fi/i^